®

5700A/5720AMulti-Function
Series II
Calibrator

Operators Manual

PN 601622
May 1996 Rev. 2, 3/05
© 1996, 2002, 2005 Fluke Corporation, All rights reserved. Printed in U.S.A.
All product names are trademarks of their respective companies.
 LIMITED WARRANTY & LIMITATION OF LIABILITY

Each Fluke product is warranted to be free from defects in material and workmanship
under normal use and service. The warranty period is one year and begins on the date
of shipment. Parts, product repairs and services are warranted for 90 days. This
warranty extends only to the original buyer or end-user customer of a Fluke authorized
reseller, and does not apply to fuses, disposable batteries or to any product which, in
Fluke's opinion, has been misused, altered, neglected or damaged by accident or
abnormal conditions of operation or handling. Fluke warrants that software will operate
substantially in accordance with its functional specifications for 90 days and that it has
been properly recorded on non-defective media. Fluke does not warrant that software
will be error free or operate without interruption.
Fluke authorized resellers shall extend this warranty on new and unused products to
end-user customers only but have no authority to extend a greater or different warranty
on behalf of Fluke. Warranty support is available if product is purchased through a Fluke
authorized sales outlet or Buyer has paid the applicable international price. Fluke
reserves the right to invoice Buyer for importation costs of repair/replacement parts
when product purchased in one country is submitted for repair in another country.
Fluke's warranty obligation is limited, at Fluke's option, to refund of the purchase price,
free of charge repair, or replacement of a defective product which is returned to a Fluke
authorized service center within the warranty period.
To obtain warranty service, contact your nearest Fluke authorized service center or send
the product, with a description of the difficulty, postage and insurance prepaid (FOB
Destination), to the nearest Fluke authorized service center. Fluke assumes no risk for
damage in transit. Following warranty repair, the product will be returned to Buyer,
transportation prepaid (FOB Destination). If Fluke determines that the failure was
caused by misuse, alteration, accident or abnormal condition of operation or handling,
Fluke will provide an estimate of repair costs and obtain authorization before
commencing the work. Following repair, the product will be returned to the Buyer
transportation prepaid and the Buyer will be billed for the repair and return transportation
charges (FOB Shipping Point).

THIS WARRANTY IS BUYER'S SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY AND IS IN LIEU OF

ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED
TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE. FLUKE SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL,
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR LOSSES, INCLUDING
LOSS OF DATA, WHETHER ARISING FROM BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BASED
ON CONTRACT, TORT, RELIANCE OR ANY OTHER THEORY.

Since some countries or states do not allow limitation of the term of an implied warranty,
or exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages, the limitations and
exclusions of this warranty may not apply to every buyer. If any provision of this
Warranty is held invalid or unenforceable by a court of competent jurisdiction, such
holding will not affect the validity or enforceability of any other provision.

Fluke Corporation Fluke Europe B.V.

P.O. Box 9090 P.O. Box 1186
Everett, WA 98206-9090 5602 BD Eindhoven
U.S.A. The Netherlands

5/94
 Claims
Immediately upon arrival, purchaser shall check the packing container against the enclosed
packing list and shall, within thirty (30) days of arrival, give Fluke notice of shortages or any
nonconformity with the terms of the order. If purchaser fails to five notice, the delivery shall be
deemed to conform with the terms of the order.
The purchaser assumes all risk of loss or damage to instruments upon delivery by Fluke to the
carrier. If an instrument is damaged in transit, PURCHASER MUST FILE ALL CLAIMS FOR
DAMAGE WITH THE CARRIER to obtain compensation. Upon request by purchaser, Fluke will
submit an estimate of the cost to repair shipment damage.
Fluke will be happy to answer all questions to enhance the use of this instrument. Please address
your requests or correspondence to: Fluke Corporation, P.O. Box 9090, Everett, WA 98206-
9090.

Declaration of the Manufacturer or Importer

We hereby certify that the Fluke Models 5700A Series II and 5720A Series II are in compliance
with Postal Regulation Vfg. 1046 and is RFI suppressed. The marketing and sale of the
equipment was reported to the German Postal Service. The right to retest this equipment to verify
compliance with the regulation was given to the German Postal Service.

Bescheinigung des Herstellers/Importeurs

Hiermit wird bescheinigt, daβ Fluke Models 5700A Series II und 5720A Series II in
Übereinstimung mit den Bestimmungen der Amtsblattverfügung Vfg. 1046 funk-entstört ist, Der
Deutschen Bundespost wurde das Inverkehrbringen dieses Gerätes angezeigt und die
Berechtigung zur Überprüfung der Seire auf Einhaltung der Bestimmungen eingeräumt.
Fluke Corporation

Interference Information
This equipment generates and uses radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in strict
accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions, may cause interference to radio and television
reception. It has been type tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B computing
device in accordance with the specifications in Subpart J of Part 15 of FCC Rules, which are
designed to provide reasonable protection against such interference in a residential installation.
However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this
equipment does cause interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by
turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one
of more of the following measures:
• Reorient the receiving antenna
• Relocate the equipment with respect to the receiver
• Move the equipment away from the receiver
• Plug the equipment into a different outlet so that the computer and receiver are on different
branch circuits
If necessary, the user should consult the dealer or an experienced radio/television technician for
additional suggestions. The user may find the following booklet prepared by the Federal
Communications Commission helpful: How to Identify and Resolve Radio-TV Interference
Problems. This booklet is available from the U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington, D.C.
20402. Stock No. 004-000-00345-4.
 OPERATOR SAFETY
SUMMARY
WARNING

HIGH VOLTAGE
is used in the operation of this equipment

LETHAL VOLTAGE
may be present on the terminals, observe all safety precautions!

To avoid electrical shock hazard, the operator should not electrically contact
the output hi or sense hi binding posts. During operation, lethal voltages of
up to 1100V ac or dc may be present on these terminals.

Whenever the nature of the operation permits, keep one hand away from
equipment to reduce the hazard of current flowing thought vital organs of
the body.

Terms in this Manual

This instrument has been designed and tested in accordance with the safety standards
listed in the General Specifications, which are located in the Specifications section in
Chapter 1 of this Operator Manual. This manual contains information and warnings which
have to be followed by the user to ensure safe operation and to retain the instrument in
safe condition.
WARNING statements identify conditions or practices that could result in personal injury or
loss of life.
CAUTION statements identify conditions or practices that could result in damage to the
equipment or other property.
Symbols Marked on Equipment
S DANGER — High Voltage
Q Protective ground (earth) terminal
P Attention — refer to the manual. This symbol indicates that information about
the usage of a feature is contained in the manual.

Power Source
The 5700A Series II and 5720A Series II are intended to operate from a power source that
will not apply more than 264V ac rms between the supply conductors or between either
supply conductor and ground. A protective ground connection by way of the grounding
conductor in the power cord is essential for safe operation.
Use the Proper Fuse
To avoid fire hazard, use only the fuse specified on the line voltage selection switch label,
and which is identical in type voltage rating, and current rating.
Grounding the 5700A Series II or 5720A Series II
The 5700A Series II and 5720A Series II are Safety Class I (grounded enclosure)
instruments as defined in IEC 348. The enclosure is grounded through the grounding
conductor of the power cord. To avoid electrical shock, plug the power cord into a
properly wired earth grounded receptacle before connecting anything to any of the 5700A
Series II or 5720A Series II terminals. A protective ground connection by way of the
grounding conductor in the power cord is essential for safe operation.
Use the Proper Power Cord
Always use the power (line) cord and connector appropriate for the voltage and outlet of
the country or location in which you are working.
Always match the line cord to the instrument.
• Use the AC line cord supplied with this instrument with this instrument only.
• Do not use this line cord with any other instruments.
• Do not use any other line cords with this instrument.
Use only the power cord and connector appropriate for proper operation of a 5700A Series
II or 5720A Series II in your country.
Use only a power cord that is in good condition.
For detailed information on power cords, refer to Figure 2-3 in Chapter 2.
Refer cord and connector changes to qualified service personnel.
Do Not Operate in Explosive Atmospheres
To avoid explosion, do not operate the 5700A Series II or 5720A Series II in an
atmosphere of explosive gas.
Do Not Remove Cover
To avoid personal injury, do not remove the cover from the 5700A Series II or 5720A
Series II. Do not operate the 5700A Series II or 5720A Series II without the cover properly
installed. There are no user-serviceable parts inside the 5700A Series II or the 5720A
Series II, so there is no need for the operator to ever remove the cover.
 FIRST AID FOR
ELECTRIC SHOCK

Free the Victim From the Live Conductor

Shut off high voltage at once and ground the circuit. If high voltage cannot be turned off
quickly, ground the circuit.

Get Help!
Call loudly for help. Call an emergency number. Request medical assistance.

Never Accept Ordinary and General Tests for Death

Symptoms of electric shock may include unconsciousness, failure to breathe, absence of
pulse, pallor, and stiffness, and well as severe burns.

Treat the Victim

If the victim is not breathing, begin CPR or mouth-to-mouth resuscitation if you are
certified.
 Table of Contents

Chapter Title Page

1 Introduction and Specifications......................................................... 1-1

1-1. Introduction........................................................................................... 1-3
1-2. Instruction Manuals .............................................................................. 1-4
1-3. About this Manual ................................................................................ 1-4
1-4. How to Use this Manual ....................................................................... 1-5
1-5. Wideband AC Voltage Module (Option 5700A-03) ............................ 1-5
1-6. Auxiliary Amplifier .............................................................................. 1-5
1-7. 5725A Amplifier .............................................................................. 1-6
1-8. Support Equipment and Services .......................................................... 1-6
1-9. 732B Direct Voltage Reference Standard ........................................ 1-6
1-10. 732B-200 Direct Volt Maintenance Program (U.S.A. Only) ........... 1-7
1-11. 742A Series Resistance Standards.................................................... 1-7
1-12. Wideband AC Module (Option 5700A-03) Calibration Support ..... 1-7
1-13. Service Centers................................................................................. 1-7
1-14. The Components of the 5700A/5720A Series II Calibrator ................. 1-8
1-15. Calibrating the 5700A/5720A Series II Calibrator ............................... 1-8
1-16. The Calibration Process.................................................................... 1-10
1-17. Establishing Traceability .................................................................. 1-10
1-18. Calibration Reports........................................................................... 1-10
1-19. Calibration Check ................................................................................. 1-11
1-20. Developing a Performance History....................................................... 1-11
1-21. Range Calibration . ............................................................................... 1-11
1-22. DC Zeros Calibration............................................................................ 1-11
1-23. Specifications........................................................................................ 1-12
1-24. Specification Confidence Levels ...................................................... 1-12
1-25. Using Absolute and Relative Uncertainty Specifications................. 1-12
1-26. Using Secondary Performance Specifications.................................. 1-12
1-27. General Specifications .......................................................................... 1-13
1-28. Electrical Specifications ....................................................................... 1-15
1-29. DC Voltage Specifications ............................................................... 1-15
1-30. AC Voltage Specifications ............................................................... 1-18

i
5700A/5720A Series II
Operators Manual

1-31. Resistance Specifications ................................................................. 1-29

1-32. DC Current Specifications................................................................ 1-33
1-33. AC Current Specifications................................................................ 1-36
1-34. Wideband AC Voltage (Option 5700-03) Specifications................. 1-42
1-35. Auxiliary Amplifier Specifications .................................................. 1-43

2 Installation ........................................................................................... 2-1

2-1. Introduction........................................................................................... 2-3
2-2. Unpacking and Inspection .................................................................... 2-3
2-3. Service Information .............................................................................. 2-4
2-4. Contacting Fluke................................................................................... 2-4
2-5. Placement and Rack Mounting ............................................................. 2-4
2-6. Cooling Considerations......................................................................... 2-4
2-7. Accessing the Fuse................................................................................ 2-5
2-8. Selecting Line Voltage.......................................................................... 2-6
2-9. Connecting to Line Power .................................................................... 2-8
2-10. Connecting a 5725A Amplifier............................................................. 2-8
2-11. Selecting Output Binding Posts ............................................................ 2-8

3 Features ............................................................................................... 3-1

3-1. Introduction........................................................................................... 3-3
3-2. Front Panel Features ............................................................................. 3-3
3-3. Display Screen Saver........................................................................ 3-3
3-4. Rear Panel Features .............................................................................. 3-12
3-5. Softkey Menu Tree ............................................................................... 3-14

4 Front Panel Operation......................................................................... 4-1

4-1. Introduction........................................................................................... 4-3
4-2. Powering on the Calibrator ................................................................... 4-4
4-3. Warm Up............................................................................................... 4-4
4-4. DC Zeros............................................................................................... 4-5
4-5. Executing DC Zeros ......................................................................... 4-5
4-6. DC Zeros Reminder.......................................................................... 4-5
4-7. The Setup Menu.................................................................................... 4-6
4-8. Instrument Setup............................................................................... 4-7
4-9. Format EEPROM Menu ................................................................... 4-7
4-10. Spec Format Setup Menu ................................................................. 4-8
4-11. Setting the Internal Clock/Calendar ................................................. 4-9
4-12. Selecting Amplifiers......................................................................... 4-10
4-13. Checking the Instrument Configuration ........................................... 4-11
4-14. Special Functions Menu. .................................................................. 4-12
4-15. Resetting the Calibrator. ....................................................................... 4-12
4-16. Operate and Standby Modes ................................................................. 4-13
4-17. Connecting the Calibrator to a UUT..................................................... 4-13
4-18. Recommended Cable and Connector Types..................................... 4-13
4-19. When to Use External Sensing ......................................................... 4-14
4-20. When to Use the External Voltage Guard ........................................ 4-15
4-21. When to Use the Current Guard ....................................................... 4-15
4-22. Four-Wire Vs. Two-Wire Resistance Connections .......................... 4-16
4-23. Cable Connection Instructions ......................................................... 4-16
4-24. Setting the Output ................................................................................. 4-22
4-25. DC Voltage Output........................................................................... 4-24
4-26. AC Voltage Output........................................................................... 4-25

ii
 Contents (continued)

4-27. DC Current Output ........................................................................... 4-27

4-28. AC Current Output ........................................................................... 4-28
4-29. Resistance Output............................................................................. 4-30
4-30. Wideband AC Voltage Output (Option 5700A-03) ......................... 4-32
4-31. Variable Phase Output...................................................................... 4-34
4-32. Phase Locking to an External Signal .................................................... 4-35
4-33. Using an Auxiliary Amplifier ............................................................... 4-36
4-34. 5725A Amplifier Output .................................................................. 4-37
4-35. Checking the Calibrator’s Uncertainty Specification ........................... 4-38
4-36. Error Mode Operation........................................................................... 4-38
4-37. Error Mode Overview....................................................................... 4-39
4-38. Entering Error Mode .................................................................... 4-39
4-39. Exiting Error Mode ...................................................................... 4-39
4-40. Using Error Mode ........................................................................ 4-40
4-41. Reading the UUT Error: AC and DC Voltage and Current Output.. 4-40
4-42. Reading the UUT Error: Resistance Output ..................................... 4-41
4-43. Introduction to Offset, Scale, and Linearity Errors............................... 4-42
4-44. Offset Error....................................................................................... 4-42
4-45. Scale Error ........................................................................................ 4-43
4-46. Linearity Error.................................................................................. 4-44
4-47. Combining the Error Types .............................................................. 4-44
4-48. Programming an Offset......................................................................... 4-45
4-49. Programming a Scale Factor................................................................. 4-46
4-50. Linearity Checking Using Offset and Scale.......................................... 4-47
4-51. Setting Output Limits............................................................................ 4-50
4-52. Setting Voltage and Current Limits.................................................. 4-50
4-53. Sample Applications ............................................................................. 4-51
4-54. Calibrating Fluke 70 Series Multimeter ........................................... 4-51
4-55. Cables........................................................................................... 4-52
4-56. Guarding....................................................................................... 4-52
4-57. Sensing ......................................................................................... 4-52
4-58. Testing the Meter ......................................................................... 4-53
4-59. Calibrating the Meter ................................................................... 4-54
4-60. Calibrating a Fluke Model 8840A Series Digital Multimeter .......... 4-56
4-61. Cables........................................................................................... 4-56
4-62. Guarding....................................................................................... 4-56
4-63. Sensing ......................................................................................... 4-58
4-64. Basic Calibration Procedure......................................................... 4-58
4-65. Calibration Setup Procedure ........................................................ 4-58
4-66. A/D Calibration............................................................................ 4-59
4-67. Offset and Gain Calibration ......................................................... 4-60
4-68. High Frequency AC Calibration .................................................. 4-62
4-69. Performing A Wideband Flatness Test............................................. 4-63

5 Remote Operation ............................................................................... 5-1

5-1. Introduction........................................................................................... 5-3
5-2. Using the IEEE-488 Port for Remote Control ...................................... 5-4
5-3. IEEE-488 Bus Restrictions............................................................... 5-4
5-4. Bus Setup Procedure......................................................................... 5-4
5-5. Using the RS-232C Port for Remote Control ....................................... 5-5
5-6. Serial Remote Control Setup Procedure........................................... 5-6
5-7. Exceptions for Serial Remote Control.............................................. 5-7
5-8. Command Syntax Information.............................................................. 5-7
5-9. Parameter Syntax Rules.................................................................... 5-8

iii
5700A/5720A Series II
Operators Manual

5-10. Extra Space Characters..................................................................... 5-9

5-11. Terminators....................................................................................... 5-9
5-12. Incoming Character Processing ........................................................ 5-9
5-13. Response Message Syntax................................................................ 5-10
5-14. Input Buffer Operation.......................................................................... 5-10
5-15. Commands ............................................................................................ 5-10
5-16. Multiple Commands ......................................................................... 5-11
5-17. Coupled Commands ......................................................................... 5-11
5-18. Sequential and Overlapped Commands............................................ 5-12
5-19. Commands Ignored When Not in Remote ....................................... 5-12
5-20. Commands that Require the Calibration Switch to be Set ............... 5-12
5-21. Long Term Commands..................................................................... 5-12
5-22. Local-to-Remote State Transitions ....................................................... 5-43
5-23. Checking the Calibrator’s Status .......................................................... 5-45
5-24. Serial Poll Status Byte ...................................................................... 5-47
5-25. Service Request Line (SRQ) ........................................................ 5-48
5-26. Service Request Enable Register.................................................. 5-48
5-27. Loading the SRE .......................................................................... 5-48
5-28. Event Status Register........................................................................ 5-49
5-29. Bit Assignments for the ESR and ESE......................................... 5-49
5-30. Reading the ESR and ESE ........................................................... 5-50
5-31. Loading the ESE .......................................................................... 5-50
5-32. Instrument Status Register................................................................ 5-51
5-33. Instrument Status Change Register................................................... 5-51
5-34. Instrument Status Change Enable Register ...................................... 5-51
5-35. Bit Assignments for the ISR, ISCR, and ISCE ............................ 5-51
5-36. Reading the ISR, ISCR, or ISCE ................................................. 5-52
5-37. Loading the ISCE......................................................................... 5-52
5-38. Fault Queue ...................................................................................... 5-53
5-39. IEEE-488 Interface Configuration........................................................ 5-54
5-40. Bus Communication Overview............................................................. 5-55
5-41. Definition: Queries and Commands ................................................. 5-56
5-42. Functional Elements Of Commands................................................. 5-56
5-43. Interface Messages ........................................................................... 5-58
5-44. The IEEE-488 Connector...................................................................... 5-60
5-45. Remote Program Examples................................................................... 5-61
5-46. Printing Main Output Calibration Shift Results ............................... 5-61
5-47. Verifying a Meter ............................................................................. 5-62
5-48. Remote Calibration........................................................................... 5-62
5-49. DC Zeros ...................................................................................... 5-62
5-50. Calibration.................................................................................... 5-63
5-51. Calibration Check ........................................................................ 5-64
5-52. Wideband AC Module (Option 5700A-03) Gain Calibration...... 5-65
5-53. Using *OPC?, *OPC, and *WAI ..................................................... 5-66
5-54. Writing an SRQ and Fault Handler .................................................. 5-67
5-55. Emulating a Fluke 5100B or 5200A Calibrator.................................... 5-68
5-56. Entering Emulation Mode ................................................................ 5-68
5-57. Exiting Emulation Mode .................................................................. 5-69
5-58. The 5720’s Display During Emulation............................................. 5-69
5-59. 5100B Emulation .................................................................................. 5-69
5-60. Local-to-Remote Transitions............................................................ 5-69
5-61. Current Output Location................................................................... 5-70
5-62. Differences in the 5700A/5720A Series II and 5100B
Ohms Function.................................................................................. 5-70
5-63. Ohms Remote Program Modifications for 5100B Emulation .......... 5-71
iv
 Contents (continued)

5-64. 5200A Emulation.................................................................................. 5-72

5-65. Local-to-Remote Transitions............................................................ 5-72
5-66. Voltage and Frequency Ranges ........................................................ 5-72
5-67. Rounding Numeric Entries ............................................................... 5-73
5-68. Settling Times................................................................................... 5-73
5-69. Programming External Sensing ........................................................ 5-74
5-70. Overload Conditions......................................................................... 5-74
5-71. Phase Lock Errors............................................................................. 5-74

6 Using the RS-232C Serial Interface.................................................... 6-1

6-1. Introduction........................................................................................... 6-3
6-2. RS-232C Interface Specifications......................................................... 6-3
6-3. Setting Up and Connecting the Serial Interface.................................... 6-4
6-4. Printing Calibration Reports ................................................................. 6-6
6-5. Calibration Shift Results................................................................... 6-6
6-6. Calibration Check Shift Results ....................................................... 6-7
6-7. Generating a Printout........................................................................ 6-8

7 Operator Maintenance......................................................................... 7-1

7-1. Introduction........................................................................................... 7-3
7-2. Accessing the Fuse................................................................................ 7-4
7-3. Cleaning the Air Filter .......................................................................... 7-4
7-4. Cleaning the Exterior ............................................................................ 7-6
7-5. Calibration ............................................................................................ 7-6
7-6. Calibrating the 5700A/5720A Series II to External Standards ............. 7-6
7-7. Calibration Requirements ................................................................. 7-7
7-8. When to Adjust the Calibrator’s Uncertainty ................................... 7-7
7-9. Calibration Procedure....................................................................... 7-8
7-10. Range Calibration ................................................................................. 7-14
7-11. Calibrating the Wideband AC Module (Option 5700A-03) ................. 7-18
7-12. Performing a Calibration Check ........................................................... 7-21

8 Options and Accessories ................................................................... 8-1

8-1. Introduction........................................................................................... 8-3
8-2. Wideband AC Voltage Module (Option 5700A-03.............................. 8-3
8-3. Accessories ........................................................................................... 8-3
8-4. Low Thermal EMF Test Leads......................................................... 8-4
8-5. Rack Mount Kits (Y5737 and Y5735) ............................................. 8-4
8-6. Shielded IEEE-488 Interface Cables (Y8021 and Y8022) ............... 8-4
8-7. RS-232C Null-Modem Cables ......................................................... 8-4
8-8. DC Voltage Reference Standard (732B) .......................................... 8-4
8-9. 1Ω and 10 kΩ Resistance Standards (742A-1 and 742A-10k)......... 8-5
8-10. 5725A Amplifier................................................................................... 8-5

Appendices
Fault Codes ........................................................................................................A-1
ASCII and IEEE Bus Codes ..............................................................................B-1
Symbolic Names of Calibration Constants ........................................................C-1
Glossary .............................................................................................................D-1

v
5700A/5720A Series II
Operators Manual

vi
 List of Tables

Table Title Page

1-1. Auxiliary Amplifier Data ....................................................................................... 1-6

2-1. Standard Equipment ............................................................................................... 2-3
2-2. Line Power Cord Types Available from Fluke ...................................................... 2-6
3-1. Front Panel Features............................................................................................... 3-4
3-2. Rear Panel Features................................................................................................ 3-12
4-1. Auxiliary Amplifier Data ....................................................................................... 4-14
4-2. UUT Connection Figures ....................................................................................... 4-16
4-3. Keys that Exit Error Mode ..................................................................................... 4-39
4-4. 8840A A/D Converter Calibration Prompts........................................................... 4-59
4-5. 8840A A/D Calibration Allowable Errors ............................................................. 4-60
4-6. 8840A Offset and Gain Calibration Prompts ......................................................... 4-61
4-7. 8840A High-Frequency AC Calibration Prompts .................................................. 4-62
5-1. Command Summary by Function .......................................................................... 5-13
5-2. Commands.............................................................................................................. 5-17
5-3. Serial Remote Control Commands......................................................................... 5-42
5-4. Range Identifiers for Remote Commands .............................................................. 5-42
5-5. Operating State Transitions.................................................................................... 5-44
5-6. Status Register Summary ....................................................................................... 5-45
5-7. Supported IEEE-488 Interface Function Subsets................................................... 5-54
5-8. Functional Elements of Commands ....................................................................... 5-57
5-9. Interface Messages Accepted by the Calibrator ..................................................... 5-58
5-10. Interface Messages Sent by the Calibrator ............................................................. 5-59
6-1. RS-232C Interface Parameter Choices................................................................... 6-4
6-2. Annotation for Shift Results Printout..................................................................... 6-16
7-1. Standards for Calibrating 5700A/5720A Series II ................................................. 7-7
8-1. Accessories............................................................................................................. 8-3

vii
5700A/5720A Series II
Operators Manual

viii
 List of Figures

Figure Title Page

1-1. Time and Costs: Calibrator Calibration.................................................................. 1-9

2-1. Accessing the Fuse ................................................................................................. 2-5
2-2. Line Power Cord Types Available from Fluke ...................................................... 2-6
2-3. Line Power Label and Switch Location ................................................................. 2-7
3-1. Front Panel Features............................................................................................... 3-5
3-2. Rear Panel Features................................................................................................ 3-13
3-3. Softkey Menu Tree................................................................................................. 3-16
4-1. UUT Connections: DC Voltage, AC Voltage ≤10 kHz ......................................... 4-17
4-2. UUT Connections: AC Voltage >10 kHz .............................................................. 4-18
4-3. UUT Connections: AC Current ≤2A...................................................................... 4-19
4-4. UUT Connections: Resistance ............................................................................... 4-20
4-5. UUT Wideband AC Voltage Output (Option 5700A-03) ...................................... 4-22
4-6. UUT Connections: 5725A Amplified Current Output ........................................... 4-23
4-7. Offset Error ............................................................................................................ 4-42
4-8. Scale Error.............................................................................................................. 4-43
4-9. Linearity Error........................................................................................................ 4-44
4-10. Meter Response vs. Stimulus ................................................................................. 4-47
4-11. Cable Connections for Testing a Fluke 70 Series Multimeter ............................... 4-53
4-12. Cable Connections for Calibrating a Fluke 70 Series Multimeter ......................... 4-55
4-13. 8840A Calibration Connections ............................................................................. 4-57
5-1. Overview of Status Data Structure......................................................................... 5-46
5-2. IEEE-488 Connector Pin Assignments .................................................................. 5-60
6-1. RS-232C Connector Pinout.................................................................................... 6-3
7-1. Accessing the Fuse ................................................................................................. 7-4
7-2. Accessing the Air Filter.......................................................................................... 7-5
7-3. 732B External Calibration Connections................................................................. 7-9
7-5. 220V DC Range Calibration Connections ............................................................. 7-17
7-6. Wideband Module Calibration Connection............................................................ 7-19

ix
5700A/5720A Series II
Operators Manual

x
 Chapter 1
Introduction and Specifications

Title Page

1-1. Introduction........................................................................................... 1-3

1-2. Instruction Manuals .............................................................................. 1-4
1-3. About this Manual ................................................................................ 1-4
1-4. How to Use this Manual ....................................................................... 1-5
1-5. Wideband AC Voltage Module (Option 5700A-03) ............................ 1-5
1-6. Auxiliary Amplifier .............................................................................. 1-5
1-7. 5725A Amplifier .............................................................................. 1-6
1-8. Support Equipment and Services .......................................................... 1-6
1-9. 732B Direct Voltage Reference Standard ........................................ 1-6
1-10. 732B-200 Direct Volt Maintenance Program (U.S.A. Only) ........... 1-7
1-11. 742A Series Resistance Standards.................................................... 1-7
1-12. Wideband AC Module (Option 5700A-03) Calibration Support ..... 1-7
1-13. Service Centers................................................................................. 1-7
1-14. The Components of the 5700A/5720A Series II Calibrator ................. 1-8
1-15. Calibrating the 5700A/5720A Series II Calibrator ............................... 1-8
1-16. The Calibration Process.................................................................... 1-10
1-17. Establishing Traceability .................................................................. 1-10
1-18. Calibration Reports........................................................................... 1-10
1-19. Calibration Check ................................................................................. 1-11
1-20. Developing a Performance History....................................................... 1-11
1-21. Range Calibration . ............................................................................... 1-11
1-22. DC Zeros Calibration............................................................................ 1-11
1-23. Specifications........................................................................................ 1-12
1-24. Specification Confidence Levels ...................................................... 1-12
1-25. Using Absolute and Relative Uncertainty Specifications................. 1-12
1-26. Using Secondary Performance Specifications.................................. 1-12
1-27. General Specifications .......................................................................... 1-13
1-28. Electrical Specifications ....................................................................... 1-15
1-29. DC Voltage Specifications ............................................................... 1-15

1-1
5700A/5720A Series II
Operators Manual

1-30. AC Voltage Specifications ............................................................... 1-18

1-31. Resistance Specifications ................................................................. 1-29
1-32. DC Current Specifications................................................................ 1-33
1-33. AC Current Specifications................................................................ 1-36
1-34. Wideband AC Voltage (Option 5700-03) Specifications................. 1-42
1-35. Auxiliary Amplifier Specifications .................................................. 1-43

1-2
 Introduction and Specifications
Introduction 1
1-1. Introduction
The Fluke Model 5700A/5720A Series II Calibrators are precise instruments that
calibrate a wide variety of electrical measuring instruments. These calibrators maintain
high accuracy over a wide ambient temperature range, allowing them to test instruments
in any environment, eliminating the restrictions to calibrate only in a temperature-
controlled standards laboratory. With a 5700A/5720A Series II, you can calibrate
precision multimeters that measure ac or dc voltage, ac or dc current, and resistance. The
5720A Series II operates in a similar manner to the 5700A Series II, the difference is that
the 5720A Series II has a considerably higher specified accuracy. Option 5700A-03
Wideband AC Voltage, which is available for both the 5700A Series II and the 5720A
Series II, extends this workload to include rf voltmeters.
Specifications are provided at the end of this chapter. The calibrator is a fully-
programmable precision source of the following:
• DC voltage to 1100 V
• AC voltage to 1100 V, with output available from 10 Hz to 1.2 MHz
• AC and DC current to 2.2 A, with output available from 10 Hz to 10 kHz
• Resistance in values of 1x10n and 1.9x10n from 1 Ω to 100 MΩ, plus a short
• Optional wideband ac voltage from 300 µV to 3.5 V into 50 Ω (-57 dBm to
+24 dBm), 10 Hz to 30 MHz
Features of the calibrator include the following:
• Internal environmentally-controlled references allowing the calibrator to maintain
full performance over a wide ambient temperature range
• Automatic meter error calculation obtained through using a simple output adjust
knob; the display shows linearity, offset, and scale errors
• Keys that multiply and divide the output value by 10 to simplify work on meters with
calibration points at decade multiples of a fraction of full-scale
• Programmable entry limits used for restricting the levels that can be keyed into the
calibrator, preventing access to levels that may be harmful to equipment or personnel
• A s key that provides the capability of displaying the instrument’s specification at
the selected operating point, calibration interval, and specification confidence level
• An auxiliary current binding post that allows you to calibrate meters with separate
current inputs without moving cables
• Real-time clock and calendar for date stamping reports
• Offset and scaling modes that simplify linearity testing of multimeters
• Variable phase reference signal output and phase-lock input
• Interface for the Fluke 5725A Amplifier
• Standard IEEE-488 (GPIB) interface, complying with ANSI/IEEE Standards 488.1-
1987 and 488.2-1987
• Selectable normal remote mode or emulation of the Fluke 5100B and 5200A Series
calibrators in functions and response to system controller software
• EIA Standard RS-232C serial data interface for printing, displaying, or transferring
internally-stored calibration constants, and for remote control of the calibrator
• Extensive internal self-testing and diagnostics of analog and digital functions

1-3
5700A/5720A Series II
Operators Manual

• A traceable calibration procedure for all modes and ranges that requires only 10 V,
1 Ω, and 10 kΩ external standards, with only occasional independent verification
• Fast, simple, automated calibration check providing added confidence between
calibration recalls, and data that can be used to document and characterize the
calibrator’s performance between calibration recalls

1-2. Instruction Manuals

The 5700A/5720A Series II Calibrators ship with a complete manual set that contains
information for the operator and service or maintenance technicians. The set includes:

• 5700A/5720A Series II Getting Started Manual (PN 1668111)

• 5700A/5720A Series II Operator Reference Guide (PN 601648)

• 5700A/5720A Series II Remote Programming Reference Guide (PN 601655)

• 5700A/5720A Series II Operator Manual (provided on CD-ROM, PN 1668127, or a

printed copy is available for purchase through the Fluke Service Department under
PN 601622)

• 5700A/5720A Series II Service Manual (provided on CD-ROM, PN 1668127, or a

printed copy is available for purchase through the Fluke Service Department under
PN 105798)
Order additional copies of these instruction manuals separately using the part numbers
provided. For ordering instructions, refer to the Fluke Catalog or contact a Fluke sales
representative.

1-3. About this Manual

This manual provides complete information for installing the calibrator and operating it
from the front panel keys and in remote. It also provides a glossary of calibration-related
terms as well as general items such as specifications and error code information. The
following topics are covered in this manual:
• Installation
• Operating controls and features
• Front panel operation
• Remote operation (IEEE-488 bus or serial port remote control)
• Serial port operation (printing, displaying, or transferring data, and setting up for
serial port remote control)
• Operator maintenance, including how to calibrate the 5700A/5720A Series II
Calibrator
• Options and accessories

1-4
 Introduction and Specifications
How to Use this Manual 1
1-4. How to Use this Manual
Use the following list to find the location of specific information.
• Unpacking and setup: Chapter 2
• Installation and rack mounting: Chapter 2; also the rack mount kit instruction sheet
• AC line power and interface cabling: Chapter 2
• Controls, indicators, and displays: Chapter 3
• Front panel operation: Chapter 4
• Cabling to a UUT (Unit Under Test): Chapter 4
• Using auxiliary amplifiers: Chapter 4
• Self calibration: Chapters 1 and 7
• Remote operation (IEEE-488 or serial): Chapter 5
• Options and accessories: Chapters 2 and 8
• Instrument specifications: The end of this Chapter

1-5. Wideband AC Voltage Module (Option 5700A-03)

The Wideband AC Voltage Module (Option 5700A-03) can be installed in both the
5700A and 5720A Series II Calibrators. The module is a high-accuracy, low-noise,
extremely flat ac voltage source for calibrating rf voltmeters, with a frequency range of
10 Hz to 30 MHz. Output is in seven ranges from 300 µV (-57 dBm) to 3.5 V (+24 dBm)
through a Type-N coaxial connector into a 50 Ω load. The output level is selected in volts
or dBm through either the front panel controls or under remote control.
The wideband module also functions with the calibrator’s output adjust controls that let
display the error of a wideband meter in either percentage of output or in decibels.
Included with the wideband module is a Type-N output cable and a 50 Ω terminator. The
wideband module is calibrated to the end of its standard-equipment output cable.

1-6. Auxiliary Amplifier

The Fluke Model 5725A Amplifier is available to extend the high voltage performance
and current range of the calibrator:
Interface connectors on the calibrator’s rear panel accept cables to directly operate a
5725A. Three amplifiers can be connected to the calibrator at the same time, but only one
output can be active at a time. Once you have connected the amplifiers and configured
the calibrator in a setup menu, amplifier operation is controlled by the calibrator.
Chapter 4 provides instructions for operating the 5725A. The general specifications at the
end of this chapter include specifications for operating the calibrator with the 5725A. For
other amplifier specifications, refer to their instruction manuals. Table 1-1 summarizes
the extended capabilities offered by the 5725A. Brief descriptions of the extended
capabilities follow.

1-5
5700A/5720A Series II
Operators Manual

Table 1-1. Auxiliary Amplifier Data

Model Mode Range

5725A Amplifier AC V 20 to 1100 V rms up to 70 mA, 40 Hz to 30 kHz

(50 mA < 5 kHz)

220 to 750 V rms up to 70 mA, 30 kHz to 100 kHz

DC Amps 0 to ±11 A

DC Amps 1 to 11 A rms, 40 Hz to 10 kHz

1-7. 5725A Amplifier

The Fluke 5725A Amplifier is an external unit operating under calibrator control to
extend ac voltage drive capabilities and both ac and dc current output range. The
amplifier adds the following capabilities to the calibrator’s 1100 V AC range with no
compromise in accuracy:
• Frequency limits at higher voltage increase to 100 kHz at 750 V, 30 kHz at 1100 V.
• Load limit increases to 70 mA for frequencies above 5 kHz.
• Capacitive drive increases to 1000 pF, subject to the maximum output current.
Extended-performance voltage is available at the calibrator’s front or rear binding posts,
eliminating the need to change cables during a procedure.
A separate set of binding posts on the front panel of the 5725A supplies extended-range
ac and dc current outputs. Since most meters have a separate input terminal for the high
current ranges, this eliminates the need to change cables during a procedure. The 5725A
can also be configured to source all current (both standard calibrator-generated current
and its own current) through the 5725A binding posts.

1-8. Support Equipment and Services

Fluke supports your calibration needs with precision, high-quality equipment and a wide
range of services. Depending on your needs, location, and capabilities, you may decide to
support your 5700A/5720A Series II Calibrator independently or use Fluke services for
part, or all, of your support needs. The following paragraphs describe the support
equipment and services offered by Fluke for the calibrator. For specifications and
ordering instructions for this support equipment and other Fluke instruments, refer to the
Fluke catalog, or contact a representative at a Fluke Sales and Service Center.

1-9. 732B Direct Voltage Reference Standard

The Fluke 732B is a rugged, easily transported solid state direct voltage reference
standard with a highly predictable 10 V output. This predictability allows the Fluke
Standards Laboratory, as well as many Fluke customers, to completely eliminate fragile,
saturated standard cells. Laboratories still maintain standard cells using the 732A and
732B as a transportable voltage standard, eliminating the need to transport their standard
cells. The 732B can be short-circuited, even for extended periods of time, without
damage or loss of stability. It maintains full specified stability over a temperature span of
18 to 28 °C.
The calibrator uses a 10 V reference standard such as the Fluke 732B in its semi-
automated calibration procedure to establish external voltage traceability. Chapter 7
describes this procedure.

1-6
 Introduction and Specifications
Support Equipment and Services 1
1-10. 732B-200 Direct Volt Maintenance Program (U.S.A. Only)
The Fluke 732B-200 Direct Volt Maintenance Program provides your laboratory with
NIST-traceable 10 V calibration uncertainty as low as 0.6 parts per million.
The program maintains the 732B that you keep in your laboratory. To accomplish this,
the following occurs:
1. Fluke sends you a calibrated Fluke-owned 732B standard, together with all-necessary
connecting cables and instructions for comparison with your 10 V reference standard.
2. You take a series of readings over a five-day period, and return the results to the
Fluke Standards Laboratory.
3. The Fluke Standards Laboratory assigns a value to your 10 V standard relative to the
NIST legal volt and sends you a report of calibration.

1-11. 742A Series Resistance Standards

The calibrator uses 1 Ω and 10 kΩ resistor standards such as the 742A Series in its semi-
automated calibration procedure to establish external traceability of resistance and
current. Chapter 7 describes this procedure.
The 742A Resistance Standards, which are constructed of arrays of Fluke wirewound
precision resistors, are ideally suited as support standards for the calibrator. Stability of
the resistance transfer standards and their temperature coefficients make them ideal for
easy transport to and operation in the calibrator's working environment.

1-12. Wideband AC Module (Option 5700A-03) Calibration Support

The Wideband AC Module (Option 5700A-03) requires two kinds of calibration: gain
and flatness. Gain constants are checked and recalibrated as a part of the normal
calibrator semi-automated calibration process.
Since frequency flatness is determined by such stable parameters as circuit geometry and
dielectric constants, flatness of the Wideband AC module has excellent long-term
stability. This stability gives the Wideband AC Module a two-year calibration cycle for
flatness calibration. Flatness calibration is required only infrequently, and can be done
when the calibrator is returned to a standards laboratory for periodic verification. The
5700A/5720A Series II Service Manual contains the wideband flatness calibration
procedure. Chapter 7 of this manual contains the wideband gain calibration procedure.

1-13. Service Centers

A worldwide network of Fluke service centers supports Fluke instruments and assists
customers in many ways. Most service centers have standards and calibration laboratories
certified by local national standards organizations. The following is a partial list of the
services provided by most service centers:
• Repair and certified traceable calibration of all Fluke products.
• Certified traceable calibration of many non-Fluke standards and calibrators.
• Worldwide exchange of calibrator internal modules. Delivery inside the U.S.A. is
typically within 48 hours.
• Service agreements with the flexibility to suit your needs. These can be a simple
warranty extension or an agreement that includes on-site support. Calibration service
agreements are also available in many areas.

1-7
5700A/5720A Series II
Operators Manual

• Training programs and seminars, including laboratory metrology, system

applications, and product maintenance.
• Application help and consulting, including system design, hardware selection,
custom software, site evaluation and installation.
• Replacement parts inventory, including recommended spare parts and module kits.
Visit www.fluke.com for locations and phone numbers of authorized Fluke service
centers.

1-14. The Components of the 5700A/5720A Series II Calibrator

The calibrator is configured internally as an automated calibration system, with process
controls and consistent procedures. Internal microprocessors control all functions and
monitor performance, using a switching matrix to route signals between modules.
Complete automatic internal diagnostics, both analog and digital, confirm operational
integrity.
Reference amplifiers maintain dc accuracy and stability. Of all technologies available,
reference amplifiers have the lowest noise and best stability. Reference amplifiers in the
calibrator go through special selection processes including long-term aging to ensure high
reliability and performance well within specifications.
The calibrator achieves its exceptional ac voltage accuracy by using a patented Fluke rms
sensor to make real-time AC/DC comparison measurements. The Fluke rms sensor is
similar in principle to the traditional thermal voltage converter, but has a shorter time
constant, virtually no reversal error, higher signal-to-noise ratio, and better frequency
response. In the calibrator, one Fluke rms sensor serves as an AC/DC transfer standard to
develop gain and flatness correction constants during calibration. The second Fluke rms
sensor continuously monitors and corrects output voltage during operation.
A patented 26-bit digital-to-analog converter (dac) provides the calibrator with the ability
to precisely vary its output. This is a pulse-width-modulated dac with linearity typically
better than 0.2 ppm of full scale. As with the other internal functions, the linearity of the
dac is automatically checked during calibration and analog diagnostics.

1-15. Calibrating the 5700A/5720A Series II Calibrator

The traditional practice of returning a calibrator to a standards laboratory at regular
intervals for a full calibration is time consuming, expensive, and disruptive to the task to
which the calibrator is being applied. Moreover, it leaves gaps in confidence. You must
rely on manufacturer's specifications to determine if a calibrator will perform acceptably
in an operating environment outside the lab. Also, you must assume that drift is
predictable enough so that performance is within limits between recalls.
The 5700A/5720A Series II Calibrator makes use of Fluke design breakthroughs in the
use of internal check standards and measurement systems. As a result, it can be
completely calibrated in place to full specifications using a small number of convenient,
portable, environmentally tolerant standards available from Fluke. As you will see below,
this procedure is traceable to military standard requirements.
When manufactured, each calibrator is calibrated and thoroughly verified with process
metrology and calibration standards traceable to the U.S. National Bureau of Standards.
A certificate of calibration is included.
A calibration verification procedure described in the 5700A/5720A Series II Service
Manual is recommended every two years or as required by your established policies. This

1-8
 Introduction and Specifications
Calibrating the 5700A/5720A Series II Calibrator 1
procedure involves no adjustments. It simply ensures internal processes are in control,
and establishes parallel external traceability paths for internal functions such as ac
transfers that are never adjusted or corrected.
Figure 1-1 illustrates the time and money that can be saved by using the 5700A/5720A
Series II calibration support plan recommended by Fluke. Depending on your policies,
you may initially decide to perform calibration verification more often. The calibrator
makes this unnecessary and offers you a practical way to collect data unavailable with a
traditional calibrator design about performance between calibrations.

TRADITIONAL CALIBRATOR CALIBRATION

CALIBRATION CYCLE
COST $

TIME

5700A/5720A SERIES II CALIBRATION

CALIBRATION CYCLE
COST $

TIME

Figure 1-1. Time and Costs: Calibrator Calibration

1-9
5700A/5720A Series II
Operators Manual

1-16. The Calibration Process

Calibration requires only three external standards: 10 V, 1 Ω, and 10 kΩ.
Environmentally-controlled internal check standards provide the primary reference
points. A stored table of calibration constants defines additional reference points for
controlling the output. Traceable calibration and adjustment to the specified level of
performance is accomplished in a semi-automated process that revises this table.
When you finish calibration, but before you save the new constants, the calibrator
presents you with the proposed adjustments as +/- ppm of range and percentage change in
specification for each range and function. You can print a list of changes through the
serial (RS-232C) port, or send them to a computer through either the serial port or the
IEEE-488 port. Also on completion of calibration, the calibrator displays the largest
proposed change.
Calibration can be completed as far as deriving and printing the proposed adjustments
without changing the setting of the rear panel CALIBRATION switch; however, the
switch must be set to ENABLE to store the changes in nonvolatile memory and make
them effective. The switch is recessed to allow the metrologist to cover it with a
calibration sticker to guarantee calibrator integrity.

1-17. Establishing Traceability

Traceability to national standards is established as follows:
• Except for the internal AC/DC transfer standard, the internal check standards are
directly calibrated by traceable external standards every time the 5700A/5720A
Series II is calibrated.
• The internal AC/DC transfer standard is never adjusted, so its traceability is not
disturbed by calibration. Infrequent verification is done in the traditional way, by
comparing selected ac voltage outputs with an external dc voltage standard through
an external ac/dc transfer standard. Fluke recommends this is done every two years or
as determined by the policy of your organization.
• Infrequent independent verification is also performed on stable parameters, such as
frequency flatness, determined more by circuit geometry and dielectric constants than
time.

1-18. Calibration Reports

The calibrator stores two sets of calibration constants: the set currently in use and the old
set from the previous calibration. This gives the calibrator the ability at any time to
produce a calibration report of the differences between the present settings and the
settings that were in effect before the last calibration. The report shows changes for each
range and function in +/- ppm of range and in percentage of specification limit. You can
print the report or send it to a host computer through either the RS-232-C or IEEE-488
interface.
If you request a calibration report after doing calibration but before saving the new
constants, the report shows proposed changes to the calibration constants relative to the
previously stored settings.

1-10
 Introduction and Specifications
Calibration Check 1
1-19. Calibration Check
Checking the calibration takes about an hour, and provides you with a means of
documenting the calibrator’s performance of a between calibrations. Calibration checking
is similar to calibration, except internal check standards are used as primary references
(no external standards are needed), and changes cannot be stored. The process produces a
report similar to normal calibration, showing drift relative to internal check standards.
Because cal check does not change stored calibration constants, there is no need to enable
the rear panel CALIBRATION switch. Therefore, an external computer can do the
procedure unattended.

1-20. Developing a Performance History

A Fluke specification is a set of performance limits that all products must meet. To
maintain consistent quality, Fluke calibrators are specified with enough margin to include
temperature, line, and load extremes, plus additional margin for production. This means
that a typical 5700A/5720A Series II calibrator in a typical environment operates inside
50 % of specification limits. For some exacting applications, it can be helpful to know
just how accurately a particular calibrator operates. The proper way to do this is to
accumulate a performance history by calibrating regularly and recording results on a
control chart.
Calibrating regularly and recording the results on a control chart is tedious and requires a
large array of equipment. The calibrator’s calibration check feature is an alternative with
some distinct advantages:
• Calibrated check standards are already programmed into the unit. You do not have to
use external standards.
• The process is consistent and automatic: it does not require an operator’s assistance.
Each calibration check produces a new set of data points for accumulating a historical
record. When this process is externally automated, significant history can be accumulated
much faster than with a manual calibration.

1-21. Range Calibration .

After calibration, you can make further fine adjustments to each range. Range
adjustments are optional; they are not necessary to meet total uncertainty specifications.
However, they do allow you to align your calibrator closer to your standards.
Before you do range calibration, you must first use the calibrator’s semi-automated
calibration procedure. This is to calibrate the ranges that will not be adjusted. It also
performs an initial adjustment for each range, and supplies flatness corrections for ac
functions.

1-22. DC Zeros Calibration

To ensure the validity of the specifications, a dc zeros calibration must be performed at
least every 30 days. If more than 30 days elapse without a dc zeros calibration a warning
message appears. This procedure does not require any external equipment or connections
and takes approximately 2.5 minutes to complete.

1-11
5700A/5720A Series II
Operators Manual

1-23. Specifications
The 5700A/5720A Series II Calibrators are verified and calibrated at the factory prior to
shipment to ensure they meet the accuracy standards required for all certified calibration
laboratories. By calibrating to the specifications in this chapter, you can maintain the high
performance level throughout the life of your calibrator.
Specifications are valid after a warm-up period of twice the time the calibrator has been
turned off, up to a maximum of 30 minutes. For example, if the calibrator has been turned
off for five minutes, the warm-up period is ten minutes.

1-24. Specification Confidence Levels

You calibrator’s performance level is ensured by regular calibration to the primary
performance specifications, which are provided at both the 99 % and 95 % confidence
levels. The 95 % confidence level will provide an accuracy that will often surpass the
accuracy requirements for meeting Tag 4 standards, or a coverage factor of 2. Calibration
at the 99 % confidence level is also available for those applications that require a
confidence factor for the specifications that is higher than 95 %. For information on
selecting the confidence level, refer to Chapter 4.
The tables in this chapter provide specifications at both the 95 % and 99 % confidence
levels for the 5700A/5720A Series II Calibrators. Included with these tables are operating
specifications for using the calibrator with the Wideband AC Module (Option 5700A-03)
and the 5725A Amplifier.

1-25. Using Absolute and Relative Uncertainty Specifications

To evaluate the 5700A/5720A Series II coverage of your calibration workload, use the
Absolute Uncertainty specifications. Absolute uncertainty includes stability, temperature
coefficient, linearity, line and load regulation, and the traceability to external standards.
You do not need to add anything to absolute uncertainty to determine the ratios between
the calibrator’s uncertainties and the uncertainties of your calibration workload.
Relative uncertainty specifications are provided for enhanced accuracy applications.
These specifications apply when range constants are adjusted (see “Range Calibration”).
To calculate absolute uncertainty, you must combine the uncertainties of your external
standards and techniques with relative uncertainty.

1-26. Using Secondary Performance Specifications

Secondary performance specifications and operating characteristics are included in
uncertainty specifications. They are provided for special calibration requirements such as
stability or linearity testing.

1-12
 Introduction and Specifications
General Specifications 1
1-27. General Specifications
Warm-Up Time....................................................... Twice the time since last warmed up, to a maximum of 30 minutes.
System Installation ............................................... Rear output configuration and rack- mount kit available.
Standard Interfaces .............................................. IEEE-488, RS-232, 5725A, 5205A or 5215A, 5220A, phase lock in
(BNC), phase reference out (BNC).
Temperature Performance
Operating ............................................................ 0 °C to 50 °C
Calibration........................................................... 15 °C to 35 °C
Storage ............................................................... -40 °C to 75 °C
Relative Humidity
Operating ............................................................ <80 % to 30 °C, <70 % to 40 °C, <40 % to 50 °C
Storage ............................................................... <95 %, non-condensing. A power stabilization period of four days may
be required after extended storage at high temperature and humidity.
Safety ..................................................................... Designed to comply with UL3111; EN61010; CSA C22.2 No. 1010;
ANSI/ISA S82.01-1994
Guard Isolation...................................................... 20 V
EMI/RFI................................................................... Designed to comply with FCC Rules Part 15, Subpart B, Class B;
EN50081-1, EN50082-1
ElectroStatic Discharge........................................ This instrument meets criteria C for ESD requirements per EN61326
Line Power
Line Frequency .................................................. 47 to 63 Hz; ±10 % 100 V, 110 V, 115 V, 120 V, 200 V, 220 V, 230 V,
240 V
Maximum Power
5700A/5720A .................................................. 300 VA
5725A ............................................................. 750 VA
Weight
5700A/5720A ...................................................... 27kg (62 lbs)
5725A.................................................................. 32kg (70 lbs)
Size
5700A/5720A
Height ............................................................. 17.8 cm (7 in), standard rack increment, plus 1.5 cm (0.6 in) for feet
Width............................................................... 43.2 cm (17 in), standard rack width
Depth .............................................................. 63.0 cm (24.8 in), overall; 57.8 cm (22.7 in), rack depth
5725A
Height ............................................................. 13.3 cm, (5.25 in)
Width and Depth ............................................. Same as 5700A/5720A. Both units project 5.1 cm, (2 in) from rack
front.

1-13
5700A/5720A Series II
Operators Manual

43.2 cm (17 in)

17.8 cm (7 in)

6.35 cm (2.5 in)

63 cm (24.8 in)

FOR CABLE
ACCESS

1-14
 Introduction and Specifications
Electrical Specifications 1
1-28. Electrical Specifications
Note
Fluke guarantees performance verification using specifications stated to
99% confidence level.

1-29. DC Voltage Specifications

5720A Series II DC Voltage Specifications

Absolute Uncertainty Relative Uncertainty
± 5 °C from calibration temperature
[1]
± 1 °C
Range Resolution
24 Hours 90 Days 180 Days 1 Year 24 Hours 90 Days
± (ppm output + µV)
99 % Confidence Level
220 mV 10 nV 5 + 0.5 7 + 0.5 8 + 0.5 9 + 0.5 2 + 0.4 2.5 + 0.4
2.2 V 100 nV 3.5 + 0.8 4 + 0.8 4.5 + 0.8 6 + 0.8 2 + 0.8 2.5 + 0.8
11 V 1 µV 2.5 + 3 3+3 3.5 + 3 4+3 1+3 1.5 + 3
22 V 1 µV 2.5 + 5 3+5 3.5 + 5 4+5 1+5 1.5 + 5
220 V 10 µV 3.5 + 50 4 + 50 5 + 50 6 + 50 2 + 50 2.5 + 50
1100 V 100 µV 5 + 500 6 + 500 7 + 500 8 + 500 2.5 + 400 3 + 400
95 % Confidence Level
220 mV 10 nV 4 + 0.4 6 + 0.4 6.5 + 0.4 7.5 + 0.4 1.6 + 0.4 2 + 0.4
2.2 V 100 nV 3 + 0.7 3.5 + 0.7 4 + 0.7 5 + 0.7 1.6 + 0.7 2 + 0.7
11 V 1 µV 2 + 2.5 2.5 + 2.5 3 + 2.5 3.5 + 2.5 0.8 + 2.5 1.2 + 2.5
22 V 1 µV 2+4 2.5 + 4 3+4 3.5 + 4 0.8 + 4 1.2 + 4
220 V 10 µV 3 + 40 3.5 + 40 4 + 40 5 + 40 1.6 + 40 2 + 40
1100 V 100 µV 4 + 400 4.5 + 400 6 + 400 6.5 + 400 2 + 400 2.4 + 400
Notes:
DC Zeros calibration required every 30 days.
1. For fields strengths >1 V/m but ≤3 V/m, add 0.01 % of range.

1-15
5700A/5720A Series II
Operators Manual

5700A Series II DC Voltage Specifications

Absolute Uncertainty Relative Uncertainty
[1]
± 5 °C from calibration temperature ± 1 °C
Range Resolution
24 Hours 90 Days 180 Days 1 Year 24 Hours 90 Days
± (ppm output + µV)
99 % Confidence Level
220 mV 10 nV 6.5 + .75 7 + .75 8 + .75 9 + .8 2.5 + .5 4 + .5
2.2 V 100 nV 3.5 + 1.2 6 + 1.2 7 + 1.2 8 + 1.2 2.5 + 1.2 4 + 1.2
11 V 1 µV 3.5 + 3 5+4 7+4 8+4 1.5 + 3 3.5 + 4
22 V 1 µV 3.5 + 6 5+8 7+8 8+8 1.5 + 6 3.5 + 8
220 V 10 µV 5 + 100 6 + 100 8 + 100 9 + 100 2.5 + 100 4 + 100
1100 V 100 µV 7 + 600 8 + 600 10 + 600 11 + 600 3 + 600 4.5 + 600
95 % Confidence Level
220 mV 10 nV 5.5 + 0.6 6 + 0.6 7 + 0.6 8 + 0.6 2 + 0.4 3.5 + 0.4
2.2 V 100 nV 3.5 + 1 5+1 6+1 7+1 2+1 3.5 + 1
11 V 1 mV 3 + 3.5 4 + 3.5 6 + 3.5 7 + 3.5 1.2 + 3 3 + 3.5
22 V 1 mV 3 + 6.5 4 + 6.5 6 + 6.5 7 + 6.5 1.2 + 6 3+7
220 V 10 mV 4 + 80 5 + 80 7 + 80 8 + 80 2 + 80 3.5 + 80
1100 V 100 mV 6 + 500 7 + 500 8 + 500 9 + 500 2.4 + 500 4 + 500
Notes:
DC Zeros calibration required every 30 days.
1. For fields strengths >1 V/m but ≤ 3 V/m, add 0.01 % of range.

1-16
 Introduction and Specifications
Electrical Specifications 1
DC Voltage Secondary Performance Specifications and Operating Characteristics
Temperature Coefficient
[1] [2] Noise
Stability Adder
± 1 °C Linearity
0 - 10 °C ± 1 °C Bandwidth Bandwidth
Range and 0.1-10 Hz 10 Hz-10 kHz
24 Hours 10 - 40 °C
40 - 50 °C pk-pk RMS
± (ppm output + µV) ± (ppm output + µV) / °C ± (ppm output + µV) µV
220 mV 0.3 + 0.3 0.4 + 0.1 1.5 + 0.5 1 + 0.2 0.15 + 0.1 5
2.2 V 0.3 + 1 0.3 + 0.1 1.5 + 2 1 + 0.6 0.15 + 0.4 15
11 V 0.3 + 2.5 0.15 + 0.2 1 + 1.5 0.3 + 2 0.15 + 2 50
22 V 0.4 + 5 0.2 + 0.4 1.5 + 3 0.3 + 4 0.15 + 4 50
220 V 0.5 + 40 0.3 + 5 1.5 + 40 1 + 40 0.15 + 60 150
1100 V 0.5 + 200 0.5 + 10 3 + 200 1 + 200 0.15 + 300 500
Notes:
1. Stability specifications are included in the Absolute Uncertainty values in the primary specification tables.
2. Temperature coefficient is an adder to uncertainty specifications that does not apply unless operating more than ±5 °C from
calibration temperature.

Minimum Output .................................................. 0 V for all ranges, except 100 V for 1100 V range
Maximum Load ..................................................... 50 mA for 2.2 V through 220 V ranges; 20 mA for 1100 V range; 50 Ω
output impedance on 220 mV range; all ranges <1000 pF, >25 Ω
Load Regulation ................................................... <(0.2 ppm of output + 0.1 ppm of range), full load to no load
Line Regulation .................................................... <0.1 ppm change, ± 10 % of selected nominal line
Settling Time ........................................................ 3 seconds to full accuracy; + 1 second for range or polarity change; + 1
second for 1100 V range
Overshoot ............................................................. <5 %
Common Mode Rejection .................................... 140 dB, DC to 400 Hz
Remote Sensing .................................................. Available 0 V to ±1100 V, on 2.2 V through 1100 V ranges

1-17
5700A/5720A Series II
Operators Manual

1-30. AC Voltage Specifications

5720A Series II AC Voltage Specifications: 99% Confidence Level
Absolute Uncertainty Relative Uncertainty
Frequency ± 5 °C from calibration temperature ± 1 °C
Range Resolution
(Hz) 24 Hours 90 Days 180 Days 1 Year 24 Hours 90 Days
± (ppm output + µV)
2.2 mV 1 nV 10 - 20 250 + 5 270 + 5 290 + 5 300 + 5 250 + 5 270 + 5
20 - 40 100 + 5 105 + 5 110 + 5 115 + 5 100 + 5 105 + 5
40 - 20 k 85 + 5 90 + 5 95 + 5 100 + 5 60 + 5 65 + 5
20 k - 50 k 220 + 5 230 + 5 240 + 5 250 + 5 85 + 5 95 + 5
50 k - 100 k 500 + 6 540 + 6 570 + 6 600 + 6 200 + 6 220 + 6
100 k - 300 k 1000 + 12 1200 + 12 1250 + 12 1300 + 12 350 + 12 400 + 12
300 k - 500 k 1400 + 25 1500 + 25 1600 + 25 1700 + 25 800 + 25 1000 + 25
500 k - 1 M 2900 + 25 3100 + 25 3250 + 25 3400 + 25 2700 + 25 3000 + 25
22 mV 10 nV 10 - 20 250 + 5 270 + 5 290 + 5 300 + 5 250 + 5 270 + 5
20 - 40 100 + 5 105 + 5 110 + 5 115 + 5 100 + 5 105 + 5
40 - 20 k 85 + 5 90 + 5 95 + 5 100 + 5 60 + 5 65 + 5
20 k - 50 k 220 + 5 230 + 5 240 + 5 250 + 5 85 + 5 95 + 5
50 k - 100 k 500 + 6 540 + 6 570 + 6 600 + 6 200 + 6 220 + 6
100 k - 300 k 1000 + 12 1200 + 12 1250 + 12 1300 + 12 350 + 12 400 + 12
300 k - 500 k 1400 + 25 1500 + 25 1600 + 25 1700 + 25 800 + 25 1000 + 25
500 k - 1 M 2900 + 25 3100 + 25 3250 + 25 3400 + 25 2700 + 25 3000 + 25
220 mV 100 nV 10 - 20 250 + 15 270 + 15 290 + 15 300 + 15 250 + 15 270 + 15
20 - 40 100 + 8 105 + 8 110 + 8 115 + 8 100 + 8 105 + 8
40 - 20 k 85 + 8 90 + 8 95 + 8 100 + 8 60 + 8 65 + 8
20 k - 50 k 220 + 8 230 + 8 240 + 8 250 + 8 85 + 8 95 + 8
50 k - 100 k 500 + 20 540 + 20 570 + 20 600 + 20 200 + 20 220 + 20
100 k - 300 k 850 + 25 900 + 25 1000 + 25 1100 + 25 350 + 25 400 + 25
300 k - 500 k 1400 + 30 1500 + 30 1600 + 30 1700 + 30 800 + 30 1000 + 30
500 k - 1 M 2700 + 60 2900 + 60 3100 + 60 3300 + 60 2600 + 60 2800 + 60
2.2 V 1 µV 10 - 20 250 + 50 270 + 50 290 + 50 300 + 50 250 + 50 270 + 50
20 - 40 95 + 20 100 + 20 105 + 20 110 + 20 95 + 20 100 + 20
40 - 20 k 45 + 10 47 + 10 50 + 10 52 + 10 30 + 10 40 + 10
20 k - 50 k 80 + 12 85 + 12 87 + 12 90 + 12 70 + 12 75 + 12
50 k - 100 k 120 + 40 125 + 40 127 + 40 130 + 40 100 + 40 105 + 40
100 k - 300 k 380 + 100 420 + 100 460 + 100 500 + 100 270 + 100 290 + 100
300 k - 500 k 1000 + 250 1100 + 250 1150 + 250 1200 + 250 900 + 250 1000 + 250
500 k - 1 M 1600 + 400 1800 + 600 1900 + 400 2000 + 400 1200 + 400 1300 + 400
22 V 10 µV 10 - 20 250 + 500 270 + 500 290 + 500 300 + 500 250 + 500 270 + 500
20 - 40 95 + 200 100 + 200 105 + 200 110 + 200 95 + 200 100 + 200
40 - 20 k 45 + 70 47 + 70 50 + 70 52 + 70 30 + 70 40 + 70
20 k - 50 k 80 + 120 85 + 120 87 + 120 90 + 120 70 + 120 75 + 120
50 k - 100 k 110 + 250 115 + 250 117 + 250 120 + 250 100 + 250 105 + 250
100 k - 300 k 300 + 800 310 + 800 320 + 800 325 + 800 270 + 800 290 + 800
300 k - 500 k 1000 + 2500 1100 + 2500 1150 + 2500 1200 + 2500 900 + 2500 1000 + 2500
500 k - 1 M 1500 + 4000 1600 + 4000 1700 + 4000 1800 + 4000 1300 + 4000 1400 + 4000

1-18
 Introduction and Specifications
Electrical Specifications 1
± (ppm output + mV)
[2]
220 V 100 µV 10 - 20 250 + 5 270 + 5 290 + 5 300 + 5 250 + 5 270 + 5
20 - 40 95 + 2 100 + 2 105 + 2 110 + 2 95 + 2 100 + 2
40 - 20 k 57 + 0.7 60 + 0.7 62 + 0.7 65 + 0.7 45 + 0.7 50 + 0.7
20 k - 50 k 90 + 1.2 95 + 1.2 97 + 1.2 100 + 1.2 75 + 1.2 80 + 1.2
50 k - 100 k 160 + 3 170 + 3 175 + 3 180 + 3 140 + 3 150 + 3
100 k - 300 k 900 + 20 1000 + 20 1050 + 20 1100 + 20 600 + 20 700 + 20
300 k - 500 k 5000 + 50 5200 + 50 5300 + 50 5400 + 50 4500 + 50 4700 + 50
500 k - 1 M 8000 + 100 9000 + 100 9500 + 100 10,000 + 100 8000 + 100 8500 + 100
[1]
1100 V 1 µV 15 - 50 300 + 20 320 + 20 340 + 20 360 + 20 300 + 20 320 + 20
50 - 1 k 70 + 4 75 + 4 80 + 4 85 + 4 50 + 4 55 + 4
5725A Amplifier:
1100 V 1 mV 40 - 1 k 75 + 4 80 + 4 85 + 4 90 + 4 50 + 4 55 + 4
1 k - 20 k 105 + 6 125 + 6 135 + 6 165 + 6 85 + 6 105 + 6
20 k - 30 k 230 + 11 360 + 11 440 + 11 600 + 11 160 + 11 320 + 11
750 V 30 k - 50 k 230 + 11 360 + 11 440 + 11 600 + 11 160 + 11 320 + 11
50 k - 100k 600 + 45 1300 + 45 1600 + 45 2300 + 45 380 + 45 1200 + 45
Notes:
1. Maximum output 250 V from 15-50 Hz.
2. See Volt-Hertz capability in Figure A.

1-19
5700A/5720A Series II
Operators Manual

5720A Series II AC Voltage Specifications: 95 % Confidence Level

Absolute Uncertainty Relative Uncertainty
Frequency ± 5 °C from calibration temperature ± 1 °C
Range Resolution
(Hz) 24 Hours 90 Days 180 Days 1 Year 24 Hours 90 Days
± (ppm output + µV)
2.2 mV 1 nV 10 - 20 200 + 4 220 + 4 230 + 4 240 + 4 200 + 4 220 + 4
20 - 40 80 + 4 85 + 4 87 + 4 90 + 4 80 + 4 85 + 4
40 - 20 k 70 + 4 75 + 4 77 + 4 80 + 4 50 + 4 55 + 4
20 k - 50 k 170 + 4 180 + 4 190 + 4 200 + 4 70 + 4 80 + 4
50 k - 100 k 400 + 5 460 + 5 480 + 5 500 + 5 160 + 5 180 + 5
100 k - 300 k 300 + 10 900 + 10 1000 + 10 1050 + 10 280 + 10 320 + 10
300 k - 500 k 1100 + 20 1200 + 20 1300 + 20 1400 + 20 650 + 20 800 + 20
500 k - 1 M 2400 + 20 2500 + 20 2600 + 20 2700 + 20 2100 + 20 2400 + 20
22 mV 10 nV 10 - 20 200 + 4 220 + 4 230 + 4 240 + 4 200 + 4 220 + 4
20 - 40 80 + 4 85 + 4 87 + 4 90 + 4 80 + 4 85 + 4
40 - 20 k 70 + 4 75 + 4 77 + 4 80 + 4 50 + 4 55 + 4
20 k - 50 k 170 + 4 180 + 4 190 + 4 200 + 4 70 + 4 80 + 4
50 k - 100 k 400 + 5 460 + 5 480 + 5 500 + 5 160 + 5 180 + 5
100 k - 300 k 300 + 10 900 + 10 1000 + 10 1050 + 10 280 + 10 320 + 10
300 k - 500 k 1100 + 20 1200 + 20 1300 + 20 1400 + 20 650 + 20 800 + 20
500 k - 1 M 2400 + 20 2500 + 20 2600 + 20 2700 + 20 2100 + 20 2400 + 20
220 mV 100 nV 10 - 20 200 + 12 220 + 12 230 + 12 240 + 12 200 + 12 220 + 12
20 - 40 80 + 7 85 + 7 87 + 7 90 + 7 80 + 7 85 + 7
40 - 20 k 70 + 7 75 + 7 77 + 7 80 + 7 50 + 7 55 + 7
20 k - 50 k 170 + 7 180 + 7 190 + 7 200 + 7 70 + 7 80 + 7
50 k - 100 k 400 + 17 420 + 17 440 + 17 460 + 17 160 + 17 180 + 17
100 k - 300 k 700 + 20 750 + 20 800 + 20 900 + 20 280 + 20 320 + 20
300 k - 500 k 1100 + 25 1200 +25 1300 + 25 1400 + 25 650 + 25 800 + 25
500 k - 1 M 2400 + 45 2500 + 45 2600 + 45 2700 + 45 2100 + 45 2400 + 45
2.2 V 1 mV 10 - 20 200 + 40 220 + 40 230 + 40 240 + 40 200 + 40 220 + 40
20 - 40 75 + 15 80 + 15 85 + 15 90 + 15 75 + 15 80 + 15
40 - 20 k 37 + 8 40 + 8 42 + 8 45 + 8 25 + 8 35 + 8
20 k - 50 k 65 + 10 70 + 10 73 + 10 75 + 10 55 + 10 60 + 10
50 k - 100 k 100 + 30 105 + 30 107 + 30 110 + 30 80 + 30 85 + 30
100 k - 300 k 300 + 80 340 + 80 380 + 80 420 + 80 230 + 80 250 + 80
300 k - 500 k 800 + 200 900 + 200 950 + 200 1000 + 200 700 + 200 800 + 200
500 k - 1 M 1300 + 300 1500 + 300 1600 + 300 1700 + 300 1000 + 300 1100 + 300
22 V 10 mV 10 - 20 200 + 400 220 + 400 230 + 400 240 + 400 200 + 400 220 + 400
20 - 40 75 + 150 80 + 150 85 + 150 90 + 150 75 + 150 80 + 150
40 - 20k 37 + 50 40 + 50 42 + 50 45 + 50 25 + 50 35 + 50
20k - 50k 65 + 100 70 + 100 73 + 100 75 + 100 55 + 100 60 + 100
50k - 100k 90 + 200 95 + 200 97 + 200 100 + 200 80 + 200 85 + 200
100k - 300k 250 + 600 260 + 600 270 + 600 275 + 600 250 + 600 270 + 600
300k - 500k 800 + 2000 900 + 2000 900 + 2000 1000 + 2000 700 + 2000 800 + 2000
500k - 1M 1200 + 3200 1300 + 3200 1400 + 3200 1500 + 3200 1100 + 3200 1200 + 3200
± (ppm output + mV)
[2]
220 V 100 mV 10 - 20 200 +4 220 + 4 230 + 4 240 + 4 200 + 4 220 + 4
20 - 40 75 + 1.5 80 + 1.5 85 + 1.5 90 + 1.5 75 + 1.5 80 + 1.5
40 - 20 k 45 + 0.6 47 + 0.6 50 + 0.6 52 + 0.6 35 + 0.6 40 + 0.6
20 k - 50 k 70 + 1 75 + 1 77 + 1 80 + 1 60 + 1 65 + 1
50 k - 100 k 120 + 2.5 130 + 2.5 140 + 2.5 150 + 2.5 110 + 2.5 120 + 2.5
100 k - 300 k 700 + 16 800 + 16 850 + 16 900 + 16 500 + 16 600 + 16
300 k - 500 k 4000 + 40 4200 + 40 4300 + 40 4400 + 40 3600 + 40 3800 + 40
500 k - 1 M 6000 + 80 7000 + 80 7500 + 80 8000 + 80 6500 + 80 7000 + 80
[1]
1100 V 1 mV 15 - 50 240 + 16 260 + 16 280 + 16 300 + 16 240 + 16 260 + 16
50 - 1 k 55 + 3.5 60 + 3.5 65 + 3.5 70 + 3.5 40 + 3.5 45 + 3.5

1-20
 Introduction and Specifications
Electrical Specifications 1
5725A Amplifier:
1100 V 1 mV 40 – 1 k 75 + 4 80 + 4 85 + 4 90 + 4 50 + 4 55 + 4
1 k – 20 k 105 + 6 125 + 6 135 + 6 165 + 6 85 + 6 105 + 6
20 k – 30 k 230 + 11 360 + 11 440 + 11 600 + 11 160 + 11 320 + 11
750 V 30 k – 50 k 230 + 11 360 + 11 440 + 11 600 + 11 160 + 11 320 + 11
50 k – 100 k 600 + 45 1300 + 45 1600 + 45 2300 + 45 380 + 45 1200 + 45
Notes:
1. Maximum output 250 V from 15-50 Hz.
2. See Volt-Hertz capability in Figure A.

1-21
5700A/5720A Series II
Operators Manual

5700A Series II AC Voltage Specifications: 99 % Confidence Level

Absolute Uncertainty Relative Uncertainty
Frequency ± 5 °C from calibration temperature ± 1 °C
Range Resolution
(Hz) 24 Hours 90 Days 180 Days 1 Year 24 Hours 90 Days
± (ppm output + µV)
2.2 mV 1 nV 10 – 20 500 + 5 550 + 5 600 + 5 600 + 5 500 + 5 550 + 5
20 – 40 200 + 5 220 + 5 230 + 5 240 + 5 200 + 5 220 + 5
40 – 20 k 100 + 5 110 + 5 120 + 5 120 + 5 60 + 5 65 + 5
20 k – 50 k 340 + 5 370 + 5 390 + 5 410 + 5 100 + 5 110 + 5
50 k – 100 k 800 + 8 900 + 8 950 + 8 950 + 8 220 + 8 240 + 8
100 k – 300 k 1100 + 15 1200 + 15 1300 + 15 1300 + 15 400 + 15 440 + 15
300 k – 500 k 1500 + 30 1700 + 30 1700 + 30 1800 + 30 1000 + 30 1100 + 30
500 k – 1 M 4000 + 40 4400 + 40 4700 + 40 4800 + 40 400 + 30 4400 + 30
22 mV 10 nV 10 – 20 500 + 6 550 + 6 600 + 6 600 + 6 500 + 6 550 + 6
20 – 40 200 + 6 220 + 6 230 + 6 240 + 6 200 + 6 220 + 6
40 – 20 k 100 + 6 110 + 6 120 + 6 120 + 6 60 + 6 65 + 6
20 k – 50 k 340 + 6 370 + 6 390 + 6 410 + 6 100 + 6 110 + 6
50 k – 100 k 800 + 8 900 + 8 950 + 8 950 + 8 220 + 8 240 + 8
100 k – 300 k 1100 + 15 1200 + 15 1300 + 15 1300 + 15 400 + 15 440 + 15
300 k – 500 k 1500 + 30 1700 + 30 1700 + 30 1800 + 30 1000 + 30 1100 + 30
500 k – 1 M 4000 + 40 4400 + 40 4700 + 40 4800 + 40 4000 + 30 4400 + 30
220 mV 100 nV 10 – 20 500 + 16 550 + 16 600 + 16 600 + 16 500 + 16 550 + 16
20 – 40 200 + 10 220 + 10 230 + 10 240 + 10 200 + 10 220 + 10
40 – 20 k 95 + 10 100 + 10 110 + 10 110 + 10 60 + 10 65 + 10
20 k – 50 k 300 + 10 330 + 10 350 + 10 360 + 10 100 + 10 110 + 10
50 k – 100 k 750 + 30 800 + 30 850 + 30 900 + 30 220 + 30 240 + 30
100 k – 300 k 940 + 30 1000 + 30 1100 + 30 1100 + 30 400 + 30 440 + 30
300 k – 500 k 1500 + 40 1700 + 40 1700 + 40 1800 + 40 1000 + 40 1100 + 40
500 k – 1 M 3000 + 100 3300 + 100 3500 + 100 3600 + 100 3000 + 100 3300 + 100
2.2 V 1 mV 10 – 20 500 + 100 550 + 100 600 + 100 600 + 100 500 + 100 550 + 100
20 – 40 150 + 30 170 + 30 170 + 30 180 + 30 150 + 30 170 + 30
40 – 20 k 70 + 7 75 + 7 80 + 7 85 + 7 40 + 7 45 + 7
20 k – 50 k 120 + 20 130 + 20 140 + 20 140 + 20 100 + 20 110 + 20
50 k – 100 k 230 + 80 250 + 80 270 + 80 280 + 80 200 + 80 220 + 80
100 k – 300 k 400 + 150 440 + 150 470 + 150 480 + 150 400 + 150 440 + 150
300 k – 500 k 1000 + 400 1100 + 400 1200 + 400 1200 + 400 1000 + 400 1100 + 400
500 k – 1 M 2000 + 1000 2200 + 1000 2300 + 1000 2400 + 1000 2000 + 1000 2200 + 1000
22 V 10 mV 10 – 20 500 + 1000 550 + 1000 600 + 1000 600 + 1000 500 + 1000 550 + 1000
20 – 40 150 + 300 170 + 300 170 + 300 180 + 300 150 + 300 170 + 300
40 – 20 k 70 + 70 75 + 70 80 + 70 85 + 70 40 + 70 45 + 70
20 k – 50 k 120 + 200 130 + 200 140 + 200 140 + 200 100 + 200 110 + 200
50 k – 100 k 230 + 400 250 + 400 270 + 400 280 + 400 200 + 400 220 + 400
100 k – 300 k 500 + 1700 550 + 1700 550 + 1700 600 + 1700 500 + 1700 550 + 1700
300 k – 500 k 1200 + 5000 1300 + 5000 1300 + 5000 1400 + 5000 1200 + 5000 1300 + 5000
500 k – 1 M 2600 + 9000 2800 + 9000 2900 + 9000 3000 + 9000 2600 + 9000 2800 + 9000
± (ppm output + mV)
[2]
220 V 100 mV 10 – 20 500 + 10 550 + 10 600 + 10 600 + 10 500 + 10 550 + 10
20 – 40 150 + 3 170 + 3 170 + 3 180 + 3 150 + 3 170 + 3
40 – 20 k 75 + 1 80 + 1 85 + 1 90 + 1 45 + 1 50 + 1
20 k – 50 k 200 + 4 220 + 4 240 + 4 250 + 4 100 + 1 110 + 1
50 k – 100 k 500 + 10 550 + 10 600 + 10 600 + 10 300 + 10 330 + 10
100 k – 300 k 1500 + 110 1500 + 110 1600 + 110 1600 + 110 1500 + 110 1500 + 100
300 k – 500 k 5000 + 110 5200 + 110 5300 + 110 5400 + 110 5000 + 110 5200 + 110
500 k – 1 M 12,000 + 220 12,500 + 220 12,500 + 220 13,000 + 220 12,000 + 220 12,000 + 220
[1]
1100 V 1 mV 15 – 50 400 + 20 420 + 20 440 + 20 460 + 20 400 + 20 420 + 20
50 – 1 k 75 + 4 80 + 4 85 + 4 90 + 4 50 + 4 55 + 4

1-22
 Introduction and Specifications
Electrical Specifications 1
5725A Amplifier:
1100 V 1 mV 40 – 1 k 75 + 4 80 + 4 85 + 4 90 + 4 50 + 4 55 + 4
1 k – 20 k 105 + 6 125 + 6 135 + 6 165 + 6 85 + 6 105 + 6
20 k – 30 k 230 + 11 360 + 11 440 + 11 600 + 11 160 + 11 320 + 11
750 V 30 k – 50 k 230 + 11 360 + 11 440 + 11 600 + 11 160 + 11 320 + 11
50 k – 100 k 600 + 45 1300 + 45 1600 + 45 2300 + 45 380 + 45 1200 + 45
Notes:
1. Maximum output 250 V from 15-50 Hz.
2. See Volt-Hertz capability in Figure A.

1-23
5700A/5720A Series II
Operators Manual

5700A Series II AC Voltage Specifications: 95 % Confidence Level

Absolute Uncertainty Relative Uncertainty
Frequency ± 5 °C from calibration temperature ± 1 °C
Range Resolution
(Hz) 24 Hours 90 Days 180 Days 1 Year 24 Hours 90 Days
± (ppm output + µV)
2.2 mV 1 nV 10 – 20 400 + 4.5 500 + 4.5 530 + 4.5 550 + 4.5 400 + 4.5 500 + 4.5
20 – 40 170 + 4.5 190 + 4.5 200 + 4.5 210 + 4.5 170 + 4.5 190 + 4.5
40 – 20 k 85 + 4.5 95 + 4.5 100 + 4.5 105 + 4.5 55 + 4.5 60 + 4.5
20 k – 50 k 300 + 4.5 330 + 4.5 350 + 4.5 370 + 4.5 90 + 4.5 100 + 4.5
50 k – 100 k 700 + 7 750 + 7 800 + 7 850 + 7 210 + 7 230 + 7
100 k – 300 k 900 + 13 1000 + 13 1050 + 13 1100 + 13 380 + 13 420 + 13
300 k – 500 k 1300 + 25 1500 + 25 1600 + 25 1700 + 25 900 + 25 1000 + 25
500 k – 1 M 2800 + 25 3100 + 25 3300 + 25 3400 + 25 2900 + 25 3200 + 25
22 mV 10 nV 10 – 20 400 + 5 500 + 5 530 + 5 550 + 5 400 + 5 500 + 5
20 – 40 170 + 5 190 + 5 200 + 5 210 + 5 170 + 5 190 + 5
40 – 20 k 85 + 5 95 + 5 100 + 5 105 + 5 55 + 5 60 + 5
20 k – 50 k 300 + 5 330 + 5 350 + 5 370 + 5 90 + 5 100 + 5
50 k – 100 k 700 + 7 750 + 7 800 + 7 850 + 7 210 + 7 230 + 7
100 k – 300 k 900 + 12 1000 + 12 1050 + 12 1100 + 12 380 + 12 420 + 12
300 k – 500 k 1300 + 25 1500 + 25 1600 + 25 1700 + 25 900 + 25 1000 + 25
500 k – 1 M 2800 + 25 3100 + 25 3300 + 25 3400 + 25 2900 + 25 3200 + 25
220 mV 100 nV 10 – 20 400 + 13 500 + 13 530 + 13 550 + 13 400 + 13 500 + 13
20 – 40 170 + 8 190 + 8 200 + 8 210 + 8 170 + 8 190 + 8
40 – 20 k 85 + 8 95 + 8 100 + 8 105 + 8 55 + 8 60 + 8
20 k – 50 k 250 + 8 280 + 8 300 + 8 320 + 8 90 + 8 100 + 8
50 k – 100 k 700 + 25 750 + 25 800 + 25 850 + 25 210 + 25 230 + 25
100 k – 300 k 900 + 25 1000 + 25 1050 + 25 1100 + 25 380 + 25 420 + 25
300 k – 500 k 1300 + 35 1500 + 35 1600 + 35 1700 + 35 900 + 35 1000 + 35
500 k – 1 M 2800 + 80 3100 + 80 3300 + 80 3400 + 80 2900 + 80 3200 + 80
2.2 V 1 mV 10 – 20 400 + 80 450 + 80 480 + 80 500 + 80 400 + 80 450 + 80
20 – 40 130 + 25 140 + 25 150 + 25 160 + 25 130 + 25 140 + 25
40 – 20 k 60 + 6 65 + 6 70 + 6 75 + 6 35 + 6 40 + 6
20 k – 50 k 105 + 16 110 + 16 115 + 16 120 + 16 85 + 16 95 + 16
50 k – 100 k 190 + 70 210 + 70 230 + 70 250 + 70 170 + 70 190 + 70
100 k – 300 k 350 + 130 390 + 130 420 + 130 430 + 130 340 + 130 380 + 130
300 k – 500 k 850 + 350 950 + 350 1000 + 350 1050 + 350 850 + 350 950 + 350
500 k – 1 M 1700 + 850 1900 + 850 2100 + 850 2200 + 850 1700 + 850 1900 + 850
22 V 10 mV 10 – 20 400 + 800 450 + 800 480 + 800 500 + 800 400 + 800 450 + 800
20 – 40 130 + 250 140 + 250 150 + 250 160 + 250 130 + 250 140 + 250
40 – 20 k 60 + 60 65 + 60 70 + 60 75 + 60 35 + 60 40 + 60
20 k – 50 k 105 + 160 110 + 160 115 + 160 120 + 160 85 + 160 95 + 160
50 k – 100 k 190 + 350 210 + 350 230 + 350 250 + 350 170 + 350 190 + 350
100 k – 300 k 400 + 1500 450 + 1500 470 + 1500 500 + 1500 400 + 1500 450 + 1500
300 k – 500 k 1050 + 4300 1150 + 4300 1200 + 4300 1250 + 4300 1000 + 4300 1100 + 4300
500 k – 1 M 2300 + 8500 2500 + 8500 2600 + 8500 2700 + 8500 2200 + 8500 2400 + 8500
± (ppm output + mV)
[2]
220 V 100 mV 10 – 20 400 + 8 450 + 8 480 + 8 500 + 8 400 + 8 450 + 8
20 – 40 130 + 2.5 140 + 2.5 150 + 2.5 160 + 2.5 130 + 2.5 140 + 2.5
40 – 20 k 65 + 0.8 70 + 0.8 75 + 0.8 80 + 0.8 40 + 0.8 45 + 0.8
20 k – 50 k 170 + 3.5 190 + 3.5 210 + 3.5 220 + 3.5 85 + 3.5 95 + 3.5
50 k – 100 k 400 + 8 450 + 8 480 + 8 500 + 8 270 + 8 300 + 8
100 k – 300 k 1300 + 90 1400 + 90 1450 + 90 1500 + 90 1200 + 90 1300 + 90
300 k – 500 k 4300 + 90 4500 + 90 4600 + 90 4700 + 90 4200 + 90 4500 + 90
500 k – 1 M 10,500 + 190 11,000 + 190 11,300 + 190 11,500 + 190 10,500 + 190 11,000 + 190
[1]
1100 V 1 mV 15 – 50 340 + 16 360 + 16 380 + 16 400 + 16 340 + 16 360 + 16
50 – 1 k 65 + 3.5 70 + 3.5 75 + 3.5 80 + 3.5 45 + 3.5 50 + 3.5

1-24
 Introduction and Specifications
Electrical Specifications 1
5725A Amplifier:
1100 V 1 mV 40 – 1 k 75 + 4 80 + 4 85 + 4 90 + 4 50 + 4 55 + 4
1 k – 20 k 105 + 6 125 + 6 135 + 6 165 + 6 85 + 6 105 + 6
20 k – 30 k 230 + 11 360 + 11 440 + 11 600 + 11 160 + 11 320 + 11
750 V 30 k – 50 k 230 + 11 360 + 11 440 + 11 600 + 11 160 + 11 320 + 11
50 k – 100 k 600 + 45 1300 + 45 1600 + 45 2300 + 45 380 + 45 1200 + 45
Notes:
1. Maximum output 250 V from 15-50 Hz.
2. See Volt-Hertz capability in Figure A.

1-25
5700A/5720A Series II
Operators Manual

AC Voltage Secondary Performance Specifications and Operating Characteristics

Temperature Coefficient Maximum
Stability
[1] 0 – 10 °C Distortion
Frequency ± 1 °C Output Impedance
Range 10 – 40 °C and Bandwidth
(Hz) 24 Hours (Ω)
40 – 50 °C 10 Hz-10 MHz
± µV ±µV / °C ± (% output + µV)
2.2 mV 10 – 20 5 0.05 0.05 50 0.05 + 10
20 – 40 5 0.05 0.05 0.035 + 10
40 – 20 k 2 0.05 0.05 0.035 + 10
20 k – 50 k 2 0.1 0.1 0.035 + 10
50 k – 100 k 3 0.2 0.2 0.035 + 30
100 k – 300 k 3 0.3 0.3 0.3 + 30
300 k – 500 k 5 0.4 0.4 0.3 + 30
500 k – 1 M 5 0.5 0.5 2 + 50
22 mV 10 – 20 5 0.2 0.3 50 0.05 + 11
20 – 40 5 0.2 0.3 0.035 + 11
40 – 20 k 2 0.2 0.3 0.035 + 11
20 k – 50 k 2 0.4 0.5 0.035 + 11
50 k – 100 k 3 0.5 0.5 0.035 + 30
100 k – 300 k 5 0.6 0.6 0.3 + 30
300 k – 500 k 10 1 1 0.3 + 30
500 k – 1 M 15 1 1 2 + 30
± (ppm output ± (ppm output µV) / °C
+ µV)
220 mV 10 – 20 150 + 20 2+1 2+1 50 0.05 + 16
20 – 40 80 + 15 2+1 2+1 0.035 + 16
40 – 20 k 12 + 2 2+1 2+1 0.035 + 16
20 k – 50 k 10 + 2 15 + 2 15 + 2 0.035 + 16
50 k – 100 k 10 + 2 15 + 4 15 + 4 0.035 + 30
100 k – 300 k 20 + 4 80 + 5 80 + 5 0.3 + 30
300 k – 500 k 100 + 10 80 + 5 80 + 5 0.3 + 30
500 k – 1 M 200 + 20 80 + 5 80 + 5 1 + 30
Load Regulation
±(ppm output+ µV)
2.2 V 10 – 20 150 + 20 50 + 10 50 + 10 10 + 2 0.05 + 80
20 – 40 80 + 15 15 + 5 15 + 5 10 + 2 0.035 + 80
40 – 20 k 12 + 4 2+1 5+2 10 + 4 0.035 + 80
20 k – 50 k 15 + 5 10 + 2 15 + 4 30 + 10 0.035 + 80
50 k – 100 k 15 + 5 10 + 4 20 + 4 120 + 16 0.035 + 110
100 k – 300 k 30 + 10 80 + 15 80 + 15 300 ppm 0.3 + 110
300 k – 500 k 70 + 20 80 + 40 80 + 40 600 ppm 0.5 + 110
500 k – 1 M 150 + 50 80 + 100 80 + 100 1200 ppm 1 + 110
22 V 10 – 20 150 + 20 50 + 100 50 + 100 10 + 20 0.05 + 700
20 – 40 80 + 15 15 + 30 15 + 40 10 + 20 0.035 + 700
40 – 20 k 12 + 8 2 + 10 4 + 15 10 + 30 0.035 + 700
20 k – 50 k 15 + 10 10 + 20 20 + 20 30 + 50 0.035 + 700
50 k – 100 k 15 + 10 10 + 40 20 + 40 80 + 80 0.05 + 800
100 k – 300 k 30 + 15 80 + 150 80 + 150 100 + 700 0.3 + 800
300 k – 500 k 70 + 100 80 + 300 80 + 300 200 + 1100 0.3 + 800
500 k – 1 M 150 + 100 80 + 500 80 + 500 600 + 3000 2 + 800
220 V 10 – 20 150 + 200 50 + 1000 50 + 1000 10 + 200 0.05 + 10,000
20 – 40 80 + 150 15 + 300 15 + 300 10 + 200 0.05 + 10,000
40 – 20 k 12 + 80 2 + 80 4 + 80 10 + 300 0.05 + 10,000
20 k – 50 k 15 + 100 10 + 100 20 + 100 30 + .600 0.05 + 10,000
50 k – 100 k 15 + 100 10 + 500 20 + 500 80 + 3,000 0.2 + 50,000
100 k – 300 k 30 + 400 80 + 600 80 + 600 250 + 25,000 1.5 + 50,000
300 k – 500 k 100 + 10,000 80 + 800 80 + 800 500 + 50,000 1.5 + 50,000
500 k – 1 M 200 + 20,000 80 + 1000 80 + 1000 1000 + 110,000 3.5 + 100,000
±(ppm output + ±(ppm output) / °C ±(ppm output + ±(% output)
mV) mV)
1100 V 15 – 50 150 + 0.5 50 50 10 + 2 0.15
50 – 1 k 20 + 0.5 2 5 10 + 1 0.07

1-26
 Introduction and Specifications
Electrical Specifications 1
5725A Amplifier:
Temperature Coefficient Distortion
Stability
Adder Bandwidth
[1] [2]
Range Frequency ±1 °C Load Regulation
0 – 10 °C and 10 Hz -10 MHz
(Hz) 24 Hours 10 – 40 °C
40 – 50 °C ±(% output)
±(ppm output + mV) ±(ppm output) / °C ±(ppm output + mV) 150 pF 1000 pF
1100 V 40 – 1 k 10 + .5 5 5 10 + 1 0.10 0.10
1 k – 20 k 15 + 2 5 5 90 + 6 0.10 0.15
20 k – 50 k 40 + 2 10 10 275 + 11 0.30 0.30
50 k – 100 k 130 + 2 30 30 500 + 30 0.40 0.40
Notes:
1. Stability specifications are included in Absolute Uncertainty values for the primary specifications.
2. The 5725A will drive up to 1000 pF of load capacitance. Uncertainty specifications include loads to 300 pF and 150 pF as
shown under “Load Limits.” For capacitances up to the maximum of 1000 pF, add “Load Regulation.”

Voltage Range Maximum Current Limits Load Limits

[2]
2.2 V
22 V 50 mA, 0 °C-40 °C >50 Ω,
220 V 20 mA, 40 °C-50 °C 1000 pF
1100 V 6 mA 600 pF
5725A Amplifier:
[1]
40 Hz-5 kHz 50 mA 1000 pF
1100 V 5 kHz-30 kHz 70 mA 300 pF
[3]
30 kHz-100 kHz 70 mA 150 pF
Notes:
1. The 5725A will drive up to 1000 pF of load capacitance. Uncertainty specifications include loads to 300 pF and 150 pF as
shown under “Load Limits.” For capacitances up to the maximum of 1000 pF, add “Load Regulation.”
2. 2.2 V Range, 100 kHz-1.2 MHz only: uncertainty specifications cover loads to 10 mA or 1000 pF. For higher loads, load
regulation is added.
3. Applies from 0 °C to 40 °C.

Output Display Formats ....................................... Voltage or dBm, dBm reference 600 Ω.

Minimum Output ................................................... 10 % on each range
External Sense ...................................................... Selectable for 2.2 V, 22 V, 220 V, and 1100 V ranges; 5700A/5720A
<100 kHz, 5725A <30 kHz

Settling Time to Full Accuracy

Frequency (Hz) Settling Time (seconds)
<20 7
120-120 k 5
>120 k 2
Notes:
Plus 1 second for amplitude or frequency range change
Plus 2 seconds for 5700A/5720A 1100 V range
Plus 4 seconds for 5725A 1100 V range

1-27
5700A/5720A Series II
Operators Manual

Overshoot .............................................................. <10 %

Common Mode Rejection ....................................... 140 dB, DC to 400 Hz
Frequency
Ranges (Hz)........................................................ 10.000 – 119.99
0.1200 k – 1.1999 k
1.200 k – 11.999 k
12.00 k – 119.99 k
120.0 k – 1.1999 M
Uncertainty.......................................................... ±0.01 %
Resolution ........................................................... 11.999 counts
Phase Lock (Selectable Rear Panel BNC Input)
Phase Uncertainty (except 1100 V range) .......... >30 Hz: ±1 ° + 0.05 °/kHz), <30 Hz: ±3 °
Input Voltage....................................................... 1 V to 10 V rms sine wave (do not exceed 1 V for mV ranges)
Frequency Range ............................................... 10 Hz to 1.1999 MHz
Lock Range......................................................... ±2 % of frequency
Lock-In Time ....................................................... Larger of 10/frequency or 10 msec
Phase Reference (Selectable Rear Panel BNC Output)
Range ................................................................. ±180 °
Phase Uncertainty (except 1100 V range) .......... ±1 ° at quadrature points (0 °, ±90 °, ±180 °) elsewhere ±2 °
Stability ............................................................... ±0.1 °
Resolution ........................................................... 1 °
Output Level........................................................ 2.5 V rms ±0.2 V
Frequency Range ............................................... 50 kHz to 1 kHz, usable 10 Hz to 1.1999 MHz

10000

5700A/5720A
40 Hz 30 Hz
5725A
1000
Voltage

7
2.2 x 10 V-Hz
15 Hz
100

Volt-Hertz Capability
10
5700A-03
3.5 V

0
10 Hz 50 Hz 1 kHz 100 kHz 1 MHz 30 MHz
Frequency
Figure A.

1-28
 Introduction and Specifications
Electrical Specifications 1
1-31. Resistance Specifications

5720A Series II Resistance Specifications

Absolute Uncertainty of Characterized Value Relative Uncertainty
[1]
Nominal Value ±5 °C from calibration temperature ±1 °C
(Ω) 24 Hours 90 Days 180 Days 1 Year 24 Hours 90 Days
±ppm
99 % Confidence Level
0 50 µΩ 50 µΩ 50 µΩ 50 µΩ 50 µΩ 50 µΩ
1 85 95 100 110 32 40
1.9 85 95 100 110 25 33
10 23 25 26 27 5 8
19 23 25 26 27 4 7
100 10 11 11.5 12 2 4
190 10 11 11.5 12 2 4
1k 8 9 9.5 10 2 3
1.9 k 8 9 9.5 10 2 3
10 k 8 9 9.5 10 2 3
19 k 9 9 9.5 10 2 3
100 k 9 11 12 13 2 3
190 k 9 11 12 13 2 3
1M 16 18 20 23 2.5 5
1.9 M 1 19 21 24 3 6
10 M 33 37 40 46 10 14
19 M 43 47 50 55 20 24
100 M 100 110 115 120 50 60
95 % Confidence Level
0 40 µΩ 40 µΩ 40 µΩ 40 µΩ 40 µΩ 40 µΩ
1 70 80 85 95 27 35
1.9 70 80 85 95 20 26
10 20 21 22 23 4 7
19 20 21 22 23 3.5 6
100 8 9 9.5 10 1.6 3.5
190 8 9 9.5 10 1.6 3.5
1k 6.5 7.5 8 8.5 1.6 2.5
1.9 k 6.5 7.5 8 8.5 1.6 2.5
10 k 6.5 7.5 8 8.5 1.6 2.5
19 k 7.5 7.5 8 8.5 1.6 2.5
100 k 7.5 9 10 11 1.6 2.5
190 k 7.5 9 10 11 1.6 2.5
1M 13 15 17 20 2 4
1.9 M 14 16 18 21 2.5 4
10 M 27 31 34 40 8 12
19 M 35 39 42 47 16 20
100 M 85 95 100 100 40 50
Note:
1. Specifications apply to displayed value. 4-wire connections, except 100 MΩ.

1-29
5700A/5720A Series II
Operators Manual

5700A Series II Resistance Specifications

Absolute Uncertainty of Characterized Value Relative Uncertainty
[1]
Nominal Value ±5 °C from calibration temperature ±1 °C
(Ω) 24 Hours 90 Days 180 Days 1 Year 24 Hours 90 Days
±ppm
99 % Confidence Level
0 50 µΩ 50 µΩ 50 µΩ 50 µΩ 50 µΩ 50 µΩ
1 85 95 100 110 32 40
1.9 85 95 100 110 25 33
10 26 28 30 33 5 8
19 24 26 28 31 4 7
100 15 17 18 20 2 4
190 15 17 18 20 2 4
1k 11 12 13 15 2 3.5
1.9 k 11 12 13 15 2 3.5
10 k 9 11 12 14 2 3.5
19 k 9 11 12 14 2 3.5
100 k 11 13 14 16 2 3.5
190 k 11 13 14 16 2 3.5
1M 16 18 20 23 2.5 5
1.9 M 17 19 21 24 3.5 6
10 M 33 37 40 46 10 14
19 M 43 47 50 55 20 24
100 M 110 120 125 130 50 60
95 % Confidence Level
0 50 µΩ 50 µΩ 50 µΩ 50 µΩ 50 µΩ 50 µΩ
1 70 80 85 95 32 40
1.9 70 80 85 95 25 33
10 21 23 27 28 5 8
19 20 22 24 27 4 7
100 13 14 15 17 2 4
190 13 14 15 17 2 4
1k 9 10 11 13 2 3.5
1.9 k 9 10 11 13 2 3.5
10 k 7.5 9.5 10.5 12 2 3.5
19 k 7.5 9.5 10.5 12 2 3.5
100 k 9 11 12 14 2 3.5
190 k 9 11 12 14 2 3.5
1M 13 15 17 20 2.5 5
1.9 M 14 16 18 21 3 6
10 M 27 31 34 40 10 14
19 M 35 39 42 47 20 24
100 M 90 100 105 110 50 60
Note:
1. Specifications apply to displayed value. 4-wire connections, except 100 MΩ.

1-30
 Introduction and Specifications
Electrical Specifications 1
Resistance Secondary Performance Specifications and Operating Characteristics
Maximum Two-Wire Adder
Temperature Coefficient Difference Active
Stability Adder
[2] Maximum of Compensation
[4]
Full Spec Load Peak
Nominal [1] [3] Characterized
±1 °C Range
Value Current to Nominal
24 Hours 0 – 10 °C IL – IU
(Ω) IMAX Lead Resistance
10 – 40 °C and (mA) Value
40 – 50 °C (mA)
0.1 Ω 1Ω
±ppm
±ppm ±ppm/°C ±mΩ
0    8 – 500 500  4µV 4µV
2 + Im 4 + Im

1 32 4 5 8 – 100 700 500 4µV 4µV

2 + Im 4 + Im

1.9 25 6 7 8 – 100 500 500 4µV 4µV

2 + Im 4 + Im

10 5 2 3 8 – 11 220 300 4µV 4µV

2 + Im 4 + Im

19 4 2 3 8 – 11 160 300 4µV 4µV

2 + Im 4 + Im

100 2 2 3 8 – 11 70 150 4µV 4µV

2 + Im 4 + Im

190 2 2 3 8 – 11 50 150 4µV 4µV

2 + Im 4 + Im

1k 2 2 3 1–2 22 150 10 15
1.9 k 2 2 3 1 – 1.5 16 150 10 15
10 k 2 2 3 100 – 500 µA 7 150 50 60
19 k 2 2 3 50 – 250 µA 5 150 100 120
100 k 2 2 3 10 – 100 µA 1 150 Im= Current produced
by Ohmmeter (A)
190 k 2 2 3 5 – 50 µA 500 µA 150
1M 2.5 2.5 6 5 – 20 µA 100 µA 200
1.9 M 3.5 3 10 2.5 – 10 µA 50 µA 200
10 M 10 5 20 0.5 – 2 µA 10 µA 300
19 M 20 8 40 0.25 – 1 µA 5 µA 300
100 M 50 12 100 50 – 200 nA 1 µA 500
Notes:
1. Stability specifications are included in the Absolute Uncertainty values in the primary specification tables.
2. Temperature coefficient is an adder to uncertainty specifications that does not apply unless operated more than 5 °C from calibration
temperature, or calibrated outside the range 19 °C to 24 °C. Two examples:
- Calibrate at 20 °C: Temperature coefficient adder is not required unless operated below 15 °C or above 25 °C.
- Calibrate at 26 °C: Add 2 °C temperature coefficient adder. Additional temperature coefficient adder is not required unless operated
below 21 °C or above 31 °C.
3. Refer to current derating factors table for loads outside of this range.
4. Active two-wire compensation may be selected for values less than 100 kΩ, with either the front panel or the meter input terminals as
reference plane. Active compensation is limited to 11 mA load, and to 2 V burden. Two-wire compensation can be used only with Ω-
meters that source continuous (not pulsed) dc current.

1-31
5700A/5720A Series II
Operators Manual

Current Derating Factors

Value of Derating Factor K for Over or Under Current
Nominal Value
Two-Wire Comp Four-Wire Four-Wire
(Ω) [1] [1] [2]
I < IL I < IL IU < I < IMAX

SHORT 4.4 0.3 

-5
1 4.4 300 4 x10
-4
1.9 4.4 160 1.5 x 10
-3
10 4.4 30 1.6 x 10
-3
19 4.4 16 3 x 10
-2
100 4.4 3.5 1 x 10
-2
190 4.4 2.5 1.9 x 10

1k 4.4 0.4 0.1

1.9 k 4.4 0.4 0.19

10 k 5000 50 2.0

19 k 5000 50 3.8
-5
100 k  7.5 2 x 10
-5
190 k  4.0 3.8 x 10
-4
1M  1.0 1.5 x 10
-4
1.9 M  0.53 2.9 x 10
-3
10 M  0.2 1 x 10
-3
19 M  0.53 1.9 x 10

100 M 0.1 
Notes:
0 For I < I L, errors occur due to thermally generated voltages within the 5720A. Use the following equation to determine the error,
and add this error to the corresponding uncertainty or stability specification.
Error = K(I L – I)/( I L x I)
Where: Error is in mΩ for all two-wire comp values and four-wire short, and in ppm for the remaining four-wire values.
K is the constant from the above table;
I and IL are expressed in mA for short to 1.9 kΩ;
I and IL are expressed inµA for 10 kΩ to 100 MΩ
2. For IU < I < IMAX errors occur due to self-heating of the resistors in the calibrator. Use the following equation to determine the
error in ppm and add this error to the corresponding uncertainty or stability specification.
Error in ppm = K(I2-IU2)
Where: K is the constant from the above table;
I and IU are expressed in mA for short to 19 kΩ;
I and IU are expressed in µA for 100 kΩ to 100 MΩ

1-32
 Introduction and Specifications
Electrical Specifications 1
1-32. DC Current Specifications

5720A Series II DC Current Specifications

Absolute Uncertainty
[2] Relative Uncertainty ±1 °C
Resolution ±5 °C from calibration temperature
Range
24 Hours 90 Days 180 Days 1 Year 24 Hours 90 Days
nA ± (ppm output + nA)
99 % Confidence Level
220 µA 0 40 + 7 42 + 7 45 + 7 50 + 7 24 + 2 26 + 2
2.2 mA 1 30 + 8 35 + 8 37 + 8 40 + 8 24 + 5 26 + 5
22 mA 10 30 + 50 35 + 50 37 + 50 40 + 50 24 + 50 26 + 50
µA ± (ppm output + µA)
[1]
220 mA 0.1 40 + 0.8 45 + 0.8 47 + 0.8 50 + 0.8 26 + 0.3 30 + 0.3
[1]
2.2 A 1 60 + 15 70 + 15 80 + 15 90 + 15 40 + 7 45 + 7
5725A Amplifier:
11 A 10 330 + 470 340 + 480 350 + 480 360 + 480 100 + 130 110 + 130
95 % Confidence Level
nA ± (ppm output + nA)
220 µA 0.1 32 + 6 35 + 6 37 + 6 40 + 6 20 + 1.6 22 + 1.6
2.2 mA 1 25 + 7 30 + 7 33 + 7 35 + 7 20 + 4 22 + 4
22 mA 10 25 + 40 30 + 40 33 + 40 35 + 40 20 + 40 22 + 40
µA ± (ppm output + µA)
[1]
220 mA 0.1 35 + 0.7 40 + 0.7 42 + 0.7 45 + 0.7 22 + 0.25 25 + 0.25
[1]
2.2 A 1 50 + 12 60 + 12 70 + 12 80 + 12 32 + 6 40 + 6
5725A Amplifier:
11 A 10 330 + 470 340 + 480 350 + 480 360 + 480 100 + 130 110 + 130
Note:
Maximum output from the calibrator’s terminals is 2.2 A. Uncertainty specifications for 220 mA and 2.2 mA ranges are increased
by a factor of 1.3 when supplied through 5725A terminals.
Specifications are otherwise identical for all output locations.
1. Add to uncertainty specifications:
±200 x I2 ppm for >100 mA on 220 mA range
±10 x I2 ppm for >1 A on 2.2 A range
2. For fields strengths >0.4 V/m but ≤3 V/m, add 1 % of range.

1-33
5700A/5720A Series II
Operators Manual

5700A Series II DC Current Specifications

Absolute Uncertainty
[2] Relative Uncertainty ±1 °C
Resolution ±5 °C from calibration temperature
Range
24 Hours 90 Days 180 Days 1 Year 24 Hours 90 Days
nA ± (ppm output + nA)
99 % Confidence Level
220 µA 0.1 45 + 10 50 + 10 55 + 10 60 + 10 24 + 2 26 + 2
2.2 mA 1 45 + 10 50 + 10 55 + 10 60 + 10 24 + 5 26 + 5
22 mA 10 45 + 100 50 + 100 55 + 100 60 + 100 24 + 50 26 + 50
µA ± (ppm output + µA)
[1]
220 mA 0.1 55 + 1 60 + 65 + 1 70 + 1 26 + 0.3 30 + 0.3
[1]
2.2 A 1 75 + 30 80 + 30 90 + 30 95 + 30 40 + 7 45 + 7
5725A Amplifier:
11 A 10 330 + 470 340 + 480 350 + 480 360 + 480 100 + 130 110 + 130
95 % Confidence Level
nA ± (ppm output + nA)
220 µA 0.1 35 + 8 40 + 8 45 + 8 50 + 8 20 + 1.6 22 + 1.6
2.2 mA 1 35 + 8 40 + 8 45 + 8 50 + 8 20 + 4 22 + 4
22 mA 10 35 + 80 40 + 80 45 + 80 50 + 80 20 + 40 22 + 40
µA ± (ppm output + µA)
[1]
220 mA 0.1 45 + 0.8 50 + 0.8 55 + 0.8 60 + 0.8 22 + 0.25 25 + 0.25
[1]
2.2 A 1 60 + 25 65 + 25 75 + 25 80 + 25 35 + 6 40 + 6
5725A Amplifier:
11 A 10 330 + 470 340 + 480 350 + 480 360 + 480 100 + 130 110 + 130
Note:
Maximum output from the calibrator’s terminals is 2.2 A. Uncertainty specifications for 220 mA and 2.2 mA ranges are increased
by a factor of 1.3 when supplied through 5725A terminals.
Specifications are otherwise identical for all output locations.
1. Add to uncertainty specifications:
±200 x I2 ppm for >100 mA on 220 mA range
±10 x I2 ppm for >1 A on 2.2 A range
2. For fields strengths >0.4 V/m but ≤3 V/m, add 1 % of range.

1-34
 Introduction and Specifications
Electrical Specifications 1
DC Current Secondary Performance Specifications and Operating Characteristics
Temperature Noise
[2]
Coefficient
Stability
[1] Burden Maximum Bandwidth Bandwidth
±1 °C 0 – 10 °C
Compliance Voltage Load for Full 0.1-10 Hz 10 Hz-10
Range 24 Hours 10 – 40 °C and Adder
[3]
Accuracy
[4]
Limits kHz
40 – 50 °C
(±nA/V) (Ω) pk-pk RMS
± (ppm output + ppm output
± (ppm output + nA) / °C nA
nA) + nA
220 µA 5+1 1 + 0.40 3+1 10 0.2 20k 6 + .9 10
2.2 mA 5+5 1+2 3 + 10 10 0.2 2k 6+5 10
22 mA 5 + 50 1 + 20 3 + 100 10 10 200 6 + 50 50
220 mA 8 + 300 1 + 200 3 + 1 µA 10 100 20 9 + 300 500
[5]
2.2 A 9 + 7 µA 1 + 2.5 µA 3 + 10 µA 3 2 µA 2 12 + 1.5 µA 20 µA
± (ppm output ppm output
5725A ± (ppm output + µA) / °C µA
+ µA) + µA
11 A 25 + 100 20 + 75 30 + 120 4 0 4 15 + 70 175
Notes:
Maximum output from the calibrator’s terminals is 2.2 A. Uncertainty specifications for 220 mA and 2.2 mA ranges are increased by a factor of
1.3 when supplied through 5725A terminals.
1. Stability specifications are included in the Absolute Uncertainty values for the primary specifications.
2. Temperature coefficient is an adder to uncertainty specifications. It does not apply unless operating more than ±5 °C from calibration
temperature.
3. Burden voltage adder is an adder to uncertainty specifications that does not apply unless burden voltage is greater than 0.5 V.
0.1 x actual load
4. For higher loads, multiply uncertainty specification by: 1+
maximum load for full accuracy

5. The calibrator’s compliance limit is 2 V for outputs from 1 A to 2.2 A. 5725A Amplifier may be used in range-lock mode down to 0 A.

Minimum Output: ................................................. 0 for all ranges, including 5725A.

Settling Time: ....................................................... 1 second for mA and mA ranges; 3 seconds for 2.2 A range; 6 seconds
for 11 range; + 1 second for range or polarity change
Overshoot: ............................................................ <5 %

1-35
5700A/5720A Series II
Operators Manual

1-33. AC Current Specifications

5720A Series II AC Current Specifications: 99 % Confidence Level

Absolute Uncertainty Relative Uncertainty
[1]
Frequency ±5 °C from calibration temperature ±1 °C
Range Resolution
(Hz) 24 Hours 90 Days 180 Days 1 Year 24 Hours 90 Days
± (ppm output + nA)
10 – 20 260 + 20 280 + 20 290 + 20 300 + 20 260 + 20 280 + 20
20 – 40 170 + 12 180 + 12 190 + 12 200 + 12 130 + 12 150 + 12
220 µA 1 nA 40 – 1 k 120 + 10 130 + 10 135 + 10 140 + 10 100 + 10 110 + 10
1k – 5 k 300 + 15 320 + 15 340 + 15 350 + 15 250 + 15 280 + 15
5k – 10 k 1000 + 80 1100 + 80 1200 + 80 1300 + 80 900 + 80 1000 + 80
10 – 20 260 + 50 280 + 50 290 + 50 300 + 50 260 + 50 280 + 50
20 – 40 170 + 40 180 + 40 190 + 40 200 + 40 130 + 40 150 + 40
2.2 mA 10 nA 40 – 1 k 120 + 40 130 + 40 135 + 40 140 + 40 100 + 40 110 + 40
1k – 5 k 210 + 130 220 + 130 230 + 130 240 + 130 250 + 130 280 + 130
5k – 10 k 1000 + 800 1100 + 800 1200 + 800 1300 + 800 900 + 800 1000 + 800
10 – 20 260 + 500 280 + 500 290 + 500 300 + 500 260 + 500 280 + 500
20 – 40 170 + 400 180 + 400 190 + 400 200 + 400 130 + 400 150 + 400
22 mA 100 nA 40 – 1 k 120 + 400 130 + 400 135 + 400 140 + 400 100 + 400 110 + 400
1k – 5 k 210 + 700 220 + 700 230 + 700 240 + 700 250 + 700 280 + 700
5k – 10 k 1000 + 6000 1100 + 6000 1200 + 6000 1300 + 6000 900 + 6000 1000 + 6000
± (ppm output + µA)
10 – 20 260 + 5 280 + 5 290 + 5 300 + 5 260 + 5 280 + 5
20 – 40 170 + 4 180 + 4 190 + 4 200 + 4 130 + 4 150 + 4
220 mA 1 µA 40 – 1 k 120 + 3 130 + 3 135 + 3 140 + 3 100 + 3 110 + 3
1k – 5 k 210 + 4 220 + 4 230 + 4 240 + 4 250 + 4 280 + 4
5k – 10 k 1000 + 12 1100 + 12 1200 + 12 1300 + 12 900 + 12 1000 + 12
20 – 1 k 290 + 40 300 + 40 310 + 40 320 + 40 300 + 40 350 + 40
2.2 A 10 µA 1k–5k 440 + 100 460 + 100 480 + 100 500 + 100 500 + 100 520 + 100
5 k – 10 k 6000 + 200 7000 + 200 7500 + 200 8000 + 200 6000 + 200 7000 + 200
5725A Amplifier:
40 – 1 k 370 + 170 400 + 170 440 + 170 460 + 170 300 + 170 330 + 170
11 A 100 µA 1k–5k 800 + 380 850 + 380 900 + 380 950 + 380 700 + 380 800 + 380
5 k – 10 k 3000 + 750 3300 + 750 3500 + 750 3600 + 750 2800 + 750 3200 + 750
Note:
Maximum output from the calibrator’s terminals is 2.2 A. Uncertainty specifications for 220 µA and 2.2 mA ranges are increased by a factor
of 1.3 plus 2 µA when supplied through 5725A terminals. For the 5720A 220 µA range, 1 kHz through 5 kHz and 5 kHz through 10 kHz,
when the output is coming from the AUX current terminal, use the 5700A Absolute Uncertainty Specifications. Specifications are otherwise
identical for all output locations.
1. For fields strengths >0.4 V/m but ≤3 V/m, add 1 % of range.

1-36
 Introduction and Specifications
Electrical Specifications 1
5720A Series II AC Current Specifications: 95% Confidence Level
Absolute Uncertainty Relative Uncertainty
[1]
Frequency ±5 °C from calibration temperature ±1 °C
Range Resolution
(Hz) 24 Hours 90 Days 180 Days 1 Year 24 Hours 90 Days
± (ppm output + nA)
10 – 20 210 + 16 230 + 16 240 + 16 250 + 16 210 + 16 230 + 16
20 – 40 130 + 10 140 + 10 150 + 10 160 + 10 110 + 10 130 + 10
220 µA 1 nA 40 – 1 k 100 + 8 110 + 8 115 + 8 120 + 8 80 + 8 90 + 8
1k – 5 k 240 + 12 250 + 12 270 + 12 280 + 12 200 + 12 230 + 12
5k – 10 k 800 + 65 900 + 65 1000 + 65 1100 + 65 700 + 65 800 + 65
10 – 20 210 + 40 230 + 40 240 + 40 250 + 40 210 + 40 230 + 40
20 – 40 140 + 35 140 + 35 150 + 35 160 + 35 110 + 35 130 + 35
2.2 mA 10 nA 40 – 1 k 100 + 35 110 + 35 115 + 35 120 + 35 80 + 35 90 + 35
1k – 5 k 170 + 110 180 + 110 190 + 110 200 + 110 200 + 110 230 + 110
5k – 10 k 800 + 650 900 + 650 1000 + 650 1100 + 650 700 + 650 800 + 650
10 – 20 210 + 400 230 + 400 240 + 400 250 + 400 210 + 400 230 + 400
20 – 40 130 + 350 140 + 350 150 + 350 160 + 350 110 + 350 130 + 350
22 mA 100 nA 40 – 1 k 100 + 350 110 + 350 115 + 350 120 + 350 80 + 350 90 + 350
1k – 5 k 170 + 550 180 + 550 190 + 550 200 + 550 200 + 550 230 + 550
5k – 10 k 800 + 5000 900 + 5000 1000 + 5000 1100 + 5000 700 + 5000 800 + 5000
± (ppm output + µA)
10 – 20 210 + 4 230 + 4 240 + 4 250 + 4 210 + 4 230 + 4
20 – 40 130 + 3.5 140 + 3.5 150 + 3.5 160 + 3.5 110 + 3.5 130 + 3.5
220 mA 1 µA 40 – 1 k 100 + 2.5 110 + 2.5 115 + 2.5 120 + 2.5 80 + 2.5 90 + 2.5
1k – 5 k 170 + 3.5 180 + 3.5 190 + 3.5 200 + 3.5 200 + 3.5 230 + 3.5
5k – 10 k 800 + 10 900 + 10 1000 + 10 1100 + 10 700 + 10 800 + 10
20 – 1 k 230 + 35 240 + 35 250 + 35 260 + 35 250 + 35 300 + 35
2.2 A 10 µA 1k–5k 350 + 80 390 + 80 420 + 80 450 + 80 400 + 80 440 + 80
5 k – 10 k 5000 + 160 6000 + 160 6500 + 160 7000 + 160 5000 + 160 6000 + 160
5725A Amplifier:
40 – 1 k 370 + 170 400 + 170 440 + 170 460 + 170 300 + 170 330 + 170
11 A 100 µA 1k–5k 800 + 380 850 + 380 900 + 380 950 + 380 700 + 380 800 + 38
5 k – 10 k 3000 + 750 3300 + 750 3500 + 750 3600 + 750 2800 + 750 3200 + 750
Note:
Maximum output from the calibrator’s terminals is 2.2 A. Uncertainty specifications for 220 µA and 2.2 mA ranges are increased by 1.3
plus 2 µA when supplied through 5725A terminals. For the 5720A 220 µA range, 1 kHz through 5 kHz and 5 kHz through 10 kHz, when
the output is coming from the AUX current terminal, use the 5700A Absolute Uncertainty Specifications. Specifications are otherwise
identical for all output locations.
1. For fields strengths >0.4 V/m but ≤3 V/m, add 1 % of range.

1-37
5700A/5720A Series II
Operators Manual

5700A Series II AC Current Specifications: 99 % Confidence Level

Absolute Uncertainty Relative Uncertainty
[1]
Frequency( ±5 °C from calibration temperature ±1 °C
Range Resolution
Hz) 24 Hours 90 Days 180 Days 1 Year 24 Hours 90 Days
± (ppm output + nA)
10 – 20 650 + 30 700 + 30 750 + 30 800 + 30 450 + 30 500 + 30
20 – 40 350 + 25 380 + 25 410 + 25 420 + 25 270 + 25 300 + 25
220 µA 1 nA 40 – 1 k 120 + 20 140 + 20 150 + 20 160 + 20 110 + 20 120 + 20
1k – 5 k 500 + 50 600 + 50 650 + 50 700 + 50 450 + 50 500 + 50
5k – 10 k 1500 + 100 1600 + 100 1700 + 100 1800 + 100 1400 + 100 1500 + 100
10 – 20 650 + 50 700 + 50 750 + 50 800 + 50 450 + 50 500 + 50
20 – 40 350 + 40 380 + 40 410 + 40 420 + 40 270 + 40 300 + 40
2.2 mA 10 nA 40 – 1 k 120 + 40 140 + 40 150 + 40 160 + 40 110 + 40 120 + 40
1k – 5 k 500 + 500 600 + 500 650 + 500 700 + 500 450 + 500 500 + 500
5k – 10 k 1500 + 1000 1600 + 1000 1700 + 1000 1800 + 1000 1400 + 1000 1500 + 1000
10 – 20 650 + 500 700 + 500 750 + 500 800 + 500 450 + 500 500 + 500
20 – 40 350 + 400 380 + 400 410 + 400 420 + 400 270 + 400 300 + 400
40 – 1 k 120 + 400 140 + 400 150 + 400 160 + 400 110 + 400 120 + 400
22 mA 100 nA
1k – 5 k 500 + 5000 600 + 5000 650 + 5000 700 + 5000 450 + 5000 500 + 5000
5k – 10 k 1500 + 1600 + 10,000 1700 + 10,000 1800 + 10,000 1400 + 10,000 1500 +
10,000 10,000
± (ppm output + µA)
10 – 20 650 + 5 700 + 5 750 + 5 800 + 5 450 + 5 500 + 5
20 – 40 350 + 4 380 + 4 410 + 4 420 + 4 280 + 4 300 + 4
220 mA 1 µA 40 – 1 k 120 + 4 150 + 4 170 + 4 180 + 4 110 + 4 130 + 4
1k – 5 k 500 + 50 600 + 50 650 + 50 700 + 50 450 + 50 500 + 50
5k – 10 k 1500 + 100 1600 + 100 1700 + 100 1800 + 100 1400 + 100 1500 + 100
20 – 1 k 600 + 40 650 + 40 700 + 40 750 + 40 600 + 40 650 + 40
2.2 A 10 µA 1k–5k 700 + 100 750 + 100 800 + 100 850 + 100 650 + 100 750 + 100
5 k – 10 k 8000 + 200 9000 + 200 9500 + 200 10,000 + 200 7500 + 200 8500 + 200
5725A Amplifier:
40 – 1 k 370 + 170 400 + 170 440 + 170 460 + 170 300 + 170 330 + 170
11 A 100 µA 1k–5k 800 + 380 850 + 380 900 + 380 950 + 380 700 + 380 800 + 380
5 k – 10 k 3000 + 750 3300 + 750 3500 + 750 3600 + 750 2800 + 750 3200 + 750
Note:
Maximum output from the calibrator’s terminals is 2.2 A. Uncertainty specifications for 220 µA and 2.2 mA ranges are increased by a factor of
1.3 plus 2 µA when supplied through 5725A terminals. Specifications are otherwise identical for all output locations.
1. For field strengths >0.4 V/m but ≤3 V/m, add 1 % of range.

1-38
 Introduction and Specifications
Electrical Specifications 1
5700A Series II AC Current Specifications: 95 % Confidence Level
Absolute Uncertainty Relative Uncertainty
[1]
Frequency ±5 °C from calibration temperature ±1 °C
Range Resolution
(Hz) 24 Hours 90 Days 180 Days 1 Year 24 Hours 90 Days
± (ppm output + nA)
220 µA 1 nA 10 – 20 550 + 25 600 + 25 650 + 25 700 + 25 375 + 25 400 + 25
20 – 40 280 + 20 310 + 20 330 + 20 350 + 20 220 + 20 250 + 20
40 – 1 k 100 + 16 120 + 16 130 + 16 140 + 16 90 + 16 100 + 16
1k – 5 k 400 + 40 500 + 40 550 + 40 600 + 40 375 + 40 400 + 40
5k – 10 k 1300 + 80 1400 + 80 1500 + 80 1600 + 80 1200 + 80 1200 +80
2.2 mA 10 nA 10 – 20 550 + 40 600 + 40 650 + 40 700 + 40 375 + 40 400 + 40
20 – 40 280 + 35 310 + 35 330 + 35 350 + 35 220 + 35 250 + 35
40 – 1 k 100 + 35 120 + 35 130 + 35 140 + 35 090 + 35 100 + 35
1k – 5 k 400 + 400 500 + 400 550 + 400 600 + 400 375 + 400 400 + 400
5k – 10 k 1300 + 800 1400 + 800 1500 + 800 1600 + 800 1200 + 800 1200 + 800
22 mA 100 nA 10 – 20 550 + 400 600 + 400 650 + 400 700 + 400 375 + 400 400 + 400
20 – 40 280 + 350 310 + 350 330 + 350 350 + 350 220 + 350 250 + 350
40 – 1 k 100 + 350 120 + 350 130 + 350 140 + 350 090 + 350 100 + 350
1k – 5 k 400 + 4000 500 + 4000 550 + 4000 600 + 4000 375 + 4000 400 + 4000
5k – 10 k 1300 + 8000 1400 + 8000 1500 + 8000 1600 + 8000 1200 + 8000 1200 + 8000
± (ppm output + µA)
220 mA 1 µA 10 – 20 550 + 4 600 + 4 650 + 4 700 + 4 375 + 4 400 + 4
20 – 40 280 + 3.5 310 + 3.5 330 + 3.5 350 + 3.5 220 + 3.5 250 + 3.5
40 – 1 k 100 + 3.5 120 + 3.5 130 + 3.5 140 + 3.5 90 + 3.5 100 + 3.5
1k – 5 k 400 + 40 500 + 40 550 + 40 600 + 40 375 + 40 400 + 40
5k – 10 k 1300 + 80 1400 + 80 1500 + 80 1600 + 80 1200 + 80 1200 + 80
2.2 A 10 µA 20 – 1 k 500 + 35 550 + 35 600 + 35 650 + 35 500 + 35 550 + 35
1k–5k 600 + 80 650 + 80 700 + 80 750 + 80 550 + 80 650 + 80
5 k – 10 k 6500 + 160 7500 + 160 8000 + 1600 8500 + 160 6000 + 160 7000 + 160
5725A Amplifier:
11 A 100 µA 40 – 1 k 370 + 170 400 + 170 440 + 170 460 + 170 300 + 170 330 + 170
1k–5k 800 + 380 850 + 380 900 + 380 950 + 380 700 + 380 800 + 380
5 k – 10 k 3000 + 750 3300 + 750 3500 + 750 3600 + 750 2800 + 750 3200 + 750
Note:
Maximum output from the calibrator’s terminals is 2.2 A. Uncertainty specifications for 220 A and 2.2 mA ranges are increased by a
factor of 1.3 plus 2 µA when supplied through 5725A terminals. Specifications are otherwise identical for all output locations.
1. For fields strengths >0.4 V/m but ≤3 V/m, add 1 % of range.

1-39
5700A/5720A Series II
Operators Manual

AC Current Secondary Performance Specifications and Operating Characteristics

Temperature Maximum Noise and
[1] Coefficient
[2] Resistive Distortion
Stability ±1 °C Compliance Load
Frequency (Bandwidth
Range 24 Hours 0 – 10 °C and Limits
(Hz) 10 – 40 °C For Full 10 Hz – 50 kHz
40 – 50 °C (V rms) Accuracy
[3]
<0.5V Burden)
± (ppm output + nA) ± (ppm output + nA)/°C (Ω) ± (% output + µA)
[6]
220 µA 10 – 20 150 + 5 50 + 5 50 + 5 7 2k 0.05 + 0.1
20 – 40 80 + 5 20 + 5 20 + 5 0.05 + 0.1
40 – 1 k 30 + 3 4 + 0.5 10 + 0.5 0.05 + 0.1
1k–5k 50 + 20 10 + 1 20 + 1 0.25 + 0.5
5 k – 10 k 400 + 100 20 + 100 20 + 100 00.5 + 1
2.2 mA 10 – 20 150 + 5 50 + 5 50 + 5 7 500 0.05 + 0.1
20 – 40 80 + 5 20 + 4 20 + 4 0.05 + 0.1
40 – 1 k 30 + 3 4+1 10 + 2 0.05 + 0.1
1k–5k 50 + 20 10 + 100 20 + 100 0.25 + 0.5
5 k – 10 k 400 + 100 50 + 400 50 + 400 00.5 + 1
22 mA 10 – 20 150 + 50 50 + 10 50 + 10 7 150 0.05 + 0.1
20 – 40 80 + 50 20 + 10 20 + 10 0.05 + 0.1
40 – 1 k 30 + 30 4 + 10 10 + 20 0.05 + 0.1
1k–5k 50 + 500 10 + 500 20 + 400 0.25 + 0.5
5 k – 10 k 400 + 1000 50 + 1000 50 + 1000 00.5 + 1
Hz ± (ppm output + µA) ± (ppm output + µA) / °C
220 mA 10 – 20 150 + 0.5 50 + 0.05 50 + 0.05 7 15 0.05 + 10
20 – 40 80 + 0.5 20 + 0.05 20 + 0.05 0.05 + 10
40 – 1 k 30 + 0.3 4 + 0.1 10 + 0.1 0.05 + 10
1k–5k 50 + 3 10 + 2 20 + 2 0.25 + 50
5 k – 10 k 400 + 5 50 + 5 50 + 5 00.5 + 100
[4]
2.2 A 20 – 1 k 50 + 5 4+1 10 + 1 1.4 0.5 0.5 + 100
1k–5k 80 + 20 10 + 5 20 + 5 0.3 + 500
5 k – 10 k 800 + 50 50 + 10 50 + 10 0 1 + 1 mA

1-40
 Introduction and Specifications
Electrical Specifications 1
5725A Amplifier: ± (% output)
[5]
11 A 40 - 1 k 75 + 100 20 + 75 30 + 75 3 3 0.05
[5]
1k-5k 100 + 150 40 + 75 50 + 75 0.12
[5]
5 k - 10 k 200 + 300 100 + 75 100 + 75 0.5
Notes:
Maximum output from 5720A terminals is 2.2 A. Uncertainty specifications for 220 µA and 2.2 mA ranges are increased by a factor of 1.3, plus
2 µA when supplied through 5725A terminals. Specifications are otherwise identical for all output locations.
1. Stability specifications are included in the Absolute Uncertainty values for the primary specifications.
2. Temperature coefficient is an adder to uncertainty specifications that does not apply unless operating more than ±5 °C from calibration
temperature.
2
actual load
3. For larger resistive loads multiply uncertainty specifications by: ( )
maximum load for full accuracy

4. 1.5 V compliance limit above 1 A. 5725A Amplifier may be used in range-lock mode down to 1 A.
5. For resistive loads within rated compliance voltage limits.
6. For outputs from the Aux Current terminals, the maximum resistive load for full accuracy is 1 kΩ. For larger resistive loads, multiply the
uncertainty as described in Note 3.
Minimum Output ....................................................9 µA for 220 µA range, 10 % on all other ranges. 1 A minimum for 5725A.
Inductive Load Limits............................................400 µH (5700A/5720A, or 5725A). 20 µH for 5700A/5720A output >1 A.
Power Factors........................................................5700A/5720A, 0.9 to 1; 5725A, 0.1 to 1. Subject to compliance voltage
limits.
Frequency:
Range (Hz)..........................................................10.000 - 11.999, 12.00 - 119.99, 120.0 - 1199.9, 1.200 k - 10.000 k
Uncertainty ....................................................±0.01 %
Resolution .....................................................11,999 counts
Settling Time ......................................................5 seconds for 5700A/5720A ranges; 6 seconds for 5725A 11 A range; +1
second for amplitude or frequency range change.
Overshoot...........................................................<10 %

1-41
5700A/5720A Series II
Operators Manual

1-34. Wideband AC Voltage (Option 5700-03) Specifications

Specifications apply to the end of the cable and 50 Ω termination used for calibration.
Absolute Uncertainty
Range ±5 °C from calibration temperature
Resolution 30 Hz - 500 kHz
24 Hours 90 Days 180 Days 1 Year
Volts dBm
± (% output +µV)
1.1 mV -46 10 nV 0.4 + 0.4 0.5 + 0.4 0.6 + 0.4 0.8 + 2
3 mV -37 10 nV 0.4 + 1 0.45 + 1 0.5 + 1 0.7 + 3
11 mV -26 100 nV 0.2 + 4 0.35 + 4 0.5 + 4 0.7 + 8
33 mV -17 100 nV 0.2 + 10 0.3 + 10 0.45 + 10 0.6 + 16
110 mV -6.2 1 µV 0.2 + 40 0.3 + 40 0.45 + 40 0.6 + 40
330 mV +3.4 1 µV 0.2 + 100 0.25 + 100 0.35 + 100 0.5 + 100
1.1 V +14 10 µV 0.2 + 400 0.25 + 400 0.35 + 400 0.5 + 400
3.5 V +24 10 µV 0.15 + 500 0.2 + 500 0.3 + 500 0.4 + 500

Amplitude Flatness, 1 kHz Reference Settling Time

Frequency Voltage Range Temperature Harmonic
Frequency To Full
Resolution Coefficient Distortion
(Hz) 1.1 mV 3 mV >3 mV Accuracy
(Hz) ±ppm/°C (dB)
± (% output + floor indicated) (Seconds)
10 - 30 0.01 0.3 0.3 0.3 100 7 -40
30 - 120 0.01 0.1 0.1 0.1 100 7 -40
120 - 1.2 k 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 100 5 -40
1.2 k - 12 k 1 0.1 0.1 0.1 100 5 -40
12 k - 120 k 10 0.1 0.1 0.1 100 5 -40
120 k - 1.2 M 100 0.2 + 3 µV 0.1 + 3 µV 0.1 + 3 µV 100 5 -40
1.2 M - 2 M 100 k 0.2 + 3 µV 0.1 + 3 µV 0.1 + 3 µV 100 0.5 -40
2 M - 10 M 100 k 0.4 + 3 µV 0.3 + 3 µV 0.2 + 3 µV 100 0.5 -40
10 M - 20 M 1M 0.6 + 3 µV 0.5 + 3 µV 0.4 + 3 µV 150 0.5 -34
20 M - 30 M 1M 1.5 + 15 µV 1.5 + 3 µV 1 + 3 µV 300 0.5 -34
Additional Operating Information:
dBm reference = 50 Ω
Range boundaries are at voltage points, dBm levels are approximate.
Power
dBm = 10 log ( ) ; 0.22361 V across 50 Ω = 1 mW or 0 dBm
1 mW

Minimum Output ................................................... 300 µV (-57 dBm)

Frequency Uncertainty ......................................... ±0.01 %
Frequency Resolution .......................................... 11,999 counts to 1.1999 MHz, 119 counts to 30 MHz
Overload Protection.............................................. A short circuit on the wideband output will not result in damage. After
settling time, normal operation is restored upon removal.

1-42
 Introduction and Specifications
Electrical Specifications 1
1-35. Auxiliary Amplifier Specifications
For complete specifications, see the 5205A and 5220A Operators Manuals.
5205A (220V - 1100 V ac, 0 V - 1100 V dc)
Overshoot: < 10 %
Distortion (bandwidth 10 Hz - 1 MHz):
10 Hz - 20 kHz ................................................ 0.07 %
20 kHz - 50 kHz .............................................. 0.2 %
50 kHz - 100 kHz ............................................ 0.25 %
90 Day Accuracy Temperature Coefficient for
Frequency
at 23 ±5 °C 0 - 18 °C and 28 - 50 °C
(Hz)
± (% output + % range) ± (ppm output + ppm range) / °C
0 dc 0.05 + 0.005 15 + 3
10 - 40 0.15 + 0.005 45 + 3
40 - 20 k 0.04 + 0.004 15 + 3
20 k - 50 k 0.08 + 0.006 50 + 10
50 k - 100 k 0.1 + 0.01 70 + 20

5220A (AC Current, 180-day specifications):

Accuracy:
20 Hz - 1 kHz ................................................. 0.07 % + 1 mA
1 kHz - 5 kHz .................................................. (0.07 % + 1mA) x frequency in kHz
Temperature Coefficient (0 - 18 °C and 28 - 50 °C):
(0.003 % + 100A) / °C
Distortion (bandwidth 300 kHz):
20 Hz - 1 kHz .................................................. 0.1% + 1 mA
1 kHz - 5 kHz .................................................. (0.1% + 1 mA) x frequency in kHz
Note: 5700A/5720A combined with 5220A is not specified for inductive loads.

1-43
5700A/5720A Series II
Operators Manual

1-44
 Chapter 2
Installation

Title Page

2-1. Introduction........................................................................................... 2-3

2-2. Unpacking and Inspection .................................................................... 2-3
2-3. Service Information .............................................................................. 2-4
2-4. Contacting Fluke................................................................................... 2-4
2-5. Placement and Rack Mounting ............................................................. 2-4
2-6. Cooling Considerations......................................................................... 2-4
2-7. Accessing the Fuse................................................................................ 2-5
2-8. Selecting Line Voltage.......................................................................... 2-6
2-9. Connecting to Line Power .................................................................... 2-8
2-10. Connecting a 5725A Amplifier............................................................. 2-8
2-11. Selecting Output Binding Posts ............................................................ 2-8

2-1
5700A/5720A Series II
Operators Manual

2-2
 Installation
Introduction 2
WWarning
The calibrator can supply lethal voltages to the front and rear
binding posts. Read this chapter before operating the
calibrator.

2-1. Introduction
This chapter provides instructions for unpacking and installing the calibrator. The
procedures for line voltage selection, fuse replacement, and connection to line power are
provided here. Read this chapter before operating the calibrator.
Instructions for cable connections other than line power connection can be found in the
following chapters of the manual:
• UUT (Unit Under Test) connections: Chapter 4
• IEEE-488 interface bus connection: Chapter 5
• RS-232-C serial interface connection: Chapter 6
• Option 5700-03 Wideband AC Module connection: Chapter 4
• Auxiliary amplifier connections: Chapter 4

2-2. Unpacking and Inspection

The calibrator is shipped in a container designed to prevent damage during shipping.
Inspect the calibrator carefully for damage, and immediately report any damage to the
shipper. Instructions for inspection and claims are included in the shipping container.
When you unpack the calibrator, check for all the standard equipment listed in Table 2-1
and check the shipping order for any additional items ordered. Refer to Chapter 8 for
information about options and accessories. Report any shortage to the place of purchase
or to the nearest Fluke Service Center. If performance tests are required for your
acceptance procedures, refer to the 5700A/5720A Series II Service Manual for
instructions.
If you need to reship the calibrator, use the original container. If it is not available, you
can order a new container from Fluke by indicating the calibrator’s model and serial
number.

Table 2-1. Standard Equipment

Item Model or Part Number

Calibrator 5700A/5720A Series II

Line Power Cord See Table 2-2 and Figure 2-2

5700A/5720A Series II Manual Set 1668111

5700A/5720A Series II Operators Ref Guide 601648

5700A/5720A Series II Remote Prog Ref Guide 601655

5700A/5720A Series II Getting Started 1668111

5700A/5720A Series II Manual CD 1668127

Certificate of Calibration No part number

2-3
5700A/5720A Series II
Operators Manual

2-3. Service Information

Each calibrator is warranted to the original purchaser for a period of one year beginning
on the date received. The warranty is located at the front of this manual.
Service and technical advice for the calibrator is available at Fluke Service Centers. For a
complete list of Fluke Service Centers, visit www.fluke.com.
After-warranty service is available, but you may choose to repair the calibrator using the
information in the Troubleshooting Chapter of the 5700A/5720A Series II Service Manual
and the Module Exchange Program. Refer to the Fluke catalog or contact a Service
Center representative for the module exchange procedure.

2-4. Contacting Fluke

To order accessories, receive operating assistance, or get the location of the nearest Fluke
distributor or Service Center, call:
USA: 1-888-44-FLUKE (1-888-443-5853)
Canada: 1-800-36-FLUKE (1-800-363-5853)
Europe: +31 402-675-200
Japan: +81-3-3434-0181
Singapore: +65-738-5655
Anywhere in the world: +1-425-446-5500
Or, visit Fluke's Web site at www.fluke.com.

2-5. Placement and Rack Mounting

Place the calibrator on top of a bench or mounted in a standard-width, 24-inch (61-cm)
deep equipment rack. For bench-top use, the calibrator is equipped with non-slipping,
non-marring feet. To mount the calibrator in an equipment rack, use the Rack Mount Kit,
Model Y-5737; instructions are included with the kit. For convenience, the rack mount
instruction sheet can be stored in the binder of this manual.

2-6. Cooling Considerations

Caution
Damage caused by overheating may occur if the area around
the air intake is restricted, the intake air is too warm, or the air
filter becomes clogged.
A hidden but important feature of the calibrator is its internal cooling system. Baffles
direct cooling air from the fans throughout the chassis to internally dissipate heat during
operation. The accuracy and dependability of all internal parts of the calibrator are
enhanced by maintaining the coolest possible internal temperature. By observing the
following rules, you can lengthen the life of the calibrator and enhance its performance:
• The area around the air filter must be at least 3 inches from nearby walls or rack
enclosures.
• The exhaust perforations on the sides of the calibrator must be clear of obstructions.
• The air entering the instrument must be room temperature. Make sure that exhaust
from another instrument is not directed into the fan inlet.
• Clean the air filter every 30 days or more frequently if the calibrator is operated in a
dusty environment. (Instructions for cleaning the air filter are in Chapter 7.)

2-4
 Installation
Accessing the Fuse 2
2-7. Accessing the Fuse
Caution
To prevent instrument damage, verify that the correct fuse is
installed for the line voltage setting.
The line power fuse is accessible on the rear panel. The fuse rating label to the right of
the fuse holder (labeled F1) shows the correct replacement fuse rating for each line
voltage setting. To check or replace the fuse, refer to Figure 2-1 and proceed as follows:
1. Disconnect line power.
2. Using a standard screwdriver, loosen the fuse holder by turning the slot labeled F1
until the cap and fuse pop free.
3. Replace the fuse and holder.

VOLTAGE FUSE-F1 VOLTAGE FUSE-F1

SELECTION SELECTION
S2 S3 S4 S2 S3 S4
100V 200V
T 3A T 1.5A
110V 250V 220V 250V
115V (SB) 230V (SB)
120V 240V
CHASSIS
GROUND
!
FUSE -F1

S2 S3 S4

Figure 2-1. Accessing the Fuse

2-5
5700A/5720A Series II
Operators Manual

2-8. Selecting Line Voltage

The calibrator arrives from the factory configured for the line voltage normally
appropriate for the country of purchase, or as specified at the time of your purchase order.
The calibrator also comes with the appropriate line power plug for the country of
purchase. If you need a different type, refer to Table 2-2 and Figure 2-2. They list and
illustrate the line power plug types available from Fluke.
Check the line power label on the rear panel of the calibrator to verify that the line
voltage matches local line power. Figure 2-3 shows the location of the line power label.
You can set the calibrator to operate from eight different nominal line voltages; each
voltage setting has a voltage tolerance of ± 10%, and frequency range of 47 to 63 Hz. The
line voltage switches are located on the bottom left side of the rear panel.
To change the line voltage setting, set the line voltage selection switches to the correct
setting shown in Figure 2-3.

Table 2-2. Line Power Cord Types Available from Fluke

Type Voltage/Current Fluke Option Number

North America 120V/15A LC-1

North America 240V/15A LC-2

Universal Euro 220V/16A LC-3

United Kingdom 240V/13A LC-4

Switzerland 220V/10A LC-5

Australia 240V/10A LC-6

South Africa 240V/5A LC-7

LC-1 LC-2 LC-3 LC-4

LC-5 LC-6 LC-7

Figure 2-2. Line Power Cord Types Available from Fluke

2-6
 Installation
Selecting Line Voltage 2

CAUTION FOR FIRE PROTECTION REPLACE ONLY

WITH A 250V FUSE OF INDICATED RATING.

VOLTAGE FUSE-F1 VOLTAGE FUSE-F1

SELECTION SELECTION
S2 S3 S4 S2 S3 S4
100V 200V
T 3A T 1.5A
110V 250V 220V 250V
115V (SB) 230V (SB)
120V 240V

CAUTION FOR FIRE PROTECTION REPLACE ONLY

WITH A 250V FUSE OF INDICATED RATING.

VOLTAGE FUSE-F1 VOLTAGE FUSE-F1

SELECTION SELECTION
S2 S3 S4 S2 S3 S4
100V 200V
T 3A T 1.5A
110V 250V 220V 250V
115V (SB) 230V (SB)
120V 240V

Figure 2-3. Line Power Label and Switch Location

2-7
5700A/5720A Series II
Operators Manual

2-9. Connecting to Line Power

Warning
To avoid shock hazard, connect the factory supplied three-
conductor line power cord to a properly grounded power outlet.
Do not use a two-conductor adapter or extension cord; this will
break the protective ground connection. If a two-conductor
power cord must be used, a protective grounding wire must be
connected between the ground terminal and earth ground
before connecting the power cord or operating the instrument.
After you verify that the line voltage selection switches are set to the correct positions,
verify that the correct fuse for that line voltage is installed. Connect the calibrator to a
properly grounded three-prong outlet.

2-10. Connecting a 5725A Amplifier

The calibrator provides an interface connector for the Fluke 5725A amplifier. You
designate the active amplifier for voltage and current boost in a setup menu. That
procedure is located in the beginning of Chapter 4. Refer to the 5725A Instruction
Manual for the installation procedure.

2-11. Selecting Output Binding Posts

The calibrator is equipped with binding posts for OUTPUT, SENSE, and V GUARD
(Voltage Guard) on the front and rear panels. Only one set of binding posts can be
enabled at the same time. (GND binding posts on both front and rear are always
connected to chassis ground.) The calibrator is shipped with the front panel binding posts
enabled. The procedure to enable the rear panel binding posts involves opening the case
of the calibrator, and repositioning a cable. This procedure is described in Chapter 4 of
the 5700A/5720A Series II Service Manual.

Note
A Type "N" connector for output from the Option 5700-03 Wideband AC
Voltage Module is available only on the calibrator’s front panel. A terminal
for I GUARD is available only on the rear panel. (Connection to the I
GUARD terminal is normally required only at low current levels in
calibration systems with long cable runs.) Chapters 3 and 4 contain
detailed information about the function and use of all binding posts.

2-8
 Chapter 3
Features

Title Page

3-1. Introduction........................................................................................... 3-3

3-2. Front Panel Features ............................................................................. 3-3
3-3. Display Screen Saver........................................................................ 3-3
3-4. Rear Panel Features .............................................................................. 3-12
3-5. Softkey Menu Tree ............................................................................... 3-14

3-1
5700A/5720A Series II
Operators Manual

3-2
 Features
Introduction 3

3-1. Introduction
This chapter is a reference for the functions and locations of the calibrator's front and rear
panel features, and provides brief but thorough descriptions of each features, for quick
access. Please read this information before operating the calibrator. Front panel operating
instructions for the calibrator are provided in Chapter 4, and remote operating
instructions are provided in Chapter 5.

3-2. Front Panel Features

Front panel features (including all controls, displays, indicators, and terminals) are shown
in Figure 3-1. Each front panel feature is briefly described in Table 3-1.

3-3. Display Screen Saver

The Control Display (described in Table 3-1) is equipped with a screen saver that
lengthens the display’s life when the front panel is not being used. The display becomes
blank after 30 minutes of inactivity, unless it is one of the operating states that override
the screen saver.
If the screen saver is in effect, you can restore the display by pressing C. Pressing
another key, or turning the knob, will also restore the display in addition to performing
the command selected by the key or knob.
The screen saver will not go into effect after 30 minutes of inactivity if:
• the Setup Menu or any of its submenus are displayed
• the calibrator is being operated under remote control
• the calibrator is undergoing calibration or diagnostics
• an error message is displayed

3-3
5700A/5720A Series II
Operators Manual

Table 3-1. Front Panel Features

A two-line vacuum-fluorescent display that shows output amplitude and

A frequency. The top line shows the active output value (or potential output
value if in standby) using up to eight digits plus a polarity sign. The bottom
Output Display line shows output frequency (or potential output frequency if the calibrator is
in standby) using five digits. Following the digits on both lines of the Output
Display are four unit annunciators. (Examples of units are: mV, µA, and
kHz.) Annunciators below the amplitude line on the Output Display indicate
the following active conditions:
OPERATE Lit when an output is active at the binding posts or auxiliary
amplifier
STANDBY Lit when the calibrator is in standby
ADDR Lit when the calibrator is addressed over the IEEE-488
interface
∅-LCK Lit when the calibrator’s output is phase locked to a signal at
the rear panel PHASE LOCK IN connector
∅-SHF Lit when the calibrator’s output has a programmed phase
difference with a signal at the rear panel VARIABLE PHASE
OUT connector
U (Unsettled.) When you change the output, this annunciator
lights briefly until the output settles to within specification.
An alphanumeric vacuum-fluorescent display that shows data entries, UUT
B error adjustments, menus, and other prompts and messages. Each menu
contains a set of softkey labels that identify the functions of the softkeys
Control Display directly below them. The changing menus provide access to many different
functions through the five softkeys plus the P key. (See Figure 3-3,
Softkey Menu Tree.)
Toggles the calibrator between operate and standby modes. In standby
C mode, the OUTPUT binding posts are internally disconnected from the
calibrator. The calibrator normally starts up in standby. Status is indicated by
O (Operate/Standby) the lighted OPERATE or STANDBY annunciator above the OUTPUT binding
posts. Pressing the O key does not change any other aspect of the
calibrator’s status. The calibrator automatically switches to standby when
any of the following events occur:
• The r key is pressed.
• A voltage ≥ 22V is selected when the previous output voltage was less
than 22V.
• The output location changes (e.g., an amplifier is selected). The
exception to this is when the 5725A is selected for ac voltage or current,
provided the calibrator’s current output location is set to "5725A". In this
case, the mode does not toggle.
• The output function changes to voltage <22V, ac voltage >22V, dc
voltage >22V, dc current, ac current, or resistance. The exception is
when switching between dc and ac current in 5100B emulation mode.
Opens and closes an internal connection between the SENSE and OUTPUT
D binding posts. The calibrator powers up with SENSE and OUTPUT
connected internally (the SENSE binding posts are open circuited), with X
X (External Sense) off. Pressing X disconnects the sense lines from the OUTPUT binding
posts, and connects them to the SENSE binding posts internally.

3-4
 Features
Front Panel Features 3
Table 3-1. Front Panel Features (continued)

External Sensing should be used in the dc voltage function when the UUT
draws enough current to produce a significant voltage drop in the cables,
and in the resistance function when the UUT has a four-wire ohms input and
the calibrator is set to 100 kΩ or less. External sensing can also be used in
conjunction with the two-wire compensation circuit to compensate for lead
resistance at the UUT terminals. Refer to "When to use External Sensing,"
"Four-Wire vs. Two-Wire Resistance Connections," and "Cable
Connections" in Chapter 4 for external sensing instructions.
Opens and closes an internal connection between V GUARD (voltage guard)
E and OUTPUT LO. The calibrator powers up with the voltage guard internally
connected to OUTPUT LO and the EX GRD indicator off. Toggling x on
x (External Guard)
disconnects OUTPUT LO from the voltage guard.
The V GUARD binding post provides an external connection point for the
voltage internal guard. For a UUT with floating inputs, the V GUARD should
be connected to LO internally. (x is off.) For a UUT with a grounded input,
the GUARD may be externally connected to the grounded UUT input.
(x is on.) See Chapter 4 for instructions.

Toggles the Wideband AC Voltage Module (Option 5700A-03) and sets the
F calibrator to standby. When enabled, the ac voltage output from 10 Hz to
30 MHz is available at the front-panel coaxial connector. Wideband is
w (Wideband)
disabled whenever W BND is toggled off or when another function (such as
current) is selected. Chapter 4 contains more information.

1 3 5 2

4 6

Figure 3-1. Front Panel Features

3-5
5700A/5720A Series II
Operators Manual

Table 3-1. Front Panel Features (continued)

Enables or disables output from an amplifier, when it would not otherwise be

G automatically selected. Sets the calibrator to standby if this selection moves
the output location.
B
When available, an amplifier is automatically selected for output settings that
exceed the calibrator’s capabilities but fall within the limits of the selected
amplifier. The B key is only needed to activate an amplifier for an output
setting that is available from either the calibrator or the amplifier. This allows
you to take advantage of amplifier capabilities besides extended range, such
as higher compliance voltage.
For both voltage and current, the amplifier is assumed to be a 5725A unless
another model is designated in the setup menus.
The P softkey aborts the current operational state of the calibrator and
H recalls the previous set of menu choices. Some menus display a more
specific label for this key, such as "DONE Setting Up".
P (Previous Menu)
The functions of the five unlabeled softkeys are identified by labels on the
I Control Display directly above each key. The functions change during
operation so that many different functions are accessible through these
Softkeys keys. A group of softkey labels is called a menu. A group of interconnected
menus is called a menu tree. Figure 3-3 shows the menu tree for the
calibrator.
Turns the power on and off. The switch remains locked inwards when the
J power is on. Pushing the switch again unlocks it and turns the power off.
Power Switch
The output adjustment controls. If any of these keys are pressed or the knob
K is rotated, a digit on the Output Display becomes highlighted and the output
increments or decrements as the knob is rotated. If a digit rolls past 0 or 9,
< a > the digit to its left or right is carried. An error display appears on the Control
Display, showing the difference between the original (reference) output and
the new (adjusted) output.
The < and > keys adjust the magnitude of changes by moving the
highlighted digit. In the ac functions, the a key toggles between voltage or
current to frequency. For voltage and current outputs, the knob and arrow
keys are used to adjust output until the UUT reads correctly. The error
display then displays UUT deviation from the reference.
Since resistances are not adjustable, the knob and arrow keys adjust a value
on the Control Display to equal the UUT reading. Refer to "Error Mode
Operation" in Chapter 4 for details of entering, operating, and exiting Error
Mode.
The rotary knob is also used to adjust the phase of the ac output signal with
respect to a signal at the VARIABLE PHASE OUT connector after the
"Phase Ctrls Menu" softkey is pressed.
Aborts the current operating state of the calibrator and returns it to its power-
L up default state. r has no effect when operating under remote control.

3-6
 Features
Front Panel Features 3
Table 3-1. Front Panel Features (continued)

Identifies a UUT full-scale endpoint for checking linearity and does not
M change the output. If the output was adjusted with the rotary knob,
subsequent keyed-in output values are multiplied by a scale factor. Scaling
S is deactivated by pressing S again, or by selecting another function.
Scaling is not available for resistance outputs. See "Linearity Checking
Using Offset and Scale" in Chapter 4 for details.

N Calls up a menu that allows you to specify limits beyond which the calibrator
will not operate, to protect your test equipment and personnel.
L
Immediately changes the output to one tenth the reference value (not
O necessarily the present output value) if the value is within performance
limits.
Z
Immediately changes the output to ten times the reference value (not
P necessarily the present output value) if the value is within performance
limits. This key sets the calibrator to standby if this change is from below
Y 22V to 22V or more.

7 9

11
16 14
13
15 12 10

Figure 3-1. Front Panel Features (continued)

3-7
5700A/5720A Series II
Operators Manual

Table 3-1. Front Panel Features (continued)

Causes the calibrator to compute and display its absolute uncertainty for the
Q present output setting for the calibration interval selected in the setup
s (Specification) menus.

Identifies a UUT zero-scale endpoint and does not change the output.
R Subsequent keyed-in output values have the offset value (the calibrator’s
output value when OFFSET was pressed) added to them. Offset mode is
o deactivated by pressing OFFSET again or by selecting another function.
Offsets are available for dc outputs only. See "Programming an OFFSET" in
Chapter 4 for details.
Clears a partially completed keypad entry from the Control Display or clears
S an error message that requires acknowledgement. If there is a partially
completed entry when C is pressed, the output is unaffected.
C (Clear Entry)
Only active during error mode operation, the N key establishes the
T present output value as a new reference for meter error computation.

N
When in the ac volts or wideband function, and if no entry is in progress, the
U dBm key shows the equivalent dBm output on the Control Display. For the
ac voltage function, dBm is calculated for a 600Ω load. For the wideband
D function, dBm is calculated for a 50Ω resistive termination at the end of a 3-
foot 50Ω coaxial cable.
The formula for computing dBm is: 10 * log(power in mW)
Examples:
For 3.0V into a 600Ω load, dBm = 10 log(15.000) = 11.7609 dBm
For 3.0V into a 50Ω load, dBm = 10 log(180.000) = 22.5527 dBm
The E key loads an output value that was entered into the Control
V Display into the calibrator. If you press E without identifying the
units for the entry, the calibrator keeps the most recently used units. The
E multipliers are not saved. For example, if the most recently entered value
was 1 mV, then simply entering 10 produces an output of 10V. (The "V" units
were saved from the last entry, but not the multiplier, "m".)
Another function of the E key is to recall the currently-programmed
reference value during error mode operation. Refer to "Error Mode
Operation" in Chapter 4 for details.
Select the output function. The output functions are:
W D Decibels relative to 1 mW
Output Function Keys V Voltage
A Current
Q Resistance
H Frequency
When Hz is entered, the calibrator automatically switches to ac. When a new
signed (+ or -) output value is entered without specifying Hz, the calibrator
automatically switches back to dc.

3-8
 Features
Front Panel Features 3
Table 3-1. Front Panel Features (continued)

X Select output value multipliers. For example, if you enter

3 3 m V, then E, the calibrator output value is 33 mV.
Multiplier Keys The multiplier keys are:
-6
U micro (10 )
-3
m milli (10 )
3
K kilo (10 )
6
M mega (10 )

Y Contains number keys for keying in the output amplitude and frequency, as
well as other data such as the time and date. To enter a value, press the
Numeric Keypad digits of the output value, a multiplier key if necessary, and an output
function key; then press E. For example, for an output of 20 mV,
press 2 0 m V, then E.
If the output function is dc voltage, current, ac voltage entered in dBm, or a
Z wideband output entered in dBm, pressing + E toggles the
polarity of the output. If the output function is ac voltage or current, pressing
+ +; then E changes the output to dc.

20 19
18
21 17

25 23
26 24 22

Figure 3-1. Front Panel Features (continued)

3-9
5700A/5720A Series II
Operators Manual

Table 3-1. Front Panel Features (continued)

A Type "N" connector that provides a connection point for output from the
a Option 5700A-03 Wideband AC Module. Wideband output specifications are
stated for output levels present at the end of its 3-foot 50Ω coaxial cable
WIDEBAND Connector terminated into a 50Ω purely resistive load. The connector shell is connected
to chassis ground. Refer to Chapter 4 for connecting and operating
instructions for the wideband module.
If the calibrator is the location of the ground reference point in a system, the
b GND binding post can be used for connecting other instruments to earth
ground. (The chassis is normally connected to earth ground through the
GND Binding Post three-conductor line cord instead of through the earth ground binding post.)
Refer to "Cable Connections" in Chapter 4 for details. Included with the
calibrator is a brass strap that connects GND to V GUARD.
Provides an external connection point for the internal voltage guard. For a
c UUT with floating (ungrounded) inputs, the V GUARD should be connected
to LO internally (x off). For a UUT with a grounded input, the V GUARD
V GUARD Binding Post must be externally connected to the grounded UUT input (x on). The
maximum allowable potential between the V GUARD connector and chassis
ground is 20V peak. Refer to "When to use External Voltage Guard" and
"Cable Connections" in Chapter 4 for details.
Used in the resistance and voltage functions for sensing at the UUT after
d you have selected external sense by pressing X or by remote command.

SENSE Binding Posts External Sensing should be used in the dc voltage function when the UUT
draws enough current to produce a significant voltage drop in the cables,
and in the resistance function when the UUT has a four-wire ohms input and
the calibrator is set to 100 kΩ or less. External sensing can also be used in
the two-wire ohms function to allow the two-wire compensation circuitry to
the UUT terminals. Refer to Refer to "When to use External Sensing," "Four-
Wire vs. Two-Wire Resistance Connections," and "Cable Connections" in
Chapter 4 for external sensing instructions and illustrations of SENSE
connections.
Provide connection points for ac and dc current and voltage output, as well
e as resistance. The function of each OUTPUT binding post is defined below:

OUTPUT Binding Posts LO

The common binding post for all output functions including 5725A amplified
voltage output, but not Option 5700A-03 Wideband AC or other auxiliary
amplifier output.

HI
The active binding post for all output functions including 5725A amplified
voltage output, but not Option 5700A-03 Wideband AC or other auxiliary
amplifier output.

AUX CURRENT OUTPUT

An optional active binding post for current. It is convenient to use the AUX
CURRENT OUTPUT binding post when calibrating a UUT with a separate
current input terminal. Refer to "Connecting the calibrator to the UUT" in
Chapter 4 for instructions for using this binding post.

3-10
 Features
Rear Panel Features 3

31 29

30 28 27

Figure 3-1. Front Panel Features (continued)

3-11
5700A/5720A Series II
Operators Manual

3-4. Rear Panel Features

Rear panel features (including all terminals, sockets, and connectors) are shown in Figure
3-2. Each rear panel feature is briefly described in Table 3-2.

Table 3-2. Rear Panel Features

A The filter covers the air intake to keep dust and debris out of chassis air
baffles. Fans inside the calibrator provide a constant cooling air flow
Fan Filter throughout the chassis. Circuitry inside the calibrator monitors correct
operation of the internal fans.

B Provides the analog and digital interface for the Fluke 5725A Amplifier.
After connecting the 5725A to the 5725A AMPLIFIER connector, you
5725A AMPLIFIER Connector control the 5725A from the calibrator’s front panel or by remote commands.
Refer to "Using an Auxiliary Amplifier" in Chapter 4 for details.

C Provides access to a variable-phase nominal 2.5V rms sine-wave signal,

intended for a 3 kΩ load. The phase of this signal can be adjusted using the
VARIABLE PHASE OUT BNC arrow keys and rotary knob (or by remote commands) to lead or lag the
Connector main calibrator output signal by up to 180 degrees. The connector shell is
not connected directly to chassis ground. It is connected internally to the
OUTPUT LO binding post. The maximum allowable potential between the
connector shell and chassis ground is 20V peak. Refer to "Variable Phase
Output" in Chapter 4 for details.

D Provides the input for an external signal onto which the calibrator can be
phase locked. (1 to 10V rms, 10 kΩ input impedance.) The connector shell
PHASE LOCK IN BNC is not connected directly to chassis ground. It is connected internally to the
Connector OUTPUT LO binding post. The maximum allowable potential between the
connector shell and chassis ground is 20V peak. Refer to "Phase Locking
to an External Signal," in Chapter 4 for details.

E The rear-panel OUTPUT, SENSE, and V GUARD and I GUARD binding

posts are alternative connections to the UUT. An internal cable enables
Rear Panel Binding Posts either the front or rear binding posts. The procedure to disable the front
panel binding posts and enable the rear panel binding posts involves
opening the cover of the calibrator and is described in Chapter 4 of the
5700A/5720A Series II Service Manual.
The I GUARD binding post provides an external connection point for the
internal current guard. The current guard is used when the calibrator is
supplying low-level ac current through a long cable to remove errors
introduced by leakage through the cable capacitance. The I GUARD
binding post is available on the rear panel where it is convenient for system
applications. Refer to "When to use the Current Guard" in Chapter 4 for
details.
AUX CURRENT OUTPUT is not available on the rear panel binding posts.

3-12
 Features
Rear Panel Features 3
Table 3-2. Rear Panel Features (continued)

F A standard interface connector for operating the calibrator in remote control

as a Talker or Listener on the IEEE-488 Bus. Refer to Chapter 5 for bus
IEEE-488 Connector connection and remote programming instructions.

G A slide switch that write enables and disables the nonvolatile memory that
stores calibration constants, dates, and setup parameter settings.
CALIBRATION Switch Switching to ENABLE write enables the memory, and switching to
NORMAL protects data in memory from being overwritten. The switch must
be in the ENABLE position to set the clock. The switch is recessed to allow
the metrologist to cover it with a calibration sticker to guarantee calibrator
integrity.

H A male (DTE) serial port connector for transmitting internal calibration

constant data to a printer, monitor, or host computer, and for remote control
RS 232C Connector of the calibrator. Chapter 6 describes proper cabling, how to set up the
serial interface, and how to transmit data from the calibrator. Chapter 5
describes how to use the serial interface for remote control.

1 2 3 4

8 7 6 5

Figure 3-2. Rear Panel Features

3-13
5700A/5720A Series II
Operators Manual

Table 3-2. Rear Panel Features (continued)

I Shows the various settings of the line voltage switches, and the correct
replacement fuse ratings for fuse F1 for operating voltages of 110 (90-132)
Line Voltage Switch and Fuse and 220 (180-264) V ac. Refer to "Accessing the Fuse" in Chapter 2 for the
Rating Label fuse replacement procedure.

J The line power fuse. Refer to "Accessing the Fuse" in Chapter 2 for fuse
rating information and the fuse replacement procedure.
F1 Fuseholder

K A grounded male three-prong connector that accepts the line power cord.

AC PWR INPUT Connector

L Select the operating line voltage. Refer to "Selecting Line Voltage" in

Chapter 2 for how to select operating line voltage.
Line Voltage Selection
Switches

M A binding post that is internally grounded to the chassis. If the calibrator is

the location of the ground reference point in a system, this binding post can
CHASSIS GROUND Binding be used for connecting other instruments to earth ground. (The chassis is
Post normally connected to earth ground through the three-conductor line cord
instead of through the earth ground binding post.) Refer to "Connecting to
the UUT" in Chapter 4 for details.

VOLTAGE FUSE-F1 VOLTAGE FUSE-F1

SELECTION SELECTION
S2 S3 S4 S2 S3 S4
100V 200V
T 3A T 1.5A
110V 250V 220V 250V
115V (SB) 230V (SB)
120V 240V

13 12 11 10 9

Figure 3-2. Front Panel Features (continued)

3-5. Softkey Menu Tree

The functions of the six softkeys described under “Front Panel Features”, are represented
by menus containing labels displayed directly above each key. These functions change
whenever you access a new menu. Figure 3-3 shows the hierarchy of all the menus
available for the calibrator.

3-14
 Features
Softkey Menu Tree 3

Figure 3-3. Softkey Menu Tree

3-15
5700A/5720A Series II
Operators Manual

3-16
 Chapter 4
Front Panel Operation

Title Page

4-1. Introduction........................................................................................... 4-3

4-2. Powering on the Calibrator ................................................................... 4-4
4-3. Warm Up............................................................................................... 4-4
4-4. DC Zeros............................................................................................... 4-5
4-5. Executing DC Zeros ......................................................................... 4-5
4-6. DC Zeros Reminder.......................................................................... 4-5
4-7. The Setup Menu.................................................................................... 4-6
4-8. Instrument Setup............................................................................... 4-7
4-9. Format EEPROM Menu ................................................................... 4-7
4-10. Spec Format Setup Menu ................................................................. 4-8
4-11. Setting the Internal Clock/Calendar ................................................. 4-9
4-12. Selecting Amplifiers......................................................................... 4-10
4-13. Checking the Instrument Configuration ........................................... 4-11
4-14. Special Functions Menu. .................................................................. 4-12
4-15. Resetting the Calibrator. ....................................................................... 4-12
4-16. Operate and Standby Modes ................................................................. 4-13
4-17. Connecting the Calibrator to a UUT..................................................... 4-13
4-18. Recommended Cable and Connector Types..................................... 4-13
4-19. When to Use External Sensing ......................................................... 4-14
4-20. When to Use the External Voltage Guard ........................................ 4-15
4-21. When to Use the Current Guard ....................................................... 4-15
4-22. Four-Wire Vs. Two-Wire Resistance Connections .......................... 4-16
4-23. Cable Connection Instructions ......................................................... 4-16
4-24. Setting the Output ................................................................................. 4-22
4-25. DC Voltage Output........................................................................... 4-24
4-26. AC Voltage Output........................................................................... 4-25
4-27. DC Current Output ........................................................................... 4-27
4-28. AC Current Output ........................................................................... 4-28
4-29. Resistance Output............................................................................. 4-30

4-1
5700A/5720A Series II
Operators Manual

4-30. Wideband AC Voltage Output (Option 5700A-03) ......................... 4-32

4-31. Variable Phase Output...................................................................... 4-34
4-32. Phase Locking to an External Signal .................................................... 4-35
4-33. Using an Auxiliary Amplifier ............................................................... 4-36
4-34. 5725A Amplifier Output .................................................................. 4-37
4-35. Checking the Calibrator’s Uncertainty Specification ........................... 4-38
4-36. Error Mode Operation........................................................................... 4-38
4-37. Error Mode Overview....................................................................... 4-39
4-38. Entering Error Mode .................................................................... 4-39
4-39. Exiting Error Mode ...................................................................... 4-39
4-40. Using Error Mode ........................................................................ 4-40
4-41. Reading the UUT Error: AC and DC Voltage and Current Output.. 4-40
4-42. Reading the UUT Error: Resistance Output ..................................... 4-41
4-43. Introduction to Offset, Scale, and Linearity Errors............................... 4-42
4-44. Offset Error....................................................................................... 4-42
4-45. Scale Error ........................................................................................ 4-43
4-46. Linearity Error.................................................................................. 4-44
4-47. Combining the Error Types .............................................................. 4-44
4-48. Programming an Offset......................................................................... 4-45
4-49. Programming a Scale Factor................................................................. 4-46
4-50. Linearity Checking Using Offset and Scale.......................................... 4-47
4-51. Setting Output Limits............................................................................ 4-50
4-52. Setting Voltage and Current Limits.................................................. 4-50
4-53. Sample Applications ............................................................................. 4-51
4-54. Calibrating Fluke 70 Series Multimeter ........................................... 4-51
4-55. Cables........................................................................................... 4-52
4-56. Guarding....................................................................................... 4-52
4-57. Sensing ......................................................................................... 4-52
4-58. Testing the Meter ......................................................................... 4-53
4-59. Calibrating the Meter ................................................................... 4-54
4-60. Calibrating a Fluke Model 8840A Series Digital Multimeter .......... 4-56
4-61. Cables........................................................................................... 4-56
4-62. Guarding....................................................................................... 4-56
4-63. Sensing ......................................................................................... 4-58
4-64. Basic Calibration Procedure......................................................... 4-58
4-65. Calibration Setup Procedure ........................................................ 4-58
4-66. A/D Calibration............................................................................ 4-59
4-67. Offset and Gain Calibration ......................................................... 4-60
4-68. High Frequency AC Calibration .................................................. 4-62
4-69. Performing A Wideband Flatness Test............................................. 4-63

4-2
 Front Panel Operation
Introduction 4

4-1. Introduction
This chapter provides instructions for operating the calibrator from the front panel, which
includes all aspects of setting up and configuring the calibrator. Sample applications are
included that describe how to calibrate a Fluke 70 Series Multimeter and an 8840A Series
Digital Multimeter. Descriptions and instructions for programming offsets, scale factors,
and linearity checks are also provided.
Before you begin following the procedures in this chapter, you should be familiar with
the front panel controls, displays, and terminals, which are identified and described in
detail in Chapter 3. Once you are familiar with the front panel, be sure to warm up the
calibrator and ensure its dc zeros calibration, in accordance with the instructions at the
beginning of this chapter. For information on using remote commands to operate the
calibrator, refer to Chapter 5.

WWarning
The calibrator is capable of supplying lethal voltages. Do not
make connections to the output terminals when any voltage is
present. Placing the instrument in standby may not be enough
to avoid shock hazard, since the O key could be pressed
accidentally. Press r and verify that standby is lit before
making connections to the output terminals.

4-3
5700A/5720A Series II
Operators Manual

4-2. Powering on the Calibrator

WWarning
To avoid electric shock, make sure the calibrator is safely
grounded as described in Chapter 2.

Caution
Before turning the calibrator on, make sure that the line voltage
selection switches are set properly for your line voltage. Refer
to Figure 2-3 or to the line voltage switch label and check the
line voltage now if you have not already done so.
When you power on the calibrator, the Control Display appears as shown below and then
displays a series of tests, as the calibrator performs self-tests. If a self test fails, a prompt
on the Control Display identifies the failed test and lets you choose whether to continue
self testing or stop and run self diagnostics. For information about self-diagnostics, refer
to Chapter 3 of the 5700A/5720A Series II Service Manual.

PREV
MENU

After the calibrator passes its self-tests, it powers up to 0V dc in standby, configured for
internal sensing and internal guard, ready to accept an entry from the keypad. The
Control Display now appears as shown below:

PREV
MENU

4-3. Warm Up
The calibrator must always be warmed up, to allow the environmentally controlled
components inside to stabilize, and to ensure that it meets or exceeds the specifications
listed in Chapter 1. Sufficient warmup times are as follows:
• If the calibrator has been powered off for one hour or more, allow at least 30 minutes
of warmup time.
• If the calibrator has been powered off for a length of time less than one hour, allow it
to warm up for at least twice the length of time it was turned off. For example, if it
has been turned off for 10 minutes, allow at least 20 minutes of warmup time.

4-4
 Front Panel Operation
DC Zeros 4
4-4. DC Zeros
DC zeros is a quick, automatic process that removes any offset error on the 11V and 2.2V
ranges, and removes offset and gain errors on the 220 mV range. If a 5725A Amplifier is
attached, it also zeros the 11A dc range. This process takes about 2.5 minutes (plus an
additional 30 seconds for the 5725A).

4-5. Executing DC Zeros

To execute dc zeros, proceed as follows from the power-up state:
1. Press the following sequence of softkeys:
“Setup Menus”→“Cal” →“Zero”
2. When the process is finished, a message appears that tells you to press any key to
continue. Press any key to exit the dc zeros display.
3. To return to normal operation, press P twice.

4-6. DC Zeros Reminder

Specifications require that dc zeros be executed at least every 30 days. If the 30-day time
period elapses and dc zeros is not performed, the following message appears on the
display when the calibrator is powered on, or reset.

PREV
MENU

To override the message and perform dc zeros at a more convenient time, press the
softkey under ZERO LATER (the softkey next to P). To perform dc zero at this time,
press one of the softkeys under ZERO NOW.

Note
If you receive this message after powering on the calibrator, allow the
calibrator to warm up before executing dc zeros. Otherwise an error
message appears indicating that the calibrator is not warmed up. To ensure
the best performance, the warmup period should be completed.

4-5
5700A/5720A Series II
Operators Manual

4-7. The Setup Menu

Through the setup menu you have access to various operations and changeable
parameters. Once you set a parameter, it is saved in memory until it is changed, including
during power-off periods.
When you press the “Setup” softkey on the Control Display from the power-up state, the
display changes to:

PREV
MENU

The list below describes sub-menus available through each softkey and tells you where
you can find further information in the manuals.
• Cal: Opens the calibration menu. Softkeys in this menu activate calibration to
external standards, calibration check, and dc zeros calibration. Another softkey
displays calibration date information and another opens a calibration report menu.
This chapter describes dc zeros calibration. Chapter 7 shows this menu and describes
all other calibration procedures.
• Self Test & Diags: Opens the self testing and diagnostics menu. This menu contains a
softkey to run self tests similar to the power-up self tests and softkeys that access
separate menus to diagnose and troubleshoot the calibrator and an attached 5725A
Amplifier. Chapter 5 of the 5700A/5720A Series II Service Manual provides
instructions for using these softkeys.
• Instmt Setup: Opens the instrument setup menu. This menu contains softkeys to open
sub menus that let you change the calibration interval, set up the remote port, set the
clock/calendar, and identify the amplifier model for current and voltage
amplification. Another menu lets you format the EEPROM (Electrically Eraseable
Programmable Read Only Memory), which is nonvolatile memory. This is only
necessary when you want to replace some or all of the information in memory with
default values. The next part of this chapter describes the instrument setup menu and
its sub-menus.
• Instmt Config: Opens a menu that contains two softkeys: one that displays a list of
installed hardware modules and software revision letters, and another that displays
the contents of the user report string. This chapter describes how to use these
softkeys.
• Special Functns: Opens the special functions menu. This menu contains two softkeys:
one that allows turning off ac internal transfers, and one to select the date format.
This menu is described later in this chapter.

4-6
 Front Panel Operation
The Setup Menu 4
4-8. Instrument Setup
The softkeys in the instrument setup menu (accessed by pressing “Instmt Setup” softkey
in the setup menu) are shown below.

PREV
MENU

The list below describes sub-menus accessed by each softkey and tells you where you can
find further information in the manuals.
• Format EEPROM: Opens a menu that lets you restore all or part of the data in the
EEPROM to factory defaults. The use of this menu is described next.
• Spec Format Setup: Opens a menu that lets you select the confidence level of the
calibration specifications and calibration interval.
• Set Intrnl Clock: Accesses softkeys that allow you to check and set the date and time
for the clock/calendar. This chapter describes how to set the time and date.
• Boost Amp Types: Selects the auxiliary amplifier model number for current and
voltage boost. This chapter describes how to select the boost amp type.
• Remote Port Setup: Opens setup menus for the IEEE-488 instrument control port and
the RS-232C serial interface port. Chapter 5 describes how to set up the IEEE-488
interface. Chapter 6 describes how to set up the serial interface.

4-9. Format EEPROM Menu

Caution
Use with extreme care. The format EEPROM menu presents
softkeys that permanently erase calibration constants. Pressing
“ALL” or “CAL” invalidates the state of calibration of the
5700A/5720A Series II Calibrator.
Pressing “Format EEPROM” in the instrument setup menu opens the following menu:

PREV
MENU

4-7
5700A/5720A Series II
Operators Manual

The EEPROM stores calibration constants and dates, setup parameters, and the user
report string in non-volatile memory. Softkeys in this menu let you replace all or part of
the contents with factory defaults. In the case of calibration constants, factory defaults are
the same for all 5700A/5720A Series II calibrators. They are not the calibration constants
obtained when the calibrator was originally calibrated by the factory before shipment. All
the softkeys in this menu require the rear panel CALIBRATION switch to be in the
ENABLE position.
The function of each softkey is described below:
• ALL: Replaces the entire contents of the EEPROM with factory defaults. This would
be used by service personnel after replacing the EEPROM, for example. It is not
required in normal use.
• CAL: Replaces all calibration constants with factory defaults but leaves all the setup
parameters unchanged. This is also not required in normal use.
• RANGE: Removes only the range adjustments made during optional range
calibration. See Chapter 7 for more information about range calibration.
• SETUP: Replaces the setup parameters with factory defaults, but leaves the state of
calibration unchanged.
• 5725: Replaces all calibration constants stored in the attached 5725A with factory
defaults, but leaves the calibrator’s EEPROM contents unchanged.

4-10. Spec Format Setup Menu

Pressing the softkey under “Spec Format Setup” opens the menu shown below, which
provides options for configuring your specification confidence level, and for setting the
calibration interval. Once you have completed making these selections, press “DONE
Setting SpecFmt” to return to the Instrument Setup menu.

PREV
MENU

The function of each softkey is described below:

• Cal Interval: Sets the calibration cycle to 24 hours, 90 days, 180 days, or 1 year.
• Spec Confidence: Sets the calibration specification confidence level to 95% or 99%.
All specifications are provided in Chapter 1 of this manual.

4-8
 Front Panel Operation
The Setup Menu 4
4-11. Setting the Internal Clock/Calendar
An internal clock/calendar provides the date (corrected for leap years) and time to the
calibrator’s CPU (Central Processing Unit). The clock setting should be checked and set
if necessary.

Note
A long-life lithium battery keeps the clock/calendar running during power-
off periods. If the battery in your calibrator should ever need replacement,
refer to the Service Manual. The battery is a button-type, soldered to the
CPU Assembly (A20). Any procedure that involves removing the cover is
for service personnel only.
To set or change the time and date of the internal clock/calendar, proceed as follows:
1. If you want to set the date or both date and time, set the rear panel CALIBRATION
switch to ENABLE (see Figure 3-2). The setting of the CALIBRATION switch does
not matter for setting time only.
2. Press the following sequence of softkeys:
Setup Menus → Instmt Setup → Set Intrnl Clock
(If the Setup Menu is not displayed, press r first).
The display changes to:

PREV
MENU

3. To change the date, press the “Change Date” softkey. (To leave the date setting as is
and change the time instead, skip to step 5.) The display changes to:

PREV
MENU

4. Enter the date as six digits using the numeric keypad. The date format selected in the
Special Functns menu determines the order in which you enter the digits (mmddyy,
ddmmyy, or yymmdd). For example, in the format mmddyy, September 5, 1996 is
entered as 090596.

4-9
5700A/5720A Series II
Operators Manual

5. Press the “Change Time” softkey. The display changes to:

PREV
MENU

6. Enter the 24-hour time as six digits in the format hhmmss using the numeric keypad
(for example, 080500 for 8:05 am, or 130400 for 1:04 pm). Press E to start
the clock at its new setting.
7. Make sure the rear panel CALIBRATION switch to NORMAL.
8. Press P three times to return to normal operation.

4-12. Selecting Amplifiers

If you plan to use an auxiliary amplifier other than the 5725A, you may identify one
amplifier for current boost and one amplifier for voltage boost. Model 5725A is the
factory default for both voltage and current boost. To select other amplifiers, proceed as
follows:
1. Press the following sequence of softkeys:
Setup Menus → Instmt Setup → Boost Amp Types
(If the Setup Menu is not displayed, press r first).
The display changes to:

PREV
MENU

2. Press a softkey under “Voltage:” to scroll the highlighted label until it displays
5725A.
3. Press a softkey under “Current:” to scroll the highlighted label until it displays
5725A.
4. To go to normal operation, press P three times.

4-10
 Front Panel Operation
The Setup Menu 4
4-13. Checking the Instrument Configuration
The softkey labeled “Instmt Config” in the setup menu gives you access to the following
information:
• Installed internal operating software revision letters.
• Whether the Wideband AC Module (Option 5700A-03) is installed.
• Which auxiliary amplifiers are attached, if any.
• The contents of the user report string (a general-purpose data storage location that is
changeable only in remote control using the RPT_STR command). You can use this
register to store a property identification name or number, verification test record
number, or other message. The message appears on calibration report printouts as
described in Chapter 6. The rear panel CALIBRATION switch must be in the
ENABLE position to change the user report string. Refer to Chapter 5 for how to use
the RPT_STR remote command.
To view this information, proceed as follows:
1. Press the “Setup Menus” softkey, then press the “Instmt Config” softkey. The display
changes to:
(If the Setup Menu is not displayed, press r first.)
The following display appears:

PREV
MENU

2. Press either softkey under “Show installed s/w and h/w.” The display now shows the
installed internal operating software revisions. To view the installed and attached
hardware assemblies, press the “Go to h/w config” softkey.
3. After you have read the display, press the “MORE” softkey. If there are any more
assemblies to display, they are displayed. After there are no more assemblies to
display, the “h/w config” softkey returns control to the menu shown in step 1.
4. To return to normal operation, press P twice.
To display the contents of the user report string, proceed as follows:
1. Press the “Setup Menus” softkey, then press the “Instmt Config” softkey.
(If “Setup Menus” is not on the display, press r first.)
2. Press a softkey under the “Show user report string” label. This prints the user report
string on the Control Display. To clear the display, press P.
3. To go to normal operation, press P twice.

4-11
5700A/5720A Series II
Operators Manual

4-14. Special Functions Menu.

The softkey labeled “Special Functns” in the setup menu provides access to the AC Xfer
Choice and the Date Format feature, which lets you select one of three date formats
(m/d/y, d.m.y, and ymd). In remote, use DATEFMT to set the date format and
DATEFMT? to query the date format. The AC Xfer Choice feature activates another
softkey that lets you turn off the monitoring system that makes adjustments for load
changes. The AC Xfer OFF feature is available only in the ranges below 220V, at
frequencies below 120 kHz.
The AC Xfer OFF function remains active until the calibrator is reset or the power is
turned off. For remote control applications, the same feature is accessible through the
remote command XFER OFF. Send the command XFER ON to restore internal ac
transfers to normal operation.
Turn off internal ac transfers as follows:
1. Press the “Setup Menu” softkey.
2. Press the “Special Functns” softkey.
3. Press the “AC Xfer Choice” softkey so that ON appears. This turns on an “Intrnl
Xfers” softkey in the ac voltage function.
4. Press P twice.
5. After setting the output for an ac voltage, press the “Intrnl Xfers” softkey so that OFF
appears. This will inhibit internal transfers from being made after the output has
settled. It is particularly useful for making ppm level measurements at low
frequencies. Changing the calibrator's output will reinitiate transfers until the output
has settled.

4-15. Resetting the Calibrator.

At any time during front panel operation, you can return the calibrator to the power-up
state by pressing r. Pressing r does the following:
• Returns the calibrator to the power-up state: 0 mV dc, standby, internal guard, and
internal sense.
• Clears the stored values for limits, offset, scale, and error mode reference.

4-12
 Front Panel Operation
Operate and Standby Modes 4
4-16. Operate and Standby Modes
When the OPERATE annunciator is lit, the output value and function shown on the
Output Display are active at the selected terminals. When the STANDBY annunciator on
the Output Display is lit, all calibrator binding posts except GROUND are open-circuited.
To toggle between operate and standby modes, press O.
If any of the following events occur during operation, the calibrator automatically
switches to standby mode:
• The r key is pressed.
• A voltage ≥22V is selected when the previous output voltage was less than 22V.
• The output location is changed, for example by selecting an amplifier. The exception
is when the 5725A is selected for ac voltage or current, provided the calibrator’s
current output location is set to “5725A.”
• The output function is changed from any of the following: a voltage much less than
22V, an ac voltage much greater than 22V, a dc voltage much greater than 22V, a dc
current, an ac current, or a resistance. The exception is when the calibrator is in
5100B mode when switching between dc and ac current. In this case the calibrator
will not switch to standby mode.

4-17. Connecting the Calibrator to a UUT

WWarning
The calibrator is capable of supplying lethal voltages. Do not
make connections to the output terminals when any voltage is
present. Placing the instrument in standby may not be enough
to avoid shock hazard, since the O key could be pressed
accidentally. Press reset and verify that standby is lit before
making connections to the output terminals.
The binding posts labeled OUTPUT (HI, LO, and AUX I) deliver voltage, fixed
resistance, and current to the UUT (Unit Under Test). The Type “N” connector on the
front panel labeled WIDEBAND delivers the output signal from the Option 5700A-03
Wideband AC Module.
Depending on the output function, output amplitude, and input configuration of the UUT
(Unit Under Test) or meter, connection to the SENSE binding posts, the GUARD binding
post, and the GROUND binding post may also be required or recommended. The text in
this chapter explains how and when to use these binding posts.

4-18. Recommended Cable and Connector Types

Cables can be connected to the binding posts using banana jacks, terminal lugs, or
stripped insulated wire. To avoid errors induced by thermal voltages (thermal emfs), use
connectors and conductors made of copper or materials that generate small thermal emfs
when joined to copper. Avoid using nickel-plated connectors. Optimum results can be
obtained by using Fluke Model 5440A-7002 or 5440A-7003 Low Thermal EMF Test
Leads.
Cable requirements depend on the output function, amplitude, and frequency. Table 4-1
gives specific cable recommendations for all applications.

4-13
5700A/5720A Series II
Operators Manual

Caution
Use only cables with correct voltage ratings.

Table 4-1. Auxiliary Amplifier Data

Output Function Cable Recommendations

DC voltage Low Thermal EMF Test Leads [Note 1]

AC voltage ≤10 kHz 5440A-7002 (banana plugs) or
5440A-7003 (spade lugs) 2 ft. (61 cm.) cable
AC current ≤2A, ≤10 kHz
DC current ≤2A (If external sensing is required, use a twisted
shielded pair.)
Resistance
AC voltage >10 kHz SENSE/GUARD: Triaxial cable or Twinax (e.g.,
Alpha 2829/2), OUTPUT: Coaxial

Or: SENSE: Coaxial, OUTPUT: Coaxial

GUARD Lead: Separate wire

AC current with guard Triaxial cable

Wideband AC 6-foot (2 m) 50Ω coaxial cable with type “N” male

connector supplied with the option. A 50Ω
feedthrough terminator is also supplied for
connecting to meters with an impedance >50Ω.

Voltage-boosted output, 5725A Low Thermal EMF Test Leads [Note 1]

5440A-7002 (banana plugs) or
5440A-7003 (spade lugs)

(Output is at the calibrator’s front panel.)

Current-boosted output, 5725A 16-gauge or heavier twisted pair insulated wire, as

short as possible to minimize resistance and
inductance. (Output is at the amplifier terminals.)

1. Spade lugs provide a slightly better thermal EMF performance. However, some UUTs have repressed
banana connectors that cannot accommodate spade lugs.

4-19. When to Use External Sensing

External sensing is normally required only when you are calibrating a device that draws
enough current to produce a significant voltage drop in the cables. An example of such a
case is using the calibrator as an external dc voltage reference for an AC/DC transfer
standard. In this example, the calibrator is sourcing 1V dc into a Fluke 540B AC/DC
Transfer Standard. The 180Ω input impedance results in a current flow of approximately
5 mA. The calibrator’s 90-day uncertainty at 1V is specified to be ±(6 ppm + 1.2 uV) or ±
7.2 µV. Cumulative lead and contact resistances of as little as 2 mΩ would cause a
voltage drop greater than the total uncertainty of the calibrator. External sensing
eliminates this error.
The normal power-up state of the calibrator is external sensing off, with an internal
connection between the SENSE and OUTPUT automatically made. This is the state
achieved by pressing X so that the indicator is off.

4-14
 Front Panel Operation
Connecting the Calibrator to a UUT 4
4-20. When to Use the External Voltage Guard
The voltage guard protects the analog circuitry by placing an electrical shield between the
primary and secondary of the ac line power transformer. An optical cable transmits
control information from the calibrator’s microprocessor to analog circuits. The voltage
guard provides a low-impedance path for common-mode noise and ground loop currents.
The voltage guard is usually internally connected to the OUTPUT LO terminal. This is
the normal power-up state of the calibrator, and the connection is automatically made
when the external guard is not selected (x pressed so that the indicator is off).
If you are calibrating a UUT with a grounded low or common input terminal, you need an
external connection to the V GUARD. The calibrator's voltage guard must be grounded at
the UUT. (To avoid ground loops you must have only one ground connection in the
system, so all ground connections should be made at the UUT. To maintain one ground
point, make sure there is no grounding strap connected to the calibrator.)

4-21. When to Use the Current Guard

The rear panel CURRENT GUARD is required when the calibrator is supplying low-
level ac current through a long cable, such as in a system. For that reason, a current guard
terminal is supplied on the rear panel where it is convenient for system applications.
The current guard is active only when the calibrator is in the ac current function. The
guard is voltage driven and is in phase with the calibrator’s output current to the level of
compliance voltage at the OUTPUT HI terminal. Compliance voltage is the sum of the
UUT burden voltage and the additional burdens of contact resistances and cable losses.
When connected to the inner shield of a triaxial cable, the current guard blocks a
potentially significant leakage path by surrounding the output current with an in-phase
voltage at the same potential. Current leakage still occurs, but only between the guard
voltage on the inner cable shield and the grounded outer cable shield.
An example where current guarding is desirable is when you are sourcing 100 uA at
1 kHz through a 3-meter coaxial cable into a UUT with a burden voltage of 1V. At
100 pF per meter of length, the cable places an additional 300 pF load across the
calibrator’s output. The amount of current leakage through the cable capacitance is:
I = V(2πfC)
Where,
V = 1V
3
f = 1 kHz = 1 x 10 Hz
-12
C = 300 pF = 300 x 10 F
So the total leakage is:
3 -12
I = (1)(2)(π)(10 )(300)(10 ) = 1.9 µA
This will add in quadrature to the current through a resistive load causing an error of:

100 2 + 1.9 2 −100 = 0.018 µA

At 100 µA, the calibrator’s 90-day uncertainty is specified to be ±140 ppm + 20 nA, or
±0.034 µA. The current leakage here is over half the calibrator’s uncertainty. The error
caused by this leakage can be minimized by using the current guard.

4-15
5700A/5720A Series II
Operators Manual

4-22. Four-Wire Vs. Two-Wire Resistance Connections

Figure 4-4 shows four different ways to connect to a UUT for resistance calibration.
Figure 4-4A shows a UUT with four-wire sensing. For such meters, you should always
take advantage of the four-wire sensing capability and use external sensing to achieve the
highest accuracy. (Four-wire sensing is available for all resistance values except
100 MΩ.)
For calibrating a meter with only a two-wire resistance mode such as a typical handheld
DMM, refer to Figures 4-4B through 4-4D. For resistances of 19 kΩ or lower in two-wire
mode, compensation circuitry inside the calibrator is available to remove errors
introduced by resistance in the path between the front panel terminals and the precision
resistor. Depending on how you connect the meter, you can use two-wire compensation
referenced at the UUT terminals (Figure 4-4C) or at the ends of the UUT's test leads
(Figure 4-4D). See “Resistance Output” for information on turning on and off two-wire
compensation circuitry.
Figure 4-4B shows a meter connected in a two-wire connection with the two-wire
compensation circuitry turned off. For low resistances where uncompensated lead
resistances are significant, use the two-wire compensation circuit and the connection in
Figure 4-4C or 4-4D. Use the connection in Figure 4-4C if you want to calibrate the
meter referenced at its terminals. Use the connection in Figure 4-4D if you want to
calibrate the meter referenced at the end of its test leads.

4-23. Cable Connection Instructions

To connect the calibrator to a UUT, proceed as follows:
1. If the calibrator is turned on, press r, or 0 V E. Either action sets the
calibrator to 0 mV in standby.
2. Determine the appropriate figure from Table 4-2, and refer to the preceding text and
Table 4-1 to make appropriate connections to the UUT.

Table 4-2. UUT Connection Figures

5700A/5720A Series II Output Figure

DC Voltage (including 5725A boost 4-1

AC voltage ≤10 kHz 4-1

AC voltage >10 kHz 4-2

AC current ≤2A, ≤10 kHz 4-3

Resistance 4-4

Wideband AC voltage (option 5700A-03) 4-5

5725A amplified output (current only) 4-6

4-16
 Front Panel Operation
Connecting the Calibrator to a UUT 4

UUT A. EX SNS
: OFF
EX GRD
: OFF
CALIBRATOR

INPUT SENSE OUTPUT SENSE

Ω 4-WIRE VΩ A VΩ

HI HI WIDEBAND
HI HI

LO LO
LO LO

A
HI
GUARD
AUX GUARD GROUND
CURRENT

UUT B. EX SNS
: ON
EX SNS
: ON
CALIBRATOR

INPUT OUTPUT SENSE

SHIELDED TWISTED PAIR VΩA VΩ
DC AC WIDEBAND
HI HI

LO LO

HI

AUX GUARD GROUND

CURRENT
SHIELDED TWISTED PAIR

C. EX SNS
: OFF
EX GRD
: ON CALIBRATOR
UUT
OUTPUT SENSE
VΩA VΩ

WIDEBAND
HI HI

HI LO
LO LO

HI

AUX GUARD GROUND

CURRENT

Figure 4-1. UUT Connections: DC Voltage, AC Voltage ≤10 kHz

4-17
5700A/5720A Series II
Operators Manual

A.
: ON : OFF
EX SNS EX GRD

UUT CALIBRATOR
TRIAXIAL CABLE
INPUT SENSE OUTPUT SENSE
Ω 4-WIRE VΩ A VΩ

HI HI WIDEBAND
HI HI
TRIAXIAL CABLE
LO LO
LO LO

A
HI
GUARD
AUX V-GUARD GROUND
CURRENT

B.
: OFF : OFF
UUT EX SNS EX GRD CALIBRATOR

INPUT SENSE OUTPUT SENSE

Ω 4-WIRE VΩ A VΩ
TRIAXIAL CABLE
HI HI WIDEBAND
HI HI

LO LO
LO LO

A
HI
GUARD
AUX V-GUARD GROUND
CURRENT

NOTE

Keep the SENSE leads as short as possible.

Be careful not to exceed the capacitive load limit of 1000 pF up to 220V,

600 pF 220 to 1100V. (1000 pF with 5725A Amplifier.)

Figure 4-2. UUT Connections: AC Voltage >10 kHz

4-18
 Front Panel Operation
Connecting the Calibrator to a UUT 4

A. CALIBRATOR
UUT : OFF : OFF (FRONT)
EX SNS EX GRD
INPUT SENSE OUTPUT SENSE
Ω 4-WIRE VΩA VΩ

HI HI WIDEBAND
HI HI

LO LO
LO LO

A
HI
GUARD
AUX GUARD GROUND
CURRENT

B. : OFF : OFF CALIBRATOR

EX SNS EX GRD (REAR)
UUT
INPUT SENSE OUTPUT SENSE
Ω 4-WIRE VΩA VΩ
TRIAXIAL CABLE
HI HI
HI HI

LO LO
LO LO

A
NC
GUARD
I-GUARD
V-GUARD

NOTE

The AUX CURRENT OUTPUT binding post is shown in use in figure 4-3A.
You can use the OUTPUT HI binding post or the 5725A Boost Amplifier
binding posts as the active terminals for current output. The operating
instructions in the text describe how you select the active terminal.
If you do not select current output location, OUTPUT HI is active.

Figure 4-3. UUT Connections: AC Current ≤2A

4-19
5700A/5720A Series II
Operators Manual

A. UUT CALIBRATOR
SENSE OUTPUT SENSE
INPUT
Ω 4-WIRE V ΩA VΩ

HI HI WIDEBAND
HI HI

LO LO
LO
LO

A
HI

GUARD
AUX GUARD GROUND
CURRENT

SENSE
: ON
EX SNS

SOURCE
: OFF
EX GRD
UUT CALIBRATOR
SOURCE 2-WIRE
COMP
OFF
SENSE

B.
UUT
CALIBRATOR
OUTPUT SENSE
V ΩA VΩ

WIDEBAND
HI HI

LO LO

HI

10A VΩ AUX GUARD GROUND

CURRENT
300mA COM

NC
: OFF
EX SNS

: OFF
EX GRD

UUT CALIBRATOR
2-WIRE
COMP
OFF

Figure 4-4. UUT Connections: Resistance

4-20
 Front Panel Operation
Connecting the Calibrator to a UUT 4
C.
UUT
CALIBRATOR
OUTPUT SENSE
V ΩA VΩ

WIDEBAND
HI HI

LO LO

HI

10A VΩ
AUX GUARD GROUND
COM CURRENT
300mA
NC

NC

CAUTION : ON
EX SNS
USE CONNECTIONS WITH
EXPOSED PLUG TIPS FOR
THE OHMS FUNCTION ONLY. : OFF
COMP EX GRD

2-WIRE
COMP
UUT CALIBRATOR ON

COMP

D.
UUT
CALIBRATOR
OUTPUT SENSE
V ΩA VΩ

WIDEBAND
HI HI

LO LO

HI

10A VΩ AUX GUARD GROUND

CURRENT
300mA COM

NC
: OFF
EX SNS

COMP
: OFF
EX GRD

UUT CALIBRATOR 2-WIRE

COMP
ON
COMP

Figure 4-4. UUT Connections: Resistance (Continued)

4-21
5700A/5720A Series II
Operators Manual

50 Ω FEEDTHROUGH TERMINATOR CALIBRATOR

SUPPLIED WITH OPTION 5700A-03
OUTPUT SENSE
V ΩA VΩ

WIDEBAND
HI HI

LO LO

HI

AUX GUARD GROUND

CURRENT

CABLE SUPPLIED WITH

OPTION 5700A-03

NOTE

For wideband meters with higher than 50 Ω input impedence, use

the 50 Ω feedthrough terminator at the meter connection end.
For all wideband applications, take care to achieve a good 50 Ω
impedence match (use cable and connectors with a characteristic input
impedence of 50 Ω ).

Figure 4-5. UUT Wideband AC Voltage Output (Option 5700A-03)

4-24. Setting the Output

To set the output, simply press the following sequence of keys to select an output
function and amplitude:
[numeric keys] → [multiplier] → [function] → E → P
For example, to set the output to 10 mV dc, press:
1 0 m V EO

To set an ac output, press the following additional keys:

[numeric keys] → [multiplier] → H → E
For example, to change the present 10 mV dc to 10 mV ac at 1.8 kHz, press:
1.8KHE

To change the output back to dc, simply press:

0 H E, or
+E

4-22
 Front Panel Operation
Setting the Output 4
5725A

HI

LO

UUT

INPUT SENSE
Ω 4-WIRE

HI HI

LO LO

GUARD

Figure 4-6. UUT Connections: 5725A Amplified Current Output

The following step-by-step procedures explain how to set a desired output and how to use
the features available for each output function:
• DC voltage
• AC voltage
• DC current
• AC current
• Resistance
• Wideband ac voltage (Option 5700A-03)
• Variable phase
• Boost operation (using an auxiliary amplifier)

4-23
5700A/5720A Series II
Operators Manual

4-25. DC Voltage Output

To set a dc voltage output, proceed as follows:
1. Make sure the calibrator is in standby (STANDBY annunciator lit). Press O if
necessary.
2. If the UUT is not connected, connect it now as described earlier in this chapter under
“Connecting the Calibrator to a UUT.”
3. Set the UUT to measure dc voltage on the appropriate range.
4. Press up to eight numeric keys to select a voltage.
5. To change the polarity of your entry, press +.
6. Press U, m, or K if necessary.
7. Press V.
8. The Control Display now shows the amplitude of your entry. If you made an entry
error, press C to clear the display, then reenter the value. The following illustration
of the Control Display assumes an entry of 10 mV:

PREV
MENU

9. Press E. The calibrator clears your entry from the Control Display and copies
it into the Output Display. No voltage is available at the output terminals, however,
until you press O.
10. Press O to activate the calibrator’s output. The UUT will now respond to the
applied voltage.
Two softkey labels appear on the Control Display in the dc voltage function: “Range”
and “Setup Menus.”
• The “Range” softkey selects autorange or lock for the present range. When the range
is set to AUTO (the default setting), the calibrator automatically selects the lowest
possible range. The minimum output on all ranges except the 1100V range is 0V. The
minimum output on the 1100V range is 100V.
• The “Setup Menus” softkey opens the setup menu.

4-24
 Front Panel Operation
Setting the Output 4
4-26. AC Voltage Output
To set an ac voltage output, proceed as follows:
1. Make sure the calibrator is in standby (STANDBY annunciator lit). Press O if
necessary.
2. If the UUT is not connected, connect it now as described earlier in this chapter under
“Connecting the Calibrator to a UUT.”
3. Set the UUT to measure ac voltage on the appropriate range.
4. Press up to seven numeric keys to select a voltage output in volts or dBm.
In the ac voltage function, dBm means decibels relative to 1 mW, calculated for a
600Ω load. The formula to calculate dBm is 10 log (power in mW). For example, if
3.0V is supplied to a 600Ω load, the dBm level is:
10 log (15.0 mW) = 11.7609 dBm.
If you switch to Wideband AC output, but keep dBm as the displayed units, the dBm
value will change. The value changes because dBm is calculated for a 50Ω load in
the Wideband AC output function. Using the same voltage level as in the previous
example, if you switch to Wideband AC output, the dBm level changes to:
10 log (180.0 mW) = 22.5527 dBm.
5. To enter a negative dBm value, press +.
6. Press U, m, or K if necessary.
7. Press V for volts, or press D for a dBm level.
8. The Control Display now shows the amplitude of your entry. If you made an entry
error, press C to clear the display, then reenter the value. The following illustration
of the Control Display assumes an entry of 19V:

PREV
MENU

4-25
5700A/5720A Series II
Operators Manual

9. Press up to five numeric keys to select a frequency, followed by K or m if

necessary. The Control Display now shows the amplitude and frequency of your
entry. If you made an entry error, press C to clear the display, then reenter the
value. The following illustration of the Control Display assumes an entry of 2.8 kHz:

PREV
MENU

10. Press E. The calibrator clears your entry from the Control Display and copies
it into the Output Display. No voltage is available at the output terminals, however,
until you press O.
11. Press O to activate the calibrator’s output. The UUT will now respond to the
applied voltage.
Two softkey labels appear on the Control Display in the ac voltage function: “Phase Ctrls
Menu” and “Setup Menus”:

PREV
MENU

• The “Phase Ctrls Menu” softkey activates the front panel controls for phase output.
(Instructions for setting a phase output are under “Phase Output,” later in this
chapter.)
• The “Setup Menus” softkey opens the setup menu.

Note
The calibrator stays in the ac function after you enter a non-zero frequency.
If you want to change back to dc, simply enter a frequency of 0 Hz or a
signed voltage.

4-26
 Front Panel Operation
Setting the Output 4
4-27. DC Current Output
To set a dc current output, proceed as follows:
1. Make sure the calibrator is in standby (STANDBY annunciator lit). Press O if
necessary.
2. If the UUT is not connected, connect it now as described earlier in this chapter under
“Connecting the Calibrator to a UUT.”
3. Set the UUT to measure dc current on the appropriate range.
4. Press up to seven numeric keys to select an amperage level.
5. To change the polarity of your entry, press +.
6. Press U or m if necessary.
7. Press A.
8. The Control Display now shows the amplitude of your entry. If you made an entry
error, press C to clear the display, then reenter the value. The following illustration
of the Control Display assumes an entry of 30 mA:

PREV
MENU

9. Press E. The calibrator clears your entry from the Control Display and copies
it into the Output Display. No current is available at the output terminals, however,
until you press O.
10. Press O to activate the calibrator’s output. The UUT will now respond to the
applied current.
Three softkey labels appear on the Control Display in the dc current function: “Currnt
Output”, “Range”, and “Setup Menus”:

PREV
MENU

4-27
5700A/5720A Series II
Operators Manual

• The “Currnt Output” softkey selects one of three locations for current output: the
OUTPUT binding post (NORMAL, which is the OUTPUT HI binding post, also the
default setting); AUX, which is the AUX CURRENT OUTPUT binding post, or
5725A, which is the 5725A Amplifier binding posts. (The 5725A must be turned on,
but not necessarily activated.)

Note
If AUX is selected for a calibrator configured for rear output, error
message: “Compliance voltage exceeded” will be displayed. For rear
output, use the NORMAL setting.
• The “Range” softkey selects autorange or lock for the present range. When the range
is set to AUTO (the default setting), the calibrator automatically selects the lowest
possible range.
• The “Setup Menus” softkey opens the setup menu.

4-28. AC Current Output

To set an ac current output, proceed as follows:
1. Make sure the calibrator is in standby (STANDBY annunciator lit). Press O if
necessary.
2. If the UUT is not connected, connect it now as described earlier in this chapter under
“Connecting the Calibrator to a UUT.”
3. Set the UUT to measure ac current on the appropriate range.
4. Press up to seven numeric keys to select an amperage level.
5. Press U or m if necessary.
6. Press A.
7. The Control Display now shows the amplitude of your entry. If you made an entry
error, press C to clear the display, then reenter the value. The following illustration
of the Control Display assumes an entry of 125 mA:

PREV
MENU

4-28
 Front Panel Operation
Setting the Output 4
8. Press up to five numeric keys to select a frequency (followed by K if necessary).
The Control Display now shows the amplitude and frequency of your entry. If you
made an entry error, press C to clear the display, then reenter the value. The
following illustration of the Control Display assumes an entry of 2.5 kHz:

PREV
MENU

9. Press E. The calibrator clears your entry from the Control Display and copies
it into the Output Display. No current is available at the output terminals, however,
until you press O.
10. Press O to activate the calibrator’s output. The UUT will now respond to the
applied current.
Three softkey labels appear on the Control Display in the ac current function: “Currnt
Output”, “Phase Ctrls Menu”, and “Setup Menus” as shown below:

PREV
MENU

• The “Currnt Output” softkey selects one of three locations for current output: the
OUTPUT binding post (NORMAL, which is the OUTPUT HI binding post, also the
default setting); AUX, which is the AUX CURRENT OUTPUT binding post, or
5725A, which is the 5725A Amplifier binding posts. (The 5725A must be turned on,
but not necessarily activated.)

Note
If AUX is selected for a calibrator configured for rear output, error
message: “Compliance voltage exceeded” will be displayed. For rear
output, use the NORMAL setting.

4-29
5700A/5720A Series II
Operators Manual

• The “Phase Ctrls Menu” softkey activates the front panel controls for phase output.
(Instructions for setting a phase output are under “Phase Output,” further on in this
chapter.)
• The “Setup Menus” softkey opens the setup menu.

Note
The calibrator stays in the ac function after you enter a non-zero frequency.
If you want to change back to dc, simply enter a frequency of 0 Hz or a
signed current magnitude.

4-29. Resistance Output

In the resistance function, the calibrator supplies your choice of 17 standard resistance
values or a short at the output terminals. You can display a table of the available
resistance values on the Control Display. To display the table, proceed as follows:
1. Make sure the calibrator is in standby (STANDBY annunciator lit). Press O if
necessary.
2. Press 1, Q, then E.
3. Press the “List Table Values” softkey. The calibrator shows a table of available
resistance values on the Control Display:

PREV
MENU

To select a resistance output, proceed as follows:

1. Make sure the calibrator is in standby (STANDBY annunciator lit). Press O if
necessary.
2. If the UUT is not connected, connect it now as described previously in this chapter
under “Connecting the Calibrator to a UUT.”
3. Set the UUT to read resistance on the appropriate range.
4. Press the numeric keys of the nominal resistance.
5. Press K or m if necessary.
6. Press Q.

4-30
 Front Panel Operation
Setting the Output 4
7. Press E. If you entered a resistance value that is unavailable (as in the
following example of 490Ω), the Control Display prompts you to try again. If you
want to review the available resistance values, press the “List Value Table” softkey.

PREV
MENU

8. After you specify a valid resistance and press E, the calibrator clears your
entry from the Control Display and shows the characterized (true) resistance value on
the Output Display and on the Control Display.
9. Press O. This resistance is now available at the output terminals.
Depending on the value set, two or three softkey labels appear on the control display in
the resistance function: “2 wire Comp”, “List Value Table”, and “Setup Menus”:

PREV
MENU

• The “2 wire Comp” softkey only appears for resistance values of 19 kΩ or lower. It
turns on and off internal two-wire lead compensation circuitry. (See the full
explanation on its use below.)
• The “List Value Table” softkey lists the nominal resistance values that the calibrator
can produce.
• The “Setup Menus” softkey opens the setup menu.
In the resistance function, two features are available to enhance accuracy: four-wire
sensing and two-wire compensation. Two-wire compensation works with either a two-
wire connection or a four-wire connection to a two-wire ohmmeter. A full explanation
follows:

4-31
5700A/5720A Series II
Operators Manual

Four-wire connection is available for all resistance values except 100 MΩ.To activate
four-wire resistance, press X so that the indicator lights. (Figure 4-4A shows the four-
wire connection.)
For calibrating a meter with a two-wire resistance mode such as a typical handheld
DMM, refer to Figures 4-4B through 4-4D. For resistances of 19 kΩ or lower in two-wire
mode, compensation circuitry inside the calibrator is available to remove errors
introduced by resistance in the path between the front panel terminals and the precision
resistor. The softkey label “2 wire Comp” appears on the Control Display when you
select resistances of 19 kΩ or lower. This softkey allows you to disable and enable the
compensation circuitry.
Depending on how you connect the meter, you can use two-wire compensation
referenced at the UUT terminals (Figure 4-4C) or at the calibrator’s terminals (Figure 4-
4D). See “Resistance Output” for information on turning on and off two-wire
compensation circuitry.
Figure 4-4B shows a meter connected in a two-wire connection with the two-wire
compensation circuitry turned off. Use this configuration only if lead resistances are
insignificant. For a two-wire connection, press X so that the indicator is off.
For resistances where uncompensated lead resistances are significant, use the two-wire
compensation circuit and the connection in Figure 4-4C or 4-4D. Use the connection in
Figure 4-4C if you want to calibrate the meter referenced at its terminals. Use the
connection in Figure 4-4D if you want to calibrate the meter referenced at the ends of its
test leads.

4-30. Wideband AC Voltage Output (Option 5700A-03)

To set an output from the Wideband AC Module (Option 5700A-03), proceed from r
or the power-up state as follows:
1. Make sure the calibrator is in standby (STANDBY annunciator lit). Press O if
necessary.
2. If the UUT is not connected, connect it now as described previously in this chapter
under “Connecting the Calibrator to a UUT.”
3. Set the UUT to read ac voltage on the appropriate range.
4. Press w.
5. Press the numeric keys for the desired output, expressed as voltage or a dBm level.

4-32
 Front Panel Operation
Setting the Output 4
In the Wideband AC function, dBm means decibels above or below 1 mW, calculated
for a 50Ω load. The formula to calculate dBm is 10 log (power in mW). For example,
if 3.0V is supplied to a 50Ω load, the dBm level is:
10 log (180.0 mW) = 22.5527 dBm
If you switch to standard ac output, but keep dBm as the displayed units, the dBm
value will change. The value changes because dBm is calculated for a 600Ω load in
the standard ac output function. Using the same voltage level as in the previous
example, if you switch to standard ac output, the dBm level changes to:
10 log (15.0 mW) = 11.7609 dBm.
6. If you want to enter a negative dBm value, press +.
7. Press U or m if necessary.
8. Press V for volts or D for volts expressed as dBm.
9. The Control Display now shows the amplitude of your entry. If you made an entry
error, press C to clear the display, then reenter the value. The following illustration
of the Control Display assumes an entry of 20 dBm:

PREV
MENU

10. Press up to five numeric keys to select a frequency, followed by K or M if

necessary. The Control Display now shows the amplitude and frequency of your
entry. If you made an entry error, press C to clear the display, then reenter the
value. The following illustration of the Control Display assumes an entry of 21 MHz:

PREV
MENU

4-33
5700A/5720A Series II
Operators Manual

11. Press E. The calibrator clears your entry from the Control Display and copies
it into the Output Display. No voltage is available at the WIDEBAND Type “N”
coaxial connector however, until you press O.
12. Press O to activate the calibrator’s output. The UUT will now respond to the
applied voltage.

Note
To deactivate the Wideband AC Module and switch to another output
function, press w. If you are sourcing an ac voltage or dBm level within
the range of the standard ac voltage output mode, that value is selected.
Otherwise, the Output Display reads 0 mV (dc). When you are using units
of dBm and switching between wideband and standard ac voltage output,
the amplitude changes. This change occurs because for the wideband
function, decibel levels are computed for a 50Ω load, and for the standard
ac function, decibel levels are computed for a 600Ω load.

4-31. Variable Phase Output

A variable-phase signal of nominally 2.5V rms is available at the rear panel BNC
connector labeled VARIABLE PHASE OUT when sourcing ac V, wideband voltage, or
ac current outputs. The phase of this signal with respect to the main output signal is
continuously adjustable from -180º to +180º in 1º increments. The rotary knob and
softkeys adjust the phase of this signal, after calling up the phase controls menu using a
softkey. The Control Display shows the phase of the phase output signal as a number and
a cursor on a linear scale graduated in 90º steps from -180º to +180º.
To set and adjust a phase output, proceed as follows:
1. Set an ac voltage or current output as described under “AC Voltage or Current
Output.”
2. Press the “Phase Ctrls Menu” softkey. The Control Display appears as shown below:

PREV
MENU

4-34
 Front Panel Operation
Phase Locking to an External Signal 4
3. Press the “Adjust Phase Shift” softkey. A cursor on the display shows the phase shift
of the variable phase output signal:

PREV
MENU

4. To quickly select a multiple of 90º, press the appropriate softkey.

5. To select a phase output between -180º and 180º (including all intermediate
positions), turn the rotary knob to move the cursor to the desired position on the
scale. The Control Display shows the phase angle in ± degrees.
6. Press the “DONE Phase Adjust” softkey.
7. Press the “Phase Shift” softkey so “ON” appears. The “(∅-SHF” annunciator lights
indicating that variable phase output is on. The variable-phase reference signal stays
on after you leave the phase controls menu, and even when you switch
between current and voltage. It is turned off when you switch to a dc or ohms
function.
8. To reactivate the numeric keypad for controlling the output, press the “DONE Phase
Ctrls” softkey.

4-32. Phase Locking to an External Signal

The phase-lock feature locks the calibrator's main output signal in phase with an external
signal (1 to 10V rms at 10 Hz to 1.2 MHz) applied to the rear panel PHASE LOCK IN
BNC connector. You can use this feature with ac V, wideband voltage, or current outputs,
and combine it with variable phase output. You access the softkey that turns on phase
locking through the phase controls menu. To lock onto an external signal, proceed as
follows:
1. With the external signal source turned off, connect a coaxial cable between the
external signal source and the rear panel PHASE LOCK IN BNC connector.

Note
When using PHASE LOCK IN, make sure the phase lock source is floating
relative to the calibrator’s output. Ground loops that can occur if the two
devices are not isolated can cause amplitude errors in the calibrator’s
output. These errors may be particularly significant in the millivolt
ranges.
2. Set an ac voltage or current output as described under “AC Voltage or Current
Output.”

4-35
5700A/5720A Series II
Operators Manual

3. Press the “Phase Ctrls Menu” softkey. The Control Display appears as shown below:

PREV
MENU

4. Turn on the external signal source.

5. Set the calibrator’s frequency to within 2% of the external source frequency.
6. Press the “Phase Lock” softkey. This locks the calibrator's main output signal in
phase with the external signal applied to the rear panel PHASE LOCK IN BNC
connector. When phase locking is successful, the (∅-LOCK annunciator on the
Output Display lights.
7. Observe the Control Display. If the calibrator cannot lock onto the external signal for
any reason, it displays the following message:

PREV
MENU

8. To reactivate the numeric keypad for controlling the output, press P. Phase locking
remains active until you change the frequency or turn off phase lock using the
“Phase Lock” softkey.

4-33. Using an Auxiliary Amplifier

You can increase the output capability of the calibrator by using an auxiliary amplifier.
The calibrator has rear panel connectors that interface with four different amplifiers.
Three amplifiers can be connected to the calibrator simultaneously, but only one
amplifier can be designated as the voltage boost and one amplifier as the current boost in
the setup menu. (And only one output can be active at a time.) Table 1-1 shows the
ranges and functions supported by the 5725A. The choice of active amplifier and be
changed dynamically in a remote system, since such systems can control any front panel
function.
During boost operation, you operate the amplifier from the calibrator’s front panel. The
calibrator computes and supplies the correct excitation voltages to drive the amplifier.
The Output Display on the calibrator always shows the actual output of the amplifier, not
the excitation output of the calibrator. In general, the amplifier is activated automatically
by selecting an output amplitude only available in its range. In some cases, B is used to
activate and deactivate the selected amplifier. Refer to the following text for specific
operation instructions for each type of amplifier.

4-36
 Front Panel Operation
Using an Auxiliary Amplifier 4
4-34. 5725A Amplifier Output

WWarning
Boosted voltage operation produces high voltage at higher
current levels than normally available from the calibrator.
During boosted voltage operation, the potential risk of injury or
fatal accident is greater than during normal operation.

Note
Refer to the 5725A Instruction Manual for setup and installation
instructions.
The 5725A Amplifier boosts ac voltage and both ac and dc current. Proceed as follows to
set a boosted output from the 5725A Amplifier:
1. Install the 5725A if you have not already done so as described in the 5725A
Instruction Manual.
2. If the “Boost Amp Types” setting in the setup menus has been changed from the
default, select the 5725A for boost operation as described at the beginning of this
chapter.
3. Make sure the calibrator and 5725A are in standby (STANDBY annunciator lit).
Press O if necessary.
4. If the UUT is not connected, connect it now as described earlier in this chapter under
“Connecting the Calibrator to a UUT.” Note that for boosted current, you connect to
the 5725A binding posts, and for boosted voltage, you connect to the calibrator’s
binding posts.
5. Set the UUT to read the appropriate quantity.
6. Enter the desired output value as described under “Setting the Output.” Current
entries beyond the standard range of the calibrator automatically select the amplifier.
Voltage entries in the 220-1100V range automatically select the amplifier. Note
that the 5725A takes over the 1100V range of the calibrator.
7. Boosted voltage output is available at the front or rear panel of the calibrator
(depending on which set of terminals is active). Boosted current output is available at
the front panel of the 5725A Amplifier. When the 5725A binding posts are selected,
the Control Display announces the output location. If your entry has caused a change
of output location, you must press O to activate the amplifier.

4-37
5700A/5720A Series II
Operators Manual

8. When the “Range” softkey is set to “AUTO”, the amplifier automatically turns off
whenever a current level within the range of the calibrator is set. Setting the “Range”
softkey to “LOCKED” disables this auto shut-off, so you can use the amplifier at
lower current levels.

Note
You can have the 5725A source a current below 2.2A to take advantage of
the amplifier's higher compliance voltage. To do so, press the “Range”
softkey to lock onto the 11A range when the calibrator is set for over 2.2A,
or set the lower current and press B O to turn on the amplifier.
9. To deactivate the amplifier, press B again.

4-35. Checking the Calibrator’s Uncertainty Specification

At any time during front panel operation, you can display the uncertainty specification of
the present output of the calibrator by pressing s, which opens a display similar to the
one shown below. To return to normal operation, press P.

PREV
MENU

4-36. Error Mode Operation

The output adjustment controls (arrow keys and the rotary knob) are used to adjust the
output of the calibrator incrementally (except in the resistance function). While this
happens, the Control Display computes and displays the difference between the adjusted
output and the reference level in ±% or ±ppm (parts per million). The reference level is
the original output setting before you adjusted it. When this capability is used to adjust
the output until the UUT reads correctly, the displayed difference is the UUT error for
that output setting. The error is displayed in ±% unless it is ±20 ppm or less.
For example, suppose you set the calibrator to output 10.00000V, and the UUT reading is
high. To determine the error, use the output adjustment controls to adjust the calibrator
until the UUT reads 10.0000V. If, for example, the calibrator’s output display now reads
9.993900, the calibrator calculates and displays a UUT error of +0.0610% on the control
display.
The calibrator uses this formula to calculate the UUT error:

(Reference) - (Final Output)

Error = x 100%
(Reference)

The rotary knob is also a convenient way to change the frequency during ac voltage
testing. To adjust frequency in error mode, for example when testing a meter's flatness,
press a. The 10 Hz digit of the frequency line is highlighted. Press < twice. Now
when you turn the knob, the output frequency increases or decreases 1 kHz per knob
click.
4-38
 Front Panel Operation
Error Mode Operation 4
4-37. Error Mode Overview
The Error Mode Overview explains how to use error mode in general. Following the
overview, a step-by-step procedure explains how to use this mode to read UUT error for
each of the calibrator’s output functions.

4-38. Entering Error Mode

Activate error mode by rotating the rotary knob, pressing an arrow key, or pressing a.
When you enter error mode, the starting value is the reference from which errors are
computed. A new reference is established when you exit and reenter error mode (see
Table 4-4 for a summary).

4-39. Exiting Error Mode

Table 4-3 lists the actions that cause the calibrator to exit error mode.

Table 4-3. Keys that Exit Error Mode

Keys Action

E Returns to the previous reference value.

++E Establishes a new reference.

A new keypad entry + E Establishes a new reference.

N Establishes the present output as a new reference.

Y Establishes a new reference that is equal to ten times the previous

reference value.

Z Establishes a new reference that is equal to one tenth of the previous

reference value.

o Identifies the present output as a zero-scale endpoint for scaling and

establishes 0.0 as the new reference.

S Identifies the present output as a full-scale endpoint for scaling and

causes the display to show scale error.

r Returns to the power-up state.

The “Setup Menus” Softkey Opens the Setup menu.

4-39
5700A/5720A Series II
Operators Manual

4-40. Using Error Mode

When you enter error mode from any output function except resistance, the least
significant digit on the Output Display is highlighted. Entering error mode by pressing
a selects the frequency line for adjustment first (but only if the frequency is not zero).
When you turn the rotary knob, the highlighted digit increments or decrements. Turning
the knob clockwise makes the number more positive; turning the knob counterclockwise
makes the number more negative. As you increment a digit past 9 or decrement a digit
past 0, the adjacent digit carries. < and > select digits to the right and left, and a
selects the upper line (amplitude) and lower line (frequency).
If you attempt to adjust the output beyond the capability of the calibrator, the calibrator
beeps and does not allow the change.
You can quickly verify accuracy of different ranges of a UUT by pressing Y and Z.
When you are in error mode and you press these keys, the calibrator’s output and the new
reference are set to 10 times or one tenth the previous reference value.
In the resistance output function, the edit controls produce a display of the UUT error in a
similar way, except the output of the calibrator does not change as you turn the knob.
Instead, a reading on the Control Display changes, allowing you to match it to the reading
on the UUT. As you change the reading, the calibrator computes and displays UUT error.

4-41. Reading the UUT Error: AC and DC Voltage and Current Output
Proceed as follows to read the error of the UUT in the ac and dc voltage and current
output functions:
1. Set the desired calibration voltage or current, as previously described under “Setting
the Output.”
2. Use the output adjustment controls as required to achieve a reading on the UUT equal
to the original entry on the calibrator. To increment or decrement a higher-order digit,
press <. As you approach the reference value, work progressively back towards
the LSD (least-significant digit) on the calibrator’s output display as necessary by
pressing >. You only need to go one digit past the LSD of the UUT; digits below
that are beyond the resolution of the UUT. The UUT error appears on the Control
Display as shown: (This example assumes that the calibrator is in the dc voltage
function.)

PREV
MENU

4-40
 Front Panel Operation
Introduction to Offset, Scale, and Linearity Errors 4
4-42. Reading the UUT Error: Resistance Output
Proceed as follows to read the error of the UUT in the resistance function:
1. Set the desired resistance output as described under “Setting the Output.”
2. Use the output adjustment controls as required to achieve a reading on the Control
Display (illustrated below) equal to the reading on the UUT. To adjust a higher-order
digit, press <. As you approach the reference value, work progressively back
towards the LSD (least-significant digit) on the calibrator’s Control Display as
necessary by pressing >. You only need to go one digit past the LSD of the UUT;
digits below that are beyond the resolution of the UUT.

PREV
MENU

4-41
5700A/5720A Series II
Operators Manual

4-43. Introduction to Offset, Scale, and Linearity Errors

The performance of a DMM or meter can be plotted as a graph of input stimulus and
meter reading. For a perfect meter, the graph of the input stimulus would exactly match
the graph of the reading.
The calibrator measures and displays the following three types of UUT errors:
• Offset Error
• Scale Error
• Linearity Error

4-44. Offset Error

Offset error can be measured directly by finding the calibrator’s output that causes a
meter reading of 0V. This error is called an offset because it reflects a fixed error that is
present in all meter output readings. For example, if a meter reads 0V when -1.3 mV is
applied, the meter has an offset error of +1.3 mV. Figure 4-7 illustrates this example.

CALIBRATOR
SETTING

0
OFFSET
ERROR = METER READING
+1.3 mV -1.3 mV

Figure 4-7. Offset Error

4-42
 Front Panel Operation
Introduction to Offset, Scale, and Linearity Errors 4
4-45. Scale Error
Scale error, sometimes referred to as gain error, occurs when the slope of the meter's
response curve deviates from one. A meter with only scale error (no offset or linearity
error), will read 0V when 0V is applied, but will read something other than 10V when
10V is applied. For example, if a meter reads 19.900V when 19.903V is applied, the
meter has a scale error of -3 mV. To isolate scale error, offset error must first be
subtracted. Scale error is then simply the error measured near the full-scale endpoint, or:

(Reference full scale) - (Adjusted Calibrator Setting)

Scale Error =
(Reference full scale)

Where “Adjusted calibrator setting” is the adjusted output (using the knob) that results in
the UUT correctly reading “nominal full-scale.” Select a point just down from the UUT
full-scale endpoint for nominal full-scale. This keeps the UUT from ranging while you
make adjustments. For example, you might use 19.9V as the nominal full-scale for a
UUT that ranges at 20V.
The example in Figure 4-8 assumes no offset error. The formula for scale error yields:

19.9 − 19.903
Scale Error = = -0.000151=-0.0151%
19.9

ACTUAL

SCALE
19.903V
ERROR =
-3 mV 19.9V
IDEAL
CALIBRATOR
SETTING

0
METER READING

19.9V

Figure 4-8. Scale Error

4-43
5700A/5720A Series II
Operators Manual

4-46. Linearity Error

Linearity error occurs when the response curve of a meter deviates from a straight line.
This type of error is measured by fixing zero and near-full-scale endpoints on the
response curve, drawing a line through the points, then measuring how far the meter
response deviates from the straight line at various points. The error value is computed
relative to the selected full-scale point. The formula for linearity error is:

(Nominal setting) - (Adjusted 5720A setting)

Linearity Error =
(Nominal full scale)

Where the “nominal setting” is calculated by subtracting the offset error and a
proportional part of the scale error.
Figure 4-9 illustrates linearity error with both offset and scale errors assumed to be zero.
The formula for linearity error yields:

10.0 − 9.993
Linearity Error = = 0.000352 =+0.0352%
19.9

19.9V

CALIBRATOR LINEAR RESPONSE

SETTING

LINEARITY 10.0V
ERROR =
+7 mV 9.993V
ACTUAL
RESPONSE

0
10.0V 19.9V

METER READING

Figure 4-9. Linearity Error

4-47. Combining the Error Types

The actual error of a meter is the combination of all three types of errors. The calibrator
uses o and Sto allow you to separately display all three types of errors directly,
without having to do any calculation.

4-44
 Front Panel Operation
Programming an Offset 4
4-48. Programming an Offset
You can use o when in the dc voltage or current function any time you want to offset
the calibrator’s output by a fixed amount. After you establish an offset, it is subtracted
from all later keyboard entries to compensate for a UUT's offset error. You turn off this
offset by pressing o again. Both the offset value and the keypad-entered reference
value are shown on the Control Display. The Output Display shows the true output value.
The o key may be used to establish a zero-scale endpoint, which you can then use with
Sto check the linearity of a UUT. (See the example under “Linearity Checking Using
Offset and Scale.”)
To program an offset, proceed as follows:
1. Set the calibrator to output 0 mV dc in operate mode. The easiest way to do this is to
press r, then press O.
2. Adjust the calibrator’s output with the rotary knob (and arrow keys if necessary) until
the UUT reads 0V.
3. Press o. This stores the output value as the offset value.
The calibrator’s output value is now 0V minus the offset value, in this example, the 1.3
mV output value is shown on the Output Display. The calibrator’s reference value is set
to 0V. The reference value is shown on the top line of the Control Display. The offset
value is shown on the second line of the Control Display. After step 2, the Control
Display and Output Display look like this:

Output Display

Control Display

If you enter a new value, the offset value is subtracted from the new value to create the
new output. The newly entered value becomes the new reference value shown on the
middle line of the Control Display. For example, if you enter 1V, the Output Display
shows +0.9987000V while the Control Display shows “Ref = 1.0000000V”. The offset
value remains in effect until you press o again, turn off the power, select a different
output function (for example, changing from voltage to current output), or press “Setup
Menus”.

4-45
5700A/5720A Series II
Operators Manual

4-49. Programming a Scale Factor

You can use the S key in ac and dc voltage and current functions to apply a scale
factor to subsequent outputs. After you establish a scale factor, the correct proportion of
it is applied to all subsequent entries to compensate for a UUT's scale error. You turn off
this scale factor by pressing S again. Both the scale error and the keypad-entered value
are shown on the Control Display. The Output Display shows the true output value.
The S key may be used to establish a reference full-scale endpoint, which you can use
with o to check the linearity of a UUT. (See the example under “Linearity Checking
Using Offset and Scale”.)
To program a scale factor, proceed as follows:
1. Set the calibrator to output a level just below the UUT full-scale endpoint. For
example, you might use 19.9V for a UUT that ranges at 20V.
2. Adjust the calibrator’s output with the rotary knob (and arrow keys if necessary) until
the UUT reads the selected output level correctly (19.9V in this example).
3. Press S. This stores a scale factor that would apply this adjustment if this output
level were selected again.
Subsequent calibrator output values will be scaled by this factor. Using the example of
Figure 4-8, the meter reading was 3 mV low at 19.9V. To compensate, the calibrator was
adjusted to 19.003V to get a reading of 19.9V on the meter. Note that the calibrator is
adjusted in the opposite direction of the meter's scale error. So, a factor computed in the
following equation is applied to subsequent calibrator’s output settings until S is
cleared:

19.9V − 19.903V
1− = 1.000151
19.9V

Extending this example, if you now set the calibrator to 10V, the actual output (showing
on the Output Display) is 10.00151V.

4-46
 Front Panel Operation
Linearity Checking Using Offset and Scale 4
4-50. Linearity Checking Using Offset and Scale
Using the calibrator’s offset and scaling features, you can remove a UUT's offset and
scale errors to isolate and display linearity error. The following procedure is an example
that uses o and S to determine both scale and linearity error of a 4 1/2-digit DMM.
In this example, the DMM is set to the 20V dc range, and the calibrator is connected to
the DMM. Figure 4-10 illustrates all three types of errors that are detected by the
calibrator. The numbers in the graph correspond to the conditions encountered in the
example.
1. Set the calibrator to 0 mV in standby. The displays change to:

Output Display Control Display UUT (DMM) Display

2. Use the output adjustment controls (the rotary knob and arrow keys) to adjust the
calibrator’s output for a reading of 0V on the DMM. The displays change to:

Output Display Control Display UUT (DMM) Display

LINEAR
RESPONSE

19.9017
SCALE
19.9
ERROR
19.8987

ACTUAL
CALIBRATOR IDEAL METER
VOLTAGE RESPONSE RESPONSE

10.000208 LINEARITY
ERROR
9.993208

0
OFFSET 19.900
10.000 10.007
ERROR =
+1.3 mV -1.3 mV
METER READING

Figure 4-10. Meter Response vs. Stimulus

4-47
5700A/5720A Series II
Operators Manual

Note
The message “Error >> +999.9999%” occurs because in this case the
reference voltage is 0.
3. Press o to identify this as the DMM zero-scale end point. The displays change to:

Output Display Control Display UUT (DMM) Display

4. Use the numeric keypad to set the calibrator to a point near the end of the DMM
range. (This example uses 19.9V.) The displays change to:

Output Display Control Display UUT (DMM) Display

5. Use the output adjustment controls to adjust the calibrator’s output for a reading of
19.9V (the reference value) on the DMM. The displays change to:

Output Display Control Display UUT (DMM) Display

6. Press Sto identify this as the full-scale endpoint for the DMM range.
7. To check the linearity error of the DMM, select an output at a linearity checkpoint
somewhere in the middle of the range, such as 10V. Entering 10V changes the
displays to:

Output Display Control Display UUT (DMM) Display

4-48
 Front Panel Operation
Setting Output Limits 4
The 10.000208V output setting is calculated by the calibrator using the following
equation:

19.9V − 19.903V
1− = 1.0001508
19.9V

This is applied to 10V to yield the following:

10V x 1.0001508 = 10.001508V
The 1.3 mV zero offset is then subtracted:
10.001508V − 0.0013V = 10.000208V

8. Use the output adjustment controls to adjust the calibrator’s output for a reading of
10.0V (the reference value) on the DMM. The displays change to:

Output Display Control Display UUT (DMM) Display

The Control Display now shows that the DMM scale error at 19.9V is -0.0151%, and the
DMM linearity error at 10V is +0.0352%.

4-49
5700A/5720A Series II
Operators Manual

4-51. Setting Output Limits

An output limit feature is available to help prevent accidental damage to a UUT from
overcurrent or overvoltage conditions. This feature allows you to preset the maximum
positive and negative allowable voltage or current output. Entry limits you set prevent
any input greater than the limit from being activated by entry through the front panel
keys or the output adjustment controls. Positive limits for voltage and current set the
limits for ac voltage and current. Default entry limits after power-up or r are the
specified maximum and minimum for each output function.

4-52. Setting Voltage and Current Limits

To set voltage and current entry limits, proceed as follows from r, the power-up state,
or any direct operation menu:
1. Press L. The display changes to:

PREV
MENU

2. Press one of the softkeys under “Voltage.” The display changes to:

PREV
MENU

3. Press the “Change Upper Limit” or the “Change Lower Limit” softkey, then press the
numeric keys for the desired voltage limit and U, m, or K if necessary,
followed by E.

Note
The upper voltage limit sets the limits for both dc and ac voltage.
4. Press P.

4-50
 Front Panel Operation
Sample Applications 4
5. To display or change the current entry limits, press one of the softkeys under
“Current.” The display changes to:

PREV
MENU

6. Press the “Change Upper Limit” or the “Change Lower Limit” softkey, then press the
numeric keys for the desired current limit and U, m, or K if necessary,
followed by E.

Note
The upper current limit sets the limit for both dc and ac current.
7. Press P twice.

4-53. Sample Applications

Sample methods for approaching a few selected applications are provided here. Included
are the following:
• Calibrating a Fluke 70 Series 3½ digit handheld multimeter
• Calibrating a Fluke 8840A Series 5½ digit multimeter
• Testing the flatness of a wideband voltmeter

4-54. Calibrating Fluke 70 Series Multimeter

For many users, calibrating a handheld DMM is a major part of the calibrator’s workload.
This example goes through the steps necessary to calibrate a Fluke 70 Series Multimeter.

Note:
These procedures are included here as an example. The 70 Series Service
Manual contains the authoritative testing and calibration procedures for 70
Series meters.
Two procedures are described here. The first tests each function and range for
compliance to specifications. The second is the calibration procedure for the 70 Series
meters. The 70 Series Service Manual gives instructions for disassembly and access to
the pca (printed circuit assembly). You will need to access the pca for the calibration
procedure.
Before connecting the calibrator to the 70 Series Multimeter (hereafter referred to as "the
meter"), you need to determine what type of cables to use and whether to use internal or
external guarding and sensing. This decision-making process is covered next.

4-51
5700A/5720A Series II
Operators Manual

4-55. Cables
According to the text under “Connecting the Calibrator to a UUT,” the 5440A-7002
(banana plugs) or 5440A-7003 (spade lugs) Low-Thermal Cables are recommended for:
• All DC voltage
• All resistance
• AC voltage <10 kHz
• AC current ≤2 A ≤ 0 kHz
• DC current ≤ 2A
Since all of the 70 Series tests include these functions, you should use the 5440A-7002 or
5440A-7003 Low-Thermal Cables, if possible. However, the thermal emf errors that the
Low-Thermal cables are designed to reduce are not significant when calibrating a 3½
digit meter. Therefore, if you have the recommended Low-Thermal Cables, use them.
Otherwise, ordinary insulated test leads will suffice.

4-56. Guarding
Because the 70 Series Multimeters are battery operated, their inputs have no connection
to earth ground. Therefore, setting the calibrator to internal guard is appropriate.

4-57. Sensing
External sensing is required only when the voltage drop in the cables is significant. The
following data determines the significance of the voltage drop in the cables:
• The input impedance of the 70 Series Multimeters is 10 MΩ.
• The total resistance of the Model 5440A-7002 Low-Thermal Cables is 30 mΩ.
• The basic dc voltage accuracy of the most accurate of the 70 Series, the Model 77, is
0.3%.
The percentage of error caused by voltage drop in the cables is:
0.3 x 100/10,000 = 0.003%, or 1/100th of the accuracy of the Model 77.
This voltage drop is not significant, so a two-wire connection (Internal Sense) is
appropriate.

4-52
 Front Panel Operation
Sample Applications 4
4-58. Testing the Meter
You can use the error mode feature of the calibrator to test the meter. To verify that all
ranges of all functions are within specifications, proceed as follows:
1. Turn on the calibrator and allow it to warm up.
2. Execute dc zeros calibration. Do this by pressing the following sequence of softkeys:
“Setup Menus” → “Cal” → “Zero”
3. Press P twice to get out of the calibration menu.
4. Verify that the EX GRD and EX SNS indicators are off; if either is lit, press X and
x as necessary.
5. Test the dc voltage function as follows:
a. Verify that the calibrator is in standby and connect the meter as shown in
Figure 4-11.
b. Turn on the meter and set its function switch to dcV.
c. Set the warmed up calibrator to 2.7V dc. Press O.
d. Use the output adjustment controls to adjust the calibrator’s output for a reading
of +2.70 on the meter.
e. Verify that the error shown on the control display is less than the specification
for the meter (see the service manual for the specifications).

UUT
CALIBRATOR
: OFF : OFF
EX SNS EX GRD
OUTPUT SENSE
VΩ A VΩ

WIDEBAND
HI HI

LO LO

HI

10A VΩ AUX GUARD GROUND

CURRENT
300mA COM

NC

Figure 4-11. Cable Connections for Testing a Fluke 70 Series Multimeter

f. Check the meter error at 27V and 270V. Hint: use Y. See if the errors are
within specification. When Y causes the output to go over 22V, the calibrator
goes into standby. When this happens, press O to operate.

4-53
5700A/5720A Series II
Operators Manual

g. Check the meter error at 1000V. See if it is within specification.

h. Press r on the calibrator, verify that the STANDY annunciator is lit, and set
the meter function switch to 300 mV.
i. Check the meter error at 300 mV. See if it is within specification.
6. Test the ac voltage function:
a. Press r on the calibrator and set the meter function switch to acV.
b. Check the error against specifications at the following voltages and frequencies:
Voltage Frequency
2.7V 100 Hz
2.7V 500 Hz
750V 100 Hz
750V 1000 Hz
7. Test the dc current function:
a. Press r on the calibrator and set the meter function switch to dcI.
b. Set the calibrator to 1.99A but do not press O yet.
c. Press the “Currnt Output” softkey until the AUX label appears.
d. Press O on the calibrator.
e. Use the output adjustment controls to adjust the calibrator’s output for a reading
of +1.99 on the meter.
f. Verify that the error shown on the control display is within specification.
g. Set the meter function switch to 300 mA, move the current lead to the 300 mA
terminal, and check the error at 27 mA and 200 mA.
8. Test the resistance function:
a. Press r on the calibrator and set the meter function switch to ohms.
b. Set the calibrator to 100Ω and press O.
c. Press the “2 wire Comp” softkey to turn on two-wire lead-drop compensation.
d. Use the output adjustment controls to adjust the calibrator’s output until the
reading on the Control Display is the same as the reading on the meter.
e. Verify that the error is within specification.
f. Repeat steps d and e for the following values, leaving two-wire compensation
turned on for 1 kΩ and 10 kΩ only:
1 kΩ, 10 kΩ, 100 kΩ, 1 MΩ, 10 MΩ
9. Press r on the calibrator. Meter testing is complete.

4-59. Calibrating the Meter

Continue with calibration if any range was out of tolerance in the previous procedure.

4-54
 Front Panel Operation
Sample Applications 4
Note
The adjustment for calibrating the meter requires disassembling the meter.
Refer to the diagrams and access procedures in the 70 Series Service
Manual.
1. Verify that the calibrator is set to 0V dc in standby. Press r if it is not.
2. Turn on the meter, and set its function switch to dcV.
3. Connect a set of test leads to the meter as shown in Figure 4-12.
4. Set the calibrator to 3V dc and press O.
5. Adjust R8 (located just to the left of the rotary switch on the pca) in the meter for a
display reading of +3.00V dc ±.001V.
6. Press r on the calibrator. Disconnect and turn off the meter. Calibration is
complete.

UUT
CALIBRATOR
: OFF : OFF
EX SNS EX GRD OUTPUT SENSE
V ΩA VΩ
R8
WIDEBAND
HI HI

LO LO

HI

10A VΩ AUX GUARD GROUND

CURRENT
300mA COM

NC

Figure 4-12. Cable Connections for Calibrating a Fluke 70 Series Multimeter

4-55
5700A/5720A Series II
Operators Manual

4-60. Calibrating a Fluke Model 8840A Series Digital Multimeter

This example calibrates a 5-1/2 digit Fluke 8840A DMM. Procedures used in this
example are for illustrative purposes. For the authoritative and complete calibration
procedures for the 8840A, refer to the 8840A Instruction Manual.

4-61. Cables
According to the text under “Connecting the Calibrator to a UUT,” the 5440A-7002 or
5440A-7003 Low-Thermal Cables are recommended for:
• All dc voltage
• All resistance
• AC voltage < 10 kHz
• AC current ≤ 2A ≤ 10 kHz
• DC current ≤ 2A
Since all of the 8840A tests include these functions, you should use the Low-Thermal
Cables. The 8840A’s outputs all have recessed banana connectors, so use the 5440A-
7002 Low Thermal Cables, which have banana plugs.

4-62. Guarding
The 8840A inputs are not grounded, so you should establish the ground point at the
calibrator. To do so, set the calibrator to internal guard (x indicator off), and connect
the 8840A to the calibrator as Figure 4-13 shows.

4-56
 Front Panel Operation
Sample Applications 4
A. V, mA, AND TWO-WIRE OHMS: 100k Ω AND ABOVE CALIBRATOR
OUTPUT SENSE
CAL ENABLE VΩA VΩ

WIDEBAND
HI HI

INPUT

LO LO

: OFF
EX SNS

HI
: OFF
EX GRD
AUX GUARD GROUND
CURRENT
8840A NC

B. TWO-WIRE OHMS: 10k Ω AND BELOW

CALIBRATOR
NC

OUTPUT SENSE
VΩ A VΩ

CAL ENABLE
WIDEBAND
HI HI

LO LO

: ON
EX SNS

HI
: OFF
EX GRD
AUX GUARD GROUND
CURRENT
8840A 2-WIRE
COMP
ON
NC
CAUTION

USE CONNECTIONS WITH EXPOSED

PLUG TIPS FOR THE OHMS FUNCTION ONLY.
CALIBRATOR
C. FOUR-WIRE OHMS

OUTPUT SENSE
VΩA VΩ

NC CAL ENABLE
WIDEBAND
HI HI

INPUT

LO LO

: ON
EX SNS
HI

: OFF
EX GRD
AUX GUARD GROUND
CURRENT
8840A 2-WIRE
COMP
NC OFF

Figure 4-13. 8840A Calibration Connections

4-57
5700A/5720A Series II
Operators Manual

4-63. Sensing
External sensing is required only when the voltage drop in the cables is significant. The
following data determines the significance of the voltage drop in the cables:
• The input impedance of the 8840A is ≥ 10,000 MΩ for ranges up to 20V, and 10 MΩ
for the 200V and 1000V ranges.
• The total resistance of the Model 5440A-7002 Low-Thermal Cables is 30 mΩ.
Cable voltage drop is insignificant because this is a high-impedance meter, so in this case
internal sensing is appropriate.
External sensing should be used for resistance calibration in the two-wire function,
however, so the calibrator’s two-wire compensation circuitry can sense at the meter
terminals.

4-64. Basic Calibration Procedure

The basic calibration procedure consists of the following four parts. These parts must be
performed in the order given.
1. Calibration setup procedure
2. A/D calibration
3. Offset and gain calibration for each function and range
4. High-frequency ac calibration (True RMS AC option only)

4-65. Calibration Setup Procedure

1. Allow the 8840A to stabilize in an environment with ambient temperature of 18 to
28ºC and relative humidity less than 75%.
2. Turn the 8840A on, and allow it to warm up for at least one hour.
3. Turn the calibrator on, and allow it to warm up for at least 30 minutes.
4. Execute dc zeros calibration. Do this by pressing the following sequence of softkeys:
“Setup Menus” → “Cal” →“Zero”
5. Press P twice to get out of the calibration menu.
6. Enable 8840A calibration mode by pressing the 8840A CAL ENABLE switch with a
small screwdriver or other suitable instrument. (The CAL ENABLE switch is located
on the lower right side of the display and is normally covered by a calibration seal.)
7. Verify that the calibrator’s STANDBY annunciator is lit and connect the calibrator to
the 8840A using Low Thermal Cables as Figure 4-13A shows.

4-58
 Front Panel Operation
Sample Applications 4
4-66. A/D Calibration
The a/d calibration procedure calibrates the analog-to-digital converter for offset, gain,
and linearity. The 8840A automatically selects the a/d calibration procedure when the
CAL ENABLE switch is first pressed. The procedure must be performed in its entirety,
and may not be performed in part. If the a/d calibration is discontinued prior to
completion, the last complete set of a/d calibration constants will be retained unchanged.
To perform a/d calibration, proceed as follows:
1. The 8840A displays a prompt for the first reference source, 0V dc (i.e., a short).
2. Each time the 8840A prompts you for a reference source, set the calibrator to the
requested value, and press the 8840A STORE button. When you press STORE, the
numeric display field blanks while the 8840A performs the necessary calculations.
(Do not change the calibrator’s output while the display is blank.) The 8840A then
displays the next prompt. For reference, all prompts are shown in Table 4-4.

Note
The 8840A automatically checks that the reference input is near the value
prompted and displays ERROR 41 if the reference input exceeds a specific
tolerance. (See Advanced Features and Special Considerations in the
8840A Instruction Manual for more information.)
3. After the last input is stored, the 8840A begins taking readings in the 2V range of the
VDC function. (The 8840A CAL annunciator remains on.) Verify a/d calibration
using settings in Table 4-5. If you wish to repeat the a/d calibration procedure, press
the 8840A A/D button.

Table 4-4. 8840A A/D Converter Calibration Prompts

Step 8840A Prompt

A O.OV DC (short)

B -0.03V DC

C -1.01V DC

D +0.99V DC

E +0.51V DC

F -0.51V DC

G -0.26V DC

H +0.26V DC

I +0.135V DC

J -0.135V DC

K -0.0725V DC

L +0.0725V DC

4-59
5700A/5720A Series II
Operators Manual

Table 4-5. 8840A A/D Calibration Allowable Errors

Step Calibrator Output Allowable Error

A 0.0V DC (short) ± 2 counts

B -0.03V ± 2 counts

C +0.03V ± 2 counts

D -0.660V ± 3 counts

E +0.660V ± 3 counts

F -1.970V ± 4 counts

G +1.970V ± 4 counts

The a/d calibration procedure is an iterative process. Each pass through the procedure
uses the constants stored previously and improves them. Normally, one pass is adequate.
However, if the calibration memory has been erased or replaced, or the a/d converter has
undergone repair, the a/d calibration procedure must be performed twice.
Because the a/d calibration procedure is iterative, the instrument's performance can be
slightly enhanced by going through the procedure more than twice. However, this is not
necessary to meet the 8840A's published specifications.

4-67. Offset and Gain Calibration

The offset and gain calibration procedure calibrates the 8840A's offsets and gains by
applying a high and low input for every range of each function. To save time, the 8840A
uses each input for as many ranges as possible.
A function is calibrated by pressing the corresponding function button. Once a function is
selected, the 8840A automatically steps through each range of that function, prompting
you for the necessary calibrator outputs. (The prompts are shown in Table 4-6.) The
8840A does not automatically select another function after one function has been
completely calibrated; therefore, the functions may be calibrated in any order.
To perform offset and gain calibration, proceed as follows:
1. Ensure that a/d calibration has been completed.
2. Verify the the calibrator is in standby and connected to the 8840A as shown in Figure
4-13A.
3. Select the 8840A VDC function by pressing the VDC function button. The 8840A
displays the first prompt for that function.
4. Each time the 8840A prompts you for a calibrator output, apply this output and press
the 8840A STORE button. When you press STORE, the numeric display field blanks
while the 8840A performs the necessary calculations. (Do not change the reference
source while the display is blank.) The 8840A then displays the next prompt. For
reference, all prompts are shown in Table 4-6.

4-60
 Front Panel Operation
Sample Applications 4
Table 4-6. 8840A Offset and Gain Calibration Prompts

Step Displayed Prompt

VDC VAC (1) 2-Wire kΩ mA DC mA AC (1)

4-Wire kΩ

A +0.00 mV DC (short) 10.0 mV AC 0.00Ω (short) 0.0 mA DC (open) 100 mA AC

B +190.0 mV DC 100.0 mV AC 100.0Ω 1000 mA DC 1000 mA AC

C +1.900V DC 1.000V AC 1.000 kΩ

D +19.00V DC 10.00V AC 10.00 kΩ Steps C through G

E +190.0V DC 100.0V AC 100.0 kΩ not applicable for these functions.

F +1000V DC 500V AC 1000 kΩ

G Step G not applicable for these functions 10.00 MΩ

1. Inputs should be at 1 kHz ±10%. Performance may be enhanced for specific frequencies (see 8840A
Operators Manual for more information).

5. After the last range is calibrated, the 8840A begins taking readings in the highest
range so that you may verify its calibration. (The CAL annunciator remains on.) To
verify the calibration for the other ranges, press the corresponding range button.
(Pressing a function button begins the offset and gain calibration procedure for that
function.)
6. Repeat steps 2, 3, and 4 for the remaining functions.
Both two-wire and four-wire ohms functions must be calibrated. (The V ac and mA
ac functions require calibration only if the True RMS AC option is installed.)
• To calibrate two-wire ohms 100 kΩ and above, use the connection shown in
Figure 4-13A.
• To calibrate two-wire ohms 10 kΩ and below, use the connection shown in
Figure 4-13B and turn on the calibrator’s two-wire compensation.
• To calibrate four-wire ohms, use the connection shown in Figure 4-13C, turn off
the calibrator’s two-wire compensation, and press X so that its indicator is lit.
For the mA ranges, use the connection in Figure 4-13A and set the calibrator’s
current output binding post to AUX before pressing O.
7. When all functions have been calibrated, exit the calibration mode by pressing the
8840A CAL ENABLE switch, and attach a calibration certification sticker over the
CAL ENABLE switch. (If the True RMS AC option is installed, instead of attaching
the calibration sticker proceed to the High-Frequency AC Calibration procedure
which follows.)

4-61
5700A/5720A Series II
Operators Manual

4-68. High Frequency AC Calibration

The High Frequency AC Calibration procedure calibrates the response of the 8840A ac
voltage function from 20 kHz to 100 kHz. If the True RMS AC option is not installed,
selecting this procedure results in an error message.
The calibrator’s output used in this procedure should normally be between 90 and 100
kHz. An output of 100 kHz (nominal) is recommended. For special applications,
performance may be optimized at other frequencies. See “Optimizing AC Calibration at
Other Frequencies” in the 8840A Instruction Manual for more information.
To perform high-frequency ac calibration, proceed as follows:
1. Ensure that offset and gain calibration has been completed for the VAC function.
2. Select the High-Frequency AC Calibration procedure by pressing the 8840A HF AC
button. The 8840A displays the first prompt (100 mV AC). The “U” on the 8840A
display indicates the High-Frequency AC Calibration procedure has been selected.
3. Each time the 8840A prompts you for a reference amplitude, apply this amplitude to
the HI and LO INPUT terminals, and press the STORE button. When you press
STORE, the numeric display field blanks while the 8840A performs the
necessary calculations. (Do not change the reference source while the display is
blank.) The 8840A then displays the next prompt. For reference, all prompts are
shown in Table 4-7.
4. After the last range is calibrated, the 8840A begins taking readings in the highest
range so that you may verify its calibration. To verify the calibration for the other
ranges, push the corresponding range button. The CAL annunciator remains on.
5. The calibration procedure is now completed. Exit the calibration mode by pressing
the 8840A CAL ENABLE switch, and attach a calibration certification sticker over
the CAL ENABLE switch.

Table 4-7. 8840A High-Frequency AC Calibration Prompts

Step 8840A Prompt

A 100.0 mV AC

B 1.000V AC

C 10.00V AC

D 100.0V AC

E 200.0V AC

4-62
 Front Panel Operation
Sample Applications 4
4-69. Performing A Wideband Flatness Test
Wideband rms voltmeters such as the Fluke 8920 Series measure ac voltage into the RF
spectrum. One type of error in wideband rms voltmeters is flatness error, or error due to
uneven frequency response.
Two example procedures related to wideband flatness are given here. The first example is
a procedure to test the flatness or frequency response error of a wideband voltmeter to
within the uncertainty of the Wideband AC Module (Option 5700A-03) flatness
specification. The second example is a technique that transfers the accuracy of the
calibrator's main ac voltage output to the output of the Wideband AC Module at a low
frequency, then reads the absolute error of a meter with respect to the flatness
specification of the Wideband AC Module at a high frequency.
Example 1:
1. Connect the 3-foot cable supplied with the Wideband AC Module to the
WIDEBAND connector to the wideband voltmeter input through the supplied 50Ω
terminator.
2. Set the calibrator’s wideband output to 1V at 1 kHz.
3. Adjust the wideband output with the output adjustment controls for a reading of
1.00V on the wideband voltmeter.
4. Press N to establish this as a new reference.
5. Press 1 0 m H E to set the frequency to 10 MHz.
6. Adjust the wideband output again with the output adjustment controls for a reading
of 1.00V on the wideband meter.
7. The control display now shows the frequency response error to within the uncertainty
of the Wideband AC Module flatness specification.

4-63
5700A/5720A Series II
Operators Manual

Example 2:
1. Connect the main output terminals of the calibrator to the wideband voltmeter input.
2. Set the calibrator’s main output to 1V at 1 kHz.
3. Read the meter and record the reading. (Let us assume, for example, that the meter
reads 0.999V.)
4. Disconnect the leads from the main output terminals, and connect the the calibrator’s
WIDEBAND connector to the wideband voltmeter input through the supplied 50Ω
terminator.
5. Press w.
6. Adjust the calibrator’s wideband output with the output adjustment controls for the
same reading as in step 3 (0.999V in our example). The Wideband AC Module is
now sourcing an accurate 1V, referenced to the main output of the calibrator. (This
transfers the accuracy specification of the main ac output to the Wideband AC
Module at 1V @ 1 kHz.)
7. Press N to establish this as a new reference.
8. Press 1 0 m H E to set the calibrator’s frequency to 10 MHz.
9. Adjust the calibrator’s wideband output with the output adjustment controls for a
reading of 1.00V on the wideband meter.
10. The Control Display now shows the absolute (total) error of the wideband meter to
within the uncertainty of the Wideband AC Module flatness specification.

4-64
 Chapter 5
Remote Operation

Title Page

5-1. Introduction........................................................................................... 5-3

5-2. Using the IEEE-488 Port for Remote Control ...................................... 5-4
5-3. IEEE-488 Bus Restrictions............................................................... 5-4
5-4. Bus Setup Procedure......................................................................... 5-4
5-5. Using the RS-232C Port for Remote Control ....................................... 5-5
5-6. Serial Remote Control Setup Procedure........................................... 5-6
5-7. Exceptions for Serial Remote Control.............................................. 5-7
5-8. Command Syntax Information.............................................................. 5-7
5-9. Parameter Syntax Rules.................................................................... 5-8
5-10. Extra Space Characters..................................................................... 5-9
5-11. Terminators....................................................................................... 5-9
5-12. Incoming Character Processing ........................................................ 5-9
5-13. Response Message Syntax................................................................ 5-10
5-14. Input Buffer Operation.......................................................................... 5-10
5-15. Commands ............................................................................................ 5-10
5-16. Multiple Commands ......................................................................... 5-11
5-17. Coupled Commands ......................................................................... 5-11
5-18. Sequential and Overlapped Commands............................................ 5-12
5-19. Commands Ignored When Not in Remote ....................................... 5-12
5-20. Commands that Require the Calibration Switch to be Set ............... 5-12
5-21. Long Term Commands..................................................................... 5-12
5-22. Local-to-Remote State Transitions ....................................................... 5-43
5-23. Checking the Calibrator’s Status .......................................................... 5-45
5-24. Serial Poll Status Byte ...................................................................... 5-47
5-25. Service Request Line (SRQ) ........................................................ 5-48
5-26. Service Request Enable Register.................................................. 5-48
5-27. Loading the SRE .......................................................................... 5-48
5-28. Event Status Register........................................................................ 5-49
5-29. Bit Assignments for the ESR and ESE......................................... 5-49

5-1
5700A/5720A Series II
Operators Manual

5-30. Reading the ESR and ESE ........................................................... 5-50

5-31. Loading the ESE .......................................................................... 5-50
5-32. Instrument Status Register................................................................ 5-51
5-33. Instrument Status Change Register................................................... 5-51
5-34. Instrument Status Change Enable Register ...................................... 5-51
5-35. Bit Assignments for the ISR, ISCR, and ISCE ............................ 5-51
5-36. Reading the ISR, ISCR, or ISCE ................................................. 5-52
5-37. Loading the ISCE......................................................................... 5-52
5-38. Fault Queue ...................................................................................... 5-53
5-39. IEEE-488 Interface Configuration........................................................ 5-54
5-40. Bus Communication Overview............................................................. 5-55
5-41. Definition: Queries and Commands ................................................. 5-56
5-42. Functional Elements Of Commands................................................. 5-56
5-43. Interface Messages ........................................................................... 5-58
5-44. The IEEE-488 Connector...................................................................... 5-60
5-45. Remote Program Examples................................................................... 5-61
5-46. Printing Main Output Calibration Shift Results ............................... 5-61
5-47. Verifying a Meter ............................................................................. 5-62
5-48. Remote Calibration........................................................................... 5-62
5-49. DC Zeros ...................................................................................... 5-62
5-50. Calibration.................................................................................... 5-63
5-51. Calibration Check ........................................................................ 5-64
5-52. Wideband AC Module (Option 5700A-03) Gain Calibration...... 5-65
5-53. Using *OPC?, *OPC, and *WAI ..................................................... 5-66
5-54. Writing an SRQ and Fault Handler .................................................. 5-67
5-55. Emulating a Fluke 5100B or 5200A Calibrator.................................... 5-68
5-56. Entering Emulation Mode ................................................................ 5-68
5-57. Exiting Emulation Mode .................................................................. 5-69
5-58. The 5720’s Display During Emulation............................................. 5-69
5-59. 5100B Emulation .................................................................................. 5-69
5-60. Local-to-Remote Transitions............................................................ 5-69
5-61. Current Output Location................................................................... 5-70
5-62. Differences in the 5700A/5720A Series II and
5100B Ohms Function.................................................................... 5-70
5-63. Ohms Remote Program Modifications for 5100B Emulation .......... 5-71
5-64. 5200A Emulation.................................................................................. 5-72
5-65. Local-to-Remote Transitions............................................................ 5-72
5-66. Voltage and Frequency Ranges ........................................................ 5-72
5-67. Rounding Numeric Entries ............................................................... 5-73
5-68. Settling Times................................................................................... 5-73
5-69. Programming External Sensing ........................................................ 5-74
5-70. Overload Conditions......................................................................... 5-74
5-71. Phase Lock Errors............................................................................. 5-74

5-2
 Remote Operation
Introduction 5

5-1. Introduction
The calibrator is capable of operating under remote control of an instrument controller,
computer, or terminal, as well as under direct local control from the front panel. Remote
control can be interactive, with the user controlling each step from a terminal, or can be
set up to run automatically, taking commands from a computer within an automated
system. This chapter tells you how to connect, configure, and operate the 5700A/5720A
Series II in remote mode.
The remote programmer uses a language of commands called “device-dependent
commands” to duplicate the functions of the front panel controls.
An alternative language capability is included for users of the Fluke Model 5100B. It lets
the 5700A/5720A Series II emulate a 5100B in response to commands and allows
substituting either one of these calibrators into a 5100B system with no, or in some cases
minor, software modifications.

Note
If you own a previous version of the 5700A calibrator, you can use its
remote programs to operate the 5700A/5720A Series II.

WWarning
The calibrator can produce voltages up to 1100V rms and must
be programmed with caution to prevent hazardous voltages
from being produced without sufficient warning to the operator.
Programs should be written carefully and tested extensively to
ensure safe operation of the calibrator. We suggest that you
include error-catching routines in your programs to ensure that
your instrument performs as you intended. By setting the
Service Request Enable register (SRE), described in paragraph
5-26, the calibrator can be programmed to cause an SRQ when
an error is detected.
The following example shows a skeleton program that includes
error-catching.
1Ø PRINT @4, “CLS” !Clear status
2Ø PRINT @4, “*sre 8” !Set SRE Error Available bit
3Ø ON SRE GOTO 1ØØØ !Enable controller SRQ function
1ØØ !Put body of program here

9ØØ STOP !Put body of program here

1ØØØ REM start of SRQ Handler

1Ø1Ø Print @4, “FAULT?” !Request fault code
1Ø2Ø Input @4, A%
1Ø3Ø Print @4, “EXPLAIN? “;A% !Get explanation of fault code
1Ø4Ø Input @4, A$
1Ø5Ø Print “Fault “;A$” detected” !Print message to programmer
1Ø6Ø Print @4, “STBY” !Set 57ØØA to standby
1Ø7Ø Stop

5-3
5700A/5720A Series II
Operators Manual

5-2. Using the IEEE-488 Port for Remote Control

The calibrator is fully programmable for use on the IEEE Standard 488.1 interface bus
(IEEE-488 bus). The interface is also designed in compliance with supplemental standard
IEEE-488.2. Devices connected to the bus in a system are designated as talkers, listeners,
talker/listeners, or controllers. Under the remote control of an instrument controller, the
calibrator operates exclusively as a talker/listener on the IEEE-488 bus.
This manual assumes you know the basics of the IEEE-488 interface bus. For an
introduction to the bus, request Fluke Application Bulletin AB-36, “IEEE Standard 488-
1978 Digital Interface for Programmable Instrumentation.”

5-3. IEEE-488 Bus Restrictions

The following restrictions apply to all IEEE-488 systems:
1. A maximum of 15 devices can be connected in a single IEEE-488 bus system.
2. The maximum length of IEEE-488 cable used in one IEEE-488 system is either: 2
meters times the number of devices in the system, or 20 meters, whichever is less.

5-4. Bus Setup Procedure

Setting up the calibrator on the IEEE-488 bus requires only a choice of address and the
connection to a controller. Once you have these items, proceed as follows to set up the
calibrator for remote operation.
1. Turn the calibrator’s power off
2. Attach the IEEE-488 cable to the rear panel IEEE-488 connector. Fluke shielded
cables Y8021 (1m), Y8022 (2m), or Y8023 (4m), are recommended.
3. Turn the calibrator’s power on.
4. Press the “Setup Menus” softkey.
5. Press the “Instmt Setup” softkey to open the Instrument Setup Menu, as shown:

PREV
MENU

5-4
 Remote Operation
Using the RS-232C Port for Remote Control 5
6. Press the “Remote Port Setup” softkey. The remote port setup menu appears:

PREV
MENU

7. Press the “Remote Port” softkey so that GPIB (General Purpose Interface Bus)
appears. The GPIB port is the same as the IEEE-488 port.
8. Press the “Remote Lang” softkey until the correct mode appears. Select the mode
according to the following options.
• Select NORMAL for all remote applications unless you are replacing a Fluke
Model 5100B or 5200A with the 5700A/5720A Series II in an existing remote
system.
• If you are replacing a 5100B with the 5700A/5720A Series II, press the “Remote
Lang” softkey until “5100” appears below the key label. This selects 5100B
emulation mode which permits you to run 5100B commands on the
5700A/5720A Series II.
• If you are replacing a 5200A with the 5700A/5720A Series II, press the “Remote
Lang” softkey until “5200” appears. This selects 5200A emulation mode, which
permits you to run 5200A commands on the 5700A/5720A Series II.
When in either 5100B or 5200A emulation mode, the 5700A/5720A Series II
responds the commands specified for the instrument it is emulating; it does not
respond to the commands described in this chapter. For more information about
emulation mode, refer to “5100B Emulation Mode” or “5200A Emulation Mode” in
this chapter.
9. If you wish to change the bus address from its factory default of 4, press the “GPIB
Port Setup” softkey. The GPIB port setup menu appears:

PREV
MENU

10. Change the address by pressing the “down” or “up” softkeys. Addresses are allowed
in the range of 0 to 30. The address you select is saved in nonvolatile memory, and
the IEEE-488 interface is changed to conform to the selection.

5-5. Using the RS-232C Port for Remote Control

Skip these instructions if you are using an IEEE-488 controller such as the Fluke 1722A.
This procedure is intended for those who are using the calibrator's serial interface for
remote control from a terminal or computer with a serial interface.

5-5
5700A/5720A Series II
Operators Manual

5-6. Serial Remote Control Setup Procedure.

1. Turn the calibrator’s power on.
2. Press the “Setup Menus” softkey.
3. Press the “Instmt Setup” softkey. The Instrument Setup Menu appears:

PREV
MENU

4. Press the “Remote Port Setup” softkey. The remote port setup menu appears:

PREV
MENU

5. Press the “Remote Port” softkey. “RS-232” appears on the display.

6. Press the “Remote Lang” softkey. NORMAL appears on the display.
7. Press the “RS-232 Port Setup” softkey, set the RS-232C port to conform to the
settings of the host device, and connect an interface cable as described in Chapter 6
under “Setting Up and Connecting the Serial Interface.”

5-6
 Remote Operation
Command Syntax Information 5
5-7. Exceptions for Serial Remote Control
When using the RS-232C port to remotely control the calibrator, either interactively with
a terminal or under computer control, operation is the same as using an IEEE-488
controller connected to the IEEE-488 port for control, with the following exceptions:
1. Control/C performs the same function as DCL (Device Clear) or SDC (Selected
Device Clear).
2. The EOL (End of Line) input terminator is Carriage Return (Control/M) or Line Feed
(Control/L). All output lines are terminated by the terminator programmed in a setup
menu, or set using the remote command SP_SET. This setting applies to all lines,
including those with the *PUD command (see number 4).
3. Control/R echoes to the port a Carriage Return, a Line Feed, and any uncompleted
remote command entered. This allows you to see a copy of whatever has been typed
in since the last command.
4. For the *PUD (Protected User Data) Command, which stores characters for later
recall, the serial remote interface does not store the following characters: Control/C,
Line Feed (Control/J), Carriage Return (Control/M), Control/R, Control/S (XOFF),
Control/Q (XON). These characters are processed as described above, so they cannot
be a part of the *PUD command. The *PUD command terminates with Line Feed or
Carriage Return, the same as all other serial remote commands.
5. There is no SRQ capability when using serial remote control. The status registers still
behave as described in this section, but the calibrator’s serial interface does not have
a way to perform the SRQ function.
6. There are three special commands available only for serial remote control. These are
described in Table 5-3.

5-8. Command Syntax Information

The following syntax rules apply to all the remote commands. (A command consists of a
word by itself or a word followed by one or more parameters.) The rules for parameter
syntax are provided first (including proper usage of units and multipliers), followed by
the rules for extra spaces, then followed by the rules for terminator usage. A description
of how the calibrator processes incoming characters provides the basis for answering
other possible questions about syntax. Information about syntax of response messages is
also given.

5-7
5700A/5720A Series II
Operators Manual

5-9. Parameter Syntax Rules

Many of the remote commands require parameters, which must be used properly to avoid
command errors. When a command error occurs, bit CME (5) in the Event Status Enable
Register (ESE) goes to 1. General rules for parameter usage are:
1. When a command has more than one parameter, the parameters must be separated by
commas. For example: “OUT 1 V, 100 HZ.”
2. Numeric parameters may have up to 255 significant figures and their exponents may
range from -32000 to +32000. The useful range for calibrator programming is ± 2.2
E-308 to ± 1.8 E308.
3. Including too many parameters causes a command error.
4. Null parameters cause a command error (e.g., the adjacent commas in “CLOCK
133700, , 071787”).
5. Expressions, for example “(4+2*13)”, are not allowed as parameters.
Units accepted in command parameters and used in responses are:
• HZ (frequency, hertz)
• MHZ (frequency, megahertz)
• V (voltage, volts)
• A (current, amperes)
• OHM (resistance, ohms)
• MOHM (resistance, megohms)
• DB (decibels)
• DBM (decibels referenced to 1 milliwatt for ac voltage amplitude)
• PCT (percent)
• PPM (parts per million)
Multipliers accepted in command parameters are:
• MA (mega, or unit x 1,000,000)
• K (kilo, or unit x 1,000)
• M (milli, or unit /1,000; except MOHM and MHZ)
• U (micro, or unit /1,000,000)
Some examples of allowed unit and multiplier combinations are:
• “MOHM” and “MAOHM” are both interpreted as megohms
• “MHZ”and “MAHZ” are both interpreted as megahertz
• “MV” is interpreted as millivolts
• “MAV” is interpreted as megavolts
• “MA” is interpreted as milliamperes

5-8
 Remote Operation
Command Syntax Information 5
5-10. Extra Space Characters
Tables 5-2 and 5-3 and the remote program examples at the end of this chapter show
commands and their parameters separated by spaces. One space after a command is
required. All other spaces are optional. They are shown for clarity in the manual and may
be left in or omitted as desired. Extra spaces can be inserted between parameters as
desired. Extra spaces within a parameter are generally not allowed, except for between a
number and its associated multiplier or unit.
Example: Explanation:
“OUT 188.3 MA, 442 HZ” Equivalent to “OUT 188.3MA,442HZ”
“OUT - 110.041 V” Invalid; no space allowed in a number
“OUT -110.041 V” Correct form for above
Table 5-2 contains examples for commands whose parameters are not self-explanatory.
Remote program examples for the Fluke 1722A Instrument Controller are provided at the
end of this section.

5-11. Terminators
To signify the end of a response sent to the controller, the calibrator sends a “terminator.”
For response message terminators, the calibrator sends the ASCII character Line Feed
with the EOI control line held high. The following characters are recognized bythe
calibrator as terminators when encountered in incoming data:
• ASCII LF character
• Any ASCII character sent with the EOI control line true
The terminator used by the Fluke 1722A Instrument Controller for data it sends to
instruments on the IEEE-488 bus is programmable, but its default is LF with EOI.

5-12. Incoming Character Processing

The calibrator processes all incoming data as follows (except the 8-bit data byte portion
of the *PUD parameter):
1. An eighth bit (DIO8) is ignored.
2. All data is taken as 7-bit ASCII.
3. Lower-case or upper-case characters are accepted.
4. ASCII characters whose decimal equivalent is less than 32 (Space) are discarded,
except for characters 10 (LF) and 13 (CR) and in the *PUD command argument.
*PUD allows all characters in its argument and terminates in a special way.

5-9
5700A/5720A Series II
Operators Manual

5-13. Response Message Syntax

In Table 5-2, responses from the calibrator are described wherever appropriate. In order
to know whether to read in an integer, a floating-point number, or character string, the
first entry is (Integer), (Floating), or (String).

Note
The responses described in the command tables are correct for IEEE-488
remote control, and for serial remote control in COMPUTER mode.
TERMINAL mode (in serial remote control), responses contain more
descriptive text intended for an operator using a terminal interactively.
Integers for most controllers or computers are decimal numbers in the range -32768 to
32767. Response elements of this type are labeled as “integer” in the command tables.
Floating-point numbers may be in exponential form, i.e. “1.15E-12”. String responses
may be any ASCII printing characters. A special case of string response is in the
CAL_CLST?, CAL_SHIFT?, CAL_SLST?, CAL_RPT?, ECHO?, EXPLAIN?,
RPT_STR?, *OPT?, and *STATE? commands. Those strings include leading and trailing
quotation marks. (See Table 5-2 for details.)

5-14. Input Buffer Operation

As the calibrator receives each data byte from the controller, it places the bytes in a
portion of memory called the input buffer. The input buffer holds up to 128 data bytes
and operates in a first in, first out fashion.
The calibrator treats the EOI IEEE-488 control line as a separate data byte and inserts it
into the input buffer if it is encountered as part of a message terminator.
Input buffer operation is transparent to the program running on the controller. If the
controller sends commands faster than the calibrator can process them, the input buffer
fills to capacity. When the input buffer is full, the calibrator holds off the IEEE-488 bus
with the NRFD (Not Ready For Data) handshake line. When the calibrator has processed
a data byte from the full input buffer, it then completes the handshake, allowing the
controller to send another data byte.
The calibrator clears the input buffer on power-up and on receiving the DCL (Device
Clear) or SDC (Selected Device Clear) messages from the controller.
Under RS-232C serial port remote control using Control/S (XOFF) protocol, the
calibrator issues a Control/S (XOFF) when the input buffer becomes 80% full. The
calibrator issues a Control/Q (XON) when it has read enough of the input buffer so that it
is less than 40% full. When using RTS (Request to Send) protocol, the serial interface
retracts and asserts RTS in response to same conditions as for XON/XOFF protocol.

5-15. Commands
Table 5-1 summarizes the commands by function. Table 5-2 provides protocol details of
the remote commands. Table 5-3 provides protocol details of the three special commands
available for serial remote control only. The commands duplicate almost all activities that
can be initiated from the front panel in local operation. Separate headings for each
command in the tables provide the parameters and responses (if any), and an example for
cases in which the parameters are not self-explanatory.

5-10
 Remote Operation
Commands 5
5-16. Multiple Commands
Controllers using BASIC may send commands all at once, or one at a time, in BASIC
PRINT statements. For example, if the calibrator’s bus address is 3 and you want to set
the calibrator to output 100 mV dc, some typical BASIC program statements would be:
1Ø REMOTE @3 ! PUT THE CALIBRATOR INTO THE REMOTE STATE
2Ø PRINT @3,”OUT 1ØØ MV” ! SELECT Ø.1V DC
3Ø PRINT @3,”OPER” ! ACTIVATE THE OUTPUT LIKE THE OPR/STBY KEY

You can achieve the same results by combining the two commands in one statement as
follows:
1Ø REMOTE @3
2Ø PRINT @3,”OUT 1ØØ MV ; OPER”

In both versions of the program, the PRINT statements transmit all necessary interface
messages (ATN and MLA) automatically.

5-17. Coupled Commands

When a compound command follows another command, there is a possibility that a fault
can occur because of the action of the first command. Such commands are called coupled
commands. An example of coupled commands that cause a fault is:
“OUT 1V, 1 MHZ”
followed by the compound command:
“OUT 100V” ; OUT 100 HZ.”
The second command causes a fault because when the calibrator encounters “OUT
100V”, it is interpreted as 100V, 1 MHz, which is out of range of the instrument. If only
the second compound command was sent, there would have been no fault and the
calibrator would be set to 100V at 100 Hz.
Another example is:
“OUT 1V ; RANGELCK ON”
followed by:
“OUT 10V ; RANGELCK OFF.”
In this case, when the calibrator interprets the first half of the second command, it causes
an error since the previous command locked the range on 2.2V.
Any command that affects the state of the output is a coupled command, i.e. order-
dependent. These commands include all the following: *RST, BOOST, BTYPE,
CAL_CHK, CAL_REF, CAL_STORE, CAL_ZERO, CUR_POST, DIAG, EXTGUARD,
EXTSENSE, FORMAT, INCR, LIMIT, MULT, NEWREF, OFFSET, OPER, OUT,
PHASE, PHASELCK, PHASESFT, RANGELCK, RCOMP, REMOTE, LOCAL,
LOCKOUT, SCALE, STBY, WBAND, CAL_RNG. Be careful to use appropriate
sequences when using these commands.

5-11
5700A/5720A Series II
Operators Manual

5-18. Sequential and Overlapped Commands

Commands executed immediately as they are encountered in the data stream are called
sequential commands. Commands that begin execution, but are completed some time
later are called overlapped commands, because they can be overlapped by later
commands. Headings under each command description in Tables 5-2 and 5-3 define
whether the command is sequential or overlapped. Because the calibrator queues and
executes overlapped commands in a multitasking way, *OPC, *OPC?, and *WAI are
useful to detect completion of overlapped commands. (See the full descriptions of *OPC,
*OPC?, and *WAI in Table 5-2 for more information.)

5-19. Commands Ignored When Not in Remote

The calibrator can receive and execute most commands in either local or remote state.
Commands that change the state of the instrument are prevented from executing unless
the calibrator is in the remote state. At the end of each command description in Tables 5-
2 and 5-3 it is noted if the command is ignored if the calibrator is not in the remote state.
When the command description says, “ignored when not in remote,” it means that if sent
to the calibrator in the local state, the command will not work, and logs a fault into the
fault queue. (Or it returns the fault message if in serial remote terminal mode.)
To put the calibrator in remote, execute the 1722A BASIC command REMOTE or its
equivalent for other controllers. If you are using the serial port for remote control, send
the REMOTE command (described in Table 5-3) to the calibrator. Refer to
“Remote/Local State Transitions” for more information.

5-20. Commands that Require the Calibration Switch to be Set

The following commands do not work unless the rear panel CALIBRATION switch is in
the ENABLE position: CLOCK, CAL_STORE, CAL_RNG STORE, CAL_WBFLAT
STORE, CAL_WBGAIN STORE, *PUD, and RPT_STR. Attempting to use any of these
commands with the CALIBRATION switch in the NORMAL position logs a fault into
the fault queue. (Or it returns the fault message if in serial remote terminal mode.)

5-21. Long Term Commands

Remote commands that take a relatively long time to execute are identified as such in
Table 5-2, “Commands,” which follows the command summary in Table 5-1. If a
command that produces a change in instrument state (i.e. any “I” command) is received
during the execution of a long-term command, for example, CAL_CHK, the command is
ignored and a device-dependent fault occurs. (Bit 3 in the Event Status Register is set to 1
if enabled, and the fault code for the fault is available to be read from the fault queue. See
the FAULT? and EXPLAIN? commands for more information.)

5-12
 Remote Operation
Commands 5
Table 5-1. Command Summary by Function

Error Mode Commands

ADJOUT? Returns the adjusted output magnitude and frequency

INCR Increments or decrements the output

MULT Multiplies the reference by a value and establishes a new reference

NEWREF Establishes a new reference

OFFSET Sets and enables or disables an offset

OFFSET? Returns the value of the present offset

OLDREF Sets the output to the present reference

OUT_ERR? Returns the UUT error computed by the calibrator

REFOUT? Returns the value of the present reference

SCALE Activates and deactivates scaling

SCALE? Returns scaling information

SCAL_ERR? Returns the value of the scale error if scaling is active

Instrument Configuration Commands

BTYPE Selects the amplifier type for voltage or current boost

BTYPE? Returns the amplifier types set for voltage and current boost

CLOCK Sets the clock/calendar

CLOCK? Returns the setting of the clock/calendar

CUR_POST Selects the active binding post for current output

CUR_POST? Returns the active binding post for current output

EXTGUARD Opens and closes an internal connection between GUARD and LO

EXTSENSE Opens and closes an internal connection between SENSE and OUTPUT

FORMAT Restores calibration constants and setups to factory defaults

LIMIT Sets positive and negative output limits

LIMIT? Returns the programmed positive and negative output limits

*LRN? Returns a list of commands that would duplicate the present state

RANGE? Returns the present output range

RANGELCK Locks in the present range, or selects autoranging

5-13
5700A/5720A Series II
Operators Manual

Table 5-1. Command Summary by Function (continued)

Output Commands

BOOST Activates or deactivates an auxiliary amplifier

DBMOUT? Returns the output amplitude and frequency, but in dBm if ac V

OPER Activates the calibrator’s output if it is in standby

OUT Sets the output and establishes a new reference for error mode

OUT? Returns the output amplitude and frequency

PHASE Sets the phase shift of the phase output signal

PHASE? Returns the phase shift of the phase output signal

PHASELCK Activates or deactivates phase locking to an external signal

PHASESFT Activates or deactivates variable phase output

RCOMP Activates or deactivates two-wire compensation circuitry

STBY Puts the calibrator in standby

VOUT? Returns the output amplitude in volts if the active units are dBm

WBAND Activates or deactivates the Wideband AC Module (Option 5700A-03)

Overall Functions

*CLS Clear; clears status registers, any service request, and flags

ECHO? Echoes a string to the remote port

GAL Go to Alternate Language; enters Fluke 5100B emulation mode

*OPC Sets bit 0 in the ESR to 1 when pending remote operations are complete

*OPC? Returns a "1" when all pending remote operations are complete

*PUD Stores a string of user-selected characters in nonvolatile memory

*PUD? Returns the contents of the PUD memory

RPT_STR Loads the user report string

RPT_STR? Returns the user report string

*RST Reset; sets the calibrator to its default power-up state

*WAI Halts remote program execution until all pending remote operations are
complete

5-14
 Remote Operation
Commands 5
Table 5-1. Command Summary by Function (continued)

RS-232-C Interface Parameter Setting Commands

SP_EOF Sets the End-Of-File (EOF) string

SP_EOF? Returns the End-Of-File (EOF) string

SP_SET Sets baud, terminal or computer mode, stall method, data bits, stop bits, parity,
and End-Of-Line (EOL) string

SP_SET? Returns baud rate, terminal or computer mode, stall method, data bits, stop
bits, parity, and End-Of-Line (EOL) string

SP_TIME Sets the timeout period

SP_TIME? Returns the timeout period

Calibration, Testing, and Diagnostics Commands for the Calibrator

CAL_ADJ Does the internal portion of calibration

CAL_CHK Starts calibration check

CAL_CLST? Returns a group of calibration constant names and their values

CAL_CONF Sets the calibration specifications to a confidence level of either 95% or 99%.

CAL_CONF? Returns the current calibration confidence level.

CAL_CONST? Returns the value of a particular constant

CAL_DATE? Returns the date of the most recent calibration

CAL_DAYS? Returns the days elapsed since last calibration recall

CAL_INTV Sets the calibration interval

CAL_INTV? Returns the calibration interval

CAL_PR Prints a calibration report out the serial interface

CAL_REF Does a calibration procedure using a 1Ω, 10 kΩ, or 10V standard

CAL_RNG Starts a self calibration procedure of a range

CAL_RPT? Returns a formatted calibration report

CAL_SHIFT? Returns the shift of a range due to a calibration action

CAL_SLST? Returns the shifts of a group of ranges

CAL_STORE Stores new calibration constants in nonvolatile memory

CAL_TEMP Sets the temperature for calibration

CAL_TEMP? Returns the calibration temperature last specified

CAL_WBFLAT Does Wideband AC Module (Option 5700A-03) flatness calibration

CAL_WBGAIN Does Wideband AC Module (Option 5700A-03) gain calibration

CAL_ZERO Does internal zeros calibration

DIAG Runs self diagnostics

5-15
5700A/5720A Series II
Operators Manual

Table 5-1. Command Summary by Function (continued)

Calibration, Testing, and Diagnostics Commands for the Calibrator (continued)

DIAGFLT Sets the calibrator’s response to faults in remote diagnostics

DIAGFLT? Returns the calibrator’s response to faults in remote diagnostics

OHMSREF? Returned calculated resistance reference (Main software revision H and after)

STOP_PR Stops printing a report

*TST? Performs a series of self tests and returns the results

Serial Only Remote Commands

LOCAL Puts the calibrator into the local state

LOCKOUT Puts the calibrator into the local lockout state

REMOTE Puts the calibrator into remote state

Status Commands

*ESE Loads the Event Status Enable register

*ESE? Reads the Event Status Enable register

*ESR? Reads and clears the Event Status Register

ETIME? Elapsed time query. Returns the cumulative number of minutes powered on.

EXPLAIN Decodes a fault code by returning a brief description

FAULT? Returns the most recent fault code from the fault queue

*IDN? Returns calibrator identification information

ISCE Loads the Instrument Status Change Enable register

ISCE? Reads the Instrument Status Change Enable register

ISCR? Reads and clears the Instrument Status Change Register

ISR? Reads and clears the Instrument Status Register

ONTIME? Returns the number of minutes since power-up this session

*OPT? Returns a list of installed modules and attached amplifiers

*SRE Loads the Service Request Enable register

*SRE? Reads the Service Request Enable register

STATE? Returns the long-term state of the calibrator

*STB? Returns the status byte

UNCERT? Returns the calculated absolute uncertainty of the output

5-16
 Remote Operation
Commands 5
Table 5-2. Commands

ADJOUT?

Description Sequential Command.

Returns the adjusted output magnitude and frequency. The adjusted output magnitude is
the output after modification by the front panel knob or the INCR remote command. In all
output functions but resistance, ADJOUT? behaves exactly like OUT?. In the resistance
function, OUT? returns the actual calibrator’s output, which cannot be adjusted, and
ADJOUT? returns what would be the reading on the Control Display in direct operation. The
frequency is always the present output frequency.

Parameter None

Response 1. (Float) Output amplitude

2. (String) Units (V, DBM, A, or OHM)
3. (Float) Frequency (0 if dc or ohms)
Examples 1.256983E+01,V,0 (12.56983V)
1.883E-01,A,4.42E+02 (188.3 mA, 442 Hz)
1.9E+06,OHM,0 (1.9 MΩ)

BOOST

Description Overlapped Command, ignored if not in remote.

Activates and deactivates an accessory amplifier.
Parameter ON Activates the appropriate amplifier for the type of output)
OFF Deactivates the active amplifier
Example BOOST ON

Activates the appropriate amplifier if the last OUT command selected an output supported
by the attached amplifier.

BTYPE

Description Sequential command, ignored if not in remote.

Selects the accessory amplifiers for current and voltage boost. If the BOOST command is
active when BTYPE is received, BTYPE does not take effect until the next time the BOOST
command is received. The setting of BTYPE remains even after the power is turned off.

Parameter One of the following:

VB5725 (Selects the 5725A for voltage boost)
IB5725 (Selects the 5725A for current boost)
Example: BTYPE IB5725

Selects Model 5725A as the current amplifier.

5-17
5700A/5720A Series II
Operators Manual

Table 5-2. Commands (continued)

BTYPE?

Description Sequential command.

Returns the model numbers of auxiliary amplifiers selected for voltage and current boost.

Parameter None

Response (String, string) VB<model number>,IB<model number>

Example: BTYPE?

Returns: "VB5725,IB5725" if Model 5725A is selected for voltage boost and Model 5725A is
selected for current boost.

CAL_ADJ

Description Overlapped long-term command, ignored if not in remote.

Performs the internal calibration. This command should be sent after the last CAL_REF
command in the sequence of calibration. (See CAL_REF for an example.)

Parameter None

CAL_CHK

Description Overlapped long-term command, ignored if not in remote.

Starts calibration check. Results are available via the CAL_SLST? or CAL_SHIFT?
commands.

Parameter None

CAL_CLST?

Description Sequential command.

Returns a list of names values of a particular group of calibration constants.

Parameter CAL (Returns active calibration constants)

CHECK (Returns calibration check constants)
PREV (Returns previous calibration constants)
Response (String)
"<EOL>
<total number of constants> <EOL>
<name> <value> <EOL>
<name> <value> <EOL>
(cont)
"
Example: CAL_CLST? Could return:
"
424
D3P, 3.9817876E+02
(Continues for about 400 pairs of names and values.)
“

5-18
 Remote Operation
Commands 5
Table 5-2. Commands (continued)

CAL_CONF

Description Sequential command.

Sets the calibration specifications to a confidence level of either 99% or 95%.

Parameters: CONF95 or CONF99: Sets 95% or 99% specifications.

CAL_CONF?

Description Sequential command.

Returns the current calibration confidence level.

Parameters: None

Response CONF95 (indicates 95% specifications)a or CONF99 (indicates 99% specifications)

CAL_CONST?

Description Sequential command.

Returns the value of a particular calibration constant from a particular group of constants.

Parameters: 1. CAL (From active calibration constants)

CHECK (From calibration check constants)
PREV (From previous calibration constants)
2. Symbolic name of the calibration constant desired (see Appendix D).
Response (Float) The value of the constant

Example: CAL_CONST? CHECK, KV6

Could return: 6.5000010E+00

CAL_DATE?

Description Sequential command.

Returns the date of the most recent calibration of the specified type.

Parameter B5725 (Last 5725A Amplifier calibration)

CAL (Last calibration of the calibrator)
WBFLAT (Last wideband flatness calibration)
WBGAIN (Last wideband gain calibration)
ZERO (Last dc V zero calibration)
Response (Integer) Date as MMDDYY, DDMMYY, or YYMMDD depending on the setting of
DATEFMT.

CAL_DAYS?

Description Sequential command.

Returns the number of days elapsed since the last calibration activity of the specified type.

Parameter B5725 (Last 5725A Amplifier calibration)

CAL (Last calibration of the calibrator)
WBFLAT (Last wideband flatness calibration)
WBGAIN (Last wideband gain calibration)
ZERO (Last dc V zero calibration)
Response (Integer) Number of elapsed days

5-19
5700A/5720A Series II
Operators Manual

Table 5-2. Commands (continued)

CAL_INTV

Description Sequential command, ignored if not in remote.

Sets the calibration interval for main output calibration. This value is saved in nonvolatile
memory and used for calculating the calibrator’s output uncertainty.

Parameter 1, 90, 180, or 365; the number of days in the calibration cycle.

CAL_INTV?

Description Sequential command.

Returns the calibration interval for main output calibration.

Parameter None

Response (Integer) 1, 90, 180, or 365; the number of days in the calibration cycle.

CAL_PR

Description Overlapped command.

Sends a calibration report printout for a particular calibration activity through the RS-232-C
serial interface. This is for IEEE-488 remote control only. (See Chapter 6 for printout format
details.)

Parameter CAL (Output change report for calibration)

CHECK (Output change report for cal check)
RAW (A list of all calibration constants)
CAL_REF

Description Overlapped long-term command, ignored if not in remote.

Calibrates the internal references for the main output functions based on comparison to an
externally-applied standard. To calibrate the 5700A/5720A Series II calibrator, the controller
must send a CAL_TEMP command, a sequence of CAL_REF commands (one for each
external standard), followed by a CAL_ADJ command, then a CAL_STORE command.
These commands must be in the same sequence as in the example. Note that the
CALIBRATION switch must be set to ENABLE for the CAL_STORE command. To only
collect performance data, use this command without a CAL_STORE.

Parameter The true value of the external standard attached to the calibrator’s binding posts. The value
and units of the parameter tell the calibrator which calibration procedure to perform.

Example: CAL_TEMP 23.5

CAL_REF 10.00013 V ; *WAI
CAL_REF -10.00013 V ; *WAI
CAL_REF 9.99987 KOHM ; *WAI
CAL_REF 1.00026 OHM ; WAI
CAL_ADJ
CAL_STORE ;
*WAI

5-20
 Remote Operation
Commands 5
Table 5-2. Commands (continued)

CAL_RNG

Description Overlapped command, ignored if not in remote.

Starts a calibration of a range. This command causes the calibrator to source the calibration
magnitude specified by the second parameter for the range specified by the first parameter.
To calibrate a range, the controller must send commands in the same sequence as in the
example.

Parameters: 1. The range identifier of the range to calibrate from Table 5-4, or the keyword NULL or
STORE.
2. (Only if parameter 1 is the range mnemonic) The calibration magnitude for the calibrator
to source. Must be 45% to 95% of the range specified.
3. (Optional; only if parameter 1 is the range mnemonic) The frequency of the calibrator
output with optional multiplier and units.
Example: CAL_TEMP 23.5
CAL_RNG DC2_2V, 2V ; OPER ; *WAI
INCR (enough to null the calibrator)
CAL_RNG NULL
CAL_RNG STORE
CAL_RPT?
Description Sequential command.
Returns a report for a specified calibration activity (see Chapter 6 for format details).
Parameter CAL (Output change report for calibration)
CHECK (Output change report for cal check)
RAW (A list of all calibration constants)
Response (String)
"<EOL>
<formatted report>
"
Example: 10 REM THIS 1722A PROGRAM SAVES FORMATTED REPORT IN A FILE
20 CLOSE 1 \ OPEN "MF0:CALRPT" AS NEW FILE #1
30 PRINT @4,'CAL_RPT? CAL'
40 INPUTLINE @4,A$ ! THROW AWAY BEGINNING QUOTE
50 ! DO {
60 INPUTLINE @4,A$
70 PRINT #1,A$
80 IF LEFT(A$,1%) != '"' GOTO 60
90 !} WHILE(NOT END OF FILE)

5-21
5700A/5720A Series II
Operators Manual

Table 5-2. Commands (continued)

CAL_SHIFT?
Description Sequential command.
Returns a particular set of output shifts from a particular range.
Parameters: 1. CAL (Output changes due to calibration check)
CHECK (All output changes due to calibration check)
2. Range identifier from Table 5-4
Response (String)
"<EOL>
range name>,<# points><EOL>
<mag 1>,<freq 1>,<offset 1>,<ashift 1>,<rshift 1><sshift 1>,<spec 1><EOL>
...
<mag n>,<freq n>,<offset n>,<ashift n>,<rshift 1>,<sshift n>,<spec n><EOL>
"
Where:
<range name> = Range identifier from Table 5-4
<# points> = (Integer) Number of points for the range
<mag n> = (Float) Magnitude for point n in range units
<freq n> = (Float) Frequency for point n in Hz
<offset n> = (Float) Zero shift for point n in range units
<ashift n> = (Float) Absolute shift for point n in range units
<rshift n> = (Float) Relative shift for point n (ppm)
<sshift n> = (Float) % of spec shift for point n
<spec n> = calibrator specification for point n in ppm
Range units are the appropriate units for the range, e.g., for all DC V ranges, range units
are V.
Example: CAL_SHIFT? CAL, DC220MV could return:
"
DC220MV,2
2.20E-1,0.00E+00,1.76E-07,1.97E-07,8.98E-01,7.10E+00,1.26E+01
-2.20E-1,0.00E+00,1.58E-07,1.38E-07,6.26E-01,4.95E+00,1.26E+01
"

5-22
 Remote Operation
Commands 5
Table 5-2. Commands (continued)

CAL_SLST?

Description Sequential command.

Returns a group of calibration constant shifts due to a calibration activity.

Parameter CAL (All output changes due to calibration)

CHECK (All output changes due to calibration check)

Response (String)
"<EOL>

<range name>,<# points><EOL>

<mag 1>,<freq 1>,<offset 1>,<ashift 1>,<rshift 1><sshift 1>,<spec 1><EOL>
...
<mag n>,<freq n>,<offset n>,<ashift n>,<rshift 1>,<sshift n>,<spec n><EOL>
"
Where:
<range name> = Range identifier from Table 5-4
<# points> = (Integer) Number of points for the range
<mag n> = (Float) Magnitude for point n in range units
<freq n> = (Float) Frequency for point n in Hz
<offset n> = (Float) Zero shift for point n in range units
<ashift n> = (Float) Absolute shift for point n in range units
<rshift n> = (Float) Relative shift for point n (ppm)
<sshift n> = (Float) % of spec shift for point n
<spec n> = calibrator specification for point n in ppm
Range units are the appropriate units for the range, e.g., for all DC V ranges, range units
are V.

Example: CAL_SLST? CAL could return:

“
49
DC220MV,2
2.20E-1,0.00E+00,1.76E-07,1.97E-07,8.98E-01,7.10E+00,1.26E+01
-2.20E-1,0.00E+00,1.58E-07,1.38E-07,6.26E-01,4.95E+00,1.26E+01
DC2_2V,2
(cont)
"
CAL_STORE

Description Sequential command, ignored if not in remote.

Stores all new calibration constants in nonvolatile memory. Use this command to save the
results of a CAL_ADJ command after you are completely finished with calibration via remote
control. The rear panel CALIBRATION switch must be in the ENABLE position or an
execution fault results.

Parameter None

5-23
5700A/5720A Series II
Operators Manual

Table 5-2. Commands (continued)

CAL_TEMP

Description Sequential command, ignored if not in remote.

Sets the temperature for calibration. This should be done before sending CAL_REF,
CAL_WBFLAT, CAL_WBGAIN, or CAL_CHK commands. Once set, the temperature is
used for all calibration activities until it is changed. If the temperature is not set before a
calibration activity, the calibrator uses a default of 23.0°C.

Parameter Temperature in degrees C.

CAL_TEMP?

Description Sequential command.

Returns the previous ambient temperature setting used for a particular calibration
procedure.

Parameter B5725, CAL, WBFLAT, WBGAIN, or CHECK

Response (Float) Temperature in degrees C.

CAL_WBFLAT

Description Overlapped command, ignored if not in remote.

Does Wideband AC Module (Option 5700-03) flatness calibration. There are two different
calibration procedures for the wideband module; gain and flatness. Wideband gain is to be
done at every calibration cycle. Wideband flatness is needed only during full verification,
recommended every two years. For reference, the manual procedure for wideband flatness
cal is in Chapter 3 of the 5700A/5720A Series II Service Manual.

After sending a CAL_WBFLAT START command, the controller must adjust the calibrator’s
output using the INCR command until it matches the calibration voltage, then inform the
calibrator of the fact by sending a CAL_WBFLAT NULL command. A series of points to test
is selected automatically by the software. After each CAL_WBFLAT NULL command, you
can determine the calibration setting by sending an OUT? command.

Parameter START (Starts flatness calibration, sources the first point)

NULL (Calculates flatness constant, sources the next point)
STORE (Stores wideband flatness constants into EEPROM)
Example: CAL_TEMP 24.6
CAL_WBFLAT START
(Connect to external standard as in the Service Manual)
OPER
INCR (Enough to get the calibrator’s output correct)
CAL_WBFLAT NULL
(Repeat the preceding two commands for each calibration point. CAL_NULL
automatically sources the next calibration point. When OUT? returns 0,V,0, all points
have been calibrated.)
CAL_WBFLAT STORE

5-24
 Remote Operation
Commands 5
Table 5-2. Commands (continued)

CAL_WBGAIN
Description Overlapped long-term command, ignored if not in remote.
Does Wideband AC Module (Option 5700-03) gain calibration. There are two different
calibration procedures for the wideband module: gain and flatness. Wideband gain is to be
done at every calibration cycle. Wideband flatness is needed only during full verification
(recommended every two years). For reference, the manual procedure for wideband gain
cal is in Chapter 7.

To calibrate wideband gain in remote, the wideband output cable must be connected to the
calibrator’s SENSE binding posts as described in Chapter 7, then the controller must send
commands in the same sequence as in the example. For positive gain, the center conductor
is connected to SENSE HI. For negative gain, the center conductor is connected to SENSE
LO.

Parameter PGAIN (Calibrates wideband positive gain)

NGAIN (Calibrates wideband negative gain)
STORE (Stores wideband constants into EEPROM)
Example: CAL_TEMP 23.5
CAL_WBGAIN PGAIN (Calibrates positive gain)
(Reverse the SENSE connection now)
CAL_WBGAIN NGAIN (Calibrates negative gain)
CAL_WBGAIN STORE
CAL_ZERO
Description Overlapped long-term command, ignored if not in remote.
Performs internal zeros calibration. This removes offsets on the 2.2V dc range. It takes
about 2-1/2 minutes, plus 30 seconds if teamed with 5725A, and does not require setting
the CALIBRATION switch.
Parameter None
CLOCK
Description Sequential command, ignored if not in remote.
Sets the clock/calendar. The rear panel CALIBRATION switch must be in the ENABLE
position or an execution fault results.

Parameters: 1. Time in 24-hour format as HHMMSS

2. Date as MMDDYY, DDMMYY, or YYMMDD depending on the setting the DATEFMT.
Examples CLOCK 133700, 071788 (Sets the clock/calendar to 1:37 p.m., July 17, 1988.)
CLOCK 080000, 101088 (Sets the clock/calendar to 8:00 a.m., November 10, 1988.)
CLOCK?
Description Sequential command.
Returns the setting of the clock/calendar.
Parameter None
Response 1. (Integer) Time in 24-hour format as HHMMSS.
2. (Integer) Date as MMDDYY, DDMMYY, or YYMMDD depending on the setting of
DATEFMT.
Example: CLOCK?
Returns:
"150000,090188" if the clock/calendar is set to 3 p.m., September 1, 1988.

5-25
5700A/5720A Series II
Operators Manual

Table 5-2. Commands (continued)

*CLS
Description Sequential command.
(Clear status.) Clears the ESR, ISCR, the fault queue, and the RQS bit in the status byte.
This command terminates pending operation complete commands (*OPC or *OPC?).
Parameter None

CUR_POST
Description Sequential command, ignored if not in remote.
Selects the binding posts for current output. Once set, the calibrator retains the current post
setting during power-off periods.
Parameter NORMAL (Selects the OUTPUT HI binding post)
AUX (Selects the AUX CURRENT OUTPUT binding post)
IB5725 (Selects binding posts on the 5725A)
CUR_POST?
Description Sequential command.
Returns the binding posts for current output.
Parameter None
Response (String) NORMAL (The OUTPUT HI binding post is selected)
AUX (The AUX CURRENT OUTPUT binding post is selected)
IB5725 (The 5725A binding posts are selected)
DATEFMT
Description Determine the format for clock/calendar front panel date display and entry, for entering and
reading the date remotely using the CLOCK and CLOCK? commands, and for displaying
calibration dates on the front panel and in calibration reports.
Parameter MDY (Display: MM/DD/YY, remote and front panel entry: MMDDYY)
DMY (Display: DD.MM.YY, remote and front panel entry: DDMMYY)
YMD (Display: YYMMDD, remote and front panel entry: YYMMDD)
DATEFMT?
Description Returns the date format setting (see DATEFMT for its applications).
Parameter None
Response (String) MDY (Display: MM/DD/YY, date entry: MMDDYY),
DMY (Display: DD.MM.YY, date entry: DDMMYY), or
YMD (Display: YYMMDD, date entry: YYMMDD)
DBMOUT?
Description Sequential command.
Same as OUT? except that if output is ac V, the returned magnitude is converted to dBm for
the appropriate load (50Ω for wideband, 600Ω standard ac V).
Parameter None
Response 1. (Float) Output value
2. (String) Units (DBM, V, A, or OHM)
3. (Float) Frequency (0 if dc or ohms)
Examples 1.256983E+01,V,0 (12.56983V)
28.345,DBM,442
1.9E+06,OHM,0 (1.9 MΩ)

5-26
 Remote Operation
Commands 5
Table 5-2. Commands (continued)

DIAG

Description Overlapped long-term command, ignored if not in remote.

Runs a self-diagnostics routine. If any faults are detected, they are logged into the fault
queue where they can be read by the FAULT? query. The response to faults that occur
during remote-controlled diagnostics depends by the setting of the DIAGFLT command.
Parameter ALL (Runs all diagnostics routines)
D5700 (Runs all calibrator diagnostics)
DV5725 (Runs 5725A voltage diagnostics)
DI5725 (Runs 5725A current diagnostics)
CONT (Continues execution of diagnostics)
ABORT (Terminates execution of diagnostics)
DIAGFLT
Description Sequential command, ignored if not in remote.
Determines the response to faults that occur during remote-controlled diagnostics. In all
cases the fault encountered is logged into the fault queue before the calibrator takes any
action as set by this command. The settings of this command are saved in nonvolatile
memory. The default is ABORT.
Parameter HALT (Halts and waits for DIAG CONT or DIAG ABORT)
ABORT (Terminates diagnostics)
CONT (Diagnostics continues to completion, logging any more faults as encountered)
DIAGFLT?
Description Sequential command.
Returns the setting of DIAGFLT.
Parameter None
Response (String) HALT, ABORT, or CONT
ECHO?
Description Sequential command.
Echoes a string back to the remote interface port. Upper or lower case remains intact in this
command.
Parameter Any string
Response (String including delimiting quotation marks)
Example: ECHO "123abc456"
Returns:
"123abc456"
*ESE
Description Sequential command.
Loads a byte into the Event Status Enable Register, described under "Checking the
Calibrator’s Status."
Parameter The decimal equivalent of the binary number to load into the register (0-255 only).
Example: *ESE 140
Enables bits 2 (QYE), 3 (DDE), and 7 (PON), and disables all the other bits. (See "Checking
the Calibrator’s Status" for details.)

5-27
5700A/5720A Series II
Operators Manual

Table 5-2. Commands (continued)

*ESE?

Description Sequential command.

Returns the byte from the Event Status Enable register, described under "Checking the
Calibrator’s Status."

Parameter None

Response (Integer) Decimal equivalent of the register byte.

Example: *ESE?

Returns: "140" if bits 2 (QYE), 3 (DDE), and 7 (PON) are enabled (1) and the rest of the bits
are disabled (0). (See "Checking the Calibrator’s Status" for details.)

*ESR?

Description Sequential command.

Returns the byte from the Event Status Register and clears the register. The ESR is
described under "Checking the Calibrator’s Status."

Parameter None

Response (Integer) Decimal equivalent of the register byte.

Example: *ESR?

Returns: "140" if bits 2 (QYE), 3 (DDE), and 7 (PON) are set (1) and the rest of the bits are
reset (0). (See "Checking the Calibrator’s Status" for details.)

ETIME?

Description Sequential command.

Elapsed time query. The response is the total number of minutes that the power switch has
been on for the life of the instrument. An example of using this command would be detecting
when an interval you set for cleaning the air filter has expired.

Parameter None

Response (Integer) Total number of minutes that the power has been on.

EXPLAIN?

Description Sequential command.

Explains a fault code. This command returns a string that explains the fault code furnished
as the parameter. The fault code (same as the parameter) is originally obtained by sending
the FAULT? query.

Parameter The fault code (an integer).

Response (String) An explanation of the fault code.

Example: EXPLAIN? 725

Returns:
ILLEGAL LIMIT SETTING

5-28
 Remote Operation
Commands 5
Table 5-2. Commands (continued)

EXTGUARD

Description Overlapped command, ignored if not in remote.

Sets the calibrator to internal or external guard. (The same as pressing EX GRD in local
operation.) The default is internal guard.

Parameter ON (Sets the calibrator to external guard)

OFF (Sets the calibrator to internal guard)
EXTSENSE

Description Overlapped command, ignored if not in remote.

Selects internal or external sensing. (The same as pressing EX SNS in local operation.) The
default if internal sensing.

Parameter ON (Sets the calibrator to external sensing)

OFF (Sets the calibrator to internal sensing)
FAULT?

Description Sequential command.

Returns the earliest fault code contained in the calibrator’s fault queue. After you get the
fault code, you can use the EXPLAIN? command to find out the meaning of the fault code. A
table of fault codes is also included in Chapter 4 of this manual.

A zero value is returned if there are no faults, so to read the entire contents of the fault
queue, repeat FAULT? until the response is "0."

Parameter None

Response (Integer) The fault code

FORMAT

Description Sequential command, ignored if not in remote.

Use with extreme care. Restores the contents of the EEPROM (Electrically-Erasable
Programmable Read Only Memory) to factory defaults. The EEPROM holds calibration
constants and setup parameters. You lose all calibration data permanently. The
CALIBRATION switch must be in the ENABLE position, or an execution fault occurs.

Parameter ALL (Replaces the whole contents with defaults)

B5725 (Replaces 5725A cal constants with defaults)
CAL (Replaces all cal constants with defaults)
RNG (Replaces range cal constants with defaults)
SETUP (Replaces setup parameters with defaults)
GAL

Description Sequential command.

(Go to Alternate Language.) Selects the 5100B emulation remote mode. The new language
remains selected even after the power is turned off. The inverse command in 5100B mode,
to go back to normal mode, is a tilde (~).

Parameter L5100 5100B emulation remote mode

5-29
5700A/5720A Series II
Operators Manual

Table 5-2. Commands (continued)

*IDN?

Description Sequential command.

Returns instrument model number and firmware version letters for the main, inguard, and if
attached, the 5725A Amplifier CPU.

Parameter None

Response (String, string, 0, string)

A message containing four fields separated by commas, as follows:
1. Fluke
2. Model number (5700A or 5720A)
3. Serial number
4. Three firmware versions: one each for the Main CPU, the Inguard CPU, and the Boost
CPU. Each version is separated by a plus (+). If no amplifier is attached then its position
(third character) contains an asterisk (*).
Example: FLUKE,5720A,5248000,1.0+B+*

INCR

Description Overlapped command, ignored if not in remote.

Increments the output amplitude and enters error mode, the same as using the output
adjustment knob in local operation.

Parameter Increment step size; positive for incremental step, negative for decremental step. Units
(optional) specify magnitude or frequency.

Examples INCR -.00001 Enters error mode and decrements the output by .00001.
INCR 1 Hz Enters error mode and increments the frequency by 1 Hz.

ISCE

Description Sequential command.

Loads a byte into the Instrument Status Change Enable register described under "Checking
the Calibrator’s Status."

Parameter The decimal equivalent of the binary number to load into the register.

Example: ISCE 56
Enables bits 3 (BOOST), 4 (RCOMP), and 5 (RLOCK) in the Service Request Enable
register.

ISCE?

Description Sequential command.

Returns the byte from the Instrument Status Change Enable register, described under
"Checking the Calibrator’s Status."

Parameter None

Response The decimal equivalent of the register contents byte.

Example: ISCE?
Returns: "4" if bit 3 (BOOST) is enabled (1) and the rest of the bits are disabled (0). (See
"Checking the Calibrator’s Status" for details.)

5-30
 Remote Operation
Commands 5
Table 5-2. Commands (continued)

ISCR?

Description Sequential command.

Returns and clears the byte from the Instrument Status Change Register, described under
"Checking the Calibrator’s Status."

Parameter None

Response The decimal equivalent of the register contents byte.

Example: ISCR?

Returns: "8" if bit 3 (BOOST) is set (1) and the rest of the bits are reset (0). (See "Checking
the Calibrator’s Status" for details.)

ISR?

Description Sequential command.

Returns and clears the byte from the Instrument Status Register, described under
"Checking the Calibrator’s Status."

Parameter None

Response The decimal equivalent of the register contents byte.

Example: ISR?

Returns: "16" if bit 4 (RLOCK) is set (1) and the rest of the bits are reset (0). (See "Checking
the Calibrator’s Status" for details.)

LIMIT

Description Sequential command, ignored if not in remote.

Sets the maximum permissible output magnitudes, negative and positive. Both parameters
must be present, and the units must be none, volts, or amps. The units must not conflict. If
no units are specified, V is assumed.

Parameter 1. Positive limit value with optional multiplier and optional unit.
2. Negative limit value with optional multiplier and optional unit.
Example: LIMIT 1.8A, -1.2A

Sets the limit for ac and positive dc current to 1.8A, and negative dc current to -1.2A.

LIMIT?

Description Sequential command.

Returns the programmed output magnitude limits for voltage and current.

Response (Float, float, float, float)

1. Positive voltage limit value
2. Negative voltage limit value
3. Positive current limit value
4. Negative current limit value
Example: LIMIT?

Returns: "2.20E-2,-1.0E-2,1.8E0,-1.2E0" if the programmed voltage range is -100 to 220V,

and the programmed current range is -1.2 to 1.8A.

5-31
5700A/5720A Series II
Operators Manual

Table 5-2. Commands (continued)

*LRN?
Description Sequential command.
Provides the current setting of the calibrator. The response to this command is a string that
recreates the state of the following settings when returned to the calibrator:
Output value Whether the wideband AC Module is on Phase lock
Operate/standby Whether an auxiliary amplifier is on Phase shift
Guard Range lock Offset
Sense Two-wire compensation Scale
Output limits
Parameter None
Response (String) A string that enables the settings that were set at the time of the *LRN? command.

Example: PRINT @4, "*LRN?"

INPUTLINE @4, A$
.
.
(Later, to recreate the settings:)
PRINT @4, A$
MULT
Description Overlapped command, ignored if not in remote.
Multiplies the reference magnitude by the parameter and changes the output to the new
value. The reference magnitude is the present output in direct operation, and the reference
in error mode.
Parameter Floating-point number to act as a multiplier
Example: If the output is 10V with error mode off and you send the command, "MULT 1.9", the output
changes to 19V.

NEWREF
Description Sequential command, ignored if not in remote.
Sets reference value to be the present output value. (The same as pressing the NEW REF
key in local operation.)
Parameter None
OFFSET
Description Sequential command, ignored if not in remote.
Enables and disables an offset for the output value. Effective immediately when enabled.
Parameters: ON or OFF
OFFSET?
Description Sequential command.
Returns the offset value if the offset is enabled; otherwise, returns the number 0.0.
Parameter None
Response 1. (Float) Offset value or 0.0 if no offset is active
2. (Float) Offset units
Example: OFFSET?
Returns: "5.05000E-03,V" if an offset of 5.05 mV is active.

5-32
 Remote Operation
Commands 5
Table 5-2. Commands (continued)

OHMREF?

Description Return calculated resistance reference as shown in calibration report (average actual-to-
nominal ratio of the 100 ohm to 190 kohm resistors).

Parameter CAL (From active calibration constants)

CHECK (From calibration check constants)
PREV (From previous calibration constants)
Response (Float) The resistance reference value.

Example: OHMREF? CHECK 1.000021902360723E+00

OLDREF

Description Overlapped command, ignored if not in remote.

Sets the calibrator’s output to the previously-programmed reference value. (The same as
pressing the ENTER key in local operation.)

Parameter None.

ONTIME?

Description Sequential command.

Returns the time in minutes since the calibrator was turned on.

Parameters: None.

Response (Integer) Number of minutes since power-up this session.

*OPC

Description Sequential command.

Sets bit 0 (OPC for "Operation Complete") in the Event Status Register to 1 when all
pending device operations are complete.

Parameter None

Response Sets bit 0 (OPC for "Operation Complete") in the Event Status Register to 1 when all
pending device operations are complete.

Example: After sending an OUT command, check if the output has settled by sending *OPC. As soon
as the output has settled, a pending *OPC command sets bit 0 (OPC for "Operation
Complete") in the Event Status Register to 1. The command to read the ESR is *ESR?.

*OPC?

Description Sequential command.

Causes program execution to pause until all operations are complete; returns a 1 upon
completion of these operations. (See also *WAI.)

Parameter None

Response (Integer) "1" after all operations are complete.

Example: If you had sent an OUT command, you can check if the output has settled by sending *OPC
or *OPC?. As soon as the OUT command has completed (output settled), a pending *OPC
command places a "1" in the output buffer to be read by the controller.

5-33
5700A/5720A Series II
Operators Manual

Table 5-2. Commands (continued)

OPER
Description Overlapped command, ignored if not in remote.
Activates the calibrator’s output if in standby. OPER is inhibited for outputs 22V and over, if
there are faults in the fault queue (see "Fault Queue").
Parameter None
*OPT?
Description Sequential command.
Returns a list of analog modules installed in the calibrator, including any auxiliary amplifiers
that are attached.
Parameter None
Response (Series of strings) A list of the modules and auxiliary amplifiers, separated by commas.
Example: "5725A Attached","5215A Attached"
OUT
Description Overlapped command, ignored if not in remote.
Sets the output of the calibrator and establishes a new reference point for shifting the output
to determine UUT error. If only one parameter is supplied, the calibrator makes the
minimum change needed to comply with the requested output. For example, if the calibrator
setting is 1V, 100 Hz and you send "OUT 2V", the setting changes to 2V, 100 Hz.
Parameters: 1. (Optional) Output amplitude with optional multiplier and unit. (At least one parameter
must be sent.)
2. (Optional) Output frequency with optional multiplier and unit. (At least one parameter
must be sent.)
Examples OUT -15.2 V (-15.2V; frequency unchanged)
OUT 188.3 MA, 442 HZ (188.3 mA, 442 Hz)
OUT 1.9 MOHM (1.9 MΩ)
OUT 100 HZ (Sets the frequency only)
OUT?
Description Sequential command
Returns the calibrator’s output amplitude and frequency (does not include multipliers).
Parameter None
Response 1. (Float) Output amplitude
2. (String) Units (V, DBM, A, or OHM)
3. (Float) Frequency (0 if dc or ohms)
Examples 1.256983E+01,V,0 (12.56983V)
1.883E-01,A,4.42E+02 (188.3 mA, 442 Hz)
1.9E+06,OHM,0 (1.9 MΩ)
OUT_ERR?
Description Sequential command.
Returns the UUT error computed by the calibrator after using the INCR command to shift
the output.
Parameter None
Response 1. (Float) UUT error magnitude
2. (String) units for the above number (PPM, PCT, or DB)

5-34
 Remote Operation
Commands 5
Table 5-2. Commands (continued)

PHASE
Description Overlapped command, ignored if not in remote.
Sets the phase output signal to lead or lag the main output signal by up to 180 degrees.
Parameter Phase in degrees (-359 to 359, fractions ignored)
PHASE?
Description Sequential command.
Returns the phase angle of the variable phase output signal, with respect to the main output
signal.
Parameter None
Response (Integer) Phase in degrees (0 to 359, 0 if the output is not ac)
PHASELCK
Description Overlapped command, ignored if not in remote.
Enables or disables external phase locking, when the calibrator is supplying an ac voltage.
Parameter ON (Activates phase locking)
OFF (Deactivates phase locking)
PHASESFT
Description Overlapped command, ignored if not in remote.
Enables or disables the variable phase output, when the calibrator is supplying an ac
voltage.
Parameter ON (Activates variable phase output)
OFF (Deactivates variable phase output)
*PUD
Description Sequential command.
(Protected user data command.) Allows a string of bytes to be stored in nonvolatile memory.
(The CALIBRATION switch must be enabled.) See the RPT_STR command.
Parameter #0 \<user data\> <ASCII Line Feed with EOI>
or
#<non-zero digit> \<digits\> \<user data\>
For both forms, the bytes received in the \<user data\> field are stored in nonvolatile
memory; allowing up to 63 bytes.
The first form accepts data bytes after the #0 until the ASCII Line Feed character is received
with an EOI signal. In the second form, the non-zero digit specifies the number of characters
(0 - 9, or ASCII 48 - 57 decimal), in the \<digits\> field. The value in the \<digits\> field
defines the number of user data bytes in the \<user data\> field.
Example: *PUD #0FLUKE<Line Feed with EOI>
or
*PUD #15FLUKE
Both examples store the word FLUKE in the protected user data area.
Note
The 1 indicates that one digit must follow (in this case ‘5’), and the 5
indicates that five characters are in the remainder of the *PUD message (in
this case, FLUKE).

5-35
5700A/5720A Series II
Operators Manual

Table 5-2. Commands (continued)

*PUD?

Description Sequential command.

Returns the contents of the *PUD (Protected User Data) memory.

Parameter None

Response #(non-zero digit) (digits) (user data)

The non-zero digit specifies the number of characters that will follow in the \<digits\> field.
These characters are 0 through 9 (ASCII 48 through 57 decimal). The value of the number
in the \<digits\> field defines the number of user data bytes that follow in the \<user data\>
field. The maximum response is 64 characters.

Example *PUD?

Returns: "205FLUKE" assuming that this is stored as in the example for PUD* above.

RANGE?

Description Sequential command.

Returns the present output range.

Parameter None

Response (String) Symbolic name of the range from Table 5-4.

RANGELCK

Description Overlapped command, ignored if not in remote.

Locks or unlocks the present output range. The range automatically unlocks if the output
function changes, for example from dc volts to dc current.

Parameter ON (Locks the range)

OFF (Unlocks the range)
RCOMP

Description Overlapped command, ignored if not in remote.

While a resistance output 19 kΩ or lower is selected, RCOMP activates or deactivates two-

wire ohms compensation circuitry.

Parameter ON (Turns on the two-wire compensation circuitry)

OFF (Turns off the two-wire compensation circuitry)
REFOUT?

Description Sequential command.

Returns the value of the reference, which is the output value of the calibrator the last time a
new reference was established with an OUT, NEW_REF, or MULT.

Parameter None

Response 1. (Float) Output amplitude

2. (String) Units (V, A, OHM, or DBM)
3. (String) Frequency (0 if dc)

5-36
 Remote Operation
Commands 5
Table 5-2. Commands (continued)

RPT_STR

Description Sequential command.

Loads the user report string. The user report string can be read on the Control Display in
local operation, and appears on calibration reports. The CALIBRATION switch must be set
to ENABLE.

Parameter String of up to 40 characters

RPT_STR?

Description Sequential command.

Returns the user report string. The user report string can be read on the Control Display in
local operation, and appears on calibration reports.

Parameter None

Response (String) Up to 40 characters

*RST

Description Overlapped command, ignored if not in remote.

(Reset.) Sets the calibrator to its power-up default state: 0V, 0 Hz, Standby, [BOOST] off,
[W BND] off, [EX GRD] off, [EX SNS] off, phase lock off, phase shift off, range lock off,
[SCALE] off, [OFFSET] off, two-wire compensation off, and entry limits set to defaults.

*RST does not affect any of the following:

• State of the IEEE-488 interface
• Selected bus address
• Status Register Enable setting
• Contents of nonvolatile memory
SCALE

Description Sequential command, ignored if not in remote.

Turns scaling on or off. (The same as pressing the SCALE key on the front panel.)

Parameters: ON or OFF

SCALE?

Description Sequential command.

Returns the full-scale nominal and full-scale actual values set when SCALE more was
turned on. If scaling is off, both responses one and two are "0.0."

Responses: 1. (Float) Nominal full-scale value

2. (Float) Actual full-scale value
3. (String) V, A, or DBM; units for the first two responses

5-37
5700A/5720A Series II
Operators Manual

Table 5-2. Commands (continued)

SCAL_ERR?

Description Sequential command.

Returns the value of the scale error if scaling is on; otherwise, this command returns 0.0.

Parameter None

Response 1. (Float) Scale error

2. (String) Units for scale error
SP_EOF

Description Sequential command, ignored if not in remote.

Sets the End-Of-File character string for the RS-232-C serial interface. The EOF setting is
saved when the power is turned off.

Parameters: 1. ASCII code (decimal) for the first character

2. ASCII code (decimal) for the second character
(A "0" for parameter 1 or 2 means that there is no character in that position.)

SP_EOF?

Description Sequential command.

Returns the End-Of-File character string.

Parameter None

Response 1. (Integer) ASCII code in decimal for the 1st character

2. (Integer) ASCII code in decimal for the 2nd character
(A "0" for response 1 or 2 means there is no character in that position.)

SP_SET

Description Sequential command, ignored if not in remote.

Sets the serial port settings and saves them in nonvolatile memory.

Parameters: One or more of the following, in any order:

1. Baud rate as 110, 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, or 19200
2. TERM or COMP (See note below)
3. XON, RTS, or NOSTALL (Stall method)
4. DBIT7 or DBIT8 (Data bits)
5. SBIT1 or SBIT2 (Stop bits)
6. PNONE, PEVEN, PODD, or PIGNORE (Parity)
7. CR, LF, or CRLF (End-Of-Line)
Note
The TERM or COMP parameter sets the responses in serial remote control
to be appropriate for interactive terminal use or operation under program
control. Specifying TERM sets the remote port to expect a human operator
using a terminal. Specifying COMP sets the remote port to expect a computer
program to be controlling the calibrator. (This command has the same effect
as setting Remote I/F to TERMINAL or COMPUTER in the RS-232C Port
Setup Menu.)
Defaults: 9600,TERM,XON,DBIT8,SBIT1,PNONE,CRLF

Example: 1200,COMP,XON,DBIT8,SBIT1,PEVEN,CRLF

5-38
 Remote Operation
Commands 5
Table 5-2. Commands (continued)

SP_SET?
Description Sequential command.
Returns the serial port settings contained in nonvolatile memory.
Response 1. (Integer) One of these baud rates: 110, 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, or 19200
2. (String) TERM or COMP (Response type)
3. (String) XON, RTS, or NOSTALL (Stall method)
4. (String) DBIT7 or DBIT8 (Data bits)
5. (String) SBIT1 or SBIT2 (Stop bits)
6. (String) PNONE, PEVEN, PODD, or PIGNORE (Parity)
7. (String) CR, LF, or CRLF (End-Of-Line)
Example: 9600,TERM,XON,DBIT8,SBIT1,PNONE,CRLF

SP_TIME
Description Sequential command, ignored if not in remote.
Sets the timeout period for the RS-232-C serial interface. (Timeout is the time the interface
waits after being stalled before aborting the communication session.) The timeout setting is
saved even when the power is turned off.
Parameter 0, No timeout
1 to 30, Timeout period in seconds
SP_TIME?
Description Sequential command.
Returns the timeout period for the RS-232-C serial port. Timeout is the time the interface
waits after being stalled before aborting the communication session.
Parameter None
Response 0, No timeout (the interface will wait forever)
1 to 30, Timeout period in seconds
*SRE
Description Sequential command.
Loads a byte into the Service Request Enable register (SRE), described under "Checking
the Calibrator’s Status."
Parameter The decimal equivalent of the binary number to load into the register.
Example: *SRE 56
Enables bits 3 (IIR), 4 (MAV), and 5 (ESR) in the Service Request Enable register.

*SRE?
Description Sequential command.
Returns the byte from the Service Request Enable register, described under "Checking the
Calibrator’s Status."
Parameter None
Response (Integer) The decimal equivalent of the register byte.
Example: *SRE?
Returns: "56" if bits 3 (IIR), 4 (MAV), and 5 (ESR) are enabled (1) and the rest of the bits
are disabled (0). (See "Checking the Calibrator’s Status" for details.)

5-39
5700A/5720A Series II
Operators Manual

Table 5-2. Commands (continued)

STATE?
Description Sequential command.
Returns the long-term state of the calibrator.
Parameter None
Response (Integer) Gross state, with the following responses:
0 Operating 10 Calibration, wideband positive gain
1 Self diagnostics 11 Calibration, wideband negative gain
2 Self diagnostics halted by a fault 12 Wideband flatness calibration
3 Calibration check 13 Range calibration
4 DC zeros calibration 14 5725A voltage diagnostics
5 Calibration, +dc reference 15 5725A current diagnostics
6 Calibration, -dc reference 16 5725A voltage troubleshooting
7 Calibration, 1Ω reference 17 5725A current troubleshooting
8 Calibration, 10 kΩ reference 18 Analog output tripped to dormant
9 Calibration, internal adjustment 19 Starting up
2. (String) Substate:
If operating, self calibrating, diagnosing, or testing, returns a descriptive string of the
activity underway.

*STB?
Description Sequential command.
Returns the status byte. The status byte is described under "Status Information."
Parameter None
Response (Integer) Decimal equivalent of the status byte.
Example: *STB?
Returns: "72" if bits 3 (EAV) and 6 (MSS) are set (1) and the rest of the bits are reset (0).
STBY
Description Overlapped command, ignored if not in remote.
Puts the calibrator in standby.
Parameter None
STOP_PR
Description Sequential command, ignored if not in remote.
Stops printing a report.
Parameter None
*TST?
Description Sequential command, ignored if not in remote.
Initiates a series of self-tests, then returns a "0" for pass or a "1" for fail. If any faults are
detected, they are logged into the fault queue where they can be read by the FAULT?
query.
Parameter None
Response (Integer) 0 (for Pass) or 1 (for Fail)

5-40
 Remote Operation
Commands 5
Table 5-2. Commands (continued)

UNCERT?

Description Sequential command.

Returns the calculated maximum uncertainty of the calibrator’s output according to the
selected calibration interval. (The same as pressing s from the front panel.)

Parameter None

Response 1. (Float) Uncertainty of the calibrator’s output (-1.0 if no specification is available)

2. (String Units for response 1 (PPM, PCT, V, A, OHM, etc.)
3. (Integer) The specification interval in days.
VOUT?

Description Sequential command.

Returns the output amplitude expressed in volts if the currently selected units are dBm.

Parameter None

Response 1. (Float) Output amplitude

2. (String) V, A, OHM; units for response 1
3. (Float) Frequency
Example: Assuming a value of 10 dBm, 10 kHz is currently active on the main output terminals,
VOUT? returns: "2.4494897E+00,V,1.0000E+04"

*WAI

Description Sequential command.

(Wait-to-Continue.) This command prevents further remote commands from being executed
until all previous remote commands have been executed. (See also *OPC.)

Parameter None

Example: If you had sent an OUT command, you can cause the calibrator to wait until the output has
settled before continuing on to the next command by following OUT with a *WAI command.
This is useful because OUT is an overlapped command, which means the calibrator would
normally go on to process other commands before completing the OUT command.

WBAND

Description Overlapped command, ignored if not in remote.

Activates or deactivates output from the Wideband AC Module (Option 5700A-03). This has
the same action as pressing w from the front panel during local operation.

Parameter ON or OFF

5-41
5700A/5720A Series II
Operators Manual

Table 5-3. Serial Remote Control Commands

LOCAL

Description Sequential command.

Enables the local state. This command duplicates the IEEE-488-GTL (Go to Local)
message.

Parameter None

LOCKOUT

Description Sequential command.

Enables the local lockout state. This command duplicates the IEEE-488 LLO (Local
Lookout) message.

Parameter None

REMOTE

Description Sequential command.

Enables the remote state. This command duplicates the IEEE-488 REN (Remote Enable)
message.

Parameter None

Table 5-4. Range Identifiers for Remote Commands

Function Ranges

DC Voltage DC220MV DC22V DC1100V DC2_2V DC220V

DC5205V DC11V
DC Current DC220UA DC 220A DC5220A DC2_2MA DC2_2A
DC5725A DC22MA
AC Voltage AC2_2MV AC22V AC5205V AC22MV AC220V
AC5215V AC220MV AC1100V AC5725V AC2_2V
AC Current AC220UA AC220MA AC5220A AC2_2MA AC2_2A
AC5725A AC22MA
Resistance OHM0 OHM190 OHM190K OHM1 OHM1K
OHM1M OHM1_9 OHM19K OHM1_9M OHM10
OHM10K OHM10M OHM19 OHM19K OHM19M
OHM100 OHM100K OHM100M
Wideband WB1_1MV WB33MV WB1_1V WB3_3MV WB110MV
WB3_5V WB11MV WB330MV

5-42
 Remote Operation
Local-to-Remote State Transitions 5
5-22. Local-to-Remote State Transitions
The calibrator can be operated either locally from the front panel, or remotely, by
responding to remote control commands. In addition to front panel and remote control
operation, the controller can be placed in a local lockout condition at any time by remote
command. When combined, the local, remote, and lockout conditions yield four possible
operating states:
• Local (Front Panel Operation)
The calibrator responds to local and remote commands, but only remote commands
that do not affect the state of the calibrator are allowed to execute. (For example
OUT?, which returns the value of the calibrator’s output setting is executable in the
local state, but OUT, which sets the output to another value cannot be executed in
local state.)
• Local with Lockout
Local with lockout is identical to local, except the calibrator will go into the remote
with lockout state instead of the remote state when it receives a remote command.
The local with lockout state is entered by executing the LOCKOUT statement from
an IEEE-488 controller, or by sending the LOCKOUT command froma serial
controller.
• Remote
When the Remote Enable (REN) line is asserted and the controller addresses the
calibrator as a listener, it enters the remote state. These conditions are met, for
example, when a 1722A executes the BASIC statement “REMOTE \ PRINT @4
‘OUT 10MV’” if the calibrator's address is 4. In the remote state, Control Display
changes to:

PREV
MENU

Front panel operation is restricted to use of the power switch and the “Go To Local
Control” softkey. Pressing this softkey or sending the GTL (Go To Local) interface
message returns the calibrator to the local state. (One way to send the GTL interface
message in some controllers is by executing the LOCAL statement.)

5-43
5700A/5720A Series II
Operators Manual

• Remote with Lockout

The remote with lockout state can be entered from remote or local with lockout, but
not directly from local. Remote with lockout is similar to the remote state, but
restricted: the “Go To Local Control” softkey label does not appear on the Control
Display. To return the calibrator to the local with lockout state, the GPIB controller
sends GTL. (With some IEEE-488 controllers, you can do this manually by executing
a WBYTE statement.) To return the calibrator to the local state, the GPIB controller
unasserts the REN control line. (In BASIC, this is accomplished by sending the
LOCAL command.) When the calibrator is in remote with lockout, the Control
Display appears as follows for some controllers:

PREV
MENU

Table 5-5 summarizes the possible Remote/Local state transitions.

Table 5-5. Operating State Transitions

From To Use Typical GPIB 1722A Serial

Command Command

Local Remote MAL + REN REMOTE REMOTE

Local/Lockout LLO + REN LOCKOUT LOCKOUT

Remote Local GTL or GO TO LOCAL LOCAL LOCAL

CONTROL softkey

Remote/Lockout LLO + REN LOCKOUT LOCKOUT

Local/Lockout Remote/Lockout MLA + REN REMOTE or any REMOTE

calibrator
command

Remote/Lockout Local REN not LOCAL LOCAL

Local/Lockout GTL Manually using None

WBYTE

5-44
 Remote Operation
Checking the Calibrator’s Status 5
5-23. Checking the Calibrator’s Status
The controller has access to six status registers for the calibrator, which indicate the
calibrator’s conditions in the as shown in Figure 5-1. Each register bit is explained under
separate headings for each register. Table 5-6 lists each register and its remote
commands.
In addition to the status registers, the Service Request control line, SRQ (available only
when using an IEEE-488 controller) and a 16-element buffer called the Fault Queue
provide status information.

Table 5-6. Status Register Summary

Register READ WRITE Enable

Command Command Register

Serial Poll Status Byte (STB) *STB? None SRE

(or SPL( ) for some controllers)

Service Request Enable Register (SRE) *SRE? *SRE None

Event Status Register (ESR) *ESR? None ESE

Event Status Enable Register (ESE) *ESE? *ESE None

Instrument Status Register (ISR) ISR? None None

Instrument Status Change Register (ISCR) ISCR? None ISCE

Instrument Status Change Enable Register (ISCE) ISCE? ISCE None

5-45
5700A/5720A Series II
Operators Manual

W O D

PE D
SC ND E

G S
T Y

O T

P
EM E
B T

O AR
LO T

S T
EX EN
R CK
PS CK
O LE
SE TBS

PL SE

BO M
R TL

R HIF

EX S

R
O
O
A
FF

C
P
R
0
0
Instrument Status 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Change Enable
Register
&
Reading Using ISCE? &
Write to Using ISCE &
&
&
&

Logical OR
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
Instrument Status
Change Register 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Read Using ISCR?

Bit Change from 0 1 or 1 0

Instrument Status
Register 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Read using ISR?
EX E

Q E
0 E
N

FC
D E
M

D
Y
PO

O
C
0

Event Status Data

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Register Available?
Read using *ESR?
&
&
Logical OR

& Output Buffer

&
&
&
&
&

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Event Status Fault

Enable Register Available?
Read using *ESE?
Write using *ESE

Fault Queue

Read by Serial Poll

RQS
Service Request
Generation 7 6 ESB MAV EAV ISCB 1 0 Status Byte Register
MSS
Read using *STB?

&
Logical OR

SRQ &
on &
IEEE bus &
&
&
&
Service Request
7 5 4 3 2 1 0 Enable Register
Read using *SRE?
Write using *SRE

Figure 5-1. Overview of Status Data Structure

5-46
 Remote Operation
Checking the Calibrator’s Status 5
5-24. Serial Poll Status Byte
The most important and frequently used register is the serial poll status byte, which is the
calibrator’s response to a serial poll. This byte is cleared (set to 0) when the power is
turned on. You cannot do a serial poll if you are using the RS-232C port as the remote
control interface. Instead, you can send the *STB? command to get the same information.
Its bits are defined as follows (bits 7, 1, and 0 are always 0):
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 RQS ESB MAV EAV ISCB 0 0
MSS

RQS Requesting Service. The RQS bit is set to 1 whenever bits ESB , MAV, EAV, or
ISCB change from 0 to 1 and are enabled (bit 1) in the SRE. When RQS is 1, the
calibrator asserts the SRQ control line on the IEEE-488 interface. You can do a
serial poll to read this bit to see if the calibrator is the source of an SRQ.
MSS Master Summary Status. Set to 1 whenever bits ESB, MAV, EAV, or ISCB are 1
and enabled (bit 1) in the SRE. This bit can be read using the *STB? command
in serial remote control in place of doing a serial poll.
ESB Set to 1 when one or more enabled ESR bits are 1.
MAV Message Available. The MAV bit is set to 1 whenever data is available in the
calibrator’s IEEE-488 interface output buffer.
EAV Error (fault) available. A fault has occurred and a fault code is available through
the FAULT? query.
ISCB One or more enabled ISCR bits are 1.

5-47
5700A/5720A Series II
Operators Manual

5-25. Service Request Line (SRQ)

Service Request (SRQ) is an IEEE-488.1 bus control line that the calibrator asserts to
notify the controller that it requires some type of service. Many instruments can be on the
bus, but they all share a single SRQ line. To determine which instrument set SRQ, the
Controller normally does a serial poll of each instrument. The calibrator asserts SRQ
whenever the RQS bit in its Serial Poll Status Byte is 1. This bit informs the controller
that the calibrator was the source of the SRQ.
The calibrator clears SRQ and RQS whenever the controller performs a serial poll of the
calibrator’s IEEE-488 interface, sends *CLS, or whenever the MSS bit is cleared. The
MSS bit is cleared only when ESB, MAV, EAV, and ISCB are 0, or they are disabled by
their associated enable bits in the SRE register being set to 0.

5-26. Service Request Enable Register

The Service Request Enable Register (SRE) enables or masks the bits of the Serial Poll
Status Byte. The SRE is cleared at power up. Refer to “Serial Poll Status Byte” for the bit
functions.

5-27. Loading the SRE

By resetting (to 0) the bits in the SRE, you can mask (disable) associated bits in the serial
poll status byte. Bits set to 1 enable the associated bit in the serial poll status byte. The
following sample program enables the ESB bit.
1Ø ! THIS PROGRAM SETS ESB IN THE SRE
2Ø GOSUB 9Ø! GET AND PRINT OLD SRE
3Ø A% = A% + 32% ! ENABLE ESB (BIT 5)
4Ø PRINT @4,”*SRE “;A% ! “
6Ø GOSUB 9Ø! GET AND PRINT NEW SRE
8Ø END
9Ø PRINT @4, “*SRE?” ! ASK FOR THE SRE CONTENTS
1ØØ INPUT @4, A%! RETRIEVE THE REGISTER CONTENTS
11Ø PRINT “SRE = “;A%
12Ø RETURN

5-48
 Remote Operation
Checking the Calibrator’s Status 5
5-28. Event Status Register
The Event Status Register is a two-byte register in which the higher eight bits are always
0, and the lower eight bits except bits 6 and 1 represent various conditions of the
calibrator. The ESR is cleared (set to 0) when the power is turned on, and every time it is
read.
A mask register called the Event Status Enable register (ESE) allows the controller to
enable or mask (disable) each bit in the ESR. When a bit in the ESE is 1, the
corresponding bit in the ESR is enabled. When any enabled bit in the ESR is 1, the ESB
bit in the Serial Poll Status Byte also goes to 1. The ESR bit stays 1 until the controller
reads the ESR or does a device clear, a selected device clear, or sends the reset or *CLS
command to the calibrator. The ESE is cleared (set to 0) when the power is turned on.

5-29. Bit Assignments for the ESR and ESE

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
PON 0 CME EXE DDE QYE 0 OPC

PON Power on. This bit is set to 1 if the power supply has been turned off and on
since the last time the ESR was read.
CME Command error (fault). The calibrator’s IEEE-488 interface encountered an
incorrectly formed command. (The command FAULT? fetches the earliest fault
code in the fault queue, which contains fault codes for the first 15 faults that have
occurred.)
EXE Execution error (fault). A fault occurred when the calibrator tried to execute the
last command. One possible cause for this error is a parameter that’s out of
range. (The command FAULT? fetches the earliest fault in the fault queue, which
contains fault codes for the first 15 faults that have occurred.)
DDE Device-dependent error (fault). A fault related to a device-dependent command
has occurred. One possible cause for this error would be an attempt to execute
“OUT 1000000V”, which is outside the calibrator’s range. (The command
FAULT? fetches the earliest fault in the fault queue, which contains fault codes
for the first 15 faults that have occurred.)
QYE Query error (fault). The calibrator was addressed to talk when no response data
was available or appropriate, or when the controller failed to retrieve data on the
output queue.
OPC Operation complete. All commands previous to reception of an *OPC command
have been executed, and the interface is ready to accept another message.

5-49
5700A/5720A Series II
Operators Manual

5-30. Reading the ESR and ESE

To read the contents of the ESR, send the remote command, *ESR?. The ESR is cleared
(set to 0) every time it is read. To read the contents of the ESE, send the remote
command, *ESE?. The ESE is not cleared when it is read. When you read either register,
the calibrator responds by sending a decimal number that represents bits 0 through 15.
The following sample program retrieves the contents of both registers:
1Ø ! THIS PROGRAM READS THE ESR AND THE ESE REGISTERS
2Ø PRINT @4, “*ESR?”! ASK FOR THE ESR CONTENTS
3Ø INPUT @4, A! RETRIEVE THE REGISTER CONTENTS
4Ø PRINT @4, “*ESE?”! ASK FOR THE ESE CONTENTS
5Ø INPUT @4, B! RETRIEVE THE REGISTER CONTENTS
6Ø PRINT “ESR = “;A ! DISPLAY THE ESR REGISTER CONTENTS VALUE
7Ø PRINT “ESE = “;B ! DISPLAY THE ESE REGISTER CONTENTS VALUE
8Ø END

Convert the contents of variables A and B into binary, and you can read the status of the
registers. For example if A is 32, its binary equivalent is: 00000000 00100000. Therefore,
bit 5 (CME) in the ESR is set (1) and the rest of the bits are reset (0). This tells you that
the calibrator has encountered a command fault. (It tried to execute an incorrectly formed
command.)

5-31. Loading the ESE

By resetting the bits in the ESE, you can mask (disable) the associated bits in the ESR.
For example, to prevent the occurrence of a command fault from causing bit 5 (ESB) in
the serial poll status byte to go to 1, you can reset (to 0) bit 5 in the ESE register. The
following sample program accomplishes this by checking the status of the CME bit, then
toggling it if it is 1.
1Ø ! THIS PROGRAM RESETS BIT 5 (CME) IN THE ESE
2Ø PRINT @4,”*ESE 33” ! INITIAL ESE <-- EXE + OPC
3Ø GOSUB ! GET AND PRINT INITIAL ESE
4Ø IF (A% AND 32%) THEN A% = A% - 32% ! CLEAR EXE (BIT 5)
5Ø PRINT @4, “*ESE?” ! LOAD THE ESE WITH THE NEW VALUE
6Ø GOSUB 8Ø ! GET AND PRINT NEW ESE
7Ø END
8Ø PRINT @4, “*ESE?” !ASK FOR THE ESE CONTENTS
9Ø INPUT @4, A% !RETRIEVE THE REGISTER CONTENTS
1ØØ PRINT “ESE = “;A%
11Ø RETURN

5-50
 Remote Operation
Checking the Calibrator’s Status 5
5-32. Instrument Status Register
The Instrument Status Register (ISR) gives the controller access to the state of the
calibrator, including some of the information presented to the operator on the Control
Display and the display annunciators during local operation.

5-33. Instrument Status Change Register

The Instrument Status Change Register (ISCR) indicates which ISR bits have changed
status (from 0 to 1 or from 1 to 0) since the ISCR was last read. The ISCR is cleared (set
to 0) when the calibrator is turned on, and every time it is read.

5-34. Instrument Status Change Enable Register

The Instrument Status Change Enable Register (ISCE) is a mask register for the ISCR. If
a bit in the ISCE is enabled (set to 1) and the corresponding bit in the ISCR goes to 1, the
ISCB bit in the Status Byte is set to 1. If all bits in the ISCE are disabled (set to 0), the
ISCB bit in the Status Byte never goes to 1. The ISCE is cleared on power-up.

5-35. Bit Assignments for the ISR, ISCR, and ISCE

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
0 0 RPTBUSY SETTLED REMOTE WBND SCALE OFFSET

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
PLOCK PSHFT RLOCK RCOMP BOOST EXSENS EXGARD OPER

RPTBUSY When 1, a calibration report is being printed to the serial port.

SETTLED When 1, the output has stabilized to within specification.
REMOTE When 1, the calibrator is under remote control.
WBND When 1, the wideband is active.
SCALE When 1, scaling is active.
OFFSET When 1, an offset is active.
PLOCK When 1, the calibrator’s output is phase locked to an external source.
PSHFT When 1, variable phase output is active.
RLOCK When 1, the calibrator’s output range is locked.
RCOMP When 1, two-wired compensation is active when in resistance mode.
BOOST When 1, an auxiliary amplifier is active.
EXSENS When 1, external sensing is selected.
EXGARD When 1, external voltage guard is selected.
OPER When 1, the calibrator is operating, When 0, it is in standby.

5-51
5700A/5720A Series II
Operators Manual

5-36. Reading the ISR, ISCR, or ISCE

To read the contents of the ISR, send the remote command, ISR?. In a similar fashion, to
read the contents of the ISCR, send ISCR?, and to read the contents of the ISCE, send
ISCE?. The calibrator returns a decimal number representing bits 0 through 15. Every
time you read the ISCR, its contents are zeroed. The following sample program reads all
three registers:
1Ø ! THIS PROGRAM READS THE ISR, ISCR, AND ISCE REGISTERS
2Ø ! Note THAT THE ICSR? COMMAND ALSO CLEARS THE ISCR CONTENTS
3Ø PRINT @4, “ISR?” ! ASK THE ISR CONTENTS
4Ø INPUT @4,A% ! RETRIEVE THE REGISTER CONTENTS FROM THE 57ØØA
5Ø PRINT @4, “ISCR?” ! ASK FOR AND CLEAR THE ISCR CONTENTS
6Ø INPUT @4, B% ! RETRIEVE THE REGISTER CONTENTS FROM THE 57ØØA
7Ø PRINT @4, “ISCE?” ! ASK FOR THE ISCE CONTENTS
8Ø INPUT @4, C% ! RETRIEVE THE REGISTER CONTENTS FROM THE 57ØØA
9Ø PRINT “ISR =“;A% ! DISPLAY THE ISR
1ØØ PRINT “ISCR = “;B% ! DISPLAY THE ISCR
11Ø PRINT “ISCE = “;C% ! DISPLAY THE ISCE
12Ø END

To read the status of the instrument, convert the returned variables into binary. For
example if a register contains 4, its binary equivalent is: 00000000 00000100. Therefore,
bit 3 (EXSNS) is set (1) and the rest of the bits are reset (0).

5-37. Loading the ISCE

By resetting the bits in the ISCE, you can mask (disable) the associated bits in the ISCR.
For example, to cause an SRQ interrupt when an attached 5725A Amplifier turns on, bit
3 (BOOST) in the ISCE register must be 1. (The ISCB bit must also be enabled in the
SRE.) The following sample program loads a decimal 8 into the ISCE, which sets bit 3
and resets the other bits:
1Ø ! THIS PROGRAM LOADS ØØØØØØØØ ØØØØ1ØØØ BINARY INTO THE ISCE
2Ø PRINT @4, “ISCE 8” ! LOAD DECIMAL 8 INTO THE ISCE
3Ø PRINT @4, “ISCE?” ! READ BACK THE VALUE
4Ø INPUT @4, A% ! “
5Ø PRINT “ISCE = “;A% ! PRINT IT, IT SHOULD BE 8
6Ø END

5-52
 Remote Operation
IEEE-488 Interface Configuration 5
5-38. Fault Queue
When a command fault, execution fault, or device-dependent fault occurs, its fault code is
placed in the fault queue where it can be read by the FAULT? command. All fault codes
are defined in Appendix A of this manual. Another way to decode a fault code is to send
the command, EXPLAIN?, which returns a description of a fault code. Reading the first
fault with the FAULT? command removes that fault from the queue. A response of 0
means the fault queue is empty.
The fault queue contains up to 16 entries. If many faults occur, only the first 15 faults are
kept in the queue. A 16th entry in the queue is always a “fault queue overflow” fault, and
all later faults are discarded until the queue is at least partially read. The first faults are
kept, because if many faults occur before the user can acknowledge and read them, the
earliest faults are the most likely to point to the problem. The later faults are usually
repetitions or consequences of the original problem.
The OPER command is inhibited for outputs of 22V or greater whenever there is a fault
in the fault queue. The OPER command remains inhibited until either the fault queue or
the ESR is cleared.

Note
You can check your calibrator's Main CPU software revision levels using
the Instmt Config Menu, or *IDN? remote command.
After the calibrator has encountered a fault, you must do one of the following actions to
reenable the OPER command:
1. Send *CLS (to clear the ESR and fault queue)
2. Send *ESR? (to read and clear the ESR)
3. Repeatedly send the FAULT? query until 0 is returned, indicating that you have read
and cleared all faults from the queue.

5-53
5700A/5720A Series II
Operators Manual

5-39. IEEE-488 Interface Configuration

The calibrator’s IEEE-488 interface supports the IEEE-488 interface function subsets
listed in Table 5-7.

Table 5-7. Supported IEEE-488 Interface Function Subsets

Interface Function Description

SH1 Complete source handshake capability

AH1 Complete acceptor handshake capability

T6 Basic talker; serial poll; no talk-only mode; unaddress if MLA

TEO No extended talker capabilities

L4 Basic listener operation; no listen-only mode; unaddress if MTA

LEO No extended listener capabilities

SR1 Full service request capability with ability to bit-mask SRQ

RL1 Full remoter/local capability including local lockout

PPO No parallel poll capability

DC1 Device clear capability

DT0 No device trigger capability

C0 No bus control capability

5-54
 Remote Operation
Bus Communication Overview 5
5-40. Bus Communication Overview
Communication between the controller and the calibrator takes place using commands
established by IEEE-488 standards and commands specifically related to the calibrator.
The commands in Tables 5-1, 5-2, and 5-3 are all the remote commands, both common
and device-dependent. Definitions of the different types of messages used on the IEEE-
488 bus follow.
• Device-Dependent Commands
Device-Dependent commands are messages used to transfer information directly
between the calibrator and the IEEE-488 controller. Some commands cause an action
to take place in the calibrator. Others, called queries in the IEEE standards, ask for
information, and always generate a response message from the instrument. While
message format is governed by IEEE-488 standards, messages themselves can be
unique to the calibrator. For example, device-dependent commands are used to set the
output mode and amplitude, and to switch from standby to operate.
• Common Commands
IEEE standard 488.2 defines common commands, which are used for functions
common to most bus devices. Examples include the command for resetting a device
(*RST) and the query for device identification (*IDN?). Common commands and
queries can be identified easily because they all begin with an asterisk (*).
• Interface Messages
IEEE standards define interface messages, which manage the interface system. Some
of the interface messages have their own control lines, and others are sent over the
data lines by first asserting the control line ATN (Attention). An important thing to
note about interface messages is that unlike device-dependent and common
commands, interface messages are not sent literally (in a. For example, when you
send a device-dependent query to the calibrator, the controller automatically sends
the interface message MTA (My Talk Address).

5-55
5700A/5720A Series II
Operators Manual

5-41. Definition: Queries and Commands

Messages directed to the calibrator fall naturally into two categories: commands and
queries. Commands instruct the calibrator to do something or to set a value; no response
is expected. Queries generally ask only for information from the calibrator; a response is
always expected. Some queries also require the calibrator to take action. For example, the
*TST? query has the calibrator do a self test, then send the result to the controller. A
query always ends with a question mark. A command never ends with a question mark.
Tables 5-2 and 5-3 do not separate commands and queries; they are all called commands
and are presented together in one alphabetical list.
All query responses are generated instantly on receipt of the query. In other words,
queries generate their output when the calibrator executes the query rather than when the
controller attempts to read the response. The calibrator simply generates the requested
message and places it in an area of memory called the output buffer. When the controller
addresses the calibrator as a talker, the contents of the output buffer are transmitted to the
controller.
Some messages have both query and command forms (e.g., *PUD and *PUD?). In such
cases, the command generally sets the value of a parameter and the query generally
returns the most recent value of the parameter. Some messages are queries only (e.g.,
*IDN?). Some messages are commands only (e.g., *RST).

5-42. Functional Elements Of Commands

Table 5-8 lists the functional elements of commands described by the IEEE-488.2
standard that are used by the calibrator. This table is for those who have a copy of the
standard and want to use it to pursue additional information. The standard provides full
definitions and syntax diagrams for each element.

5-56
 Remote Operation
Bus Communication Overview 5
Table 5-8. Functional Elements of Commands

Element Function

PROGRAM MESSAGE A sequence of zero or more PROGRAM MESSAGE UNIT

elements, each of which is separated by a PROGRAM
MESSAGE UNIT SEPARATOR element

PROGRAM MESSAGE UNIT A command, programming data, or query received by the

device.

COMMAND MESSAGE UNIT A command or programming data received by the device.

QUERY MESSAGE UNIT A query sent from the controller to the device.

PROGRAM DATA Any of the six available program data types.

PROGRAM MESSAGE UNIT SEPARATOR Separates the PROGRAM MESSAGE UNIT elements that
comprise a PROGRAM MESSAGE.

PROGRAM HEADER SEPARATOR Separates the header from the PROGRAM DATA.

PROGRAM DATA SEPARATOR Separates PROGRAM DATA ELEMENTS listed under one
header.

PROGRAM MESSAGE TERMINATOR Terminates a PROGRAM MESSAGE.

COMMAND PROGRAM HEADER Specifies a function or operation. Used with any associated
PROGRAM DATA ELEMENTS.

QUERY PROGRAM HEADER Similar to a COMMAND PROGRAM HEADER except that

is contains a query indicator (?) since a response form the
device is expected.

CHARACTER PROGRAM DATA A data type suitable for sending short mnemonic data;
generally used where a numeric data type is not suitable.

DECIMAL NUMERIC PROGRAM DATA A data type suitable for sending decimal integers of decimal
fractions, with or without exponents.

NON-DECIMAL NUMERIC PROGRAM DATA A data type suitable for sending integer numeric
representations in base 16, 8, or 2.

SUFFIX PROGRAM DATA An optional field that follows DECIAML NUMERIC

PROGRAM DATA, and is used to indicate associated
multipliers and units.

STRING PROGRAM DATA A data type suitable for sending 7-bit ASCII character
strings where the content needs to be hidden (by
delimiters).

ARBITRARY BLOCK PROGRAM DATA A data type suitable for sending blocks of arbitrary 8-bit
information. Block size is limited to 1024 bytes.

5-57
5700A/5720A Series II
Operators Manual

5-43. Interface Messages

Interface messages manage traffic on the bus. Device addressing and clearing, data
handshaking, and commands to place status bytes on the bus are all directed by interface
messages. Some of the interface messages occur as state transitions of dedicated control
lines. The rest of the interface messages are sent over the data lines with the ATN signal
true. (All device-dependent and common commands are sent over the data lines with the
ATN signal false.)
IEEE-488 standards define interface messages. Table 5-9 lists the interface messages that
the calibrator accepts. Table 5-9 also shows the BASIC statement you execute on some
controllers to generate the interface message. Table 5-10 lists the interface messages that
the calibrator sends. The mnemonics listed in the tables are not sent in BASIC PRINT
statements as commands are; in this way they are different from device-dependent and
common commands.
Interface messages are handled automatically in most cases. For example, handshake
messages DAV, DAC, and RFD automatically occur under the direction of an
instrument's interface itself as each byte is sent over the bus.

Table 5-9. Interface Messages Accepted by the Calibrator

Mnemonic Name Function Related Controller

Command

ATN Attention A control line used to notify all instruments on the None
bus that the next data bytes are an interface
message. If ATN is low, these data bytes are
interpreted as device-dependent or common
commands, addressed to a specific instrument.

DAC Data Accepted Sets the handshake signal line NDAC low. None

DAV Data Valid Asserts the handshake signal line DAV. None

DCL Device Clear Clears the input/output buffers. CLEAR

END End A message that appears when the controller None

asserts the EOI signal line before sending a byte.

GTL Go To Local Transfers control of the calibrator from one of the LOCAL
remote states to one of the local states (See
Table 5-5.)

LLO Local Lockout Transfers remote/local control of the calibrator. LOCKOUT

(See Table 5-5.)

IFC Interface Clear A control line that sets the interface to a INIT
quiescent state.

MLA My Listen Address Addresses a specific device on the bus as a None

listener. The controller sends MLA automatically
whenever it directs a device-dependent of
common query to a specific instrument.

5-58
 Remote Operation
The IEEE-488 Connector 5
Table 5-9. Interface Messages Accepted by the calibrator (continued)

MTA My Talk Address Addresses a specific device on the bus as a None

talker. The controller sends MTA automatically
whenever it directs a device-dependent or
common query to a specific instrument.

REN Remote Enable Transfers remote/local control of the calibrator. REMOTE

(See Table 5-5.)

RFD Ready For Data Set the handshake signal line NRFD low. None

SDC Selected Device Identical to DCL, but only operates when the CLEAR
Clear calibrator is addressed as a listener.

SPD Serial Poll Disable Cancels a Serial Poll Enable. Part of SPL

SPE Serial Poll Enable Causes the calibrator to return a Status Byte to Part of SPL
the next command that address it as a listener,
no matter what the command is.

UNL Unlisten “Unaddresses” a specific device on the bus as a None

listener. The controller send UNL automatically
after the device has successfully received a
device-dependent or common command.

UNT Untalk “Unaddresses” a specific device on the bus as a None

listener. The controller sends UNT automatically
after it receives the response from a device-
dependent or common query.

Table 5-10. Interface Messages Sent by the Calibrator

Mnemonic Name Function

END End A message that appears when the calibrator asserts the EOI control
line, which happens when the calibrator transmits the ASCII character
LF for its termination sequence or terminator.

DAC Data Accepted Sets the handshake signal line NDAC low.

DAV Data Valid Asserts the handshake signal line DAV.

RFD Ready For Data Sets the handshake signal line NRFD low.

SRQ Service Request A control line that can be asserted by any device on the bus to indicate
that it requires attention. For details, see “Checking the Calibrator’s
Status.”

STB Status Byte The response sent to a serial poll (SPE) by the calibrator.

5-59
5700A/5720A Series II
Operators Manual

5-44. The IEEE-488 Connector

The IEEE-488 connector on the rear panel mates with an IEEE-488 Standard cable. The
pin assignments of the rear-panel IEEE-488 connector are shown in Figure 5-2.

SHIELD NDAC D104

ATN NFRD D103
SRQ DAV D102
IFC E01 D101

12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 1 1
24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13

GND REN D105

9
GND GND
D106
10 6
GND GND D107
11 7
LOGIC GND D108
GND 8

Figure 5-2. IEEE-488 Connector Pin Assignments

5-60
 Remote Operation
Remote Program Examples 5
5-45. Remote Program Examples
The following programs are written in BASIC for the Fluke 1722A Instrument
Controller.

5-46. Printing Main Output Calibration Shift Results

This program generates a printout of the changes in the magnitude of self correction
generated at the last calibration. The printout contains the following information:
• A heading that shows the date, time, and calibrator’s serial number
• Modules present (installed or attached)
• The most recent calibration dates and temperatures
• Data about the external standards used
• Values of the externally-calibrated internal references
• DC voltage output shifts for each range
• AC voltage output shifts for each range
• AC and dc current output shifts for each range
• Resistance shifts for each value
• 5725 Boost Amplifier output shifts (if attached)
• Wideband AC Module (Option 5700-03) output shifts (if installed)
1Ø REM THIS PROGRAM GENERATES A PRINTOUT OF
2Ø REM MAIN OUTPUT SHIFT RESULTS
3Ø INIT PORT Ø ! INITIALIZE THE INTERFACE
4Ø CLEAR PORT Ø ! SET THE 57ØØA TO ITS POWER-UP STATE
5Ø PRINT @4, “CAL_PR CAL” ! START CAL REPORT PRINTING
6Ø END

5-61
5700A/5720A Series II
Operators Manual

5-47. Verifying a Meter

The following program was written in BASIC for a typical instrument controller. This
program selects 10V dc output, verifies that the calibrator is set to 10V, then triggers an
8840A to take a reading. It displays the calibrator’s output, 8840A reading, and the meter
error in ppm. The program assumes that the calibrator’s bus address is 4 and the 8840A
bus address is 1.
1Ø REM THIS PROGRAM VERIFIES THE ACCURACY OF AN 884ØA AT 1ØV DC
2Ø INIT PORT Ø ! INITIALIZE THE INTERFACE
3Ø CLEAR PORT Ø ! “
4Ø PRINT @1, “F1 RØ SØ T2” ! SET 884ØA FOR VDC, SLOW READ, AUTORANGE
5Ø PRINT @4, “OUT 1Ø V ; OPER” ! SET THE 57ØØA TO 1ØV DC,
6Ø PRINT @4, “*WAI; OUT?” ! WAIT FOR SETTLE, REQUEST OUTPUT VALUE
7Ø INPUT @4, V,U$,F ! GET THE DATA FROM THE 57ØØA
8Ø PRINT @1, “?” ! TRIGGER THE 884ØA TO TAKE A READING
9Ø INPUT @1, VM ! GET THE DATA FROM THE 884ØA
1ØØ ER = ABS(V - VM)/V * 1E6 ! COMPUTE ERROR
11Ø PRINT “57ØØ OUTPUT:”;V;U$ ! PRINT THE RESULTS
12Ø PRINT “884Ø MEASURED:”;VM;”V” !
13Ø PRINT “ERROR:”;ER;”PPM”
14Ø END

5-48. Remote Calibration

You can calibrate the 5700A/5720A Series II Calibrator remotely instead of using the
front panel controls. For external calibration, you need to make connections to the
calibrator’s binding posts during the process, and you need to change the position of the
rear panel CALIBRATION switch. The following paragraphs contain samples of each of
the following programs:
• DC Zeros
• Calibration of the main output functions
• Range calibration
• Wideband AC Module (Option 5700A-03) calibration

5-49. DC Zeros
1Ø PRINT “Starting Zeros Calibration. Please wait . . .”
2Ø PRINT @4,”CAL_ZERO;*OPC?” ! 57ØØA ADDRESS IS 4
3Ø INPUT @4, A
4Ø PRINT “Zeros calibration is finished.”
5Ø END

5-62
 Remote Operation
Remote Program Examples 5
5-50. Calibration
1Ø ! THIS IS A PROGRAM FOR REMOTE MAIN OUTPUT CALIBRATION
2Ø !
25 REMOTE
3Ø PRINT @4, “*CLS; *SRE 8” ! ENABLE EAV TO TRIGGER SRQ
4Ø ON SRQ GOTO 6Ø ! SRQ HANDLER
5Ø GOTO 14Ø ! START MAIN PROGRAM
6Ø PRINT @4, “FAULT?” \ INPUT @4, A% ! SRQ HANDLER, GET FAULT CODE
7Ø IF A% = Ø GOTO 12Ø ! IF NO FAULT EXIT
8Ø PRINT @4, “EXPLAIN? “;A% \ INPUT @4, A$ ! GET EXPLANATION
9Ø PRINT
1ØØ PRINT “FAULT”;A%;”OCCURRED: “;A$ ! DISPLAY EXPLANATION
11Ø GOTO 6Ø! GET NEXT FAULT
12Ø A% = SPL(4%) ! SERIAL POLL TO CLEAR SP BYTE
13Ø RESUME 53Ø ! END OF SRQ HANDLER
14Ø PRINT “Ambient temperature in Celsius”; ! MAIN PROGRAM BEGINS
15Ø INPUT T ! GET TEMPERATURE FROM OPERATOR
16Ø PRINT @4, “CAL_TEMP”;T ! SET CAL TEMPERATURE
17Ø PRINT “Connect the 1ØV standard as shown in the manual” \ GOSUB 47Ø
18Ø PRINT “Enter the true value of 1ØV standard in volts”; \ INPUT V
19Ø PRINT “Doing 1ØV reference calibration. Please wait ...”
2ØØ PRINT @4, “CAL_REF “;V;”V;*OPC” \ GOSUB 49Ø
21Ø PRINT “Reverse the polarity of the leads” \ GOSUB 47Ø
22Ø PRINT “Doing -1ØV reference calibration. Please wait ...”
23Ø V = -V ! SET THE VARIABLE FOR -1ØV CAL
24Ø PRINT @4, “CAL_REF “;V;”V;*OPC” \ GOSUB 49Ø
25Ø PRINT “Connect the 1Ø kilohm standard to the output terminals”\GOSUB 47Ø
26Ø PRINT “Enter the true value of the 1Ø kilohm standard in kilohms”;
27Ø INPUT K1
28Ø PRINT “Doing 1Ø kilohm reference calibration. Please wait ...”
29Ø PRINT @4, “CAL_REF “;K1;”KOHM;*OPC” \ GOSUB 49Ø
3ØØ PRINT “Connect the 1 ohm standard to the output terminals”\GOSUB 47Ø
31Ø PRINT “Enter the true value of the 1 ohm standard in ohms”; \ INPUT K2
32Ø PRINT “Doing 1 ohm reference calibration. Please wait ...”
33Ø PRINT @4, “CAL_REF “;K2;”OHM;*OPC” \ GOSUB 49Ø
34Ø PRINT “Doing internal portion of calibration. Please wait ...”
35Ø PRINT @4, “CAL_ADJ;*OPC” \ GOSUB 49Ø
36Ø PRINT “Calibration finished. Print a calibration report? [y, n]”
37Ø INPUT A$ \ IF LEFT(A$,1)=“N” OR LEFT(A$,1)=“n” GOTO 4ØØ
38Ø PRINT “Set up the peripheral device.” \ GOSUB 47Ø
39Ø PRINT “Printing . . .” \ PRINT @4, “CAL_PR CHECK;*OPC” \ GOSUB 49Ø
4ØØ PRINT “Store or discard the constants? [s, d]” \ INPUT A$
41Ø IF LEFT(A$,1)=“D” OR LEFT(A$,1)=“d” GOTO 53Ø
42Ø PRINT “Set the CALIBRATION switch to ENABLE” \ GOSUB 47Ø
43Ø PRINT “Saving the constants in memory . . .”
44Ø PRINT @4, “CAL_STORE;*OPC” \ GOSUB 49Ø ! SAVE THE CONSTANTS IN MEMORY
45Ø PRINT “Set the CALIBRATION switch to NORMAL” \ GOSUB 47Ø \ GOTO 53Ø
47Ø PRINT “Press RETURN to continue” ! PAUSE FOR OPERATOR SUBROUTINE
48Ø INPUT A$ \ RETURN ! “
49Ø PRINT @4, “*ESR?” \ INPUT @4, A% ! WAIT FOR OPC SUBROUTINE
51Ø IF A% AND 1% THEN RETURN ! “, RETURN IF OPC BIT IS 1
52Ø GOTO 49Ø ! “, STAY IN LOOP IF OPC IS Ø
53Ø PRINT “All finished!” \END

5-63
5700A/5720A Series II
Operators Manual

5-51. Calibration Check

1Ø ! THIS IS A PROGRAM FOR REMOTE CALIBRATION CHECK
2Ø !
3Ø REMOTE
4Ø PRINT @4, “*CLS; *SRE 8” ! ENABLE EAV TO TRIGGER SRQ
5Ø ON SRQ GOTO 7Ø ! SRQ HANDLER
6Ø GOTO 15Ø ! START MAIN PROGRAM
7Ø PRINT @4, “FAULT?” \ INPUT @4, A% ! SRQ HANDLER, GET FAULT CODE
8Ø IF A% = Ø GOTO 13Ø ! IF NO FAULT EXIT
9Ø PRINT @4, “EXPLAIN? “;A% \ INPUT @4, A$ ! GET EXPLANATION
1ØØ PRINT
11Ø PRINT “FAULT”;A%;”OCCURRED: “;A$ ! DISPLAY EXPLANATION
12ØG OTO 7Ø ! GET NEXT FAULT
13Ø A% = SPL(4%) ! SERIAL POLL TO CLEAR SP BYTE
14Ø RESUME 3ØØ ! END OF SRQ HANDLER
15Ø PRINT “Ambient temperature in Celsius”; ! MAIN PROGRAM BEGINS
16Ø INPUT T ! GET TEMPERATURE FROM OPERATOR
17Ø PRINT @4, “CAL_TEMP”;T ! SET CAL TEMPERATURE
18Ø PRINT “Doing calibration check. Please wait . . .”
19Ø PRINT @4, “CAL_CHK;*OPC” \ GOSUB 27Ø
2ØØ PRINT “Calibration check finished. Print a report? [y, n]”
21Ø INPUT A$ \ IF LEFT(A$,1)=“N” OR LEFT(A$,1)=“n” GOTO 3ØØ
22Ø PRINT “Set up the peripheral device.” \ GOSUB 25Ø
23Ø PRINT “Printing ...” \ PRINT @4, “CAL_PR CHECK;*OPC” \ GOSUB 27Ø \ GOTO
3ØØ
25Ø PRINT “Press RETURN to continue” ! PAUSE FOR OPERATOR SUBROUTINE
26Ø INPUT A$ \ RETURN ! “
27Ø PRINT @4, “*ESR?” \ INPUT @4,A% ! WAIT FOR OPC SUBROUTINE
28Ø IF A% AND 1% THEN RETURN ! “, RETURN IF OPC BIT IS 1
29Ø GOTO 27Ø ! “, STAY IN LOOP IF OPC IS Ø
3ØØ PRINT “All finished!” \END

5-64
 Remote Operation
Remote Program Examples 5
5-52. Wideband AC Module (Option 5700A-03) Gain Calibration
1Ø ! THIS IS A PROGRAM FOR REMOTE WIDEBAND (OPTION -Ø3) GAIN CALIBRATION
2Ø ! WHICH IS PART OF ROUTINE CALIBRATION IF A WIDEBAND MODULE IS INSTALLED
3Ø !
4Ø REMOTE
5Ø PRINT @4, “*CLS ; *SRE 8” ! ENABLE FAULT TO TRIGGER SRQ
6Ø ON SRQ GOTO 8Ø ! SRQ HANDLER
7Ø GOTO 15Ø ! START MAIN PROGRAM
8Ø PRINT @4, “FAULT?” \ INPUT @4, A% ! SRQ HANDLER, GET FAULT CODE
9Ø IF A% = Ø GOTO 13Ø ! IF NO FAULT EXIT
1ØØ PRINT @4, “EXPLAIN? “;A% \ INPUT @4, A$ ! GET EXPLANATION
11Ø PRINT “FAULT”;A%;”OCCURRED: “;A$ ! DISPLAY EXPLANATION
12Ø GOTO 8Ø ! GET NEXT FAULT
13Ø A% = SPL(4%) ! SERIAL POLL TO CLEAR SP BYTE
14Ø RESUME 42Ø
15Ø PRINT “Ambient temperature in Celsius”; ! MAIN PROGRAM BEGINS
16Ø INPUT T ! GET TEMPERATURE FROM OPERATOR
17Ø PRINT @4, “CAL_TEMP”;T ! SET CAL TEMPERATURE
18Ø PRINT “Connect the wideband cable to the SENSE binding posts through the”
19Ø PRINT “5Ø ohm terminator with shield to LO as shown in the manual.”
2ØØ GOSUB 37Ø ! PAUSE FOR KEY
21Ø PRINT “Calibrating wideband positive gain, please wait ...”
22Ø PRINT @4, “CAL_WBGAIN PGAIN;*OPC” \ GOSUB 39Ø ! CALIBRATES POSITIVE GAIN
23Ø PRINT “Reverse the polarity at the SENSE binding posts.”
24Ø GOSUB 37Ø ! PAUSE FOR KEY
25Ø PRINT “Calibrating wideband negative gain, please wait ...”
26Ø PRINT @4, “CAL_WBGAIN NGAIN;*OPC” \ GOSUB 39Ø! CALIBRATES NEGATIVE GAIN
27Ø PRINT “Wideband gains calibration finished. Print a report? [y, n]”
28Ø INPUT A$ \ IF LEFT(A$,1)=“N” OR LEFT(A$,1)=“n” GOTO 31Ø
29Ø PRINT “Set up the peripheral device.” \ GOSUB 37Ø
3ØØ PRINT “Printing . . .” \ PRINT @4, “CAL_PR CHECK;*OPC” \ GOSUB 39Ø
31Ø PRINT “Store or discard the constants? [s, d]” \ INPUT A$
32Ø IF LEFT(A$,1)=“D” OR LEFT(A$,1)=“d” GOTO 42Ø
33Ø PRINT “Set the CALIBRATION switch to ENABLE” \ GOSUB 37Ø
34Ø PRINT “Saving the constants in memory . . .”
35Ø PRINT @4,”CAL_WBGAIN STORE;*OPC” \ GOSUB 39Ø ! SAVE THE CONSTANTS
36Ø PRINT “Set the CALIBRATION switch to NORMAL” \ GOSUB 37Ø \ GOTO 42Ø
37Ø PRINT “Press RETURN to continue” ! PAUSE FOR OPERATOR SUBROUTINE
38Ø INPUT A$ \ RETURN ! “
39Ø PRINT @4, “*ESR?”\ INPUT @4,A% ! WAIT FOR OPC SUBROUTINE
4ØØ IF A% AND 1% THEN RETURN ! “, RETURN IF OPC BIT IS 1
41Ø GOTO 39Ø ! “, STAY IN LOOP IF OPC IS Ø
42Ø PRINT “All finished!” \ END

5-65
5700A/5720A Series II
Operators Manual

5-53. Using *OPC?, *OPC, and *WAI

The *OPC?, *OPC, and *WAI commands let you maintain control of the order of
execution of commands that could otherwise be passed up by subsequent commands.
If you had sent an OUT command, you can check if the output has settled by sending the
query *OPC?. As soon as the OUT command has completed (output settled), a 1 appears
in the output buffer. You should always follow a *OPC? command with a read command
(for example, in BASIC, “INPUT @4, A”). The read command causes program execution
to pause until the addressed instrument responds. The following sample program shows
how you can use *OPC?
1Ø PRINT @4, “OUT 1ØØV,1KHZ;OPER; *OPC?” ! 57ØØA ADDRESS IS 4
2Ø INPUT @4, A ! READ THE “1” FROM THE 57ØØA
3Ø !PROGRAM HALTS HERE UNTIL A “1” IS PUT INTO THE OUTPUT BUFFER
4Ø PRINT “OUTPUT SETTLED”

The *OPC command is similar in operation to the *OPC? query, except that it sets bit 0
(OPC for “Operation Complete”) in the Event Status Register to 1 rather than sending a
“1” to the output buffer. One simple use for *OPC is to include it in a program in order
for it to generate an SRQ (Service Request). Then an SRQ handler written into the
program can detect the operation complete condition and respond appropriately. You can
use *OPC similarly to *OPC?, except your program must read the ESR to detect the
completion of all operations. The following sample program shows how you can use
*OPC.
1Ø REMOTE
2Ø PRINT @4, “OUT 1ØØV,1ØHZ;*OPC” ! 57ØØA ADDRESS IS 4
3Ø PRINT @4, “*ESR?” ! PUT THE ESR BYTE IN BUFFER
4Ø INPUT @4, A% ! READ THE ESR BYTE
5Ø IF (A% AND 1%) = Ø% GOTO 3Ø ! TRY AGAIN IF NO OPC
6Ø PRINT “OUTPUT SETTLED”
7Ø END

The *WAI command causes the calibrator to wait until any prior commands have been
completed before continuing on to the next command, and takes no other action. Using
*WAI is a convenient way to halt operation until the command or commands preceding it
have completed. The following sample program shows how you can use *WAI.
1Ø REMOTE
2Ø PRINT @4, “OUT 1ØØV,1ØHZ;*WAI” ! 57ØØA ADDRESS IS 4
3Ø PRINT @4, “OUT?” ! READ THE OUTPUT VALUE
4Ø INPUT @4, A$,B$,C$ ! A$ CONTAINS THE OUTPUT VALUE
5Ø PRINT “OUTPUT SETTLED”
6Ø PRINT “OUTPUT IS: “;A$;B$;” at “;C$
7Ø END

5-66
 Remote Operation
Emulating a Fluke 5100B or 5200A Calibrator 5
5-54. Writing an SRQ and Fault Handler
It is good practice to include fault (error) handling routines in your applications. The
following sample Fluke 1722A Basic program lines show a method for halting program
execution on occurrence of an SRQ (Service Request) on the bus, checking to see if the
calibrator is the source of the SRQ, retrieving its fault messages, and acting on the faults.
You should modify and extend this code as necessary for your application.
1Ø INIT PORTØ ! IFC THE BUS
2Ø CLEAR PORTØ ! DCL THE BUS
3Ø ! INITIALIZE THE 57ØØA SRQ HANDLER
4Ø PRINT @4, “*SRE 8” ! ENABLE STB.EAV (FAULT AVAILABLE)
5Ø ON SRQ GOTO 11ØØ ! INSTALL SRQ HANDLER
6Ø ! BODY OF THE APPLICATION GOES HERE

11ØØ ! BUS SRQ HANDLER

111Ø CLEAR PORTØ
112Ø IF (SPL(4) AND 64) THEN GOSUB 12ØØ ! IF (STB.RQS) CALL 57ØØA SRQ
113Ø ! TEST OTHER DEVICES RQS BITS IF DESIRED
114Ø RESUME

12ØØ ! 57ØØA SRQ HANDLER

121Ø IF (SPL(4) AND 8) THEN GOSUB 13ØØ ! IF (STB.EAV) CALL FAULT HANDLER
122Ø ! TEST OTHER STB BITS IF DESIRED
1299 RETURN

13ØØ ! 57ØØA STB.EAV (FAULT) HANDLER

131Ø ! DO {
132Ø PRINT @4, “FAULT?” ! READ AND CLEAR 57ØØA FAULT
133Ø INPUT @4, E% ! READ IN THE FAULT NUMBER
134Ø PRINT @4, “EXPLAIN? “;E% ! GET THE EXPLANATION STRING
135Ø INPUTLINE @4, E$ ! READ IN THE EXPLANATION STRING
136Ø PRINT E%,E$ ! PRINT USEFUL MESSAGE
137Ø IF (E% <> Ø) THEN GOTO 132Ø ! } UNTIL (NO MORE FAULTS)
138Ø PRINT “PLEASE FIX THE SOURCE OF THESE FAULTS BEFORE CONTINUING”
139Ø STOP !OTHER COMMANDS FOR YOUR APPLICATION
1399 RETURN

5-67
5700A/5720A Series II
Operators Manual

5-55. Emulating a Fluke 5100B or 5200A Calibrator

The 5700A/5720A Series II can be set to respond to either 5100B or 5200A remote
commands by selecting the appropriate emulation mode. These emulation modes permit
replacing either the 5100B or 5200A within an existing system without extensive
reprogramming, although some minor alterations in the software may be necessary to
accommodate some hardware differences. These differences are described in this section.

5-56. Entering Emulation Mode

You can set the 5700A/5720A Series II to operate in emulation mode by either sending
the remote command (GAL L5100 or GAL L5200), or by selecting the correct menu
options at the front panel.
In 1722A BASIC (using the IEEE-488 port) the command statement for activating
emulation mode is:
1Ø PRINT @4, “GAL L51ØØ”
or
1Ø PRINT @4, “GAL L52ØØ”

Once the calibrator receives this command, you can run remote programs written for the
5100B or 5200A (depending on which emulation mode you selected) and the calibrator
will respond as if it were the instrument it is emulating.
To activate emulation mode from the front panel, follow these steps (for more details
refer to “Bus Setup Procedure” at the beginning of this chapter).
1. From the Setup Menu, press “Instmt Setup”, then “Remote Port Setup.” The Remote
Port Setup menu appears as shown below:

PREV
MENU

2. Press the softkey under “Remote Lang” until “5100” or “5200” appear. For example,
if you are selecting 5100B emulation, the menu appears as follows:

PREV
MENU

Once you change the setting of the remote language, the new setting is stored in
nonvolatile memory, and remains as the power-up default selection until it’s changed
again in the Setup Menus.

5-68
 Remote Operation
5100B Emulation 5
5-57. Exiting Emulation Mode
When the calibrator is in 5100B or 5200A emulation mode, you can return back to the
normal IEEE-488 remote operating mode by sending this statement:
1Ø PRINT @4, “~”

The tilde symbol (~) is the emulation mode command that complements the GAL (Go to
Alternate Language) Command in the normal remote mode.

5-58. The 5720’s Display During Emulation

While emulating the 5100B or the 5200A in Local control mode, the 5700A/5720A
Series II displays the same output types and amplitudes as the instrument it’s emulating.
However, the displays shown on a 5100B or 5200A during remote operation are not
duplicated on the 5700A/5720A Series II.

5-59. 5100B Emulation

This section describes all characteristics of the 5700A/5720A Series II that need to be
taken into account when operating under 5100B emulation mode. These features that
require attention are due to hardware differences between the two models, and only
require minor programming alterations. The most significant differences are in the Ohms
function, and programming examples are provided that illustrate the changes that are
necessary to accommodate these differences.

Note
While in 5100B emulation mode, the 5700A/5720A Series II cannot respond
to the tape storage commands, described in Chapter 2 of the 5101B
Operators Manual.

5-60. Local-to-Remote Transitions

The 5700A/5720A Series II automatically changes its operating mode to remote control
by responding to the IEEE-488.1 standard, which is in effect as soon as the calibrator
receives remote programming commands. During local-to-remote transitions, when the
5100B language is selected, the 5700A/5720A Series II retains all settings that are fully
compatible with the 5100B. If a setting has a value that cannot be processed by the
5100B, the 5700A/5720A Series II takes the actions described below.
• If the selected output is beyond the limits of a 5100B range, the output is set to
0 mV dc and a 5100B ERR6 is generated.
• If the selected output falls within a 5100B range, but contains a higher resolution
(i.e., more significant digits) than the 5100B can process, the 5700A/5720A Series II
rounds the output to the match the resolution of the 5100B.
Once in remote control, the following menu appears on the 5700A/5720A Series II
display:

5-69
5700A/5720A Series II
Operators Manual

PREV
MENU

You can return to local operating mode by sending a remote command, or by pressing the
softkey under “Go To Local Control.” For more information on remote to local
transitions, refer to “Remote to Local State Transitions” earlier in this chapter.

5-61. Current Output Location

The ensure that the current output is available at the OUTPUT binding posts, set the
current output location on the 5270A to NORMAL. If the current output location is set to
AUX, the current will be available at the AUX CURRENT OUTPUT binding post, even
during 5100B emulation.
5-62. Differences in the 5700A/5720A Series II and 5100B Ohms Function
There are some differences in the operation of the ohms function between the 5100B and
the 5700A/5720A Series II. The 5100B generates nominal ohms values: if you request
100Ω, the 5100B sources 100Ω as closely as it can. In the 5700A/5720A Series II, if you
request 100Ω, the 5700A/5720A Series II sources a characterized value that is close to
100Ω, and displays that characterized value. If the remote controller edits the resistance
output, the edited value appears on the lower portion of the output display.
As with the 5100B, the GZ? command recalls the nominal resistance value. Included in
the 5700A/5720A Series II emulator is a new recall option, GO, which returns the
characterized ohms value for the present output. For an example of using the GO
command, see the program example under the next heading.

5-70
 Remote Operation
5200A Emulation 5
5-63. Ohms Remote Program Modifications for 5100B Emulation
The following example programs illustrate the conversions that are required for running a
5100B resistance program on a 5700A/5720A Series II in 5100B emulation mode.
Without these modifications, the 5700A/5720A Series II will still operate as a 5100B
emulator, but the resistance accuracy is only the 5700A/5720A Series II tolerance to
nominal, which is less accurate than a 5100B.
The shaded lines in these 5100B resistance programs are those that need to be modified
in order for the programs to run on a 5700A/5720A Series II in 5100B emulation mode.
5 REM ORIGINAL 51ØØB PROGRAM
1Ø REM THIS PROGRAM SETS THE 51ØØB TO 1Ø KQ, READS THE VALUE OF A
2Ø REM FLUKE 85Ø5A DMM AND CALCULATES THE ERROR.
3Ø RF = 1ØØØØ.Ø
4Ø INIT PORT Ø ! CLEAR THE INTERFACE (SENDS DCL)
5Ø CLEAR PORT Ø ! SET THE 57ØØA TO ITS POWER-UP STATE
6Ø PRINT @1,”ZTØ” ! SET 85Ø5 TO OHMS EXT TRIGGER
7Ø PRINT @4, RF;”Z,N” ! SET THE 51ØØB TO 1ØKQ, OPERATE
8Ø WAIT 2ØØØ ! WAIT FOR OUTPUT TO SETTLE
9Ø PRINT @1, “?” \ INPUT @1,R ! TRIGGER AND READ THE 85Ø5A
1ØØ ER = ABS(RF-R)/RF * 1E6 ! COMPUTE ERROR IN PPM
11Ø PRINT “EXPECTED “;RF ! PRINT RESULTS
12Ø PRINT “MEASURED “;R ! “
13Ø PRINT “ERROR”;ER;”PPM” ! “

5 REM PROGRAM FOR A 57ØØA EMULATING A 51ØØB

1Ø REM THIS PROGRAM SETS THE 51ØØB TO 1Ø KQ, READS THE VALUE OF A
2Ø REM FLUKE 85Ø5A DMM AND CALCULATES THE ERROR.
3Ø RF = 1ØØØØ.Ø
4Ø INIT PORT Ø ! CLEAR THE INTERFACE (SENDS DCL)
5Ø CLEAR PORT Ø ! SET THE 57ØØA TO ITS POWER-UP STATE
6Ø PRINT @1,”ZTØ” ! SET 85Ø5 TO OHMS EXT TRIGGER
7Ø PRINT @4, RF;”Z,N” ! SET THE 51ØØB TO 1ØKQ, OPERATE
8Ø PRINT @4,”Y1GZ?” ! GET ACTUAL OHMS VALUE
9Ø INPUT @4,RA ! “
1ØØ WAIT 2ØØØ ! WAIT FOR OUTPUT TO SETTLE
11Ø PRINT @1, “?” \ INPUT @1,R ! TRIGGER AND READ THE 85Ø5A
12Ø ER = ABS(RA-R)/RA * 1E6 ! COMPUTE ERROR IN PPM
13Ø PRINT “EXPECTED “;RF ! PRINT RESULTS
14Ø PRINT “ACTUAL “;RA ! “
15Ø PRINT “MEASURED “;R ! “
16Ø PRINT “ERROR”;ER;”PPM” ! “

5-71
5700A/5720A Series II
Operators Manual

5-64. 5200A Emulation

Due to hardware differences between the 5200A and the 5700A/5720A Series II, there
are some differences in characteristics, most notably the calibrator’s behavior at certain
voltage and frequency levels. All differences are described in this section.

5-65. Local-to-Remote Transitions

The 5700A/5720A Series II automatically changes its operating mode to remote control
by responding to the IEEE-488.1 standard, which is in effect as soon as the calibrator
receives remote programming commands. There are no hard switches to change when
switching modes, as there are on the 5200A. Once in remote control during 5200A
emulation, the following menu appears on the 5700A/5720A Series II’s display:

PREV
MENU

To return to local operating mode, either send the remote programming command or
press the softkey under “Go To Local Control.” This procedure is a change from the
5200A, which returns to local operation when the hard switch is changed back to the
position that initiates local operation. The configuration of the other hard switches on the
5200A’s front panel determine the output’s configuration when the 5200A returns to
local operating mode and, if it’s necessary, the 5200A’s output changes to match the hard
switches. When the 5700A/5720A Series II returns to local control it does not change its
output.
For more information on remote to local transitions, see “Remote to Local State
Transitions” earlier in this chapter.

5-66. Voltage and Frequency Ranges

The 5700A/5720A Series II voltage and frequency sourcing capabilities should be taken
into account during 5200A emulation mode, since there are differences from the 5200A
that may have an effect on programs that were written for the 5200A. Before you run
your 5200A programs on the 5700A/5720A Series II be sure you review the differences
described below so that you can modify your programs if necessary and ensure a trouble-
free transition to the 5700A/5720A Series II.
• Voltage Limits
Unlike the 5200A, the 5700A/5720A Series II cannot source voltages between
100 µV and 220 µV. Furthermore, the 5700A/5720A Series II resets to
220 µV @ 1 kHz when commanded to do so with a 5200A reset command. Voltages
below 220 µV will generate an error message on the 5700A/5720A Series II.
The 5700A/5720A Series II does not require a boost amplifier for sourcing voltages
between 120V and 1100V, as the 5200A does. If the Operate command is received
while in this voltage range, the 5700A/5720A Series II follows the command and
enters operating mode, whereas the 5200A remains in standby.
• Voltage Range Boundaries
5-72
 Remote Operation
5200A Emulation 5
The voltage range boundaries in the 5700A/5720A Series II are different than those
in the 5200A; therefore any discontinuities that can occur at voltage range boundaries
will now appear at a different voltage. If you compensate for these discontinuities in
your programs, you may wish to determine the new boundaries so that you can
modify your programs accordingly.
Some examples of the difference in the voltage ranges are as follows: The 5200A
sources 11.99999V in the 10V range, and 12V in the 100V range; the 5700A/5720A
Series II sources 21.99999V in the 22V range, and 22V in the 220V range.
• Frequency Limits
Unlike the 5200A, the 5700A/5720A Series II cannot source frequencies between
1.1000 MHz and 1.1999 MHz. Instead, the 5700A/5720A Series II generates an out-
of-range-error for all frequencies above 1.1000 MHz.
• Programming Values Outside the Volt-Hertz Capability
If you program a voltage or frequency that is outside the volt-hertz capability of the
5700A/5720A Series II, you will receive an out-of-range error. This is a change from
the 5200A, which remains in operating mode and compensates for out-of-range
values by maintaining the existing frequency, and reducing the voltage to the
maximum the calibrator can source.
A graph displaying the volt-hertz capability is provided in the Specifications for AC
Voltage. Refer to Chapter 1 for the 99%-level specifications, and to Appendix D for
the 95%-level specifications.

5-67. Rounding Numeric Entries

When a number is entered that is longer than the resolution of the 5700A/5720A Series
II, the entry is rounded to the next highest value, whereas the 5200A truncates the entry.
For example, the entry 119.999999V is rounded to 120.0000V in the 5700A/5720A
Series II, but is truncated to 119.9999V in the 5200A.

5-68. Settling Times

The 5700A/5720A Series II and the 5200A have different settling times. The
5700A/5720A Series II uses the SETTLING bit for all programming commands; the
5200A used the SETTLING bit only for voltage and frequency commands. After a GPIB
command has been received, the 5700A/5720A Series II can take up to 60 ms to set the
SETTLING bit.
To determine if the 5700A/5720A Series II has settled, check the SETTLING bit in either
the serial poll status byte, or in the status message.

5-73
5700A/5720A Series II
Operators Manual

5-69. Programming External Sensing

The 5700A/5720A Series II has some similarities to the 5200A when handling external
sensing. You can still program external sensing at any output, and the external sensing
feature automatically turns on and off as the output goes in and out of range, until
external sense is explicitly turned off in your program. However, when programming
external sense, you should take the following differences into account:
• Unlike the 5200A, the 5700A/5720A Series II cannot use external sense between
100 mV and 220 mV.
• If external sense is enabled and there is no signal at the SENSE terminals, an error
condition occurs. The 5720A responds to this error condition by reverting to standby
mode and generating a limit error. The 5200A remains in operating mode when this
condition occurs; it does not report an error.

5-70. Overload Conditions

When an overload condition occurs, both the 5200A and the 5270A calibrators generate a
limit error. This limit error causes the 5700A/5720A Series II to revert to standby mode,
unlike the 5200A, which remains in operating mode when overload occurs.

5-71. Phase Lock Errors

If the phase lock is enabled, but the signal cannot be locked at the PHASE LOCK
terminal, an error condition occurs. The 5700A/5720A Series II responds to this error
condition by reverting to standby mode and generating a limit error. The 5200A remains
in operating mode when this error occurs; it does not report an error.

5-74
 Chapter 6
Using the RS-232C Serial Interface

Title Page

6-1. Introduction........................................................................................... 6-3

6-2. RS-232C Interface Specifications......................................................... 6-3
6-3. Setting Up and Connecting the Serial Interface.................................... 6-4
6-4. Printing Calibration Reports ................................................................. 6-6
6-5. Calibration Shift Results................................................................... 6-6
6-6. Calibration Check Shift Results ....................................................... 6-7
6-7. Generating a Printout........................................................................ 6-8

6-1
5700A/5720A Series II
Operators Manual

6-2
 Using the RS-232C Serial Interface
Introduction 6

6-1. Introduction
This chapter describes how to set up the RS-232C interface for remote control using
protocol similar to IEEE-488, or to print or transmit data from the calibrator. After you
set up the interface for remote control, refer to Chapter 5 for full details of remote
operation. This chapter provides all details on printing or transmitting data.
The calibrator's RS-232C interface is designed in accordance with EIA (Electronic
Industries Association) standard RS-232C. Through its RS-232C interface, the calibrator
can be remotely controlled, and it can transmit its internal calibration constant values and
other information to a printer, video-display terminal, or host computer.

6-2. RS-232C Interface Specifications

The RS-232C interface is configured as DTE (Data Terminal Equipment). A null-modem
cable with two female 25-pin subminiature D connectors must be used to connect the
calibrator to other DTE (Data Terminal Equipment) such as printers, video-display
terminals, or computers. Recommended cables are Fluke accessories Y1702 or Y1703.
The pinout for the calibrator’s RS-232C Connector is shown in Figure 6-1. The choices
available and the defaults for all programmable interface parameters are shown in
Table 6-1.

PIN NAME FUNCTION

1 GND CHASSIS GROUND

2 XMT TRANSMITTED DATA
3 REC RECEIVED DATA
4 RTS REQUEST TO SEND
5 CTS CLEAR TO SEND

7 RET SIGNAL (LOGIC) GROUND

1 13

14 25 REAR PANEL VIEW

20 DTR DATA TERMINAL READY

Figure 6-1. RS-232C Connector Pinout

6-3
5700A/5720A Series II
Operators Manual

Table 6-1. RS-232C Interface Parameter Choices

Parameter Choices Default Setting

Data Bits 7 or 8 8

Stop Bits 1 or 2 1

Flow Control Ctrl S/Ctrl Q, (XON/XOFF), RTS, or none Ctrl S/ Ctrl Q

Parity Checking Odd, even, or none None

Baud Rate 110, 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, or 19200 9600

Timeout Period 0 to 30 seconds 0 (no timeout)

EOL (End of Line) CR, LF, or CR LF CR LF

EOF (End of File Any two ASCII characters No characters

6-3. Setting Up and Connecting the Serial Interface

Refer to the specifications for your peripheral device, and proceed as follows to set up the
serial interface for your application:
1. Turn off the power. Connect an RS-232C null-modem cable such as Fluke accessory
Y1702 or Y1703 to the rear panel RS-232C connector and to the peripheral device.
2. Power up the calibrator.
3. Press the following sequence of softkeys:
“Setup Menus” → “Instmt Setup” → “Remote Port Setup” → “RS-232 Port Setup”
The display changes to:

PREV
MENU

4. Set the number of data bits with the “data bits” softkey.
5. Set the number of stop bits with the “stop bits” softkey.
6. Select a method of stall control with the “Stall” softkey.
7. Select the parity mode with the “Parity” softkey.

6-4
 Using the RS-232C Serial Interface
Setting Up and Connecting the Serial Interface 6
8. Press the “Next menu” softkey. The display changes to:

PREV
MENU

9. Set the baud rate with the “baud” softkey.

10. Set the timeout period with the “shorter” or “longer” softkey. (Timeout is the length
of time the calibrator waits before aborting the current process after receiving a flow
control command, and is programmable between 0 to 30 seconds. A setting of 0
causes the calibrator to wait forever after receiving a stall command.)
11. Press the “EOL” softkey to set the EOL (End Of Line) character to either CR, LF, or
the string CR LF.
12. Press the “NEXT menu” softkey. The display changes to:

PREV
MENU

13. This step needs to be done only if you are setting up the interface for remote control
of the calibrator. Press one of the softkeys under “Remote I/F” to set the label to
“Terminal” or “Computer.”
“Terminal” sets the remote port to expect a human operator to be using a terminal
attached to the RS-232C port to control the calibrator. This setting has the same
effect as specifying TERM in the SP_SET remote command parameter string.
“Computer” sets the remote port to expect a computer to be controlling the calibrator
over the RS-232C port. This setting has the same effect as specifying “COMP” in
the SP_SET remote command parameter string.
14. To designate a character or character string as the EOF (End Of File) character, press
the “EOF” softkey. The display changes to:

PREV
MENU

6-5
5700A/5720A Series II
Operators Manual

15. Enter the decimal code of the ASCII character(s) designated as EOF. (Appendix C
contains a table of ASCII codes.) Verify that your selection is correct as shown on
the display.
16. To exit the setup menus, press P five times.

6-4. Printing Calibration Reports

Calibration reports are available for calibration check and calibration. The following
paragraphs describe what you can print and how to do it.

Note
Reports can only be printed through the serial port when it is not being
used as the remote control port. (They can be printed through the IEEE-488
port.)

6-5. Calibration Shift Results

The Calibration Shift Results printout presents all adjustments made to stored zero-offset
and gain constants, as a result of any drift detected at the most recent calibration. The
printout contains the following information:
• Heading containing the date, time, and user report string
• Modules present (installed or attached)
• Most recent calibration dates and temperatures
• Space for recording information about external standards used
• Values of externally calibrated internal references
• DC voltage output shifts for each range
• AC voltage output shifts for each range
• Current output shifts for each range (ac and dc)
• Resistance shifts for each value
• 5725A Amplifier output shifts (if attached)
• Wideband AC Module (Option 5700A-03) output shifts (if installed)

6-6
 Using the RS-232C Serial Interface
Printing Calibration Reports 6
6-6. Calibration Check Shift Results
The Calibration Check Shift Results printout present changes in the magnitude of self
correction generated by calibration check. Calibration check uses internal standards
rather than external standards as the basis for comparison, and does not make permanent
changes to calibration constants. Chapter 1 describes how to use calibration check to
develop a performance history. The printout contains the following information:
• Heading that shows the date, time, and user report string
• Modules present (installed or attached)
• Most recent calibration dates and temperatures
• Values of externally-calibrated internal references
• DC voltage output shifts for each range
• AC voltage output shifts for each range
• AC and dc current output shifts for each range
• Resistance shifts for each value
• 5725A Boost Amplifier output shifts (if attached)

6-7
5700A/5720A Series II
Operators Manual

6-7. Generating a Printout

Follow the procedure below to generate a printout of calibration shift result. Make sure
the serial interface is configured for compatibility with your peripheral device and is
attached with an RS-232C cable. The output will be paginated for a 66-line page.
1. Press the “Setup Menus” softkey; then press the “Cal” softkey. The calibration menu
appears as shown below.

PREV
MENU

2. Press the “Cal Reports” softkey. The calibration reports menu appears as shown.

PREV
MENU

3. Select one of the following softkeys to generate the printout you prefer:
• To print the main output calibration shift results press the “Print Cal Shifts”
softkey (see Figure 6-2).
• To print the calibration check shift results, press the “Print Check Shifts” softkey.
• To print raw calibration constant data as shown in Figure, press the “Print Raw
Data” softkey.
If you have difficulty generating the printout, make sure the correct cable is attached to
the peripheral device, and the interface parameters are set to the correct values. If the
input buffer of the peripheral device fills, and the device sends the calibrator a stall
command, the calibrator will stop sending data and will start a timer. If the timeout period
expires, printing is aborted and the following message appears on the display:

PREV
MENU

To remove the message, press any key.

The output is paginated with Line Feed characters to format a 66-line page.

6-8
 Using the RS-232C Serial Interface
Printing Calibration Reports 6
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
FLUKE CORPORATION A S/N 1824760 B
5720A OUTPUT CALIBRATION C
PRINTED ON 12/14/95 AT 14:04:24 5720A
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
MODULES PRESENT
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
Software Revision 0.2+A+* D
Switching Matrix
DC Volt Module
AC Volt Module
220V Module E
1100V/2A Module
Current Module
Ohms Module
Wideband Module
Hires Osc Module
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
ARTIFACT CALIBRATION DATES AND TEMPERATURES
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
Specification Interval: 90day Confidence 99%

MAIN OUTPUT: (Most recent) 12/06/88, 22.9 Degrees C F

(Previous) 9/07/88, 23.2 Degrees C
(Days since last cal) 43
ZERO: (Most recent) 1/05/89
(Days since last cal) 13

WIDEBAND GAIN: (Most recent) 12/06/88, 23.0 Degrees C G

(Previous) 9/07/88, 23.3 Degrees C
(Days since last cal) 43

WIDEBAND FLAT: (Most recent) 12/06/88, 22.9 Degrees C H

(Previous) 9/07/88, 23.3 Degrees C
(Days since last cal) 43
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
STANDARDS USED
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
STANDARD NUMBER CERT. DATE
VOLTAGE ______________ ______________ 10.000017 V

10 kOhm ______________ ______________ 10.000124 kOhm I

1 Ohm ______________ ______________ 1.0000237 Ohm
OTHER ______________ ______________ _______________
______________ ______________ _______________
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
EXTERNALLY CALIBRATED INTERNAL REFERENCES
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
REFERENCE Most Recent Previous Shift (ppm)
6.5 V DC Reference 6.548268 6.548268 0.00
13 V DC Reference 13.082727 13.082725 0.20
10 kOhm Reference 1.002937 1.002938 -0.11 J
1.0 Ohm Resistor 1.0000967 1.0000980 -1.32
1.9 Ohm Resistor 1.8992432 1.8992446 -0.72

K L M
Figure 6-2. Calibration Shift Results Printout

6-9
5700A/5720A Series II
Operators Manual

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
DC VOLTAGE OUTPUT SHIFTS
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
RANGE Point Zero Shift Full Scale Shift Spec Shift
N O P Q (+/-) R (% spec) S
220 mV +FS -0.00020 mV -0.00085 mV -3.87 ppm 10.41 ppm -37.18
-FS -0.00017 mV 0.00047 mV 2.12 ppm 10.41 ppm 20.39
2.2V +FS 0.0000003 V -0.0000011 V -0.48 ppm 6.55 ppm -7.32
-FS 0.0000006 V 0.0000018 V 0.82 ppm 6.55 ppm 12.46
11V +FS 0.000001 V 0.000001 V 0.05 ppm 5.36 ppm 0.85
-FS 0.000002 V 0.000001 V 0.09 ppm 5.36 ppm 1.60
22V +FS -0.000001 V 0.000005 V 0.21 ppm 5.36 ppm 3.87
-FS 0.000002 V 0.000001 V 0.03 ppm 5.36 ppm 0.56
220V +FS -0.00006 V 0.00020 V 0.91 ppm 6.45 ppm 14.08
-FS -0.00003 V -0.00028 V -1.26 ppm 6.45 ppm -19.45
1100V +FS -0.0002 V -0.0001 V -0.09 ppm 8.55 ppm -1.01
-FS -0.0001 V -0.0001 V -0.05 ppm 8.55 ppm -0.53
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
AC VOLTAGE OUTPUT SHIFTS
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
RANGE Point T Full Scale Shift Spec Shift
(+/-) (% spec)
2.2 mV FS -0.000018 mV -0.0008 % 0.24 % -0.34
20.00 kHz -0.000013 mV -0.0006 % 0.24 % -0.24
50.00 kHz -0.000017 mV -0.0008 % 0.26 % -0.30
100.00 kHz -0.000017 mV -0.0008 % 0.45 % -0.17
119.99 kHz -0.000018 mV -0.0008 % 0.80 % -0.10
0.1200 MHz -0.000019 mV -0.0009 % 0.80 % -0.11
0.2000 MHz -0.000041 mV -0.0019 % 0.80 % -0.23
0.3000 MHz -0.000008 mV -0.0003 % 0.80 % -0.04
0.4000 MHz -0.000002 mV -0.0001 % 1.53 % -0.01
0.5000 MHz 0.000028 mV 0.0013 % 1.53 % 0.08
0.6000 MHz 0.000007 mV 0.0003 % 1.69 % 0.02
0.7000 MHz 0.000021 mV 0.0010 % 1.69 % 0.06
0.8000 MHz 0.000021 mV 0.0009 % 1.69 % 0.06
0.9000 MHz 0.000031 mV 0.0014 % 1.69 % 0.08
1.0000 MHz 0.000032 mV 0.0015 % 1.69 % 0.09
1.1000 MHz 0.000036 mV 0.0016 % NO SPEC 0.00
1.1999 MHz 0.000042 mV 0.0019 % NO SPEC 0.00
22 mV FS -0.00008 mV -3.48 ppm 382.73 ppm -0.91
20.00 kHz -0.00009 mV -3.90 ppm 382.73 ppm -1.02
50.00 kHz -0.00004 mV -1.70 ppm 642.73 ppm -0.26
100.00 kHz -0.00004 mV -0.0002 % 0.13 % -0.13
119.99 kHz 0.00001 mV 0.0000 % 0.19 % 0.01
0.1200 MHz 0.00002 mV 0.0001 % 0.19 % 0.04
0.2000 MHz 0.00024 mV 0.0011 % 0.19 % 0.58
0.3000 MHz -0.00005 mV -0.0002 % 0.19 % -0.11
0.4000 MHz -0.00001 mV -0.0001 % 0.31 % -0.02
0.5000 MHz 0.00006 mV 0.0003 % 0.31 % 0.09
0.6000 MHz 0.00009 mV 0.0004 % 0.47 % 0.08
0.7000 MHz -0.00003 mV -0.0001 % 0.47 % -0.03
0.8000 MHz 0.00022 mV 0.0010 % 0.47 % 0.21
0.9000 MHz 0.00033 mV 0.0015 % 0.47 % 0.32
1.0000 MHz 0.00050 mV 0.0023 % 0.47 % 0.49
1.1000 MHz 0.00024 mV 0.0011 % NO SPEC 0.00
1.1999 MHz 0.00192 mV 0.0087 % NO SPEC 0.00
Figure 6-2. Calibration Shift Results Printout (continued)

6-10
 Using the RS-232C Serial Interface
Printing Calibration Reports 6
220 mV FS -0.0015 mV -6.93 ppm 145.45 ppm -4.76
20.00 kHz -0.0010 mV -4.57 ppm 145.45 ppm -3.14
50.00 kHz -0.0015 mV -6.75 ppm 375.45 ppm -1.80
100.00 kHz -0.0014 mV -6.51 ppm 936.36 ppm -0.69
119.99 kHz -0.0015 mV -0.0007 % 0.11 % -0.60
0.1200 MHz -0.0017 mV -0.0008 % 0.11 % -0.66
0.2000 MHz -0.0039 mV -0.0018 % 0.11 % -1.54
0.3000 MHz -0.0005 mV -0.0002 % 0.11 % -0.19
0.4000 MHz 0.0001 mV 0.0000 % 0.19 % 0.01
0.5000 MHz 0.0031 mV 0.0014 % 0.19 % 0.75
0.6000 MHz 0.0010 mV 0.0005 % 0.38 % 0.12
0.7000 MHz 0.0024 mV 0.0011 % 0.38 % 0.29
0.8000 MHz 0.0023 mV 0.0011 % 0.38 % 0.28
0.9000 MHz 0.0033 mV 0.0015 % 0.38 % 0.40
1.0000 MHz 0.0035 mV 0.0016 % 0.38 % 0.42
1.1000 MHz 0.0038 mV 0.0017 % NO SPEC 0.00
1.1999 MHz 0.0045 mV 0.0020 % NO SPEC 0.00
2.2V FS -0.000010 V -4.58 ppm 78.18 ppm -5.86
20.00 kHz -0.000005 V -2.22 ppm 78.18 ppm -2.84
50.00 kHz -0.000010 V -4.40 ppm 139.09 ppm -3.16
100.00 kHz -0.000009 V -4.16 ppm 286.36 ppm -1.45
119.99 kHz -0.000010 V -4.46 ppm 508.18 ppm -0.88
0.1200 MHz -0.000011 V -5.16 ppm 508.18 ppm -1.02
0.2000 MHz -0.000033 V -15.17 ppm 508.18 ppm -2.98
0.3000 MHz 0.000000 V 0.14 ppm 508.18 ppm 0.03
0.4000 MHz 0.000006 V 0.0003 % 0.13 % 0.20
0.5000 MHz 0.000036 V 0.0016 % 0.13 % 1.29
0.6000 MHz 0.000015 V 0.0007 % 0.27 % 0.26
0.7000 MHz 0.000029 V 0.0013 % 0.27 % 0.50
0.8000 MHz 0.000029 V 0.0013 % 0.27 % 0.49
0.9000 MHz 0.000038 V 0.0017 % 0.27 % 0.66
1.0000 MHz 0.000040 V 0.0018 % 0.27 % 0.69
1.1000 MHz 0.000043 V 0.0020 % NO SPEC 0.00
1.1999 MHz 0.000050 V 0.0023 % NO SPEC 0.00
22V FS 0.00000 V 0.07 ppm 78.18 ppm 0.09
20.00 kHz -0.00001 V -0.35 ppm 78.18 ppm -0.45
50.00 kHz 0.00004 V 1.85 ppm 139.09 ppm 1.33
100.00 kHz 0.00004 V 1.89 ppm 268.18 ppm 0.70
119.99 kHz 0.00008 V 3.79 ppm 627.27 ppm 0.60
0.1200 MHz 0.00010 V 4.33 ppm 627.27 ppm 0.69
0.2000 MHz 0.00032 V 14.40 ppm 627.27 ppm 2.30
0.3000 MHz 0.00003 V 1.41 ppm 627.27 ppm 0.23
0.4000 MHz 0.00007 V 0.0003 % 0.15 % 0.19
0.5000 MHz 0.00014 V 0.0006 % 0.15 % 0.40
0.6000 MHz 0.00016 V 0.0007 % 0.32 % 0.23
0.7000 MHz 0.00005 V 0.0002 % 0.32 % 0.07
0.8000 MHz 0.00030 V 0.0014 % 0.32 % 0.42
0.9000 MHz 0.00041 V 0.0019 % 0.32 % 0.58
1.0000 MHz 0.00058 V 0.0026 % 0.32 % 0.82
1.1000 MHz 0.00032 V 0.0015 % NO SPEC 0.00
1.1999 MHz 0.00200 V 0.0091 % NO SPEC 0.00
220V FS -0.0004 V -1.60 ppm 84.55 ppm -1.89
5.000 kHz 0.0013 V 5.81 ppm 84.55 ppm 6.88
10.000 kHz 0.0009 V 3.91 ppm 84.55 ppm 4.62
20.00 kHz -0.0031 V -13.95 ppm 84.55 ppm -16.50
50.00 kHz -0.0003 V -1.49 ppm 238.18 ppm -0.62
100.00 kHz -0.0004 V -1.94 ppm 595.45 ppm -0.33
Figure 6-2. Calibration Shift Results Printout (continued)

6-11
5700A/5720A Series II
Operators Manual

119.99 kHz 0.0018 V 0.0008 % 0.20 % 0.40

0.1200 MHz 0.0019 V 0.0009 % 0.20 % 0.44
0.2000 MHz 0.0040 V 0.0018 % 0.20 % 0.92
0.3000 MHz 0.0142 V 0.0064 % 0.20 % 3.22
0.4000 MHz 0.0288 V 0.0131 % 0.57 % 2.29
0.5000 MHz 0.0266 V 0.0121 % 0.57 % 2.12
0.6000 MHz 0.0506 V 0.0230 % 1.35 % 1.70
0.7000 MHz 0.0613 V 0.0279 % 1.35 % 2.07
0.8000 MHz 0.0546 V 0.0248 % 1.35 % 1.84
0.9000 MHz 0.0580 V 0.0264 % 1.35 % 1.95
1.0000 MHz 0.0782 V 0.0355 % 1.35 % 2.63
1100V FS 0.000 V 0.14 ppm 83.64 ppm 0.17
0.3000 kHz -0.000 V -0.29 ppm 83.64 ppm -0.35
0.5000 kHz -0.009 V -8.54 ppm 83.64 ppm -10.21
0.7000 kHz -0.004 V -3.45 ppm 83.64 ppm -4.13
1.0000 kHz -0.003 V -2.41 ppm 83.64 ppm -2.88
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
DC CURRENT OUTPUT SHIFTS
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
RANGE Point Zero Shift Full Scale Shift Spec Shift
(+/-) (% spec)

220 uA +FS -0.0005 uA -0.0003 uA -1.17 ppm 95.45 ppm -1.23

-FS -0.0005 uA -0.0007 uA -3.15 ppm 95.45 ppm -3.30

2.2 mA +FS -0.000005 mA -0.000004 mA -1.70 ppm 54.55 ppm -3.11

-FS -0.000005 mA -0.000005 mA -2.47 ppm 54.55 ppm -4.53

22 mA +FS -0.00005 mA -0.00001 mA -0.63 ppm 54.55 ppm -1.15

-FS -0.00004 mA -0.00007 mA -3.33 ppm 54.55 ppm -6.11

220 mA +FS -0.0005 mA -0.0005 mA -2.48 ppm 64.55 ppm -3.84

-FS -0.0005 mA -0.0004 mA -1.82 ppm 64.55 ppm -2.81

2.2A +FS -0.000005 A -0.000022 A -10.01 ppm 93.64 ppm -10.70

-FS -0.000005 A 0.000012 A 5.57 ppm 93.64 ppm 5.95
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
AC CURRENT OUTPUT SHIFTS
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
RANGE Point Full Scale Shift Spec Shift
(+/-) (% spec)

220 uA FS 0.000 uA 0.97 ppm 230.91 ppm 0.42

0.5000 kHz 0.002 uA 8.31 ppm 230.91 ppm 3.60
1.0000 kHz -0.000 uA -0.40 ppm 230.91 ppm -0.17
2.000 kHz -0.001 uA -0.0003 % 0.53 % -0.05
5.000 kHz 0.000 uA 0.0001 % 0.53 % 0.02
7.000 kHz -0.001 uA -0.0003 % 2.26 % -0.01
10.000 kHz -0.002 uA -0.0008 % 2.26 % -0.04

2.2 mA FS 0.00000 mA 0.37 ppm 158.18 ppm 0.23

0.5000 kHz 0.00001 mA 2.67 ppm 158.18 ppm 1.69
1.0000 kHz -0.00001 mA -2.48 ppm 158.18 ppm -1.57
2.000 kHz 0.00000 mA 0.0002 % 0.17 % 0.11
5.000 kHz -0.00001 mA -0.0006 % 0.17 % -0.34
7.000 kHz -0.00001 mA -0.0002 % 0.62 % -0.04
10.000 kHz -0.00001 mA -0.0004 % 0.62 % -0.07

22 mA FS 0.0000 mA 1.33 ppm 158.18 ppm 0.84

0.5000 kHz 0.0000 mA 0.40 ppm 158.18 ppm 0.25
Figure 6-2. Calibration Shift Results Printout (continued)

6-12
 Using the RS-232C Serial Interface
Printing Calibration Reports 6
1.0000 kHz 0.0001 mA 2.83 ppm 158.18 ppm 1.79
2.000 kHz -0.0000 mA -0.0002 % 0.12 % -0.14
5.000 kHz 0.0000 mA 0.0001 % 0.12 % 0.08
7.000 kHz -0.0001 mA -0.0006 % 0.53 % -0.11
10.000 kHz -0.0002 mA -0.0009 % 0.53 % -0.16

220 mA FS -0.000 mA -0.35 ppm 348.18 ppm -0.10

0.5000 kHz -0.001 mA -2.91 ppm 348.18 ppm -0.83
1.0000 kHz 0.001 mA 2.48 ppm 348.18 ppm 0.71
2.000 kHz -0.000 mA -2.17 ppm 977.27 ppm -0.22
5.000 kHz -0.001 mA -3.48 ppm 977.27 ppm -0.36
7.000 kHz -0.001 mA -0.0006 % 0.49 % -0.13
10.000 kHz -0.004 mA -0.0017 % 0.49 % -0.34

2.2A FS -0.00002 A -7.81 ppm 668.18 ppm -1.17

0.5000 kHz -0.00002 A -8.74 ppm 668.18 ppm -1.31
1.0000 kHz -0.00001 A -6.32 ppm 668.18 ppm -0.95
2.000 kHz -0.00002 A -10.79 ppm 795.45 ppm -1.36
5.000 kHz -0.00002 A -8.13 ppm 795.45 ppm -1.02
7.000 kHz -0.00003 A -0.0015 % 0.91 % -0.16
10.000 kHz -0.00004 A -0.0018 % 0.91 % -0.19

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
RESISTANCE OUTPUT SHIFTS
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
Point Full Scale Shift Spec Shift
(+/-) (% spec)

0.0000000 Ohm 0.0000000 Ohm 0.00 Ohm 0.00 Ohm 0.00

1.0000980 Ohm -0.0000013 Ohm -1.32 ppm 95.00 ppm -1.39
1.8992446 Ohm -0.0000014 Ohm -0.72 ppm 95.00 ppm -0.76
9.998777 Ohm 0.000008 Ohm 0.75 ppm 28.00 ppm 2.69
18.996369 Ohm -0.000101 Ohm -5.30 ppm 26.00 ppm -20.38
99.99425 Ohm -0.00011 Ohm -1.14 ppm 17.00 ppm -6.73
189.97922 Ohm -0.00037 Ohm -1.95 ppm 17.00 ppm -11.45
0.9999772 kOhm 0.0000006 kOhm 0.60 ppm 12.00 ppm 5.02
1.9000296 kOhm -0.0000009 kOhm -0.47 ppm 12.00 ppm -3.90
10.001505 kOhm -0.000001 kOhm -0.07 ppm 11.00 ppm -0.65
19.001801 kOhm 0.000006 kOhm 0.31 ppm 11.00 ppm 2.78
100.01559 kOhm -0.00015 kOhm -1.54 ppm 13.00 ppm -11.84
190.02896 kOhm -0.00005 kOhm -0.26 ppm 13.00 ppm -1.97
1.0001901 MOhm -0.0000029 MOhm -2.87 ppm 18.00 ppm -15.94
1.9003599 MOhm -0.0000016 MOhm -0.84 ppm 19.00 ppm -4.41
10.002007 MOhm -0.000044 MOhm -4.37 ppm 37.00 ppm -11.81
19.001915 MOhm -0.000038 MOhm -2.00 ppm 47.00 ppm -4.25
100.04720 MOhm -0.00129 MOhm -12.87 ppm 120.00 ppm -10.72

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
WIDEBAND OUTPUT SHIFTS
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
RANGE Point Full Scale Shift Spec Shift
(+/-) (% spec)

1.1 mV FS 0.25 uV 0.0224 % 0.44 % 5.14

1.0000 kHz 0.25 uV 0.0224 % 0.44 % 5.14
Figure 6-2. Calibration Shift Results Printout (continued)

6-13
5700A/5720A Series II
Operators Manual

12.00 kHz 0.25 uV 0.0224 % 0.44 % 5.14

100.00 kHz 0.25 uV 0.0224 % 0.44 % 5.14
0.5000 MHz 0.25 uV 0.0224 % 0.44 % 5.14
1.1999 MHz 0.25 uV 0.0224 % 0.91 % 2.47
1.2 MHz -0.32 uV -0.0287 % 0.91 % -3.16
2.0 MHz -0.32 uV -0.0287 % 0.91 % -3.16
10.0 MHz -0.32 uV -0.0287 % 0.91 % -3.16
20 MHz -0.32 uV -0.0287 % 0.91 % -3.16
30 MHz -0.32 uV -0.0287 % 3.30 % -0.87

3.3 mV FS 0.00070 mV 0.0212 % 0.48 % 4.42

1.0000 kHz 0.00070 mV 0.0212 % 0.48 % 4.42
12.00 kHz 0.00070 mV 0.0212 % 0.48 % 4.42
100.00 kHz 0.00070 mV 0.0212 % 0.48 % 4.42
0.5000 MHz 0.00070 mV 0.0212 % 0.48 % 4.42
1.1999 MHz 0.00070 mV 0.0212 % 0.67 % 3.16
1.2 MHz -0.00106 mV -0.0322 % 0.67 % -4.79
2.0 MHz -0.00106 mV -0.0322 % 0.67 % -4.79
10.0 MHz -0.00106 mV -0.0322 % 0.87 % -3.69
20 MHz -0.00106 mV -0.0322 % 1.07 % -3.00
30 MHz -0.00106 mV -0.0322 % 2.07 % -1.55
11 mV FS 0.0023 mV 0.0210 % 0.39 % 5.43
1.0000 kHz 0.0023 mV 0.0210 % 0.39 % 5.43
12.00 kHz 0.0023 mV 0.0210 % 0.39 % 5.43
100.00 kHz 0.0023 mV 0.0210 % 0.39 % 5.43
0.5000 MHz 0.0023 mV 0.0210 % 0.39 % 5.43
1.1999 MHz 0.0023 mV 0.0210 % 0.51 % 4.08
1.2 MHz -0.0033 mV -0.0302 % 0.51 % -5.88
2.0 MHz -0.0033 mV -0.0302 % 0.51 % -5.88
10.0 MHz -0.0033 mV -0.0302 % 0.61 % -4.92
20 MHz -0.0033 mV -0.0302 % 0.81 % -3.71
30 MHz -0.0033 mV -0.0302 % 1.41 % -2.14
33 mV FS 0.0065 mV 0.0198 % 0.33 % 5.98
1.0000 kHz 0.0065 mV 0.0198 % 0.33 % 5.98
12.00 kHz 0.0065 mV 0.0198 % 0.33 % 5.98
100.00 kHz 0.0065 mV 0.0198 % 0.33 % 5.98
0.5000 MHz 0.0065 mV 0.0198 % 0.33 % 5.98
1.1999 MHz 0.0065 mV 0.0198 % 0.44 % 4.50
1.2 MHz -0.0111 mV -0.0337 % 0.44 % -7.66
2.0 MHz -0.0111 mV -0.0337 % 0.44 % -7.66
10.0 MHz -0.0111 mV -0.0337 % 0.54 % -6.24
20 MHz -0.0111 mV -0.0337 % 0.74 % -4.55
30 MHz -0.0111 mV -0.0337 % 1.34 % -2.51
110 mV FS 0.012 mV 0.0114 % 0.34 % 3.38
1.0000 kHz 0.012 mV 0.0114 % 0.34 % 3.38
12.00 kHz 0.012 mV 0.0114 % 0.34 % 3.38
100.00 kHz 0.012 mV 0.0114 % 0.34 % 3.38
0.5000 MHz 0.012 mV 0.0114 % 0.34 % 3.38
1.1999 MHz 0.012 mV 0.0114 % 0.44 % 2.59
1.2 MHz -0.044 mV -0.0398 % 0.44 % -9.06
2.0 MHz -0.044 mV -0.0398 % 0.44 % -9.06
10.0 MHz -0.044 mV -0.0398 % 0.54 % -7.38
20 MHz -0.044 mV -0.0398 % 0.74 % -5.38
30 MHz -0.044 mV -0.0398 % 1.34 % -2.97

Figure 6-2. Calibration Shift Results Printout (continued)

6-14
 Using the RS-232C Serial Interface
Printing Calibration Reports 6
330 mV FS 0.033 mV 0.0102 % 0.28 % 3.62
1.0000 kHz 0.033 mV 0.0102 % 0.28 % 3.62
12.00 kHz 0.033 mV 0.0102 % 0.28 % 3.62
100.00 kHz 0.033 mV 0.0102 % 0.28 % 3.62
0.5000 MHz 0.033 mV 0.0102 % 0.28 % 3.62
1.1999 MHz 0.033 mV 0.0102 % 0.38 % 2.66
1.2 MHz -0.143 mV -0.0433 % 0.38 % -11.35
2.0 MHz -0.143 mV -0.0433 % 0.38 % -11.35
10.0 MHz -0.143 mV -0.0433 % 0.48 % -8.99
20 MHz -0.143 mV -0.0433 % 0.68 % -6.35
30 MHz -0.143 mV -0.0433 % 1.28 % -3.38
1.1V FS 0.00011 V 0.0099 % 0.29 % 3.45
1.0000 kHz 0.00011 V 0.0099 % 0.29 % 3.45
12.00 kHz 0.00011 V 0.0099 % 0.29 % 3.45
100.00 kHz 0.00011 V 0.0099 % 0.29 % 3.45
0.5000 MHz 0.00011 V 0.0099 % 0.29 % 3.45
1.1999 MHz 0.00011 V 0.0099 % 0.39 % 2.56
1.2 MHz -0.00045 V -0.0413 % 0.39 % -10.68
2.0 MHz -0.00045 V -0.0413 % 0.39 % -10.68
10.0 MHz -0.00045 V -0.0413 % 0.49 % -8.48
20 MHz -0.00045 V -0.0413 % 0.69 % -6.01
30 MHz -0.00045 V -0.0413 % 1.29 % -3.21

3.5V FS 0.00030 V 0.0087 % 0.21 % 4.05

1.0000 kHz 0.00030 V 0.0087 % 0.21 % 4.05
12.00 kHz 0.00030 V 0.0087 % 0.21 % 4.05
100.00 kHz 0.00030 V 0.0087 % 0.21 % 4.05
0.5000 MHz 0.00030 V 0.0087 % 0.21 % 4.05
1.1999 MHz 0.00030 V 0.0087 % 0.31 % 2.76
1.2 MHz -0.00148 V -0.0423 % 0.31 % -13.44
2.0 MHz -0.00148 V -0.0423 % 0.31 % -13.44
10.0 MHz -0.00148 V -0.0423 % 0.41 % -10.20
20 MHz -0.00148 V -0.0423 % 0.61 % -6.88
30 MHz -0.00148 V -0.0423 % 1.21 % -3.48

Figure 6-2. Calibration Shift Results Printout (continued)

6-15
5700A/5720A Series II
Operators Manual

Table 6-2. Annotation for Shift Results Printout

A The date and time that the calibrator printed the report. (This is not the date and time of calibration.)

B The user report string contents. (Set by the remote RPT_STR command.)

The type of calibration report: Output Calibration or Calibration Check.

C
• An Output Calibration Report, which can be requested at any time, shows offset and gain
adjustments performed at the last calibration. The report is derived from two sets of calibration
constants stored in non-volatile memory: the active set, and the set that was previously active.
This calibration report is always based on external standards.
• A Calibration Check Report shows recommended calibration adjustments that will never be
stored. The report can be one of two forms, depending on when it’s requested:
The first form of this report is generated if you request the report immediately after calibration,
before any adjustments have been stored. This lets you determine whether to implement the
recommended adjustments. If only minor adjustments are recommended, you may decide to
simply file the report and leave the rear panel Calibration Switch in its Normal position. This
report includes calibration drift information on the calibrator’s internal check standards, based
on the applicable external artifacts standards.
The second form of this report can be requested at any time other than immediately after
calibration. This type of report shows calibrator drift relative to internal check standards, based on
data from a just-completed calibration check. This report is based on externally calibrated internal
check standards rather than actual data; a fact that is stated in the report.
All calibration check data remains in memory and is available for reporting until replaced by a later
calibration check or calibration, or until the calibrator is reset (or the power is cycled).
The three characters that follow “Software Revision” provide the firmware versions for the Main
D CPU, the Inguard CPU, and the Boost CPU. Each version is separated by a plus (+). If no amplifier
is attached then its position (third character) contains an asterisk (*).
A list of each analog module installed in the calibrator and the external amplifiers attached to the
E instrument and powered on.-
The date and reported temperature of the most recent calibration. This always refers to the
F calibration that established the set of cal constants presently in use (stored in EEPROM).

Note
A calibration check reports contain a line that shows the date and temperature of
the calibration check, which refers to the calibration that established the set of
constants presently in temporary memory. This line is indicated by (CalCheck)
and can also refer to constants established by performing output calibration but
not yet saved into EEPROM.

G The date and temperature of the previous calibration, prior to the most recent one.

The number of days between the day the calibration report was printed (#2 above) and the day that
H the presently active set of cal constants was stored into EEPROM (#5 above).
These numbers are the entered values of the external reference. They will only appear on
I calibration reports done on instruments with rev E or higher software. Otherwise, they will be blank
lines.
The Resistance Reference is the average of the actual-to-nominal ratios of the 100Ω, 190 Ω, 1 k Ω,
J 1.9 k Ω, 10 k Ω, 19 k Ω, 100 k Ω, and 190 k Ω resistors. Prior to revision H, this line showed the
calibrated value of the internal 10 k Ω reference resistor. As of revision H, the line is changed as
shown in the report.

6-16
 Using the RS-232C Serial Interface
Printing Calibration Reports 6
Table 6-2. Annotation for Shift Results Printout (continued)

The values of each internal reference as established during the most recent calibration. The unit for
K each value is the same as listed in the reference name, just to the left under the REFERENCE
heading.

The previous value of each internal reference. For a 5720 calibration check, this column is labeled
L Most Recent and refers to the active constants stored in EEPROM.

The reference shift expressed in parts per million (ppm). The formula used for this calculation is:
M
1,000,000 x (Most Recent - Previous) / (Previous) = shift (ppm)

For 5720 calibration check, the formula is:

1,000,000 x (Cal check - Most Recent) / (Most Recent) = shift (ppm)

The remaining pages in the calibration report give information which describe how the output has
changed between the time two different calibration activities were performed. (See #1.) The
calibrator checks each range at multiple points, as described further on.

This is the name of the range to which the shift information pertains.
N
The calibrator calculates shift information at multiple points, depending on the range and mode (dc
O V, ac V, etc.). Each line in the report for a given range contains shift information for a particular
point. The “Point” column indicates which point in the range the data is calculated for.

On this example page of dc voltage output shifts, two points are listed for each range, +FS and -FS.
+FS refers to the positive full-scale value of the range, as given in the RANGE column. -FS refers to
the negative full-scale value for the range. For the 220 mV range, +FS means +220 mV dc and -FS
means -220 mV dc. These points are used to calculate the amount of full scale shift, as discussed
further on.

This column lists how much the zero output has shifted between calibration events (i.e., comparing
P the most recent with the previous calibration). Assuming the calibrator output was exactly 0V
immediately after the previous calibration, the number listed in this column shows what the
calibrator output was just before the most recent calibration was performed. There are two zero
checks for each dc range, one for the portion of the range >0V and one for the portion <0V. The
report includes the positive portion zero shifts in the +FS line and the negative portion zero shifts in
the -FS line.

For example, the positive portion zero of the 220 mV range shifted from 0.00000 mV to -
0.00020 mV between the previous calibration and the most recent calibration. (Listed under the
220 mV range, +FS point.) If this calibration data is stored, all positive outputs on the 220 mV range
will be increased by 0.00020 mV.

6-17
5700A/5720A Series II
Operators Manual

Table 6-2. Annotation for Shift Results Printout (continued)

As with zero shifts, the calibrator calculates how much the full scale point has shifted between the two
Q calibrations. This is listed in two columns under the “Full Scale Shift” heading. The left column under
this heading indicates how much the output shifted expressed in the units of output for the range. For
example, the +FS point on the 220 mV range shifted from 220.00000 mV to 199.99915 mV between
the previous calibration and the most recent calibration. (220.00000 - 0.00085 = 199.99915)
The right column under the “Full Scale Shift” heading gives the shift expressed in parts per million
(ppm). The formula used is:
shift = 1,000,000 x (full scale shift / full scale range point)
For example, if the full scale shift is -0.00085 mV on the +FS point of the 220 mV range,
shift = 1,000,000 x (-0.00085 mV / +220 mV) = -3.86 ppm.
Note that this is shown as -3.87 ppm in the sample printout. The 0.01 ppm difference is due to
rounding error caused by the limited resolution used in the calculation. The calibrator uses much
greater resolution for internal calculations.
Full scale shift includes all sources of shift at the full scale point that is checked, including both gain
and zero shift components. To determine the gain component of the full scale shift, subtract the
number in the zero shift column from the number in the left Full Scale Shift column.
e.g., for the -FS point on the 220 mV range:
total shift = +0.00047 mV (left column under Full Scale Shift)
zero shift component = -0.00017 mV (Zero Shift column)
gain shift component = +0.00064 mV (subtract zero shift from total shift)

This column shows calibrator uncertainty at the full-scale point being checked, using the calibration
R interval specified in the setup menu. (e.g., the total specified uncertainty at 2.2V is 6.55 ppm.)
The last column expresses full-scale shift as a percentage of specification. The formula is:
S shift (% spec) = 100 x (full scale shift / spec (+/-))
Using the 220 mV range example, full-scale shift is -3.87 ppm, and the specification is 10.41 ppm:
shift = 100 x (-3.87 ppm/10.41 ppm) = -37.18% of spec.

For ac outputs, the column under the “Point” heading means something slightly different than those
T for dc outputs:

FS means the calibrator calculates shift at the full scale point for a low frequency where flatness
correction constants are not applied. This is the shift as a result of changes in range gain constants.
(There is no zero shift component for an ac output.) When calculating uncertainty, the calibrator uses
the full-scale magnitude at a frequency of 1 kHz.

For example, the FS point on the 2.2 mV ac range at low frequencies shifted from 2.200000 mV to
2.199982 mV between the previous calibration and just before the most recent calibration.
(2.200000 - 0.000018 = 2.199982)

When the point describes a frequency, the shift in output is calculated at that frequency. This shift
shows the effect of changes in output due to flatness correction. The instrument calculates the
uncertainty (Spec (+/-) column) using the full scale point and the frequency listed under the Point
column.

For example, the 50.00 kHz point on the 2.2 mV ac range shifted from 2.200000 mV to 2.199983 mV
between the previous and the most recent calibration. (2.200000 - 0.000017 = 2.199983)

6-18
 Chapter 7
Operator Maintenance

Title Page

7-1. Introduction........................................................................................... 7-3

7-2. Accessing the Fuse................................................................................ 7-4
7-3. Cleaning the Air Filter .......................................................................... 7-4
7-4. Cleaning the Exterior ............................................................................ 7-6
7-5. Calibration ............................................................................................ 7-6
7-6. Calibrating the 5700A/5720A Series II to External Standards ............. 7-6
7-7. Calibration Requirements ................................................................. 7-7
7-8. When to Adjust the Calibrator’s Uncertainty ................................... 7-7
7-9. Calibration Procedure....................................................................... 7-8
7-10. Range Calibration ................................................................................. 7-14
7-11. Calibrating the Wideband AC Module (Option 5700A-03) ................. 7-18
7-12. Performing a Calibration Check ........................................................... 7-21

7-1
5700A/5720A Series II
Operators Manual

7-2
 Operator Maintenance
Introduction 7

7-1. Introduction
This chapter explains how to perform the routine maintenance and calibration tasks
required to keep your calibrator in optimal operating condition. The tasks covered in this
chapter include the following.
• Replacing the fuse
• Cleaning the air filter and external surfaces
• Calibrating to external standards
• Calibrating the range
• Calibrating the wideband ac module
• Checking the calibration
For intensive maintenance tasks such as troubleshooting or repair, and for all procedures
that require opening the cover of the instrument, refer to the 5700A/5720A Series II
Service Manual. The service manual contains complete verification procedures for
checking that traceability to national standards is being maintained by the normal
calibration procedure.

7-3
5700A/5720A Series II
Operators Manual

7-2. Accessing the Fuse

The fuse is accessible from the rear panel. The fuse rating label to the right of the fuse
holder shows the correct replacement fuse ratings for each operating voltage. To access
the fuse, refer to Figure 7-1 and proceed as follows:
1. Disconnect line power.
2. Using a standard screwdriver, turn the fuse holder counterclockwise until the cap and
fuse are disengaged.

VOLTAGE FUSE-F1 VOLTAGE FUSE-F1

SELECTION SELECTION
S2 S3 S4 S2 S3 S4
100V 200V
T 3A T 1.5A
110V 250V 220V 250V
115V (SB) 230V (SB)
120V 240V
CHASSIS
GROUND
!
FUSE -F1

S2 S3 S4

Figure 7-1. Accessing the Fuse

7-3. Cleaning the Air Filter

Caution
Damage caused by overheating may occur if the area around
the fan is restricted, the intake air is too warm, or the air filter
becomes clogged.
The air filter must be removed and cleaned at least every 30 days, or more frequently if
the calibrator is operated in a dusty environment. The air filter is accessible from the rear
panel of the calibrator.
To clean the air filter, refer to Figure 7-2 and proceed as follows:
1. Disconnect line power.
2. Remove the filter by unscrewing the knurled screw at the top of the air filter pulling
the filter’s retainer downwards (it hinges at the bottom) and removing the filter
element.
3. Clean the filter by washing it in soapy water. Rinse and dry it thoroughly before
reinstalling.
7-4
 Operator Maintenance
Cleaning the Exterior 7
4. Reinstall the filter and the knurled screw.

CHASSIS
GROUND
!
FUSE -F1

S2 S3 S4

Figure 7-2. Accessing the Air Filter

7-5
5700A/5720A Series II
Operators Manual

7-4. Cleaning the Exterior

To keep the calibrator looking like new, clean the case, front panel keys, and lens using a
soft cloth slightly dampened with either water or a non-abrasive mild cleaning solution
that is not harmful to plastics.

Caution
Do not use aromatic hydrocarbons or chlorinated solvents for
cleaning. They can damage the plastic materials used in the
calibrator.

7-5. Calibration
This chapter provides procedures for calibrating the 5700A/5720A Series II to external
standards, adjusting the range if necessary, and for performing a calibration check.
Your calibrator is calibrated at the factory with constants that are traceable to the U.S.
National Bureau of Standards. In order to maintain traceability, you only need to met the
following requirements.
• Calibration to external standards must be completed at the beginning of the
calibration cycle
• Performance verification must be completed every two years. (See the 5700A/5720A
Series II Service Manual for procedures.)
Calibration check and range calibration are optional procedures that are provided for
enhancing the accuracy if needed for special requirements.
For a description of the calibration process and the theory behind its use to establish
traceability to national standards, see Chapter 1 of this manual. Included in this chapter is
a description of the calibration check feature, and how it can be used to develop a
performance history for the calibrator. Detailed calibration theory can be found in the
5700A/5720A Series II Service Manual.

7-6. Calibrating the 5700A/5720A Series II to External Standards

You must calibrate to external standards at the beginning of the calibration cycle. The
length of the cycle (24 hours, 90 days, 180 days, or one year) is selected in a setup menu
described in Chapter 4.
To calibrate the 5700A/5720A Series II, you apply three portable standards to the output
binding posts: a 10V dc voltage standard, a 1Ω resistance standard, and a 10 kΩ
resistance standard. The following standards are recommended:
• Model 732A or 732B DC Reference Standard
• Model 742A-1 1Ω Resistance Standard
• Model 742A-10k 10Ω Resistance Standard
Use the following Low Thermal Leads for all connections:
• When calibrating the 5700A, use either the connector set 5440A-7002 (banana plugs)
or the set 5440A-7003 (spade lugs).
• When calibrating the 5720A, use the set 5440A-7003 (spade lugs).

7-6
 Operator Maintenance
Calibrating the 5700A/5720A Series II to External Standards 7
7-7. Calibration Requirements
Both the calibrator and the recommended external standards have the ability to internally
control (or compensate for) ambient temperature variations. Therefore it is unnecessary to
keep the calibrator in tightly controlled temperatures during calibration. During the
calibration procedure, the calibrator prompts you to enter the ambient temperature, and
includes this information in specification readouts and output shift reports.

7-8. When to Adjust the Calibrator’s Uncertainty

Table 7-1 lists each external standard’s uncertainty limit, and the 5700A/5720A Series II
uncertainty specifications that must adjusted accordingly if that limit is exceeded.
As long as the external standards have the uncertainties listed in Table 7-1, you do not
need to adjust the calibrator’s absolute uncertainty specifications in Chapter 1. However,
if your standard’s uncertainty exceeds the value in the table you must adjust some of the
calibrator’s absolute uncertainty specifications by the algebraic difference between your
standard’s uncertainty and the uncertainty limit listed in the Table 7-1. For example, if
the dc voltage standard has an uncertainty of ±2.5 ppm, then the 5700A and the 5720A
absolute uncertainty specifications listed in Table 7-1 must all be increased by ±1 ppm.

Table 7-1. Standards for Calibrating 5700A/5720A Series II

Fluke Traceable Nominal Uncertainty 5700A/5720A Series II

Standard Quantity Value Limit Specifications susceptible to
Uncertainty Limit

732B Voltage 10V ±1.5 ppm dc volts, ac volts,

dc current, ac current

742A-1 Resistance 1Ω ±10 ppm 1Ω, 1.9Ω

742A-10k Resistance 10 kΩ ±4 ppm ac current, dc current

10Ω to 100 MΩ

7-7
5700A/5720A Series II
Operators Manual

7-9. Calibration Procedure

Before you being this procedure make sure the calibrator is powered on and has
completed the appropriate warm-up period.
After you have finished calibration, but before you save the new constants, the calibrator
presents the new changes as ± ppm, and as a percentage of specifications for each range
and function. A list of changes can be sent to a computer through either the serial or
instrument control (IEEE-488) port, or printed through the serial port. The largest
proposed change will be displayed on the calibrator’s front panel.
Follow this procedure to calibrate the main output functions.
1. Press the “Setup Menus” softkey; then press the “Cal” softkey. The calibration menu
appears as shown below:

PREV
MENU

2. Press the “Cal” softkey. The display shows the following.

PREV
MENU

2. To calibrate the main output functions, press one of the softkeys under “Calibration.”
The display shows the following:

PREV
MENU

7-8
 Operator Maintenance
Calibrating the 5700A/5720A Series II to External Standards 7
3. Enter the ambient temperature; then press E. The display shows:

PREV
MENU

4. Connect the 732B to the calibrator as shown in Figure 7-3.

732B DC STANDARD

CALIBRATOR
AC PWR IN CAL CHARGE LOW BAT
OUTPUT SENSE
VΩA VΩ
10V 1.018V CHASSIS

WIDEBAND
HI HI

LO LO

10V COM 1.018V COM GUARD

SERIAL NUMBER
HI

AUX GUARD GROUND

CURRENT

Figure 7-3. 732B External Calibration Connections.

7-9
5700A/5720A Series II
Operators Manual

6. Enter the true value of the 732B 10V output. The true value is the value printed on
the calibration sticker, plus or minus, as well as drift that has occurred since
calibration. That drift can be estimated provided control charts have been maintained
for the 732B.
If the entered value is not between 9V and 11V, and error message appears, which
lets you start over from this point with a calibrated 732B. Press E, and the
display shows the following:

PREV
MENU

When the calibrator’s 6.5V and 13V references have been characterized, the display
shows the following message, which lets you accept or reject the changes that are
about to be made to the calibration constants.

PREV
MENU

7. To reject the changes, return to the calibration menu shown in step 2 by pressing
P. Otherwise, press the softkey under “Proceed” to accept and save the changes,
and to open the display shown below, letting you continue with calibration.

PREV
MENU

7-10
 Operator Maintenance
Calibrating the 5700A/5720A Series II to External Standards 7
8. Reverse the HI and LO connections at the 732B terminals, and press E. The
following displays appear, asking you to wait before proceeding with the 10 kΩ
standard.

PREV
MENU

After a few seconds, the following display appears:

PREV
MENU

9. Connect the calibrator to the 10 kΩ standard as shown in Figure 7-4 and enter the
true value of the standard. If the standard is not between 9 kΩ and 11 kΩ, an error
message appears, which allows you to start over from this point with a different
standard. Press E again to open the following display:

PREV
MENU

When the internal 10 kΩ reference has been characterized, the following message
appears, which lets you accept or reject the changes that are about to be made to the
calibration constant:

PREV
MENU

7-11
5700A/5720A Series II
Operators Manual

CALIBRATOR
RESISTANCE STANDARD
OUTPUT SENSE
CURRENT SENSE
VΩA VΩ

HI HI WIDEBAND
HI HI

LO LO
LO LO

HI

CHASSIS AUX GUARD GROUND

GROUND CURRENT

Figure 7-4. 742A-1 and 742A-10k External Calibration Connections

10. To reject the changes, return to the calibration menu shown in step 2 by pressing
P. Otherwise, press the softkey under “Proceed” to accept and save the changes,
and to open the display shown below, letting you continue with calibration.

PREV
MENU

7-12
 Operator Maintenance
Range Calibration 7
11. Disconnect the 10 kΩ standard, and connect the calibrator to the 1Ω standard; then
enter the true value of the 1Ω standard. If the standard is not between 0.9Ω and 1.1Ω,
an error message appears, which lets you start over from this point with another
standard. Press E to bring up the following display:

PREV
MENU

When the internal 1Ω reference has been characterized, the following message
appears, which lets you accept or reject the changes that re about to be made to the
calibration constant:

PREV
MENU

12. To reject the changes, return to the calibration menu shown in step 2 by pressing
P. Otherwise, press the softkey under “Proceed” to accept and save the changes,
and let the calibrator complete the internal calibration steps.
13. The calibration is not effective until you store the newly calibrated constants in
memory. To store the constants, set the rear panel CALIBRATION switch to
ENABLE, the press the “Store Values” softkey.

Note
To review the proposed output shifts before you store the new constants,
print a listing of the proposed shifts by pressing the softkey under “Print
Output Shifts.”
14. After you store the constants, press the softkey under “DONE with Cal” to exit
calibration and resume normal operation.
15. If you press this softkey before you store the constants, the new constants will be
used temporarily for normal operation until the calibrator is powered down or reset.
(This is only true for software versions G and lower. For versions H and higher, the
process is aborted without updating existing constants.)
16. Set the rear panel CALIBRATION switch to NORMAL.

7-13
5700A/5720A Series II
Operators Manual

7-10. Range Calibration

Once calibration is complete, you may find you need to make further adjustments to the
range. Calibrating the range is accomplished by adjusting a range constant, which is an
additional gain multiplier. Although range calibration is not needed in order to meet total
uncertainty specifications, they are useful for tuning the calibrator so that its values are
closer to your own standards.
Use your own laboratory standard to adjust the range constants. The following procedure
for adjusting the range constants is designed for laboratory standard values that are:
between 45% and 95% of the range’s full-scale value.
Once you adjust the range constant, the new constant remains active until the next
calibration, at which time all range constant multipliers are rest to 1. You can also erase
all range adjustments by calling up the format EEPROM menu and selecting Range
Constants (see Chapter 4).
Before you begin the following procedure, make sure you have the equipment you need
on hand including your own laboratory standards where required.
The following example procedure adjusts the 220V dc range constant using the following
equipment:
• 732B DC reference standard
• 752A Reference Divider
• 845AB/845AR Null Detector
• Low Thermal Test Leads: 5440A-7002 (banana plugs) or 5440A-7003 (spade lugs)
Proceed as follows to adjust the 220V dc range constant. You must have completed
calibration to external standards before you follow this procedure.
1. Press the “Setup Menus” softkey; the press the “Cal” softkey. The following menu
appears:

PREV
MENU

2. Press the “Cal” softkey to bring up the next menu shown below:

PREV
MENU

7-14
 Operator Maintenance
Range Calibration 7
3. Press the “Range Adjust” softkey to bring up the next menu shown below:

PREV
MENU

4. Press the “DC V” softkey to bring up the next menu shown below:

PREV
MENU

5. Press the “NEXT Menu” softkey, which scrolls through all the available dc voltage
ranges, until 220V appears. Then press that selection’s softkey to open a display
similar to the following:

PREV
MENU

6. Connect the 732B, 845A, and 732B in a 10:1 configuration, as shown in Figure 7-5.
7. Multiply the 732B’s value by 10, and enter this new value. (This value is the output
of the 752A, to which you will null the calibrator’s output.) Then press E to
bring up the following display.

PREV
MENU

7-15
5700A/5720A Series II
Operators Manual

8. Press O to activate the calibrator output. Then turn the output adjustment knob on
the calibrator until you achieve a null on the 845A Null Detector.
9. Se the rear panel CALIBRATION switch to ENABLE. Press E on the front
panel. The calibrator will now calculate a new range constant multiplier for the 220V
dc range, and will store it in non-volatile memory.
10. The range calibration is now complete. Set the rear panel CALIBRATION switch to
the NORMAL position, disconnect the external standards, and press R to reset the
calibrator to its newly calibrated ranges.

7-16
 Operator Maintenance
Calibrating the Wideband AC Module (Option 5700A-03) 7
845A NULL DETECTOR

HI

LO

GUARD GND : OFF : OFF

EX SNS EX GRD

CALIBRATOR

NC

OUTPUT SENSE
VΩA VA
HI HI WIDEBAND

LO LO

HI
AUX GUARD GROUND
CURRENT

752A VOLTAGE DIVIDER STANDARD

INPUT HI LO

NULL LO
DETECTOR HI
OUTPUT GND GRD
REFERENCE HI LO
STANDARD
HI LO

732B VOLTAGE REFERENCE

STANDARD

732B DC STANDARD

AC PWR IN CAL CHARGE LOW BAT

10V 1.018V CHASSIS

10V COM 1.018V COM GUARD

SERIAL NUMBER

Figure 7-5. 220V DC Range Calibration Connections

7-17
5700A/5720A Series II
Operators Manual

7-11. Calibrating the Wideband AC Module (Option 5700A-03)

The Wideband AC Module (Option 5700A-03) can be installed in either the 5720A or
5700A Series II Calibrator. The module needs to be calibrated for both gain and flatness.
The gain should be calibrated when the 5700A-03 main output functions undergo their
routine calibration.
Since frequency flatness is determined by stable parameters (i.e. circuit geometry and
dielectric constants), the flatness of the Wideband AC Module has excellent long-term
stability. Consequently, a two-year calibration cycle is adequate for flatness calibration,
and can be scheduled to coincide with the calibrator’s shipment to a standards laboratory
for periodic verification.
The following procedure describes how to perform the wideband gain calibration. The
procedure for performing the wideband flatness calibration can be found in the
5700A/5720A Series II Service Manual.

Note
To perform this procedure you will need, in addition to the standard
equipment supplied with the wideband option, a Type “N” female to double
banana plug adapter (e.g., Pomona 1740).
Before you start this procedure, make sure the calibrator is powered on and has
completed an appropriate warm-up period. The proceed with this procedure to calibrate
the wideband gain.
1. Press the “Setup Menus” softkey; then press the “Cal” softkey to being up the menu
shown below:

PREV
MENU

2. Press the “Cal “ softkey to bring up the following menu:

PREV
MENU

3. Connect the wideband output cable between the WIDEBAND connector and the
SENSE binding post.
The center conductor of the 50Ω feedthrough should go to SENSE HI and shown in
Figure 7-6. The GND tab on the adapter should be on the LO side.

7-18
 Operator Maintenance
Calibrating the Wideband AC Module (Option 5700A-03) 7
CALIBRATOR

OUTPUT SENSE
VΩA VΩ

50 Ω FEEDTHROUGH WIDEBAND
HI HI

LO LO

HI

AUX GUARD GROUND

CURRENT
GND TAB

Figure 7-6. Wideband Module Calibration Connection

4. Press the “Gain” softkey to bring up the following display:

PREV
MENU

5. Enter the ambient temperature; the press E. The display shows the following:

PREV
MENU

As the wideband calibration proceeds, messages appear on the display identifying all
processes as they are encountered. When positive gains calibration is complete, a
message appears telling you to refer to the manual for negative gains connections.

7-19
5700A/5720A Series II
Operators Manual

6. Reverse the dual-banana connector so that the center connector is connected to LO;
then press E. The display shows the following:

PREV
MENU

After a short time, a message appears indicating that the wideband calibration is
complete.
7. To store the new constants, set the CALIBRATION switch to ENABLE and press
“Store Values.” To discard the constants, press “DONE with Cal” and answer “YES”
when the display asks for verification.
8. You have now completed the wideband gain calibration. Set the CALIBRATION
switch to NORMAL, disconnect the wideband cable, and press r.

7-20
 Operator Maintenance
Performing a Calibration Check 7
7-12. Performing a Calibration Check
A calibration check is similar to the calibration, with the primary difference being that no
changes are made to the stored constants, and the internal check standards are used as the
reference points. A calibration check produces a report similar to the normal calibration
report, and shows any proposed changes.
This procedure can be performed from an external computer, and can be set to run
automatically, with no assistance (there is no need to enable the CALIBRATION switch,
since no constants are changed).
You can use the calibration check at any time to confirm the integrity of the calibrator
without connecting external standards. The calibration check is also useful for collecting
a performance history.
Before you begin this procedure, make sure the calibrator is powered on and has
completed the appropriate warm-up period. Then follow this procedure to check the
calibration.
1. Press the “Setup Menu” softkey; then press the “Cal” softkey to bring up the
following menu:

PREV
MENU

2. Press the “Cal Check” softkey to bring up the following display:

PREV
MENU

7-21
5700A/5720A Series II
Operators Manual

3. Enter the ambient temperature; then press E. As the calibration check

proceeds, the display indicates the current process of the calibration check. When the
check is complete, the largest shift that is detected appears on the display.

PREV
MENU

4. You can now print a list of the proposed shifts, or quit without creating a list.
To print the report, connect a printer and set up the serial interface as described in
Chapter 6. Press the softkey under “Print Output Changes.” To return to normal
operation without printing, press the softkey under “DONE with check.”
5. Press P to exit the calibration menus.

7-22
 Chapter 8
Options and Accessories

Title Page

8-1. Introduction........................................................................................... 8-3

8-2. Wideband AC Voltage Module (Option 5700A-03.............................. 8-3
8-3. Accessories ........................................................................................... 8-3
8-4. Low Thermal EMF Test Leads......................................................... 8-4
8-5. Rack Mount Kits (Y5737 and Y5735) ............................................. 8-4
8-6. Shielded IEEE-488 Interface Cables (Y8021, Y8022, and Y8023) . 8-4
8-7. RS-232C Null-Modem Cables (Y1702 and Y1703) ........................ 8-4
8-8. DC Voltage Reference Standard (732B) .......................................... 8-4
8-9. 1Ω and 10 kΩ Resistance Standards (742A-1 and 742A-10k)......... 8-5
8-10. 5725A Amplifier................................................................................... 8-5

8-1
5700A/5720A Series II
Operators Manual

8-2
 Options and Accessories
Introduction 8
8-1. Introduction
This chapter describes options and accessories available to enhance the capabilities of the
5700A/5720A Series II Calibrator. Chapter 4 contains instructions for operating the
calibrator with the options and accessories described here. To order options or
accessories, call or write to a Fluke Service Center.

8-2. Wideband AC Voltage Module (Option 5700A-03

The Wideband AC Voltage Module (Option 5700A-03) is used to calibrate RF
voltmaters, and can be installed in either a 5720A or 5700A Series II calibrator. Its
frequency ranges from 10 Hz to 30 MHz , and is a highly accurate, low-noise, ac voltage
source that maintains excellent flatness. The module sources its output through a coaxial
connector into a 50Ω load, and this output can be from within any of seven ranges of
values, from 300 µV (-57 dBm) to 3.5V (+24 dBm), selected in either volts or dBm.
The wideband module also functions with the calibrator’s edit controls, allowing you to
display the error of a wideband meter in percentage of output or decibels.

8-3. Accessories
Included with the wideband module are a Type “N” output cable and a 50Ω terminator.
The wideband module is calibrated to the end of its standard equipment output cable.
Table 8-1 summarizes the accessories available for the 5700A/5720A Series II Calibrator.
Following the table is a brief description of each accessory.

Table 8-1. Accessories

Model Description

732B DC Voltage Reference Standard

742A-1 1Ω Resistance Transfer Standard

742A-10k 10 kΩ Resistance Transfer Standard

5440A-7002 Low Thermal EMF Test Lead Set with Banana Plugs:
One 4 ft. cable (122 cm) and two 2 ft. (61 cm) cables.

5440A-7003 Low Thermal EMF Test Lead Set with Spade Lugs.
Two 4 ft. (122 cm) cables and One 2 ft. (61 cm) cable.

Y8021 IEEE-488 Shilded Interface Cable, 1 Meter

Y8022 IEEE-488 Shielded Interface Cable, 2 Meters

Y5737 24 in (61 cm) Rack Mount Kit for 5700A/5720A Series II

Y5735 24 in (61 cm) Rack Mount Kit for 5725A

PAC33 Printer Adapter Cable, Serial to Parallel Interface

8-3
5700A/5720A Series II
Operators Manual

8-4. Low Thermal EMF Test Leads

Two types of low thermal test leads are available. These cables are designed to exhibit
low thermal emfs. The types available are:
• Model 5440A-7002. Low Thermal Test Lead cables with banana plugs.
Set includes one 4 ft. (122 cm) cable and two 2 ft. (61 cm) cables. Each cable
includes two conductors and a shield lead.
• Model 5440A-7003. Low Thermal Test Lead cables with spade lugs.
Set includes two 4 ft. (122 cm) cables and One 2 ft. (61 cm) cable. Each cable
includes two conductors and a shield lead. Shield lead has a banana plug connector.

8-5. Rack Mount Kits (Y5737 and Y5735)

The rack mount kits provide all the hardware necessary to mount the calibrator and the
5725A Amplifier on slides in a 24-inch (61 cm) equipment rack. Model Y5737 is for the
5700A/5720A Series II and Model Y5735 is for the 5725A. Instructions are provided in
Chapter 2 and are also included with each kit.

8-6. Shielded IEEE-488 Interface Cables (Y8021 and Y8022)

Shielded IEEE-488 cables are available in two lengths (see Table 8-1). The cables attach
the calibrator to any other IEEE-488 device. Each cable has double 24-pin connectors at
both ends to allow stacking. Metric threaded mounting screws are provided with each
connector. Figure 5-2 in Chapter 5 shows the pinout for the IEEE-488 connector.

8-7. RS-232C Null-Modem Cables

An RS-232C Null-Modem Cable connects the calibrator to a printer, video-display
terminal, computer, or other serial device configured as DTE (Data Terminal Equipment).
Figure 6-1 in Chapter 6 shows the pinout for the rear-panel serial interface connector.
(For parallel printers, use the PAC33 Printer Adapter Cable.)
Chapter 6 contains instructions for transferring serial data from the calibrator. Chapter 5
contains instructions for operating the calibrator remotely.

8-8. DC Voltage Reference Standard (732B)

The Fluke 732B is a rugged, easily transported solid state direct voltage reference
standard with a highly predictable 10V output. This predictability allows the Fluke
Standards Laboratory, as well as many Fluke customers, to completely eliminate fragile,
saturated standard cells. Many laboratories that maintain standard cells use the 732B as a
transportable voltage standard, eliminating the need to transport their standard cells. The
732B can be short circuited, even for extended periods of time, without damage or loss of
stability. The 732B maintains full specified stability over a temperature span of 18 to
28ºC.
The calibrator uses a 10V reference standard such as the Fluke 732B in an automated
menu-prompted procedure to establish voltage traceability. Chapter 7 describes this
procedure.

8-4
 Options and Accessories
Amplifier 8
8-9. 1Ω and 10 kΩ Resistance Standards (742A-1 and 742A-10k)
The 742A Series Standard Resistors are available in values of 1Ω and 10 kΩ to support
5700A/5720A Series II calibration. Constructed of arrays of Fluke wirewound precision
resistors, these standards are ideally suited as support standards for the calibrator.
Stability of the resistance transfer standards and their temperature coefficient make them
ideal for easy transport to and operation in the calibrator's working environment.
The calibrator uses 1Ω and 10 kΩ resistor standards such as the 742A Series in its
automated calibration procedure to establish external traceability. Chapter 7 describes
this procedure.

8-10. 5725A Amplifier

The 5725A is available to extend the high voltage performance and current range of the
5700A/5720A Series II Calibrator.
An interface connector on the calibrator rear panel accepts the cable to directly operate a
5725A. Once you have connected the amplifier and configured the calibrator in a setup
menu, operation is controlled by the calibrator.
Chapter 4 provides instructions for operating the 5725A amplifier. The general
specifications at the end of Chapter 1 include specifications for operating the calibrator
with the 5725A. For other amplifier specifications, refer to their instruction manuals.
Table 1-1 summarizes the extended capabilities offered by each amplifier. Brief
descriptions of the extended capabilities follow.
The Fluke 5725A Amplifier is an external unit operating under calibrator control to
extend ac voltage drive capabilities and both ac and dc current output range. The
amplifier adds the following capabilities to the calibrator’s 1100V ac range with no
compromise in accuracy:
• Frequency limits at higher voltage increase to 100 kHz at 750V, 30 kHz at 1100V.
• Load limit increases to 70 mA for frequencies above 5 kHz.
• Capacitive drive increases to 1000 pF, subject to the maximum output current.
Extended-performance voltage is available at the calibrator’s front or rear binding posts,
eliminating the need to change cables during a procedure.
A separate set of binding posts on the front panel of the 5725A supplies extended-range
ac and dc current outputs. Since most meters have a separate input terminal for the high
current ranges, this eliminates the need to change cables during a procedure. A 5720A or
5700A Series II paired with a 5725A can also be configured to source all current (both
standard calibrator-generated outputs and its own outputs) through the 5725A binding
posts.

8-5
5700A/5720A Series II
Operators Manual

8-6
 Appendices

Appendix Title Page

A Fault Codes.......................................................................................................... A-1

B ASCII and IEEE Bus Codes................................................................................ B-1
C Symbolic Names of Calibration Constants ......................................................... C-1
D Glossary............................................................................................................... D-1
 Appendix A
Fault Codes

100-Level Faults: Air Flow Monitoring Subsystem

100 Low Air Flow

200-Level Faults: 5725 Boost System

200 5725 No Error

201 5725 Self-Test ROM Failure

202 5725 Self-Test RAM Failure

203 5725 Self-Test EEPROM Failure

204 5725 Self-Test Data Bus Failure

205 5725 Self-Test CLAMPS Circuit Failure

206 5725 Self-Test HVCLR Circuit Failure

207 5725 Self-Test DAC Failure

208 5725 Self-Test Watchdog Timer Failure

209 5725 Current Heatsink Too Hot

210 Output Tripped To Standby

211 5725 Current Compliance Voltage Too High

212 5725 Current Compliance Voltage Too High

213 5725 +400V Supply Did Not Shut Off

214 5725 -400V Supply Did Not Shut Off

215 5725 Voltage Heatsink Too Hot

216 5725 Voltage Heatsink Too Hot

217 5725 +400V Supply Too Small

218 5725 +400V Supply Too Large

219 5725 -400V Supply Too Large

220 5725 -400V Supply Too Small

A-1
5700A/5720A Series II
Operators Manual

221 5725 +400V Supply Current Too High

222 Output Tripped To Standby

223 5725 -400V Supply Current Too High

224 Output Tripped To Standby

225 5725 Fan Not Working

226 5725 CLAMPS Fault

227 Output Tripped To Standby

228 5725 Software TRAP

229 5725 Cable Was Off

230 5725 RESET (power-up or watchdog timer)

231 5725 Guard-Crossing Timeout

232 5725 Illegal/Unexecutable Command

233 5725 Non-Maskable Interrupt Occurred

234 5725 HVCLEAR Circuit Activated

235 Output Tripped To Standby

400-Level Faults: Calibration Constant Subsystem

400 Bad Cal Constant ID

500-Level Faults: Configuration Finder Subsystem

500 Bad Mode To CNFmodeRanges

501 Configuration Table Overflow

502 Bad Amplifier Type Selection

503 Bad Flat Constant Type Selection

504 Bad Flat Constant Type In Table

505 5725 Guard Crossing Wouldn't Start

600-Level Faults: Dot Matrix Display Driver Subsystem

600 Bad Row Selector

601 Bad Column Argument

602 Bad Character

800-Level Faults: Executive Subsystem

800 Wideband Module Needed

801 Amplifier Not Selected Or Connected

802 Amplifier Must Remain On For This Output

803 Over Limits Of Locked Range

804 Under Limits Of Locked Range

A-2
 Appendices
Fault Codes A
806 Invalid Date
807 Invalid Time
808 DC dBm Not Allowed

809 Ext Ref Value Out Of Range

810 Bad Edit Digit Movement

811 Not Wideband Units

812 Cannot Set Frequency With Ohms

813 Bad Units

814 Wrong Polarity For Limit

815 Outside Entry Limits

816 Magnitude Too Large For Calibrator

817 Magnitude Too Small For Calibrator

818 Frequency Too Large For Calibrator

819 Frequency Too Small For Calibrator

820 Calibrator Cannot Source That Value

821 V Limit Outside Calibrator Ability

822 I Limit Outside Calibrator Ability

823 Cannot Adjust Frequency To <<= 0 Hz

824 Offset Not Allowed Now

825 Scale Not Allowed Now

826 Ohms Reading Set Too High

827 Ohms Reading Set Too Low

828 Cannot Use External Sense Now

829 Cannot Use Phase Shift Now

830 Cannot Use Phase Lock Now

831 Cannot Use 2-ire Comp Now

832 Could not Do Default Wideband Output

833 Bad Selector For Set/Get Item

834 Cannot Boost This Output Mode

835 Cannot Use Ext Sense On Selected Range

836 Cannot Use 2 Wire Comp On Selected Range

837 Cannot Lock This Range

838 Cannot Set Clock, Rear Switch In NORMAL

839 Cannot Fmt EEPROM, Rear Switch In NORMAL

A-3
5700A/5720A Series II
Operators Manual

840 Illegal Output Post For Current

841 No 5725 Available For Selected Output

842 Not A Valid Wideband Flatness Point

843 Wideband Flatness Cal Is Not Active

844 Report String Too Long

845 Cannot Store, Rear Switch In NORMAL

846 Range Calibration Is Not Active

847 Magnitude Too High For Range Cal

848 Magnitude Too Low For Range Cal

849 Invalid Calibrator Setup Block

850 Cannot Format, 5725 Switch In NORMAL

851 Cannot Store, 5725 Switch In NORMAL

852 Calibration Steps Out Of Order

853 Cannot Use External Guard Now

854 Cannot Use Ext Guard On Selected Range

855 Cannot Set String, Rear Switch in NORMAL

856 Present Output Exceeds Selected Limit

857 Bad Selector For Reference Calibration

858 Cannot Change Range Now

859 Hardware Not Installed For This Range

860 Cannot Use Amplifier For This Output

861 5725 Cannot Ext Sense At That Frequency

900-Level Faults: Keyboard Driver Subsystem

900 Keyboard Output Queue Full

1000-Level Faults: 5725 Communication Receive Subsystem

1000 Could not ACK Packet From 5725

1001 Illegal 5725 Receive Task State

1002 Bad Receive Packet Number From 5725

1003 Bad Control Byte From 5725

1100-Level Faults: 5725 Communication Transmit Subsystem

1100 Multiple Timeouts Sending To 5725

1101 5725 Request Reset Loop

1102 Unexpected NSA From 5725

1103 Bad Packet Number In ACK From 5725

A-4
 Appendices
Fault Codes A
1104 Bad Control Byte From 5725 Receive Task

1105 Illegal 5725 Transmit Task State

1106 5725 Indefinite ACKWAIT Holdoff

1200-Level Faults: 5725 Communication Utility Subsystem

1200 Serial Write Failure To 5725

1201 Packet Too Large For 5725

1300-Level Faults: Output Monitor Subsystem

1300 Undefined Signal

1301 Output Tripped To Standby

1302 Output Tripped To Standby

1303 DC Zero Calibration is Needed (Every 30 Days)

1400-Level Faults: Software Timer Subsystem

1400 Cannot Install MTtick()

1401 Bad Timer Selector

1500-Level Faults: Guard Crossing Receive Subsystem

1500 Could not ACK Packet From Inguard

1501 Illegal Inguard Receive Task State

1502 Bad Receive Packet Number From Inguard

1503 Bad Control Byte From Inguard

1600-Level Faults: Guard Crossing Transmit Subsystem

1600 Multiple Timeouts Sending To Inguard

1601 Inguard Request Reset Loop

1602 Unexpected NSA From Inguard

1603 Bad Packet Number In ACK From Inguard

1604 Bad Control Byte From Inguard Rcv Task

1605 Illegal Inguard Transmit Task State

1606 Inguard Indefinite ACKWAIT Holdoff
1700-Level Faults: Guard Crossing Utility Subsystem

1700 Serial Write Failure To Inguard

1701 Packet Too Large For Inguard

1800-Level Faults: Normal Output Operations Subsystem

1800 DORMANT To OPERATE

1801 Bad Transition Type

A-5
5700A/5720A Series II
Operators Manual

1802 Bad Boolean Selector

1803 NRMrngStby Encountered Error

1804 DCV Called For Non-DCV Range

1805 ACV Called For Non-ACV Range

1806 Bad ACV Frequency Range

1807 Hi Res Frequency Too High

1808 ACV Amplitude Correction Failure

1809 Cannot Phase Lock To Signal

1810 Bad Phase Quadrant

1811 Current Called for Non-Current Range

1812 Ohms Called for Non-Ohms Range

1813 Cannot Phase Lock, Output Not AC

1814 Cannot Phase Shift, Output Not AC

1815 Bad Wide Band Range

1816 Freq. Too High Even For Wide Band

1817 Illegal Current Output Location

1818 Output Current Out Of Tolerance

1819 Current Compliance Voltage Exceeded

1820 2-Wire Compensation Current Exceeded

1821 NRMbstcur Passed Bad Range

1822 5220 No Longer Connected

1823 5220 Detected Fault And Shut Off

1824 5205 No Longer Connected

1825 5205 Detected Fault And Shut Off

1826 5725 No Longer Connected

1827 14 Bit DAC Scaling Found Zero Output

1900-Level Faults: Non-Volatile Subsystem

1900 Could not Write Byte To EEPROM

1901 Checksum Error Reading EEPROM

1902 EEPROM Is Full

1903 Unknown Nonvolatile Constant Selector

1904 EEPROM Partition Is Full

1905 Could not Write Byte To 5725 EEPROM

1906 Checksum Error Reading 5725 EEPROM

A-6
 Appendices
Fault Codes A
2000-Level Faults: Analog Operations Manager Subsystem

2000 Bad Command Code

2001 Bad Signal

2002 Long Term Command In Progress

2003 Guard Crossing Protocol Failed To Start

2004 Fatal Fault, Output Tripped

2005 Tripped While Calibrating or Diagnosing

2100-Level Faults: Output Display Driver Subsystem

2100 Bad Display Selector

2101 Bad Character

2102 Bad Annunciator Selector

2200-Level Faults: Remote Interface Subsystem

2200 Unknown Command

2201 Invalid Number Of Parameters

2202 Invalid Cal Constant Name
2203 Invalid Keyword
2204 Invalid Range
2205 Invalid Parameter Type
2206 Invalid Parameter Unit
2207 Invalid Parameter Value
2208 IEEE488.2 I/O DEADLOCK
2209 Spare

2210 IEEE488.2 INTERRUPTED Query

2211 Not Allowed From GPIB Interface

2212 Not Allowed From Serial Interface

2213 Remote Only

2214 Invalid Syntax

2215 IEEE488.2 UNTERMINATED Command
2216 Symbol Table Overflow

2217 Command Reserved For Service

2218 Invalid Binary Number

2219 Invalid Binary Block
2220 Invalid Character

A-7
5700A/5720A Series II
Operators Manual

2221 Invalid Decimal Number

2222 Invlaid Hexadecimal Block
2223 Invalid Hexadecimal Number
2224 Too Many Parameters

2225 Invalid Octal Number

2226 Too Many Characters

2227 Invalid String

2228 Invalid Register Address
2229 Invalid Cal Constant Name
2230 Remote Serial Port Dead

2231 IEEE488.2 Query After Indef Response

2300-Level Faults: Executive Subsystem

2300 Unknown Report Requested

2301 Unknown Report Device Requested

2302 Serial Port Timeout

2400-Level Faults: Real Time Clock Subsystem

2400 Cannot Install Interrupt Handler

2401 Unknown Interrupt Selector

2402 Bad Date & Cannot Be Set

2500-Level and 2600-Level Faults: Self Calibration Subsystem

2500 Invalid Cal Procedure Number

2501 Could not Ext Cal Gain

2502 Could not Ext Cal Ref

2503 Could not Ext Cal Neg

2504 Could not Cal Ratio

2505 Could not Cal Pos 11V or 22V DC Zero

2506 Could not Cal Neg 11V or 22V DC Zero

2507 Could not Cal Pos 11V or 22V DC Gain

2508 Could not Cal 6.5V or 13V Buf Ref

2509 Could not Cal 2.2V Zero

2510 Could not Cal 220 mV Gain S1

2511 Could not Cal 220 mV Gain S2

2512 Could not Cal 220 mV Gain S3

A-8
 Appendices
Fault Codes A
2513 Could not Cal 220 mV Gain S4

2514 Could not Cal 220V DC Offset

2515 Could not Cal 220V DC Rnet

2516 Could not Cal 220V DC Gain

2517 Could not Cal ACV Gain

2518 Flatness Cal: Main Sensor Fail?

2519 Flatness Cal: AC Cal Sensor Fail?

2520 Could not Cal Fine Tune (14 bit) DAC

2521 Could not Cal Fine Tune 15th bit Down

2522 Could not Cal Fine Tune 15th bit Up

2523 Could not Cal 2.2 mV/22 mV step 1

2524 Could not Cal 2.2 mV/22 mV step 2

2525 Could not Cal 220V AC Offset

2526 Could not Cal 220V AC Gain

2527 Could not Cal 220 mV Offset

2528 Could not Cal 1100V AC/DC Offset

2529 Could not Cal 1100V AC/DC Gain

2530 Could not Cal 220 µA DC Zero

2531 Could not Cal 2.2 mA DC Zero

2532 Could not Cal 22 mA DC Zero

2533 Could not Cal 220 mA DC Zero

2534 Could not Cal 2.2A DC Zero

2535 Could not Cal 220 µA DCI (Meas 1)

2536 Could not Cal 220 µA DCI (Meas 2)

2537 Could not Cal 2.2 mA DCI (Meas 1)

2538 Could not Cal 2.2 mA DCI (Meas 2)

2539 Could not Cal 22 mA DCI (Meas 1)

2540 Could not Cal 22 mA DCI (Meas 2)

2541 Could not Cal 220 mA DCI (Meas 1)

2542 Could not Cal 220 mA DCI (Meas 2)

2543 Could not Cal 2.2A DCI (Meas 1)

2544 Could not Cal 2.2A DCI (Meas 2)

2545 Could not Ext Cal 10K Ohm Std (Meas 1)

A-9
5700A/5720A Series II
Operators Manual

2546 Could not Ext Cal 10K Ohm Std (Meas 2)

2547 Could not Ext Cal 10K Ohm Std (Meas 3)

2548 Could not Cal 10K Ohm (Meas 1)

2549 Could not Cal 10K Ohm (Meas 2)

2550 Could not Cal 10K Ohm (Meas 3)

2551 Could not Cal 19K Ohm (Meas 1)

2552 Could not Cal 19K Ohm (Meas 2)

2553 Could not Cal 19K Ohm (Meas 3)

2554 Could not Cal 100K Ohm (Meas 1)

2555 Could not Cal 100K Ohm (Meas 2)

2556 Could not Cal 190K Ohm (Meas 1)

2557 Could not Cal 190K Ohm (Meas 2)

2558 Could not Cal 1M Ohm (Meas 1)

2559 Could not Cal 1M Ohm (Meas 2)

2560 Could not Cal 1.9M Ohm (Meas 1)

2561 Could not Cal 1.9M Ohm (Meas 2)

2562 Could not Cal 10M Ohm (Meas 1)

2563 Could not Cal 10M Ohm (Meas 2)

2564 Could not Cal 19M Ohm (Meas 1)

2565 Could not Cal 19M Ohm (Meas 2)

2566 Could not Cal 100M Ohm (Meas 1)

2567 Could not Cal 1K Ohm (Meas 1)

2568 Could not Cal 1K Ohm (Meas 2)

2569 Could not Cal 1.9K Ohm (Meas 1)

2570 Could not Cal 1.9K Ohm (Meas 2)

2571 Could not Cal 100 Ohm (Meas 1)

2572 Could not Cal 100 Ohm (Meas 2)

2573 Could not Cal 190 Ohm (Meas 1)

2574 Could not Cal 190 Ohm (Meas 2)

2575 Could not Cal Ohms Divider (Meas 1)

2576 Could not Cal Ohms Divider (Meas 2)

2577 Could not Cal 10 Ohm (Meas 1)

2578 Could not Cal 10 Ohm (Meas 2)

A-10
 Appendices
Fault Codes A
2579 Could not Cal 19 Ohm (Meas 1)

2580 Could not Cal 19 Ohm (Meas 2)

2581 Could not Ext Cal 1 Ohm (0.26V CM Meas)

2582 Could not Ext Cal 1 Ohm (Ext Meas)

2583 Could not Ext Cal 1 Ohm (0.13V CM Meas)

2584 Could not Ext Cal 1 Ohm (Int Meas)

2585 Could not Ext Cal 1.9 Ohm (0.18V CM Meas)

2586 Could not Ext Cal 1.9 Ohm (0.12V CM Meas)

2587 Could not Ext Cal 1.9 Ohm (Int Meas)

2588 Could not Cal Wideband Gain

2589 Bad Cal Step Selector

2590 A/D Appears To Have Failed

2591 User Range Gain Adjustment Is 0

2592 Stored User Range Gain Adjust Is 0

2593 220 µA AC Flatness Calibration Failed

2594 2.2 mA AC Flatness Calibration Failed

2595 22 mA AC Flatness Calibration Failed

2596 220 mA AC Flatness Calibration Failed

2597 Bad Range Number For IAC Flatness Cal

2598 No Data For DCI Calibration

2599 2.2V AC Flat Early Fail

2600 2.2V AC Flat Bad AC Cal Sensor?

2601 2.2V AC Flat Diverge

2602 22V AC Flat Early Fail

2603 22V AC Flat Bad AC Cal Sensor?

2604 22V AC Flat Diverge

2605 220V AC Flat Early Fail

2606 220V AC Flat Bad AC Cal Sensor?

2607 220V AC Flat Diverge

2608 1100V AC Flat Early Fail

2609 1100V AC Flat Bad AC Cal Sensor?

2610 1100V AC Flat Diverge

2611 220 µA IAC Flat Early Fail

A-11
5700A/5720A Series II
Operators Manual

2612 220 µA IAC Flat Bad AC Cal Sensor?

2613 220 µA IAC Flat Diverge

2614 2.2 mA IAC Flat Early Fail

2615 2.2 mA IAC Flat Bad AC Cal Sensor?

2616 2.2 mA IAC Flat Diverge

2617 22 mA IAC Flat Early Fail

2618 22 mA IAC Flat Bad AC Cal Sensor?

2619 22 mA IAC Flat Diverge

2620 220 mA IAC Flat Early Fail

2621 220 mA IAC Flat Bad AC Cal Sensor?

2622 220 mA IAC Flat Diverge

2623 2.2A IAC Flat Early Fail

2624 2.2A IAC Flat Bad AC Cal Sensor?

2625 2.2A IAC Flat Diverge

2626 Illegal Ohms Null Function State

2627 Unknown Source Divider Identifier

2628 No Data For Ohms Calibration

2629 Illegal Ohms Calibration Config

2630 Illegal Number Of Ohms Cal Points
2631 5725 Shunt 0A Meas Fail

2632 5725 Shunt 1.3A Meas Fail

2633 5725 Current Amplifier Zero Meas Fail

2634 5725 Current Amplifier Gain Meas Fail

2635 Wideband Thermal Sensor Cal Diverge

2636 Wideband Sensor Amp Offset Too Big

2637 Wideband Ext Cal Point Bad Const ID

2638 5725 ACV Sense Amp Offset Diverge

2639 5725 ACV Sense Amp Gain Diverge

2640 5725 ACV Flatness Ref Freq Failure

2641 5725 ACV Flatness Cal Freq Failure

2642 External V Reference Value Out Of Range

2643 5725 Diagnostic DAC Cal Didn't Converge

2644 Spare

A-12
 Appendices
Fault Codes A
2645 Spare

2646 DAC Appears To Not Meet Linearity Spec

2647 ACV Buffer Offset Too Large

2648 5725 ACV Flat Test Cap Too Large

2649 5725 ACV Flat Test Cap Too Large

2650 Could not Cal 100M Ohm (Meas 2)

2700-Level Faults: Self Diagnostics Subsystem (Current)

2700 A7: 8255 Control Word

2701 A7: 8255 Port A Fault

2702 A7: 8255 Port B Fault

2703 A7: 8255 Port C Fault

2705 A7: Oven Regulation Fault

2706 A7: Current Compliance Fault

2707 A7: Hardware Initialization Fault

2709 A7: Current Magnitude Fault

2710 A7: Dummy Load Current Fault

2711 Assembly A7 Is Not Responding

2712 A7: Hi-Res Clock Fault

2713 A7: Hi-Res Loop Fault In 100HZ Range

2714 A7: Hi-Res Loop Fault In 1KHZ Range

2715 A7: Hi-Res Loop Fault In 10KHZ Range

2716 A7: Hi-Res Loop Fault In 100KHZ Range

2717 A7: Hi-Res Loop Fault In 1MHZ Range

2718 Fault In Setting Up AC For Diagnostics

2719 A7: 8255 Was Reset

2800-Level Faults: Self Diagnostics Subsystem (DAC)

2800 A11: 8255 Control Word

2801 A11: 8255 Port A Wires

2802 A11: 8255 Port B Data Bus

2803 A11: 82C54 Status Words

2804 A11: DAC Heaters Not Regulated

2805 5700 Not Warmed Up

2806 A11: ADC Amp Output Noise

A-13
5700A/5720A Series II
Operators Manual

2807 A11: ADC Amp Output Offset

2808 A11: ADC Amp Gain Error

2809 A11: DAC Monitoring Fault

2810 A11: +11V DC Range Fault

2811 A11: -11V DC Range Fault

2812 A11: +22V DC Range Fault

2813 A11: -22V DC Range Fault

2814 A11: 6.5V Buffered Reference Fault

2815 A11: 6.5V Reference Fault

2816 A11: 13V Buffered Reference Fault

2817 A11: 13V Reference Fault

2818 Assembly A11 Missing

2819 A11: 8255 Was Reset

2820 A11: Fine Adjust Channel Fault

2821 A8/A11: +11/22V DC Zero Estimate Fault

2822 A8/A11: -11/22V DC Zero Estimate Fault

2823 A11: Could not Estimate +11V Or 22V Gain

2824 A11: Could not Estimate 6.5V Or 13V Ref

2825 A11: Could not Estimate 6.5V Or 13V Buf Ref

2826 A11: A/D Overload Fault

3100-Level Faults: Self Diagnostics Subsystem (High Voltage)

3100 A14: 8255 Control Word

3101 A14: 8255 Port A Fault

3102 A14: 8255 Port B Fault

3103 A14: 8255 Port C Fault

3104 A15: HV Oven Regulation Fault

3105 A15: HV I Oven Regulation Fault

3106 A15: DC HV Amp Noise Fault

3107 A15: DC HV Amp Offset Fault

3108 A15: DC HV Amp Gain Fault

3109 A15: HV +DC Preamplifier Fault

3110 A15: HV +DC Series Pass & Current Fault

3111 A15: HV +DC High Voltage Output Fault

A-14
 Appendices
Fault Codes A
3112 A15: HV +DC Ref/Error Amplitude Fault

3113 A15: HV -DC Preamplifier Fault

3114 A15: HV -DC Series Pass & Current Fault

3115 A15: HV -DC High Voltage output Fault

3116 A15: HV -DC Reference/Error Amp Fault

3117 A14/A15: HV +DC Current Error Amp Fault

3118 A14/A15: HV -DC Current Error Amp Fault

3119 A14/A15: HV +DC Current Abs. Value

3120 A14/A15: HV -DC Current Abs. Value

3122 A14/A15: HV AC 1KHZ, Preamp Fault (lo)

3123 A14/A15: HV AC 1KHZ, Preamp Fault (mid)

3124 A14/A15: HV AC 1KHZ, Preamp Fault (hi)

3125 A14/A15: HV AC 100HZ, Preamp Fault (lo)

3126 A14/A15: HV AC 100HZ, Preamp Fault

3127 A14/A15: HV AC 100HZ, Preamp Fault (hi)

3128 A14/A15: HV AC 1KHZ, Output Fault (lo)

3129 A14/A15: HV AC 1KHZ, Output Fault (mid)

3130 A14/A15: HV AC 1KHZ, Output Fault (hi)

3131 A14/A15: HV AC 100HZ, Output Fault (lo)

3132 A14/A15: HV AC 100HZ, Output Fault (mid)

3133 A14/A15: HV AC 100HZ, Output Fault (hi)

3135 Assembly A14 Not Responding

3136 A14: 8255 Was Reset

3137 A14/A15/A16: 2.2A AC Range Mag. Fault

3138 A14/A15/A16: 2.2A AC Range Compliance

3139 A14/A15/A16: 2.2A AC Range Amplitude

3140 A14/A15/A16: 2.2A AC Range Abs. Value

3141 A14/A15/A16: 2.2A DC Range Dummy Load

3142 A14/A15/A16: 2.2A DC Range Compliance

3143 A14/A15/A16: 2.2A DC Range Magnitude

A-15
5700A/5720A Series II
Operators Manual

3200-Level Faults: Self Diagnostics Subsystem (misc)

3200 Assemblies Missing

3201 Unknown Diagnostic Test

3202 5725 ACV Sense Amp Fault

3203 5725 ACV Standby 5725 Fault

3204 5725 ACV Operate 5725 Fault

3205 5725 ACV Cal Sensor Test Died

3206 5725 ACV Cal Sensor Fault

3207 5725 ACV VLF (100 Hz) Won't Converge

3208 5725 ACV LF (1 kHz) Won't Converge

3209 5725 ACV MF (10 kHz) Won't Converge

3210 5725 ACV HF (100 kHz) Won't Converge

3211 5725 Current Path To Shunt Open

3212 5725 Shunt Sense Open

3213 5725 Shunt Measurement Out Of Tolerance

3214 5725 Current Amplifier Offset Too Large

3215 5725 Current Drive Path Open

3216 5725 Current Error Amplifier Failure

3217 5725 Amplifer Not Connected

3300-Level Faults: Self Diagnostics Subsystem (Ohms)

3300 A9: 8255 Control Word

3301 A9: 8255 Port A Fault

3302 A9: 8255 Port B Fault

3303 A9: 8255 Port C Fault

3304 A9: 10V Source Fault

3305 A9: 5V Source Fault

3306 A9: 2V Source Fault

3308 A9: Diff Amp Offset Fault

3309 A9: Diff Amp Gain Fault

3310 A9: Diff Amp Noise Fault

3311 A9/A10: Ohms 10:1 Divider Fault

3312 A9/A10: Ohms 1:1 Divider Fault

A-16
 Appendices
Fault Codes A
3313 A9/A10: 10K Ohm Diagnostic Fault

3314 A9/A10: 19K Ohm Cal Diag Fault

3315 A9/A10: 10 Ohm Cal Diag Fault

3316 A9/A10: 19 Ohm Cal Diag Fault

3317 A9/A10: 100K Ohm Ratio Fault

3318 A9/A10: 190K Ohm Ratio Fault

3319 A9/A10: 1M Ohm Ratio Fault

3320 A9/A10: 1.9M Ohm Ratio Fault

3321 A9/A10: 10M Ohm Ratio Fault

3322 A9/A10: 19M Ohm Ratio Fault 1

3323 A9/A10: 19M Ohm Ratio Fault 2

3324 A9/A10: 100M Ohm Ratio Fault

3325 A9/A10: 10K Ohm Check Fault

3326 A9/A10: 19K Ohm Check Fault

3327 A9/A10: 1K Ohm Check Fault

3328 A9/A10: 1.9K Ohm Check Fault

3329 A9/A10: 100 Ohm Check Fault

3330 A9/A10: 190 Ohm Check Fault

3331 A9/A10: 10 Ohm Check Fault

3332 A9/A10: 19 Ohm Check Fault

3333 A9/A10: 1 Ohm Check Fault

3334 A9/A10: 1.9 Ohm Check Fault

3335 A9/A10: Ohms Short Check Fault

3336 A9/A10: 2 Wire Compensation Fault

3337 A9/A10: Ohms Correction Factor Fault

3338 Assembly A9 Not Responding

3339 A9: 8255 Was Reset

3340 A9/A10: 100 Ohm Cal Diag Fault

3341 A9/A10: 190 Ohm Cal Diag Fault

A-17
5700A/5720A Series II
Operators Manual

3400-Level Faults: Self Diagnostics Subsystem (Oscillator)

3400 A12: 8255 Control Word

3401 A12: 8255 Port A

3402 A12: 8255 Port B

3403 A12: 8255 Port C

3404 A13: 8255 Control Word

3405 A13: 8255 Port A

3406 A13: 8255 Port B

3407 A13: 8255 Port C

3408 A13: Fixed Ampl. Osc Fault

3409 A13: Phase Lock Loop Fault

3410 A12/A13: 22V Amp Bias Adj Error

3411 A12/A13: 22V Amp Nonfunctional

3412 A12 To A13 Interface Fault

3413 A12/A13: 14 bit DAC Nonfunctional

3414 A12/A13: Nonlinear Control Loop 2Vrng

3415 A12/A13: nonlinear Control Loop 20Vrng

3416 A12/A13: DAC 15th Bit Fault

3417 A12: DC Sensor Buffer Fault

3418 A12: Sensor Loop/Sq. Root Amp Fault

3419 A12: AC Sensor Buff (2V Range)

3420 A12: AC Sensor Buff (20V Range)

3421 A12: AC Cal Sensor (2V Range)

3422 A12: AC Cal Sensor (20V Range)

3423 Assembly A12 Missing

3424 Assembly A13 Missing

3425 Assembly A12 Or A13 Not Responding

3426 A12: 8255 Was Reset

3427 A13: 8255 Was Reset

A-18
 Appendices
Fault Codes A
3500-Level Faults: Self Diagnostics Subsystem (Power Amp)

3500 A16: 8255 Control Word

3501 A16: 8255 Port A

3502 A16: 8255 Port B

3503 A16: 8255 Port C

3507 A16: PA Supplies Are Off

3508 A16/A14: 220V AC Range Output Fault

3509 A16: Amplifier Loop Not Regulated

3510 A16: 220V Amp Fault

3511 A16: Incorrect PA Input

3520 A16: PA Oven Regulation Fault

3521 Assembly A16 Is Not Responding

3524 A16: Power Amp Is Too Hot

3525 220V DC Initialization Fault

3526 220V AC Initialization Fault

3527 A16: Power Amp DC Cal Network Zero Fault

3528 A16: Power Amp DC Cal Network Gain Fault

3529 A16: Pwr Amp 220V Range Attenuator Fault

3530 A16: 8255 Was Reset

3600-Level Faults: Self Diagnostics Subsystem (Power Supplies)

3600 +17S Supply Fault

3601 -17S Supply Fault

3602 +15S Supply Fault

3603 -15S Supply Fault

3604 +42S Supply Fault

3605 -42S Supply Fault

3606 LH COM Ground Fault

3607 -5LH Supply Fault

3608 5RLH Supply Fault

3609 8RLH Supply Fault

3610 +PASupply Fault

3611 -PASupply Fault

3612 +15 OSC Supply Fault

A-19
5700A/5720A Series II
Operators Manual

3613 -15 OSC Supply Fault

3614 OSC COM Ground Fault

3615 S COM Ground Fault

3700-Level Faults: Self Diagnostics Subsystem (Rear I/O)

3700 A21: 8255 Control Word

3701 A21: 8255 Port A Fault

3702 A21: 8255 Port B Fault

3703 A21: 8255 Port C Fault

3704 Assembly A21 Not Responding

3705 A21: Rear Panel Data Bus Fault

3708 A21: 8255 Was Reset

3800-Level Faults: Self Diagnostics Subsystem (Switch Matrix)

3800 A8: 8255 Control Word

3801 A8: 8255 Port A Fault

3802 A8: 8255 Port B Fault

3803 A8: 8255 Port C Fault

3804 A8: Zero Amp Lo Noise Fault

3805 A8: Zero Amp Lo Offset

3806 A8: Zero Amp Lo Gain Fault

3807 A8: Zero Amp Hi Noise Fault

3808 A8: Zero Amp Hi Offset

3809 A8: Zero Amp Hi Gain Fault

3810 A8: 2.2V Amp Noise Fault

3811 A8: Zero Amp Offset

3812 A8: 2.2V Gain Fault

3813 A8: 220mV Offset Fault

3814 A8: 220mV Divider Fault

3815 A8: 22mV Divider Fault

3818 A8: Out Lo To Sense Lo Continuity Fault

3819 A8: Relay Fault

3824 A8: Oven Regulation Fault

3825 Assembly A8 Not Responding

A-20
 Appendices
Fault Codes A
3826 A8: 8255 Was Reset

3827 Assembly A8 Too Hot

3900-Level Faults: Self Diagnostics Subsystem (Wideband)

3900 A5: 8255 Control Word

3901 A5: 8255 Port A Fault

3902 A5: 8255 Port B Fault

3903 A5: 8255 Port C Fault

3904 Optional Assemblies A5/A6 Are Missing

3905 A6: Phase Lock Loop Fault

3906 A6: Phase Lock Loop Fault At 30Mhz

3907 A5: RMS Sensor Fault

3908 A5: RMS Sensor Fault At 30Mhz

3909 A5: RMS Sensor Fault At 6.5V DC in

3910 A5/A6: Ampl. Control Fault

3911 A5/A6: Ampl. Control Fault At 30Mhz

3912 A5/A6: Output Offset Fault

3913 A5/A6: Output Offset Fault At 30Mhz

3914 A5: 0DB Output Attenuation Fault

3915 A5: 10DB Output Attenuation Fault

3916 A5: 20DB Output Attenuation Fault

3917 A5: 30DB Output Attenuation Fault

3918 A5: 40DB Output Attenuation Fault

3922 A5/A6: Wideband Initialization Fault

3923 A5: 8255 Was Reset

4000-Level Faults: Analog Sequencing Subsystem

4000 Bad Sequence ID

4001 Over Nested Subsequences

4002 Bad Sequence Command Code

4003 Bad Reply Size From Inguard

4004 Reply From Inguard Too Small

4005 False MSG Semaphore from Inguard

4006 Inguard CPU POP

A-21
5700A/5720A Series II
Operators Manual

4007 Inguard CPU Reset

4008 Inguard CPU A/D Timeout
4009 Inguard CPU Timed Out On Main CPU
4010 Inguard CPU Detected A Command Error
4011 Bad Y5000 Get/Set Selector

4012 Sequencer Timed Out Waiting For Inguard

4013 Illegal Analog State Command For 5725

4014 Sequencer Timed Out Waiting for 5725

4015 Could not Queue Command To 5725 BX

4016 Reply From 5725 Was Garbled

4100-Level Faults: Serial Interface Driver Subsystem

4100 Bad Virtual channel

4101 Framing

4102 Input Queue Overflow

4103 Overrun

4104 Parity

4105 Uart Failed Self Test

4106 Serial Port 0

4107 Serial Port 1

4108 Guard Crossing UART

4109 Serial Port 3

4110 Remote Interface UART

4111 Boost Crossing UART

4200-Level Faults: Instrument State Manager Subsystem

4200 Bad Boolean Value Selector

4201 Meaningless Target State Value

4202 Meaningless Actual State Value

4203 Mystery Target/Actual State Difference

A-22
 Appendices
Fault Codes A
4300-Level Faults: Self Test Subsystem

4301 ROM Checksum

4302 RAM

4303 Real Time Clock

4304 Keyboard

4305 Output Display

4306 Control Display

4307 IEEE488
4308 Rear Panel DUART

4309 Guard Crossing DUART

4310 Interrupt Hardware

4311 Inguard CPU ROM Fault
4312 Inguard CPU RAM Fault
4313 Front Panel Refresh Fault

4400-Level Faults: General Purpose Utility Subsystem

4400 Invalid Command

4500-Level Faults: Analog Value Finder Subsystem

4500 VFdcDac Value Out Of DAC Range

4501 Bad Range Selector

4502 Non-Vfinder Range

4503 Bad DAC ICALL

4504 User Range Adjust of 0 (I used 1)

4505 Divide By 0 In (VF)correct

4600-Level Faults: Watch Dog Monitoring Subsystem

4600 Watchdog Timed Out

4700-Level Faults: Operating Kernel Subsystem

4700 Kstart Returned

4701 Task Termination

4702 No Signal Handler

4703 Ksuspend( ) When Not RUNNING

4704 Ksleep( ) When Not RUNNING

4705 Kevwait( ) When Not RUNNING

A-23
5700A/5720A Series II
Operators Manual

A-24
 Appendix B
ASCII and IEEE Bus Codes

B-1
5700A/5720A Series II
Operators Manual

B-2
 Appendices
ASCII and IEEE Bus Codes B
ASCII BINARY DEV. MESSAGE ASCII BINARY DEV. MESSAGE
DECIMAL OCTAL HEX DECIMAL OCTAL HEX
CHAR. 7654 3210 NO. ATN=TRUE CHAR. 7654 3210 NO. ATN=TRUE
NUL 0 000 00 0000 0 0 00 @ 64 100 40 0 100 00 00 0 MTA
SQH 1 001 01 0000 0 0 01 A A 65 101 41 0 100 00 01 1 MTA
GTL D
STX 2 002 02 0000 0 0 10 B 66 102 42 0 100 00 10 2 MTA
ETX 3 003 03 0000 0 0 11 D C 67 103 43 0 100 00 11 3 MTA
R
EOT 4 004 04 0000 0 1 00 SDC E D 68 104 44 0 100 01 00 4 MTA
ENQ 5 005 05 0000 0 1 01 PPC S E 69 105 45 0 100 01 01 5 MTA
ACH 6 006 06 0000 0 1 10 S F 70 106 46 0 100 01 10 6 MTA
BELL 7 007 07 0000 0 1 11 E G 71 107 47 0 100 01 11 7 MTA
D
BS 8 010 08 0000 1 0 00 GET H 72 110 48 0 100 10 00 8 MTA
HT 9 011 09 0000 1 0 01 TCT C I 73 111 49 0 100 10 01 9 MTA T
LF 10 012 0A 0000 1 0 10 O J 74 112 4A 0 100 10 10 10 MTA A
VT 11 013 0B 0000 1 0 11 M K 75 113 4B 0 100 10 11 11 MTA L
M K
FF 12 014 0C 0000 1 1 00 A L 76 114 4C 0 100 11 00 12 MTA
CR 13 015 0D 0000 1 1 01 N M 77 115 4D 0 100 11 01 13 MTA A
SO 14 016 0E 0000 1 1 10 D N 78 116 4E 0 100 11 10 14 MTA D
SI 15 017 0F 0000 1 1 11 S O 79 117 4F 0 100 11 11 15 MTA D
R
DLE 16 020 10 0001 0 0 00 P 80 120 50 0 101 00 00 16 MTA E
DC1 17 021 11 0001 0 0 01 LLO U Q 81 121 51 0 101 00 01 17 MTA
N S
DC2 18 022 12 0001 0 0 10 R 82 122 52 0 101 00 10 18 MTA S
DC3 19 023 13 0001 0 0 11 I S 83 123 53 0 101 00 11 19 MTA
V E
E S
DC4 20 024 14 0001 0 1 00 DCL T 84 124 54 0 101 01 00 20 MTA
NAK 21 025 15 0001 0 1 01 PPU R U 85 125 55 0 101 01 01 21 MTA
SYN 22 026 16 0001 0 1 10 S V 86 126 56 0 101 01 10 22 MTA
ETB 23 027 17 0001 0 1 11 A W 87 127 57 0 101 01 11 23 MTA
L
CAN 24 030 18 0001 1 0 00 SPE X 88 130 58 0 101 10 00 24 MTA
EM 25 031 19 0001 1 0 01 SPD C Y 89 131 59 0 101 10 01 25 MTA
SUB 26 032 1A 0001 1 0 10 O Z 90 132 5A 0 101 10 10 26 MTA
ESC 27 033 1B 0001 1 0 11 M [ 91 133 5B 0 101 10 11 27 MTA
M
FS 28 034 1C 0001 1 1 00 A \ 92 134 5C 0 101 11 00 28 MTA
GS 29 035 1D 0001 1 1 01 N ] 93 135 5D 0 101 11 01 29 MTA
RS 30 036 1E 0001 1 1 10 D ^ 94 136 5E 0 101 11 10 30 MTA
US 31 037 1F 0001 1 1 11 S _ 95 137 5F 0 101 11 11 UNT

SPACE 32 040 20 001 0 0 0 00 0 MLA , 96 140 60 0 11 1 00 00 0 MSA

! 33 041 21 001 0 0 0 01 1 MLA a 97 141 61 0 11 1 00 01 1 MSA
34 042 22 001 0 0 0 10 2 MLA b 98 142 62 0 11 1 00 10 2 MSA
"# 35 043 23 001 0 0 0 11 3 MLA c 99 143 63 0 11 1 00 11 3 MSA

$ 36 044 24 001 0 0 1 00 4 MLA d 100 144 64 0 11 1 01 00 4 MSA

% 37 045 25 001 0 0 1 01 5 MLA e 101 145 65 0 11 1 01 01 5 MSA
& 38 046 26 001 0 0 1 10 6 MLA f 102 146 66 0 11 1 01 10 6 MSA
39 047 27 001 0 0 1 11 7 MLA g 103 147 67 0 11 1 01 11 7 MSA
'
( 40 050 28 001 0 1 0 00 8 MLA h 104 150 68 0 11 1 10 00 8 MSA
) 41 051 29 001 0 1 0 01 9 MLA L i 105 151 69 0 11 1 10 01 9 MSA S
42 052 2A 001 0 1 0 10 10 MLA I j 106 152 6A 0 11 1 10 10 10 MSA E
*+ 43 053 2B 001 0 1 0 11 11 MLA S k 107 153 6B 0 11 1 10 11 11 MSA C
T O
, 44 054 2C 001 0 1 1 00 12 MLA E l 108 154 6C 0 11 1 11 00 12 MSA N
_ 45 055 2D 001 0 1 1 01 13 MLA N m 109 155 6D 0 11 1 11 01 13 MSA D
. 46 056 2E 001 0 1 1 10 14
15
MLA
MLA A
n 110 156 6E 0 11 1 11 10 14 MSA A
R
/ 47 057 2F 001 0 1 1 11 o 111 157 6F 0 11 1 11 11 15 MSA
D Y
0 48 060 30 0 0 11 0 0 00 16 MLA D p 112 160 70 0 11 1 00 00 16 MSA
1 49 061 31 0 0 11 0 0 01 17 MLA R q 113 161 71 0 11 1 00 01 17 MSA A
2 50 062 32 0 0 11 0 0 10 18 MLA E r 114 162 72 0 11 1 00 10 18 MSA D
3 51 063 33 0 0 11 0 0 11 19 MLA S s 115 163 73 0 11 1 00 11 19 MSA D
S R
4 52 064 34 0 0 11 0 1 00 20 MLA E t 116 164 74 0 11 1 01 00 20 MSA E
5 53 065 35 0 0 11 0 1 01 21 MLA S u 117 165 75 0 11 1 01 01 21 MSA S
6 54 066 36 0 0 11 0 1 10 22 MLA v 118 166 76 0 11 1 01 10 22 MSA S
7 55 067 37 0 0 11 0 1 11 23 MLA w 119 167 77 0 11 1 01 11 23 MSA E
S
8 56 070 38 0 0 11 1 0 00 24 MLA x 120 170 78 0 11 1 10 00 24 MSA
9 57 071 39 0 0 11 1 0 01 25 MLA y 121 171 79 0 11 1 10 01 25 MSA
: 58 072 3A 0 0 11 1 0 10 26 MLA z 122 172 7A 0 11 1 10 10 26 MSA
; 59 073 3B 0 0 11 1 0 11 27 MLA { 123 173 7B 0 11 1 10 11 27 MSA

< 60 074 3C 0 0 11 1 1 00 28 MLA | 124 174 7C 0 11 1 11 00 28 MSA

= 61 075 3D 0 0 11 1 1 01 29 MLA } 125 175 7D 0 11 1 11 01 29 MSA
> 62 076 3E 0 0 11 1 1 10 30 MLA ~ 126 176 7E 0 11 1 11 10 30 MSA
? 63 077 3F 0 0 11 1 1 11 UNL 127 177 7F 0 11 1 11 11 UNS

B-3
5700A/5720A Series II
Operators Manual

B-4
 Appendix C
Symbolic Names of Calibration Constants

Name Description

D3P 11V range, positive zero

D3M 11V range, negative zero

D4P 22V range, positive zero

D4M 22V range, negative zero

KV6 6.5V reference true value

KV13 13V reference true value

BV6 6.5V buffered reference value

BV13 13V buffered reference value

KDAC DAC channel ratio

KADC A/D scale constant (gain of one range)

DACLIN DAC linearity

APDC 220V dc cal attenuator constant

KZAL Switch Matrix zero amp gain (low setting)

ZA220 220 mV attenuator - zero amp combo offset

ZA2V 2V attenuator - zero amp combo offset

D1P 220 mV range offset

D1G 220 mV range gain

D2P 2.2V range offset

D2G 2.2V range gain

D3G 11V range positive gain

D3N 11V range negative gain

C-1
5700A/5720A Series II
Operators Manual

D4G 22V range positive gain

Name Description

D4N 22V range negative gain

D5P 220V range zero offset

D5G 220V range gain

D6P 1100V range zero offset

D6G 1100V range gain

KRMS AC V sense return buffer offset

OSUP Upward 15-bit dac hysteresis offset

OSDN Downward 15-bit dac hysteresis offset

A1G 2.2 mV range gain

A1S 2.2 mV range standing wave ratio correction

A2G 22 mV range gain

A2S 22 mV range standing wave ratio correction

A3G 220 mV range gain

A3S 220 mV range standing wave ratio correction

A4G 2.2V range gain

A4S 2.2V range standing wave ratio correction

A4D 2.2V range 8-bit dac constant

A4F1 2.2V range, flatness correction, 20 kHz

A4F2 Same, 50 kHz

A4F3 Same, 100 kHz

A4F4 Same, 119.99 kHz

A4F5 Same, 120 kHz

A4F6 Same, 200 kHz

A4F7 Same, 300 kHz

A4F8 Same, 400 kHz

A4F9 Same, 500 kHz

A4FA Same, 600 kHz

A4FB Same, 700 kHz

A4FC Same, 800 kHz

A4FD Same, 900 kHz

A4FE Same, 1 MHz

A4FF Same, 1.1 MHz

C-2
 Appendices
Symbolic Names of Calibration Constants C
A4FG Same, 1.1999 MHz

A4FH 10 Hz linearity correction

Name Description

A4FI 1000V dc gain adjustment

A4C1 2.2V range, first convergence correction, 10 Hz

A4C2 Same, 1 kHz

A4C3 Same, 5 kHz

A4C4 Same, 20 kHz

A4C5 Same, 50 kHz

A4C6 Same, 70 kHz

A4C7 Same, 100 kHz

A4C8 Same, 119.99 kHz

A4C9 2.2V range, first convergence correction, 200 kHz

A4CA Same, 300 kHz

A4CB Same, 400 kHz

A4CC Same, 500 kHz

A4CD Same, 600 kHz

A4CE Same, 700 kHz

A4CF Same, 800 kHz

A4CG Same, 900 kHz

A4CH Same, 1 MHz

A4CI Same, 1.1 MHz

A4CJ Same, 1.1999 MHz

A4V1 2.2V range, first 1/V convergence correction, 10 Hz

A4V2 Same, 1 kHz

A4V3 Same, 5 kHz

A4V4 Same, 20 kHz

A4V5 Same, 50 kHz

A4V6 Same, 70 kHz

A4V7 Same, 100 kHz

A4V8 Same, 119.99 kHz

A4V9 Same, 200 kHz

A4VA Same, 300 kHz

A4VB Same, 400 kHz

C-3
5700A/5720A Series II
Operators Manual

A4VC Same, 500 kHz

A4VD Same, 600 kHz

A4VE Same, 700 kHz

Name Description

A4VF Same, 800 kHz

A4VG Same, 900 kHz

A4VH Same, 1 MHz

A4VI Same, 1.1 MHz

A4VJ Same, 1.1999 MHz

A5G 22V range gain

A5S 22V range standing wave ratio correction

A5D 22V range 8-bit dac constant

A5F1 22V range, first flatness correction, 20 kHz

A5F2 Same, 50 kHz

A5F3 Same, 100 kHz

A5F4 Same, 119.99 kHz

A5F5 Same, 120 kHz

A5F6 Same, 200 kHz

A5F7 Same, 300 kHz

A5F8 Same, 400 kHz

A5F9 Same, 500 kHz

A5FA Same, 600 kHz

A5FB Same, 700 kHz

A5FC Same, 800 kHz

A5FD Same, 900 kHz

A5FE Same, 1 MHz

A5FF Same, 1.1 MHz

A5FG Same, 1.1999 MHz

A5FH 220V ac gain adjustments

A5FI 22 mV ac gain adjustment

A5C1 22V range, first convergence correction

A5C2 Same, 1 kHz

A5C3 Same, 5 kHz

A5C4 Same, 20 kHz

C-4
 Appendices
Symbolic Names of Calibration Constants C
A5C5 Same, 50 kHz

A5C6 Same, 70 kHz

A5C7 Same, 100 kHz

A5C8 Same, 119.99 kHz

Name Description

A5C9 Same, 200 kHz

A5CA Same, 300 kHz

A5CB Same, 400 kHz

A5CC Same, 500 kHz

A5CD Same, 600 kHz

A5CE Same, 700 kHz

A5CF Same, 800 kHz

A5CG 22V range, first flatness correction, 900 kHz

A5CH Same, 1 MHz

A5CI Same, 1.1 MHz

A5CJ Same, 1.1999 MHz

A5V1 22V range, first 1/V convergence correction

A5V2 Same, 1 kHz

A5V3 Same, 5 kHz

A5V4 Same, 20 kHz

A5V5 Same, 50 kHz

A5V6 Same, 70 kHz

A5V7 Same, 100 kHz

A5V8 Same, 119.99 kHz

A5V9 Same, 200 kHz

A5VA Same, 300 kHz

A5VB Same, 400 kHz

A5VC Same, 500 kHz

A5VD Same, 600 kHz

A5VE Same, 700 kHz

A5VF Same, 800 kHz

A5VG Same, 900 kHz

A5VH Same, 1 MHz

A5VI Same, 1.1 MHz

C-5
5700A/5720A Series II
Operators Manual

A5VJ Same, 1.1999 MHz

A6G 220V range basic gain

A6S 220V range standing wave ratio correction

A6D1 220V range, first freq. dependent 8-bit dac constant, 10 kHz

A6D2 Same, 50 kHz

Name Description

A6D3 Same, 120 kHz

A6D4 Same, 300 kHz

A6D5 Same, 500 kHz

A6D6 Same, 600 kHz

A6D7 Same, 700 kHz

A6D8 Same, 800 kHz

A6D9 220V range, first freq. dependent 8-bit dac constant, 900 kHz

A6DA Same, 1 MHz

A6F1 220V range, first flatness correction, 5 kHz

A6F2 Same, 10 kHz

A6F3 Same, 20 kHz

A6F4 Same, 50 kHz

A6F5 Same, 100 kHz

A6F6 Same, 119.99 kHz

A6F7 Same, 120 kHz

A6F8 Same, 200 kHz

A6F9 Same, 300 kHz

A6FA Same, 400 kHz

A6FB Same, 500 kHz

A6FC Same, 600 kHz

A6FD Same, 700 kHz

A6FE Same, 800 kHz

A6FF Same, 900 kHz

A6FG Same, 1 MHz

A6FH 220V ac flatness cutoff frequency

A6FI 220 mV dc gain adjustment

A6FJ Spare

A6FK Spare

C-6
 Appendices
Symbolic Names of Calibration Constants C
A6FL Spare

A7G 1100V range gain

A7F1 1100V range, first flatness correction, 300 Hz

A7F2 Same, 500 Hz

A7F3 Same, 700 Hz

A7F4 Same, 1 kHz

Name Description

A7F5 Spare

A7F6 Spare

I1Z 220 µA range zero

I1G 220 µA range gain

I2Z 2.2 mA range zero

I2G 2.2 mA range gain

I3Z 22 mA range zero

I3G 22 mA range gain

I4Z 220 mA range zero

I4G 220 mA range gain

I5Z 2.2A range zero

I5G 2.2A range gain

IGME Measurement at bottom of resistor during gain cal

I1F1 220 µA ac, 500 Hz

I1F2 Same, 1 kHz

I1F3 Same, 2 kHz

I1F4 Same, 5 kHz

I1F5 Same, 7 kHz

I1F6 Same, 10 kHz

I1F7 Spare

I1F8 Spare

I2F1 2.2 mA ac, 500 Hz

I2F2 Same, 1 kHz

I2F3 Same, 2 kHz

I2F4 Same, 5 kHz

I2F5 Same, 7 kHz

I2F6 Same, 10 kHz

C-7
5700A/5720A Series II
Operators Manual

I2F7 Spare

I2F8 220 µA flatness correction

I3F1 22 mA ac, 500 Hz

I3F2 Same, 1 kHz

I3F3 Same, 2 kHz

I3F4 Same, 5 kHz

I3F5 Same, 7 kHz

Name Description

I3F6 Same, 10 kHz

I3F7 Spare

I3F8 Spare

I4F1 220 mA ac, 500 Hz

I4F2 220 mA ac, 1 kHz

I4F3 Same, 2 kHz

I4F4 Same, 5 kHz

I4F5 Same, 7 kHz

I4F6 Same, 10 kHz

I4F7 Spare

I4F8 Spare

I5F1 2.2A ac, 500 Hz

I5F2 Same, 1 kHz

I5F3 Same, 2 kHz

I5F4 Same, 5 kHz

I5F5 Same, 7 kHz

I5F6 Same, 10 kHz

I5F7 Spare

I5F8 2.2A dc gain adjustment

IMZ Current monitor circuit zero

IMAG Current monitor circuit ac gain

IMDG Current monitor circuit dc gain

RS10 10 kΩ standard true value (on Ohms Cal assembly)

R0 0Ω true value

R1 1Ω true value

R1_9 1.9Ω true value

C-8
 Appendices
Symbolic Names of Calibration Constants C
R10 10Ω true value

R19 19Ω true value

R100 100Ω true value

R190 190Ω true value

R1K 1 kΩ true value

R1_9K 1.9 kΩ true value

R10K 10 kΩ true value

R19K 19 kΩ true value

Name Description

R100K 100 kΩ true value

R190K 190 kΩ true value

R1M 1 MΩ true value

R1_9M 1.9 MΩ true value

R10M 10 MΩ true value

R19M 19 MΩ true value

R100M 100 MΩ true value

RDIV10 Divider ratio Ohms Cal assembly to get 10V from 13V ref

RDIV5 Divider ratio Ohms Cal assembly to get 5V from 13V ref

RDIV2 Divider ratio Ohms Cal assembly to get 2V from 13V ref

RDIV_1 10k/90k divider on Ohms Cal assembly

ZERO_TEMP Recorded temperature for zero calibration

ALL_TEMP Recorded temperature main output calibration

G5205D 5205A gain, dc

G5205A 5205A gain, ac

G5220 5220A gain

W1G 1.1 mV wideband gain

W2G 3.3 mV wideband gain

W3G 11 mV wideband gain

W4G 33 mV wideband gain

W5G 110 mV wideband gain

W6G 330 mV wideband gain

W7G 1.1V wideband gain

W8G 3.5V wideband gain

WL1 Wideband thermal sensor correction constant #1

C-9
5700A/5720A Series II
Operators Manual

WL2 Wideband thermal sensor correction constant #2

WL3 Wideband thermal sensor buffer offset

WBAND_TEMP Recorded temperature for wideband gains calibration

WF1 No attenuators wideband flatness correction, 1 kHz

WF2 Same, 12 kHz

WF3 Same, 100 kHz

WF4 Same, 500 kHz

WF5 Same, 1.1999 MHz

WF6 Same, 1.2 MHz

Name Description

WF7 Same, 2 MHz

WF8 Same, 10 MHz

WF9 No attenuators wideband flatness correction, 20 MHz

WFA Same, 30 MHz

WFB Spare

WFC Spare

W1F1 10 dB attenuator wideband flatness correction, 1 kHz

W1F2 Same, 12 kHz

W1F3 Same, 100 kHz

W1F4 Same, 500 kHz

W1F5 Same, 1.1999 MHz

W1F6 Same, 1.2 MHz

W1F7 Same, 2 MHz

W1F8 Same, 10 MHz

W1F9 Same, 20 MHz

W1FA Same, 30 MHz

W1FB Spare

W1FC Spare

W2F1 20 dB attenuator wideband flatness correction, 1 kHz

W2F2 Same, 12 kHz

W2F3 Same, 100 kHz

W2F4 Same, 500 kHz

W2F5 Same, 1.1999 MHz

W2F6 Same, 1.2 MHz

C-10
 Appendices
Symbolic Names of Calibration Constants C
W2F7 Same, 2 MHz

W2F8 Same, 10 MHz

W2F9 Same, 20 MHz

W2FA Same, 30 MHz

W2FB Spare

W2FC Spare

W3F1 10 dB and 20 dB together wideband rf correction, 1 kHz

W3F2 Same, 10 MHz

W3F3 Same, 20 MHz

W3F4 Same, 30 MHz

Name Description

W3F5 Spare

W3F6 Spare

W4F1 40 dB attenuator wideband flatness correction, 1 kHz

W4F2 Same, 12 kHz

W4F3 Same, 100 kHz

W4F4 Same, 500 kHz

W4F5 Same, 1.1999 MHz

W4F6 Same, 1.2 MHz

W4F7 Same, 2 MHz

W4F8 Same, 10 MHz

W4F9 Same, 20 MHz

W4FA Same, 30 MHz

W4FB Spare

W4FC Spare

W5F1 10 dB and 40 dB together wideband rf correction, 1 kHz

W5F2 Same, 10 MHz

W5F3 Same, 20 MHz

W5F4 Same, 30 MHz

W5F5 Spare

W5F6 Spare

WB_FLAT_TEMP Recorded temperature for wideband flatness calibration

TW1 Manual range adjust, 220 mV dc

TW2 Manual range adjust, 2.2V dc

C-11
5700A/5720A Series II
Operators Manual

TW3 Manual range adjust, 11V dc

TW4 Manual range adjust, 22V dc

TW5 Manual range adjust, 220V dc

TW6 Manual range adjust, 1100V dc

TW7 Manual range adjust, 1100V dc with 5205A

TW8 Manual range adjust, 2.2 mV ac

TW9 Manual range adjust, 22 mV ac

TW10 Manual range adjust, 220 mV ac

TW11 Manual range adjust, 2.2V ac

TW12 Manual range adjust, 22V ac

TW13 Manual range adjust, 220V ac

C-12
 Appendices
Symbolic Names of Calibration Constants C
Name Description

TW14 Manual range adjust, 1100V ac

TW15 Manual range adjust, 1100V ac with 5725A

TW16 Manual range adjust, 1100V ac with 5215A

TW17 Manual range adjust, 1100V ac with 5205A

TW18 Manual range adjust, 220 µA dc

TW19 Manual range adjust, 2.2 mA dc

TW20 Manual range adjust, 22 mA dc

TW21 Manual range adjust, 220 mA dc

TW22 Manual range adjust, 2.2A dc

TW23 Manual range adjust, 11A dc with 5725A

TW24 Manual range adjust, 20A dc with 5220A

TW25 Manual range adjust, 220 µA ac

TW26 Manual range adjust, 2.2 mA ac

TW27 Manual range adjust, 22 mA ac

TW28 Manual range adjust, 220 mA ac

TW29 Manual range adjust, 2.2A ac

TW30 Manual range adjust, 11A ac with 5725A

TW31 Manual range adjust, 20A ac with 5220A

TW32 Manual range adjust, 1.1 mV wideband ac

TW33 Manual range adjust, 3.3 mV wideband ac

TW34 Manual range adjust, 11 mV wideband ac

TW35 Manual range adjust, 33 mV wideband ac

TW36 Manual range adjust, 110 mV wideband ac

TW37 Manual range adjust, 330 mV wideband ac

TW38 Manual range adjust, 1.1V wideband ac

TW39 Manual range adjust, 3.5V wideband ac

TW40 Manual range adjust, 0Ω

TW41 Manual range adjust, 1Ω

TW42 Manual range adjust, 1.9Ω

TW43 Manual range adjust, 10Ω

TW44 Manual range adjust, 19Ω

TW45 Manual range adjust, 100Ω

TW46 Manual range adjust, 190Ω

C-13
5700A/5720A Series II
Operators Manual

Name Description

TW47 Manual range adjust, 1 kΩ

TW48 Manual range adjust, 1.9 kΩ

TW49 Manual range adjust, 10 kΩ

TW50 Manual range adjust, 19 kΩ

TW51 Manual range adjust, 100 kΩ

TW52 Manual range adjust, 190 kΩ

TW53 Manual range adjust, 1 MΩ

TW54 Manual range adjust, 1.9 MΩ

TW55 Manual range adjust, 10 MΩ

TW56 Manual range adjust, 19 MΩ

TW57 Manual range adjust, 100 MΩ

TW58 Spare

TW59 Spare

TW60 Spare

5725_SET 5725A set selector

ABG 1100V ac gain constant (5725A)

ABS 1100V ac standing wave ratio correction (5725A)

ABZ 1100A ac sense amp offset (5725A)

ABCAP 5725A capacitive dac setting

ABF1 5725A flatness constants, 1 kHz

ABF2 5725A flatness constants, 5 kHz

ABF3 5725A flatness constants, 10 kHz

ABF4 5725A flatness constants, 12 kHz

ABF5 5725A flatness constants, 15 kHz

ABF6 5725A flatness constants, 17 kHz

ABF7 5725A flatness constants, 20 kHz

ABF8 5725A flatness constants, 30 kHz

ABF9 5725A flatness constants, 30.01 kHz

ABFA 5725A flatness constants, 40 kHz

ABFB 5725A flatness constants, 50 kHz

ABFC 5725A flatness constants, 60 kHz

ABFD 5725A flatness constants, 70 kHz

ABFE 5725A flatness constants, 80 kHz

C-14
 Appendices
Symbolic Names of Calibration Constants C
Name Description

ABFF 5725A flatness constants, 90 kHz

ABFG 5725A flatness constants, 100 kHz

IDBG 10A dc gain constant (5725A)

IABG 10A ac gain constant (5725A)

IBZ 10A dc current zero (5725A)

DB2_0 Monitor dac value for 2.0V output

DB1_8 Monitor dac value for 1.8V output

CAL5725_TEMP Recorded temperature for 5725A calibration

C-15
 Appendix D
Glossary
adc (analog-to-digital converter)
A device or circuit that converts an analog voltage to digital signals.

absolute uncertainty
Uncertainty specifications that include the error contributions made by all equipment and
standards used to calibrate the instrument. Absolute uncertainty is the number to compare
with the UUT for determining test uncertainty ratio.

accuracy
The degree to which the measured value of a quantity agrees with the true (correct) value
of that quantity. Accuracy is the same as 1 minus the percent uncertainty. (See
“uncertainty.”) For example, an instrument specified to +/-1% uncertainty is 99%
accurate.

assert
To cause a digital signal line to go into a logic true state.

af (audio frequency)
The frequency range of human hearing; normally 15 - 20,000 Hz.

artifact standard
An object that produces or embodies a physical quantity to be standardized, for example
a Fluke 732B dc Voltage Reference Standard.

base units
Units in the SI system that are dimensionally independent. All other units are derived
from base units. The only base unit in electricity is the ampere.

buffer
Refers to either an area of digital memory for temporary storage of data, or an amplifier
stage before the final amplifier.

burden voltage
The maximum sustainable voltage across the terminals of a load.

D-1
5700A/5720A Series II
Operators Manual

calibration check
A fast, simple, automated procedure to provide added confidence between calibration
recalls, and data that can be used to develop a history of the calibrator’s performance
between calibrations. No changes are made to stored constants, and the internal check
standards are used as the reference points instead of external standards as in the routine
calibration procedure.

calibrate
To compare a measurement system or device of unknown accuracy to a measurement
system or device of known and greater accuracy to detect or correct any variation from
required performance of the unverified measurement system or device.

calibration
The comparison of a measurement system or device of unknown accuracy to a
measurement system or device of known and greater accuracy to detect or correct any
variation from required performance of the unverified measurement system or device.

calibration constant
A correction factor that is applied manually or automatically to correct the output or
reading of an instrument.

calibration curve
A smooth curve drawn through a graph of calibration points.

calibration interval
The interval after which calibration must occur to maintain the performance of an
instrument as stated in its specifications.

calibration report
A record of uncertainty and/or correction factors for an instrument as determined during
calibration.

calibrator
A device that supplies outputs with a known uncertainty for use in checking the accuracy
of measurement devices.

check standard
A device used solely to verify the integrity of another standard. For example in the
5700A/5720A Series II calibrator, one Fluke RMS sensor continuously monitors the
output voltage while a second Fluke RMS sensor confirms the integrity of the first.

D-2
 Appendices
Glossary D
characterization
The development of a table of calibration constants or correction factors for use in
correcting the output or reading of an instrument.

common mode noise

An undesired signal that exists between a device’s terminals and ground. Common mode
noise is at the same potential on both terminals of a device.

compliance voltage
The maximum voltage a constant-current source can supply.

control chart
A chart devised to monitor one or more processes in order to detect the excessive
deviation from a desired value of a component or process.

crest factor
The ratio of the peak voltage to the rms voltage of a waveform (with the dc component
removed).

current guard
A generator that drives the inner shield of a triaxial cable with a signal of the same
amplitude and phase as a Calibrator’s ac current output signal on the center conductor.
The current guard shields the Calibrator’s output signal from a capacitive leakage path to
ground.

dac (digital-to-analog converter)

A device or circuit that converts a digital waveform to an analog voltage.

dBm
Power level expressed as decibels above or below 1 mW.

derived units
Units in the SI system that are derived from base units. Volts, ohms, and watts are
derived from amperes and other base and derived units.

distortion
Undesired changes in the waveform of a signal. Harmonic distortio disturbs the original
relationship between a frequency and other frequencies naturally related to it.
Intermodulation distortion (imd) introduces new frequencies by the mixing of two or
more original frequencies. Other forms of distortion are phase distortion and transient
distortion.

D-3
5700A/5720A Series II
Operators Manual

errors
The different types of errors described in this glossary are: offset error, linearity error,
random error, scale error, systematic errors, and transfer error. Each of these are defined
in this glossary.

flatness
A measure of the variation of the actual output an ac voltage source at different frequency
points when set to the same nominal output level. A flat voltage source exhibits very little
error throughout its frequency range.

floor
The part of the uncertainty specification of an instrument that is typically a fixed offset
plus noise. Floor can be expressed as units such as microvolts or counts of the least
significant digit. For the calibrator, the floor specification is combined with fixed range
errors in one term.

full scale
The maximum reading of a range of a meter, analog-to-digital converter, or other
measurement device, or the maximum attainable output on a range of a calibrator.

gain error
Same as scale error. Scale or gain error results when the slope of the meter’s response
curve is not exactly 1. A meter with only gain error (no offset or linearity error), will read
0V with 0V applied, but something other than 10V with 10V applied.

ground
The voltage reference point in a circuit. Earth ground is a connection through a ground
rod or other conductor to the earth, usually accessible through the ground conductor in an
ac power receptacle.

ground loops
Undesirable currents induced when there is more than one chassis ground potential in a
system of instruments. Ground loops can be minimized by connecting all instruments in a
system to ground to one point.

guard
See “voltage guard” and “current guard.”

International System of Units

Same as “SI System of Units”; the accepted system of units. See also “units”, “base
units”, and “derived units.”

D-4
 Appendices
Glossary D
legal units
The highest echelon in a system of units, for example the U.S. National Bureau of
Standards volt.

life-cycle cost
The consideration of all elements contributing to the cost of an instrument throughout its
useful life. This includes initial purchase cost, service and maintenance cost, and the cost
of support equipment.

linearity
The relationship between two quantities when a change in the first quantity is directly
proportional to a change in the second quantity.

linearity error
Linearity error occurs when when the response curve of a meter is not exactly a straight
line. This type of error is measured by fixing two points on the response curve, drawing a
line through the points, then measuring how far the curve deviates from the straight line
at various points on the response curve.

MAP (Measurement Assurance Program)

A program for a measurement process. A MAP provides information to demonstrate that
the total uncertainty of the measurements (data), including both random error and
systematic components of error relative to national or other designated standards is
quantified, and sufficiently small to meet requirements.

MTBF (Mean Time Between Failures)

The time interval in operating hours that can be expected betweenfailure of equipment.
MTBF can be calculated from direct observation or mathematically derived through
extrapolation.

MTTF (Mean Time to Fail)

The time interval in operating hours that can be expected until the first failure of
equipment. MTF can be calculated from direct observation or mathematically derived
through extrapolation.

MTTR (Mean Time to Repair)

The average time in hours required to repair failed equipment.

metrology
The science of measurement, and its field of knowledge.

D-5
5700A/5720A Series II
Operators Manual

minimum use specifications

A compilation of specifications that satisfies the calibration requirements of a
measurement system or device. The minimum use specifications are usually determined
by maintaining a specified test uncertainty ratio between the calibration equipment and
the unit under test. The 5700A/5720A Series II Service Manual contains a table of
minimum use specifications for performing full verification.

noise
A signal containing no useful information that is superimposed on a desired or expected
signal.

normal mode noise

An undesired signal that appears between the terminals of a device.

offset error
Same as zero error. The reading shown on a meter when an input value of zero is applied
is its offset or zero error.

parameters
Independent variables in a measurement process such as temperature, humidity, test lead
resistance, etc.

precision
The degree of agreement among independent measurements of a quantity under the same
conditions. (Same as “repeatability.”)
The precision of a measurement process is the coherence, or the closeness to the one
result, of all measurement results. High precision, for example would result in a tight
pattern of arrow hits on a target, without respect to where on the target the tight pattern
falls.

predictability
A measure of how accurately the output value of a device can be assumed after a known
time following calibration. If a device is highly stable, it is also predictable. If a device is
not highly stable, but its value changes at the same rate every time after calibration, it’s
output has a higher degree of predictability than a device that exhibits random change.

primary standard
A standard defined and maintained by some authority and used to calibrate all other
secondary standards.

process metrology
Tracking the accuracy drift of calibration and other equipment by applying statistical
analysis to correction factors obtained during calibration.

D-6
 Appendices
Glossary D
random error
Any error which varies in an unpredictable manner in absolute value and in sign when
measurements of the same value of a quantity are made under effectively identical
conditions.

range
The stated upper end of a measurement device’s span. Usually, however, a measurement
device can measure quantities for a specified percentage overrange. (The absolute span
including overrange capability is called “scale.”) In the 5700A/5720A Series II, however,
range and scale are identical.

range calibration
An optional calibration procedure available to the enhance the 5700A/5720A Series II
specifications by nulling the output to an external standard.

reference amplifier
DC voltage references developed for the 5700A/5720A Series II. These are 6.5V hybrid
devices consisting of a zener diode and a transistor on a heated substrate. These reference
amplifiers exhibit extremely low uncertainty and drift, and are superior to zener diode or
temperature-compensated zener diode voltage references.

reference standard
The highest-echelon standard in a laboratory; the standard that is used to maintain
working standards that are used in routine calibration and comparison procedures.

relative uncertainty
5700A/5720A Series II uncertainty specifications that exclude the effects of external
dividers and standards, for use when range constants are adjusted. Relative uncertainty
includes only the stability, temperature coefficient, noise, and linearity specifications of
the calibrator itself.

reliability
A measure of the “uptime” of an instrument.

repeatability
The degree of agreement among independent measurements of a quantity under the same
conditions. (Same as “precision.”)

resistance
A property of a conductor that determines the amount of current that will flow when a
given amount of voltage exists across the conductor. Resistance is measured in ohms.
One ohm is the resistance through which one volt of potential will cause one ampere of
current to flow.

D-7
5700A/5720A Series II
Operators Manual

resolution
The smallest change in quantity that can be detected by a measurement system or device.
For a given parameter, resolution is the smallest increment that can be measured,
generated or displayed.

rf (radio frequency)
The frequency range of radio waves; ranging from 150 kHz up to the infrared range.

rms (root-mean-square)
The value assigned to an ac voltage or current that results in the same power dissipation
in a resistance as a dc current or voltage of the same value.

rms sensor
A device that converts ac voltage to dc voltage with great accuracy. RMS sensors operate
by measuring the heat generated by a voltage through a known resistance (i.e., power);
therefore, they sense true rms voltage.

scale
The absolute span of the reading range of a measurement device including overrange
capability.

scale error
Same as gain error. Scale or gain error results when the slope of the meter’s response
curve is not exactly 1. A meter with only scale error (no offset or linearity error), will
read 0V with 0V applied, but something other than 10V with 10V applied.

secondary standard
A standard maintained by comparison against a primary standard.

sensitivity
The degree of response of a measuring device to the change in input quantity, or a figure
of merit that expresses the ability of a measurement system or device to respond to an
input quantity.

shield
A grounded covering device designed to protect a circuit or cable from electromagnetic
interference.

SI System of Units
The accepted International System of Units. See also “units”, “base units”, and “derived
units.”

D-8
 Appendices
Glossary D
specifications
A precise statement of the set of requirements satisfied by a measurement system or
device.

stability
A measure of the freedom from drift in value over time and over changes in other
variables such as temperature. Note that stability is not the same as uncertainty.

standard
A device that is used as an exact value for reference and comparison.

standard cell
A primary cell that serves as a standard of voltage. The term “standard cell” often refers
to a “Weston normal cell”, which is a wet cell with a mercury anode, a cadmium mercury
amalgam cathode, and a cadmium sulfate solution as the electrolyte.

systematic errors
Errors in repeated measurement results that remain constant or vary in a predictable way.

temperature coefficient
A factor per °C deviation from a nominal value or range that the uncertainty of an
instrument increases. This specification is necessary to account for the thermal
coefficients in a calibrator’s analog circuitry.

test uncertainty ratio

The numerical ratio of the uncertainty of the measurement system or device being
calibrated to the uncertainty of the measurement system or device used as the calibrator.
(Also called “test accuracy ratio.”)

thermal emf
The voltage generated when two dissimilar metals joined together are heated.

traceability
The ability to relate individual measurement results to national standards or nationally
accepted measurement systems through an unbroken chain of comparisons, i.e., a
calibration “audit trail.”
Measurements, measurement systems or devices have traceability to the designated
standards if and only if scientifically rigorous evidence is produced on a continuing basis
to show that the measurement process is producing measurement results for which the
total measurement uncertainty relative to national or other designated standards is
qualified.

D-9
5700A/5720A Series II
Operators Manual

transfer error
The sum of all new errors induced during the process of comparing one quantity against
another.

transfer standard
Any working standard used to compare a measurement process, system or device at one
location or level with another measurement process, system, or device at another location
or level.

transport standard
A transfer standard that is rugged enough to allow shipment by common carrier to
another location.

true value
Also called legal value, the accepted, consensus, (i.e., the correct value of the quantity
being measured).

uncertainty
The maximum difference between the accepted, consensus, or true value and the
measured value of a quantity. Uncertainty is normally expressed in units of ppm (parts
per million) or as a percentage. (Accuracy is the same as 1 - % uncertainty.)

units
Symbols or names that define the measured quantities. Examples of units are: V, mV, A,
kW, and dBm. See also “SI System of Units.”

UUT (Unit Under Test)

An abbreviated name for an instrument that is being tested or calibrated.

volt
The unit of emf (electromotive force) or electrical potential in the SI system of units. One
volt is the difference of electrical potential between two points on a conductor carrying
one ampere of current, when the power being dissipated between these two points is
equal to one watt.

watt
The unit of power in the SI system of units. One watt is the power required to do work at
the rate of one joule/second. In terms of volts and ohms, one watt is the power dissipated
by one ampere flowing through a 1Ω load.

wideband
AC voltage at frequencies up to and including the radio frequency spectrum.

D-10
 Appendices
Glossary D
verification
Checking the functional performance and uncertainty of an instrument or standard
without making adjustments to it or changing its calibration constants.

voltage guard
A floating shield around voltage measurement circuitry inside an instrument. The voltage
guard provides a low-impedance path to ground for common-mode noise and ground
currents, thereby eliminating errors introduced by such interference.

working standard
A standard that is used in routine calibration and comparison procedures in the
laboratory, and is maintained by comparison to reference standards.

zero error
Same as offset error. The reading shown on a meter when an input valueof zero is applied
is its zero or offset error.

D-11
5700A/5720A Series II
Operators Manual

D-12
 Index

Rounding Numeric Entries, 5-73

Settling Times, 5-73
—*— The 5720’s Display During Emulation, 5-69
*CLS remote command, 5-26
Using Hard Switches to change Operating
*ESE remote command, 5-27
Modes, 5-72
*ESE? remote command, 5-28
Voltage and Frequency Ranges, 5-72
*ESR? remote command, 5-28
5725A AMPLIFIER Connector, 3-12
*IDN? remote command, 5-30
5725A Amplifier Output, 4-37
*LRN? remote command, 5-32
*OPC remote command, 5-33, 5-66
*OPC? remote command, 5-33, 5-66 —7—
*OPT? remote command, 5-34 732B Direct Voltage Reference
*PUD remote command, 5-35 Standard, 1-6, 8-4
*PUD? remote command, 5-36 732B-200 Direct Volt Maintenance Program
*RST remote command, 5-37 (U.S.A. Only), 1-7
*SRE remote command, 5-39 742A Series Resistance Standards, 1-7
*SRE? remote command, 5-39 742A Series Standard Resistors, 8-5
*STB? remote command, 5-40
*TST? remote command, 5-40
*WAI remote command, 5-41, 5-66
—A—
AC Current Output, 4-28
AC PWR INPUT Connector, 3-14
—5— AC Voltage output, 4-25
5100B Emulation Mode Accessing the Fuse, 2-5
Current Output Location, 5-70 Accessories, 8-3
Differences in the Ohms Function, 5-70 DC Voltage Reference Standard (732B), 8-4
Entering Emulation Mode, 5-68 Low Thermal EMF Test Leads, 8-4
Exiting Emulation Mode, 5-69 Rack Mount Kits (Y5737 and Y5735), 8-4
Local to Remote Transitions, 5-69 Resistance Standards
Ohms Remote Program Modifications, 5-71 (742A - 1 and 742A-10k), 8-5
The 5720’s Display During Emulation, 5-69 RS-232C Null-Modem Cables (Y1702 and
5100B Emulation Mode, 5-69 Y1703, 8-4
5200A Emulation Mode, 5-72 Shielded IEEE-488 interface cables (Y8021,
Entering Emulation Mode, 5-68 Y8022, and Y8023), 8-4
Exiting Emulation Mode, 5-69 Add/Subtract key, 3-9
Overload Conditions, 5-74 ADJOUT? remote command, 5-17
Phase Lock Errors, 5-74 Air filter, 2-4
Programming External Sensing, 5-74 Amperes key, 3-8

1
5700A/5720A Series II
Operators Manual

Ampl/Freq key, 3-6 Calculation, dBm, 4-25, 4-33

Amplifiers. See Auxiliary Amplifier Calibrating 70 Series DMM
Applications, sample, 4-51 Cables, 4-52
Arrow key, 3-6 Calibrating 70 Series DMM
Arrow keys, 4-38 Guarding, 4-52
AUX CURRENT OUTPUT Binding Post, 3-10 Calibrating a 70 Series DMM, 4-51
Auxiliary Amplifiers, 1-5, 2-8, 4-36, 8-5 Calibrating the Meter, 4-54
5725A Amplifier, 1-6 Testing the Meter, 4-53
Calibrating a70 Series DMM
Sensing, 4-52
—B— Calibrating an 8840A Series Digital
Backup Battery, 4-9
Multimeter, 4-56
Binding, 4-13
Calibrating an 8840A Series DMM
Binding Post
A/D Calibration, 4-59
Chassis Ground, 3-14
Basic Calibration Procedure, 4-58
Current Guard, 3-12
Calibration Setup Procedure, 4-58
GND, 3-10
Guarding, 4-56
OUTPUT, 3-12
High Frequency AC Calibration, 4-62
OUTPUT, 3-10
Offset and Gain Calibration, 4-60
Rear panel, 3-12
Sensing, 4-58
SENSE, 3-12
Calibrating the 5700A/5720A Series II
SENSE, 3-10
Calibration Check, 1-11
Voltage Guard, 3-12
Calibration Process, 1-10
Voltage Guard, 3-10
Calibration Reports, 1-10
Binding Post Selection, 2-8
Establishment of Traceability, 1-10
Boost key, 3-6
Performance history, developing, 1-11
BOOST key, 4-36
Range Calibration, 1-11
BTYPE remote command, 5-17
Calibrating the 5700A/5720A Series II, 1-8
BTYPE? remote command, 5-18
Calibrating to external standards, 7-6
Bus Communication Overview, 5-55
calibration procedure, 7-8
calibration requirements, 7-7
—C— Calibration, 7-6
Cable Connection Instructions, 4-16 DC Zeroes, 1-11
Cable Recommendations, 4-13 range, 7-14
CAL_ADJ remote command, 5-18 Wideband AC Module (Option 5700A-03), 7-18
CAL_CHK remote command, 5-18 Calibration Check, 7-21
CAL_CLST? remote command, 5-18 CALIBRATION Switch, 3-13
CAL_CONF remote command, 5-19 CHASSIS GROUND Binding Post, 3-14
CAL_CONF? remote command, 5-19 Checking the Calibrator’s Uncertainty
CAL_CONST? remote command, 5-19 Specification, 4-38
CAL_DATE? remote command, 5-19 Cleaning
CAL_DAYS? remote command, 5-19 air filter, 7-4
CAL_INTV remote command, 5-20 exterior, 7-6
CAL_INTV? remote command, 5-20 Clear Entry (CE) key, 3-8
CAL_PR remote command, 5-20 Clearance, for installation, 2-4
CAL_REF remote command, 5-20 CLOCK remote command, 5-25
CAL_RNG remote command, 5-21 Clock/Calendar, setting, 4-9
CAL_RPT? remote command, 5-21 CLOCK? remote command, 5-25
CAL_SHIFT? remote command, 5-22 Commands. See Remote Commands
CAL_SLST? remote command, 5-23 Compensation circuitry, two-wire lead
CAL_STORE remote command, 5-23 drop, 4-32
CAL_TEMP remote command, 5-24 Components of the 5700A/5720A Series II, 1-8
CAL_TEMP? remote command, 5-24 Configuration Data, 4-11
CAL_WBFLAT remote command, 5-24 Connecting the Calibrator to a UUT, 4-13
CAL_WBGAIN remote command, 5-25 Connecting to Line Power, 2-8
CAL_ZERO remote command, 5-25 Connections, alternative for UUT, 3-12

2
 Index (continued)

Connector Emulation Modes for 5100B and 5200A

N type, 3-10 Calibrator. See also 5100B Emulation Mode
Connectors, 3-14, Also See Binding Posts or 5200A Emulation Mode
5725A Amplifier, 3-12 Enter key, 3-8
AC PWR INPUT, 3-14 Error Mode Operation, 4-38
IEEE-488, 3-13, 5-60 /10 key, 4-40
Phase Lock In BNC, 3-12 Adjustment controls, output, 4-38
RS-232C, 3-13, 6-3 Arrow keys, 4-38
Variable Phase Out BNC, 3-12 Entering Error Mode, 4-39
WIDEBAND, 3-10 Error Mode Overview, 4-39
Connectors, also see binding posts Exiting Error Mode, 4-39
Recommendations, 4-13 New Reference, establishing, 4-39
Control Display, 3-4 Using Error Mode, 4-40
Cooling Considerations, 2-4 Error Types, 4-42
CUR_POST remote command, 5-26 Combining the Error Types, 4-44
CUR_POST? remote command, 5-26 Linearity Error, 4-44
Current Offset Error, 4-42
Guard, when to use, 4-15 Scale Error, 4-43
Limits, setting, 4-50 ETIME? remote command, 5-28
Output, setting, 4-22 Event Status Register, 5-49
Current Guard Binding Posts, 3-12 Bit Assignments for the ESR and ESE, 5-49
Current units key, 3-8 Loading the ESE, 5-50
Reading the ESR and ESE, 5-50
Ex Grd key, 3-5
—D— Ex Sns, 3-4
Date, setting, 4-9
EX SNS key, 4-15
DATEFMT remote command, 5-26
Exhaust, 2-4
DATEFMT? remote command, 5-26
Exiting Error Mode, 4-39
dBm calculation, 4-25
EXPLAIN remote command, 5-28
dBm key, 3-8, 4-25
External Sensing, when to use, 4-14
DBMOUT? remote command, 5-26
External Voltage Guard, when to use, 4-15
DC Current Output, 4-27
EXTGUARD remote command, 5-29
DC Voltage Output, 4-24
EXTSENSE remote command, 5-29
DC Voltage Reference Standard (732B), 1-6, 8-4
DC Zeros, 4-5
Executing, 4-5 —F—
Reminder, 4-5 F1 Fuseholder, 3-14
DC Zeros Calibration, 1-11 Fan Filter, 3-12
DIAG remote command, 5-27 Fault Queue, 5-53
DIAGFLT remote command, 5-27 FAULT? remote command, 5-29
DIAGFLT? remote command, 5-27 Features, 1-3
Display Filter, cleaning, 7-4
Control, 3-4 Filter, fan, 3-12
Output, 3-4 Format EEPROM menu, 4-7
screen saver, 3-3 Format EEPROM Menu, 4-7
Divide by 10 key, 3-7, 4-40 FORMAT remote command, 5-29
Four-Wire vs Two-Wire Resistance
Connections, 4-32
—E— Frequency units key, 3-8
ECHO? remote command, 5-27
Front Panel Features, 3-3, 3-4
EEPROM, formatting, 4-7
Function keys, output, 3-8
Emulation Modes for 5100B and 5200A
Functional Elements Of Commands, 5-56
Entering Emulation Mode, 5-68
Fuse Rating Label, 3-14
Exiting Emulation Mode, 5-69
Fuse Replacement, 2-5
The 5720’s Display During Emulation, 5-69
Fuse, accessing, 7-4
Fuseholder, 3-14

3
5700A/5720A Series II
Operators Manual

Keys
—G— add/subtract, 3-9
GAL remote command, 5-29
amperes, 3-8
GND Binding Post, 3-10
Ampl/Freq, 3-6
Guarding, 4-15
arrow, 3-6
Boost, 3-6
—H— Clear Entry (CE), 3-8
Hazard, Shock, Safety Summary Sheet, 4-4 dBm, 3-8
HI Output Binding Post, 3-10 divide by 10, 3-7
Hz key, 3-8 Enter, 3-8
Ex Grd, 3-5
Ex Sns, 3-4
—I— Hz, 3-8
IEEE-488 Connector, 3-13 kilo, 3-9
IEEE-488 Interface, 5-4 Limit, 3-7
Configuration, 5-54 mega, 3-9
Connector, 5-60 micro, 3-9
IEEE-488 Interface Cables (Y8021, Y8022, and milli, 3-9
Y8023), 8-4 multiplier, 3-9
INCR remote command, 5-30 multiply by 10, 3-7
Input Buffer Operation, remote control, 5-10 New ref, 3-8
Inspection, 2-3 numeric keypad, 3-9
Installing Offset, 3-8
Auxiliary Amplifiers, 2-8 ohms, 3-8
the 5700A/5720A Series II, 2-4 Oper/Stby, 3-4
Instruction Manuals. See Manuals, additional output function, 3-8
Instrument Setup, 4-7 Prev Menu, 3-6
Instrument Status Change Enable Register, 5-51 Reset, 3-6
Bit Assignments for the ISR, ISCR, and Scale, 3-7
ISCE, 5-51 Spec, 3-8
Loading the ISCE, 5-52 volts, 3-8
Reading the ISR, ISCR, and ISCE, 5-52 W Bnd, 3-5
Instrument Status Change Register, 5-51 Knob, 3-6, 4-38
Bit Assignments for the ISR, ISCR, and
ISCE, 5-51
Reading the ISR, ISCR, and ISCE, 5-52 —L—
Instrument Status Register, 5-51 Label, line power and fuse rating, 2-7
Bit Assignments for the ISR, ISCR, and Lead drop compensation circuitry, 4-32
ISCE, 5-51 Limit key, 3-7
Reading the ISR, ISCR, and ISCE, 5-52 LIMIT remote command, 5-31
Interface Cables LIMIT? remote command, 5-31
Null-Modem Cables, RS-232C (Y1702 and Limits, setting, 4-50
Y1703), 8-4 Line Power Cords, 2-6
Shielded IEEE-488 (Y8021, Y8022, and Line Voltage, 2-6
Y8023), 8-4 Line voltage and fuse rating label, 2-7
Interface Messages, 5-58 Line voltage selection switches, 2-7
Interface, IEEE-488, 5-4 Line Voltage Switch, 3-14
Interface, RS-232C, 6-3 Linearity Checking Using Offset and Scale, 4-47
Internal Clock/Calendar, setting, 4-9 Linearity Error, 4-44
ISCE remote command, 5-30 LO Output Binding Post, 3-10
ISCE? remote command, 5-30 LOCAL serial remote command, 5-42
ISCR? remote command, 5-31 LOCKOUT serial remote command, 5-42
ISR? remote command, 5-31 Low Thermal EMF Test Leads, 8-4
Low thermal emf test leads (5440A-7002), 4-13
—K—
Keypad, numeric, 3-9

4
 Index (continued)

Wideband AC Voltage(Option 5700A-03), 4-32

—M—
Maintenance
cleaning, 7-6 —P—
Manuals, additional, 1-4 Parameters
Menu Tree, 3-14 Remote command, 5-8
Meter response vs. stimulus, 4-48 Serial Communication, 6-4
MULT remote command, 5-32 Setup, 4-6
Multiplier Keys, 3-9 Performance History, developing, 1-11
multiply by10 key, 3-7 Performing a Wideband Flatness Test, 4-63
Phase Controls menu, 4-34
Phase Lock In BNC Connector, 3-12
—N— Phase locking to an external signal, 4-34
N type connector, 3-10
Phase Locking to an External Signal, 4-35
New ref key, 3-8
PHASE remote command, 5-35
NEW REF key, 4-63, 4-64
PHASE? remote command, 5-35
New reference, establishing, 4-39
PHASELCK remote command, 5-35
NEWREF remote command, 5-32
PHASESFT remote command, 5-35
Numeric Keypad, 3-9
Placement and Rack Mounting, 2-4
Power Switch, 3-6
—O— Powering on the Calibrator, 4-3, 4-4
Offset Error, 4-42 Prev Menu key, 3-6
Offset key, 3-8 Printing Calibration Reports, 6-6
OFFSET key, 4-47 About calibration reports, 1-10
Offset Programming, 4-45 Calibration Check Shift Results, 6-7
OFFSET remote command, 5-32 Calibration Shift Results, 6-6
OFFSET? remote command, 5-32 Generating a Printout, 6-8
OHMREF? remote command, 5-33 remote program to print a report, 5-61
Ohms key, 3-8 Programming a Scale Factor, 4-46
OLDREF remote command, 5-33 Programming an Offset, 4-45
ONTIME? remote command, 5-33
OPER remote command, 5-34 —Q—
Oper/Stby key, 3-4
Queue, fault, 5-53
Operate and Standby Modes, 4-13
Operating State Transitions, 5-44
OUT remote command, 5-34 —R—
OUT? remote command, 5-34 Rack Mount Kits (Y5737 and Y5735), 2-4, 8-4
OUT_ERR? remote command, 5-34 Range Calibration, 1-11, 7-14
OUTPUT Binding Post, 3-10 Range Identifiers for Remote Commands, 5-42
AUX CURRENT, 3-10 RANGE? remote command, 5-36
HI, 3-10 RANGELCK remote command, 5-36
LO, 3-10 RCOMP remote command, 5-36
OUTPUT Binding Posts, 3-12 Reading the UUT Error
Output Display, 3-4 AC and DC VOltage and Current Output, 4-40
Output Function Keys, 3-8 Resistance Output, 4-41
Output Limits, setting, 4-50 Rear Panel Binding Posts, 3-12
Current Limits, setting, 4-50 Rear Panel Features, 3-12
Voltage Limits, setting, 4-50 Reference Guides, 1-4
Output, setting, 4-22 REFOUT? remote command, 5-36
AC Current, 4-28 Remote Commands, 5-10
AC Voltage, 4-25 Coupled, 5-11
Auxiliary Amplifier, 4-37 Extra Space Characters, 5-9
DC Current, 4-27 Ignored When not in Remote, 5-12
DC Voltage, 4-24 Long Term, 5-12
Resistance, 4-30 Multiple, 5-11
Variable Phase, 4-34 Overlapped, 5-12

5
5700A/5720A Series II
Operators Manual

Parameter syntax rules, 5-7 Specifications, 6-3

Requiring the Calibration Switch to be set, 5-12 RS-232C Null-Modem Cables (Y1702 and
Response Message Syntax, 5-10 Y1703), 8-4
Sequential, 5-12
Syntax information, 5-7
Terminators, 5-9
—S—
Sample Applications, 4-51
Remote Control, IEEE-488 and common
SCAL_ERR? remote command, 5-38
elements of RS-232, 5-4
Scale Error, 4-43
Address Selection, 5-5
Scale key, 3-7
Bus Setup Procedure, 5-4
SCALE key, 4-47
IEEE-488 Address Selection, 5-5
SCALE remote command, 5-37
IEEE-488 Bus Restrictions, 5-4
SCALE? remote command, 5-37
Incoming Character Processing, 5-9
Screen Saver, 3-3
Input Buffer Operation, 5-10
Selecting Amplifiers, 4-10
Interface Messages Accepted, 5-59
Selecting Line Voltage, 2-6
Language Selection, 5-5
Selecting Output Binding Posts, 2-8
Port Setup, 5-5
SENSE Binding Post, 3-10
Remote and Local State Transitions, 5-43
SENSE binding posts, 4-15
Remote State, 5-43
SENSE Binding Posts, 3-12
Remote with Lockout State, 5-44
Sensing, external, when to use, 4-14
Setup Procedure, 5-4
Serial Poll Status Byte, 5-47
Terminators, 5-9
Serial Port Remote Control. See Remote Control,
Remote Control, RS-232 Specific, 5-5
RS-232C
Exceptions for serial remote control, 5-7
Service Centers, 1-7
Remote port setup, 5-6
Service Information, 2-4
Setup procedure, 5-6
Setting up
Remote Program Examples, 5-61
IEEE-488 interface, 5-4
*WAI, using, 5-66
Installing the 5700A/5720A Series II, 2-4
Calibration, 5-63
RS-232C Serial Interface, 6-4
Calibration check, 5-64
Setting Up
DC Zeros, 5-62
Menu, 4-6
OPC, using, 5-66
Parameters, 4-6
OPC?, using, 5-66
Setup Menu, 4-6
Printing main output calibration shift
Shipping Container, 2-3
results, 5-61
Shock Hazard. Safety Summary Sheet, 4-4
Remote Calibration, 5-62
Softkey Menu Tree, 3-14, 3-16
Verifying a meter, 5-62
Softkeys, 3-6
Wideband AC Module (Option 5700A-03) Gain
SP_EOF remote command, 5-38
Calibration, 5-65
SP_EOF? remote command, 5-38
REMOTE serial remote command, 5-42
SP_SET remote command, 5-38
Reset key, 3-6
SP_SET? remote command, 5-39
RESET key, 4-12
SP_TIME remote command, 5-39
Resetting the Calibrator, 4-12
SP_TIME? remote command, 5-39
Resistance Output, 4-30
Spec Format Setup Menu, 4-8
Resistance Value Table, 4-30
Spec key, 3-8
Resistance units key, 3-8
SPEC key, 4-38
Resistors
Special Functions Menu, 4-12
standard, 742A series, 8-5
Specifications, 1-12
Rotary Knob, 3-6
Confidence Levels, 1-12
RPT_STR remote command, 5-37
uncertainty, checking, 4-38
RPT_STR? remote command, 5-37
Using, 1-12
RS 232C Connector, 3-13
Standard Equipment, 2-3
RS-232C Interface
State transitions, operating, 5-43
Parameters, 6-4
STATE? remote command, 5-40
Printing. See Printing Caliibration Reports
Status Register Summary, 5-45
Setup, 6-4

6
 Index (continued)

Status, checking Voltage Guard Binding Post, 3-10

Event Status Register, 5-49 Voltage Guard Binding Posts, 3-12
Bit Assignments for the ESR Voltage Selection Switches, 3-14
and ESE, 5-49 Voltage Switch, 3-14
Loading the ESR and ESE, 5-50 Voltage units key, 3-8
Reading the ESR and ESE, 5-50 Volts key, 3-8
Instrument Status Change Enable Register VOUT? remote command, 5-41
Bit Assignments for the ISR, ISCR, and
ISCE, 5-51
Loading the ISCE, 5-52
—W—
W Bnd key, 3-5
Reading the ISR, ISCR, and ISCE, 5-52
Warm Up, 4-4
Instrument Status Change Register, 5-51
WBAND remote command, 5-41
Bit Assignments for the ISR, ISCR, and
Wideband AC Module
ISCE, 5-51
dBm calculation, 4-33
Reading the ISR, ISCR, and ISCE, 5-52
Output, 4-32
Instrument Status Register, 5-51
use of W BND key, 4-32
Bit Assignments for the ISR, ISCR, and
Wideband AC Module (Option 5700A-03)
ISCE, 5-51
Calibrating, 7-18
Reading the ISR, ISCR, and ISCE, 5-52
Calibration, 1-7
Instrument StatusChange Enable Register, 5-51
Wideband AC Voltage Module (Option
Serial Poll status byte, 5-47
5700A-03), 1-5
Service Request Enable Register, 5-48
Wideband AC Voltage Output (Option
Service Request Line (SRQ), 5-48
5700A-03, 4-32
SRE, loading, 5-48
WIDEBAND Connector, 3-10
STBY remote command, 5-40
Wideband voltmeter flatness test, 4-64
STOP_PR remote command, 5-40
Syntax, remote commands, 5-7

—T—
Terminators, remote, 5-9
Time, 4-9
Troubleshooting, 2-4
Turning on the Calibrator, 4-3, 4-4
Two-Wire Compensation Circuitry, 4-32
Two-Wire Resistance Connection, 4-32

—U—
UNCERT? remote command, 5-41
Uncertainty Specification, checking, 4-38
Uncertainty Specifications, displaying, 4-34
Unpacking, 2-3
Using an Auxiliary Amplifier, 4-36
UUT, Connections to the Calibrator, 4-12

—V—
Variable Phase Out BNC Connector, 3-12
Variable Phase Output, 4-34
Phase Controls menu, 4-34
Quadrature points, 4-35
Voltage
Guard, when to use, 4-15
Limits, setting, 4-51
Line, 2-6
Setting the output, 4-22

7
5700A/5720A Series II
Operators Manual